श्रोत्रमथो बलमिन्द्रियाणि च सर्वाणि ।
सर्वं ब्रह्मौपनिषदं माहं ब्रह्म निराकुर्यां मा मा ब्रह्म
निराकरोदनिराकरणमस्त्वनिराकरणंं मेऽस्तु ।
तदात्मनि निरते य उपनिषत्सु धर्मास्ते
मयि सन्तु ते मयि सन्तु ॥
॥ ॐ शान्तिः शान्तिः शान्तिः ॥
- ॐ (oṃ)The sacred syllable. आप्यायन्तु (āpyāyantu) – May they be nourished and strong. ममाङ्गानि (mamāṅgāni) – My limbs, my parts of the body. वाक् प्राणः चक्षुः (vāk prāṇaḥ cakṣuḥ) – Speech, prāṇa (life force), and eyes. श्रोत्रम् अथः बलम् (śrotram athaḥ balam) – Ears and strength. इन्द्रियाणि च सर्वाणि (indriyāṇi ca sarvāṇi) – All my senses. सर्वं ब्रह्म उपनिषदं (sarvam brahma upaniṣadaṃ) – All this is in the essence of Brahman found in the Upaniṣads. माऽहं ब्रह्म निराकुर्यां (mā'haṃ brahma nirākuryāṃ) – May I never deny Brahman. मा मा ब्रह्म निराकरोद् (mā mā brahma nirākarod) – May Brahman never deny me. अनिराकरणम् अस्तु (anirākaraṇam astu) – Let there be no denial at all (of Brahman). अनिराकरणं मे अस्तु (anirākaraṇam me astu) – Let there be no denial in/for me (of Brahman). तत् आत्मनि (tat ātmani) – In that Self. निरते (nirate) – Those who are engaged or absorbed. यः उपनिषत्सु धर्माः (yaḥ upaniṣatsu dharmāḥ) – The virtues found in the Upaniṣads. मयि सन्तु (mayi santu) – May they be realised in me. ते मयि सन्तु (te mayi santu) – May they be fully realised in me. (Repeated for emphasis) ॐ शान्तिः शान्तिः शान्तिः (oṃ śāntiḥ śāntiḥ śāntiḥ) – Oṃ peace, peace, peace (at all levels).
note The purpose of this Shanti mantra is to prepare oneself before studying or learning spiritual knowledge, particularly before reading the Upanishads (ancient Indian spiritual texts). The seeker sincerely asks that all parts of their being — their physical organs, limbs, speech, prana (vital air), strength, and all sense organs — become efficient enough to perform their respective duties properly and without any hindrance to the main objective, which is to truly grasp and learn what they are about to study. The mantra then focuses on Brahman (the ultimate Reality) and the teachings of the Upanishads. When it says "sarvam brahmopaniṣadam", it is expressing that everything is Brahman, as propounded and abundantly made clear in the Upanishads. As the mantra progresses, there is a request for the non-rejection of Brahman. "Mā’ham brahma nirākuryām" means "May I not reject Brahman." The subsequent phrase "mā mā brahma nirākarod anirākaraṇamastvanirākaraṇaṃ me'stu" is a repeated plea for inseparation between the seeker and Brahman, the Reality that they wish to realize or recognize. It is essentially a prayer for the devotee to never be ignorant of or deny the ultimate truth of Brahman. The prayer deepens with the plea: "May all the virtues (as described in the Upanishads) of those wise men who dwell in the Ātman (or the Supreme Self) become part of me and reside in me." Thus, we come to understand that this is a humble prayer asking for the physical, mental, and spiritual strength to absorb and live by the teachings of the Upanishads. A prayer that the teachings of the Upanishads be realized and internalized in their very being.
- Om iti, this Om [is closest to Brahman]
- etat akṣaram udgītham upāsīta, recite this syllable as part of your upāsanā [ritual]
- hi om iti udgāyati, how you recite this Om
- tasya upavyākhyānam, is being explained.
note Om is as good as Brahman. To begin with, it is a symbol of Brahman. But it is not just a symbol; it is Brahman itself. The Upaniṣad says to recite Om as if you are worshipping Brahman. This recitation is called udgītha, and it is loud recitation. You recite Om aloud, but you do it with the feeling that you are worshipping Brahman. This worship then eventually purifies the mind. The importance of Om is being explained in the following verses.
- Eṣām bhūtānām, of these beings
- pṛthivī rasaḥ, the earth is the essence
- pṛthivyāḥ, of the earth
- āpaḥ, water
- rasaḥ, is the essence
- apām oṣadhayaḥ rasaḥ, plants are the essence of water
- oṣadhīnām puruṣaḥ rasaḥ, human beings are the essence of plants
- puruṣasya vāk rasaḥ, speech is the essence of human beings
- vācaḥ ṛg rasaḥ, the Ṛg Veda is the essence of speech
- ṛcaḥ sāma rasaḥ, the Sāma Veda is the essence of the Ṛg Veda
- sāmnaḥ udgīthaḥ rasaḥ, the part known as udgītha is the essence of the Sāma Veda.
note There are both living and non-living things on the earth. What sustains them? Obviously the earth. They all come out of the earth, are sustained by the earth, and finally dissolve into the earth. But what sustains the earth? Water. The earth is a mixture of water and earth, and there can be no earth without water. Plants are said to be the essence of water, for they grow from water. Similarly, human beings are the essence of plants, because the human body is the outcome of the food eaten by human beings. Speech is the essence of human beings, for it is the best part of them. The best speech is the Ṛg Veda, and the essence of the Ṛg Veda is the Sāma Veda. Finally, udgītha—that is, Om—is the essence of the Sāma Veda.
- Saḥ, that
- eṣaḥ, this
- rasānām, of all the essences
- rasatamaḥ, the best essence
- paramaḥ, the best
- parārdhyaḥ, ranking the highest
- aṣṭamaḥ, the eighth [in the order of earth, water, plants, human beings
- speech, the Ṛg Veda, the Sāma Veda, and udgītha]
- yāt, that
- udgīthaḥ, udgītha [Om].
note The best of all essences is the udgītha, which is Om. It is the highest and best because it is the same as Brahman.
- Katamā, which
- katamā ṛk, which are the Ṛks
- katamat katamat sāma, which are the Sāmas
- katamaḥ katamaḥ udgīthaḥ, which are the udgīthas
- iti vimṛṣṭam bhavati, this is the question.
note It has been stated that speech is the essence of the Ṛg Veda. The question now arises: Which ones are the Ṛk, which ones are the Sāma, and which ones are the udgītha? The word katama, ‘which,’ is repeated to emphasize the importance of the question. But why is the word ‘which’ being used here? ‘Which’ is used when you have to pinpoint one thing out of many. The Ṛg Veda is taken as a single whole, so how is the use of ‘which’ justified here? The answer is that here ‘which’ refers to individual Ṛk mantras, and not to the whole body of the Ṛg Veda.
- Vāk eva ṛk, speech is Ṛk [being the cause of the Ṛk]
- prāṇaḥ sāma, prāṇa [breath, or the life force] is Sāma [for you can sing the Sāma if your prāṇa is strong]
- om iti etat akṣaram udgīthaḥ, the syllable ‘Om’ is the udgītha [for you recite it out of love for the Sāma]
- tat etat vai mithunam, it is like a couple
- yat vāk ca prāṇaḥ ca ṛk ca sāma ca, which are speech and prāṇa, Ṛk and Sāma.
note The word ‘couple,’ or ‘pair,’ is being used to suggest a relationship of cause and effect. Cause and effect are, in fact, one and the same. Speech is the cause, According to this Upaniṣad, the evolution of the gross world is in this order: earth, water, plants, human beings, speech, Ṛk, Sāma, and udgītha (Om). Udgītha is rasatamā, the essence of all essences, the cause of all causes. It occupies the eighth position—that is, it is the ultimate in the evolution of things. It is the Paramātman, the Self of all selves.
- Tat, that
- etat, this
- mithunam, dual combination [i.e., speech and life]
- om iti etasmin akṣare saṃsṛjyate, meet in this syllable Om
- yadā vai, whenever
- mithunau samāgacchataḥ, a couple [a male and a female] come together
- tau, they
- anyonyasya kāmam āpayataḥ vai, naturally satisfy each other’s desires.
note Those two, speech and life, merge into each other in Om. They attain their fulfilment in this way. Om thus stands for the fulfilment of all things.
- Āpayitā, he receives
- ha vai kāmānām, all he desires
- bhavati, this happens
- yaḥ, he who
- etat, this
- evam, this way [as the one who receives everything]
- vidvān, knows
- akṣaram, Om
- udgītham, as udgītha [Brahman]
- upāste, worships.
note If you worship Om, you acquire the qualities of Om. If you worship Om as the one who receives everything, you also, like Om, receive everything you desire. The śruti says: ‘You become whatever or whomever your object of worship is.’ (Maṇḍala Brāhmaṇa 20)
- Tat, that
- vai etat, this
- anujñā akṣaram, syllable [Om] indicates assent
- yat, when
- hi kim ca anujānāti, assent is to be indicated
- om iti, this Om
- eva tadā āha, is then uttered
- eṣā u eva, this
- samṛddhiḥ, progress
- yat, that
- anujñā, assent
- samardhayitā, makes it possible
- ha vai kāmānām bhavati, one attains those desires
- yaḥ, he who
- etat, this
- evam, this way
- vidvān, having known
- akṣaram udgītham upāste, worships the syllable Om as the udgītha [Brahman],
note The word Om means ‘yes.’ Once someone named Śākalya asked the sage Yājñavalkya, ‘How many gods and goddesses are there?’ Yājñavalkya replied, ‘Thirty-three.’ Then Śākalya indicated his agreement by saying ‘Om.’ When you say Om it is also an indication of your faith in yourself. It is proof of your strength and vigour, and proof also of your prosperity. Om is therefore a symbol of certain basic qualities. When you worship Om you acquire those qualities, and you begin to progress and also prosper.
- Tena, by this [Om]
- iyam, this
- trayī vidyā vartate, threefold Vedic ritual begins
- om iti, with Om
- āśrāvayati, the recitation begins
- om iti śaṃsati, with Om begins the singing of the hymn
- om iti udgāyati, with Om the udgān [the praise to Om] begins
- etasya akṣarasya, to this akṣara [Brahman]
- eva apacityai, to pay homage
- mahimnā, for its greatness
- rasena, with the essence [of Om],
note To create some interest in Om, it is being praised here. Om is indispensable even if you are performing a Vedic ritual. You begin reciting a Vedic verse with Om, singing a Vedic hymn with Om, and closing your final udgān with Om. In short, the whole procedure is dedicated to Om. Not only that, those who participate in this ritualistic worship derive their strength and vigour from Om, for the butter or barley syrup they drink as a stimulant is from Om. How? Om is the medium through which sacrifices are performed, and the effects of the sacrifices are carried to the sun. These then return to the earth as rain. From rain come life and food. Again, because of life and food, a person is able to perform sacrifices. Thus, it is the essence of Om that makes ritualistic worship, such as sacrifices, possible. Ritualistic worship is therefore a testimony to the greatness of Om. Om is both the cause and the effect.
- Ubhau, both [kinds of persons]
- tena, by the power of that [Om]
- kurutaḥ, work
- yaḥ ca, whoever
- evam, as such
- veda, knows
- etat, this [i.e., about Om]
- yaḥ ca na veda, he who does not know
- vidyā ca avidyā ca nānā tu, knowledge and ignorance are entirely different things
- yat eva, anything
- vidyayā karoti, one does with knowledge [about Om]
- śraddhayā, with respect for one’s teachers and the scriptures
- upaniṣadā, as taught by the Upaniṣads [i.e., according to yoga]
- tat eva, that [work]
- vīryavattaram bhavati,. is more powerful [i.e., more fruitful]
- iti, this
- khalu, certainly
- etasya eva akṣarasya upavyākhyānam bhavati, is the right tribute to this Om. Iti prathamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the first section.
note Two kinds of people work: one kind knowing what Om means and another kind knowing nothing about it. Both kinds of people, however, are able to work because of Om. What is the difference between the two? What special advantage does a person who knows about Om have? Someone may argue: Suppose a person takes a medicine knowing what medicine he is taking and why he is taking it, and another person takes it without any knowledge of what he is taking and why he is taking it. Will the medicine produce different results in them? The answer is: The analogy does not apply here. Knowledge is always an advantage, especially knowledge about Om. If you work because you are told to work, and if you work because you want to use the work as a stepping-stone to the attainment of Om—there is a vast difference between the two approaches. In the first instance, you are content with whatever the work produces; in the second, you are content only if it paves the way to your attainment of Om.
- Devāsurāḥ. the gods and goddesses and the demons
- ha vai yatra saṃyetire, fought among themselves
- ubhaye, [though] both
- prājāpatyāḥ, were Prajāpati’s children
- tat, at that time
- ha devāḥ, the gods and goddesses then
- udgītham ājahruḥ, adopted the path of the udgītha
- anena, by this
- enān, them [the demons]
- abhibhaviṣyāmah, will overcome
- iti, thinking thus.
note The gods and goddesses are ‘bright’ by virtue of their self-control, while the demons are ‘dark’ because they have no control over themselves. Though they were offspring of the same Prajāpati, they often clashed with each other. The gods and goddesses represent virtue; the demons represent vice. This conflict between virtue and vice is eternal, but it is virtue that always prevails. Virtue is here said to be the udgītha—that is, reciting Om while performing sacrifices. The gods and goddesses choose the path prescribed by the scriptures, whereas the demons do just the opposite and defy the scriptures. No wonder then the demons lose. The udgītha is supreme because it is Om. It is the Paramātman, the Cosmic Self.
- Te, they [the gods and goddesses]
- ha nāsikyam prāṇam udgītham upāsāñcakrire, worshipped as udgītha the prāṇa [life principle] presiding over the nostrils
- asurāḥ ha, the asuras, however
- tam pāpmanā vividhuḥ, pierced it with evil [i.e., misused it, as if it were meant only for sense pleasure such as enjoying fragrance]
- hi, this is why
- eṣaḥ, this [prāṇa presiding over the nostrils]
- pāpmanā viddhaḥ, is tainted with evil
- tasmāt, therefore
- tena, by it [i.e., the nostrils]
- jighrati, smells
- surabhi ca, good odour
- durgandhi ca, and also bad odour.
note Mark the contrast between the attitude of the gods and goddesses and of the demons. To the demons, the nostrils were only an organ for smelling. Being what they are, it is natural that they would think so. But to the gods and goddesses, the nostrils are the seat of prāṇa, the vital breath, and they worship prāṇa there. The nostrils are also holy to them for another reason: they use the nostrils in reciting the udgītha to prāṇa. The demons know nothing about prāṇa or udgītha. To them, prāṇa is merely that which carries good and bad odours.
- Atha ha, next
- vācam, speech
- udgītham upāsāñcakrire, [the gods and goddesses] worshipped as udgītha
- tām ha asurāḥ pāpmanā vividhuḥ, the asuras pierced it with evil [i.e., misused it]
- tasmāt, that is why
- tayā, by it [the organ of speech]
- vadati, one speaks
- ubhayam satyam ca anṛtam ca, both truth and untruth
- pāpmanā hi eṣā viddhā, because this [speech] was pierced with evil [by the ignorant demons].
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Atha ha, next
- cakṣuḥ udgītham upāsāñcakrire, [the gods and goddesses] worshipped the eye as udgītha [in praise of Om]
- asurāḥ ha, the demons, however
- tat, that [eye]
- pāpmanā vividhuḥ, pierced with evil [misused it from ignorance]
- tasmāt, this is why
- tena, by this [eye]
- paśyati, one sees
- ubhayam darśanīyam ca adarśanīyam ca, both good and bad sights
- hi, because
- etat, this [eye]
- pāpmanā viddham, was pierced by evil.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Atha ha, next
- śrotram udgītham upāsāñcakrire, [the gods and goddesses] worshipped the faculty of hearing as their udgītha [praise to Om]
- asurāḥ ha, the asuras, however
- tat, that faculty
- pāpmanā vividhaḥ, pierced with evil [misused from ignorance]
- tasmāt, that is why
- tena, by it [the organ of hearing]
- ubhayam śṛṇoti śravaṇīyam ca aśravaṇīyam ca, one hears both pleasant and unpleasant things
- hi, because
- etat, this [faculty]
- pāpmanā viddham, was pierced by evil [i.e., was misused by the ignorant],
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Atha ha, next
- manaḥ udgītham upāsāñcakrire, [the gods and goddesses] worshipped the mind for its role in chanting the udgītha
- asurāḥ ha, the asuras, however
- tat, that [mind]
- pāpmanā vividhuḥ, poisoned it with bad thoughts
- tasmāt, for that reason
- tena, in the mind
- ubhayam saṅkalpanīyam ca asaṅkalpanīyam ca saṅkalpayate, one thinks both good and bad thoughts
- pāpmanā hi etat viddham, because the mind is vitiated by evil [ignorance],
note Prāṇa is another name for Brahman. Prāṇa is pure, but when it is associated with the sense organs it is not pure. Similarly, Brahman as Brahman is pure, but with adjuncts it is not pure. It is not pure in the sense that it is subject to change. Here, these adjuncts are referred to as pāpma, impure or evil, because they are limitations imposed on Brahman. These limitations are not real, however, but only apparent. When the Upaniṣad speaks of the organs, it means the organs with their presiding deities. Both are described as pāpma. In these verses, some of the organs are mentioned, but it is to be understood that what is stated here about some organs applies to all the organs and their presiding deities.
- Atha ha, next
- yaḥ eva mukhyaḥ prāṇaḥ, the chief prāṇa [the vital force, inclusive of its five aspects—prāṇa, apāna, vyāna, udāna, and samāna]
- tam udgītham upāsāñcakrire, [the gods and goddesses] worshipped him as udgītha
- yathā, just as
- ākhaṇam, unbreakable
- aśmānam, stone
- ṛtvā, hit against
- vidhvaṃseta, broken into pieces [and are destroyed]
- [in the same way] asurāḥ ca, the demons also
- tam ha ṛtvā vidadh vaṃsuḥ, hit against it [prāṇa] and were destroyed.
note The gods and goddesses worshipped pure prāṇa—that is, prāṇa without the organs—as udgītha. As before, the demons tried to hurt prāṇa, but they failed. In fact, they got lost in prāṇa. They met the same fate as chunks of earth thrown against granite. When the chunks hit the granite, they break into pieces and are destroyed. Similarly, it is beyond the power of the demons to do any harm to prāṇa.
- Evam yathā, just as [chunks of earth]
- ākhaṇam, unbreakable
- aśmānam, stone
- ṛtvā, having hit
- vidhvaṃsate, are smashed
- evam ha eva, in the same way
- saḥ vidhvaṃsate, a person gets totally destroyed
- yaḥ pāpam kāmayate, who wishes ill
- evamvidi, of a person who knows thus [the true nature of prāṇa]
- yaḥ ca enam abhidāsati, or who causes an injury to such a person
- saḥ eṣaḥ, he [who knows] this [prāṇa]
- aśmā ākhaṇaḥ, [is like] a stone that can never be broken.
note What is the difference between mukhya prāṇa (the chief prāṇa) and the prāṇa that is associated with our breathing, or smelling? Mukhya prāṇa is supreme prāṇa—that is, it is Brahman. It is pure, all-pervasive, and self-sufficient. But our breathing is associated with the organ of smelling and is not independent. It is also not pure. It has limitations and is susceptible to pāpma, impurities—that is, it is sometimes good and sometimes bad. Mukhya prāṇa, however, is always pure, always the same. One who knows the true nature of prāṇa is immune to injury. And anyone trying to hurt him will end up hurting himself.
- Etena eva, by this [chief prāṇa]
- nā surabhi, no sweet odour
- na durgandhi, no bad odour
- vijānāti, is known
- hi, because
- eṣaḥ, this [prāṇa]
- apahata-pāpmā, is pure [untouched by evil]
- tena, by that [prāṇa]
- yat aśnāti, whatever a person eats
- yat pibati, whatever a person drinks
- tena, by this [eating and drinking]
- itarān prāṇān, the sense organs
- avati, sustains
- u antataḥ, at the time of death
- etam, this [chief prāṇa]
- avittvā eva, without receiving any food and drink
- utkrāmati, goes out of the body
- [this is why] antataḥ, at the time of death
- vyādadāti eva, a person has the mouth open.
note For the chief prāṇa, there is no good or bad odour because it is pure. Egotism is the source of impurity, and the chief prāṇa is free from egotism. And being free from egotism, the chief prāṇa is selfless. People eat and drink because of the chief prāṇa. But the chief prāṇa does not eat or drink for itself. It enables But how do we know that the food and drink the chief prāṇa consumes goes to sustain the organs? When death occurs the chief prāṇa stops eating and drinking. As a result, the sense organs stop functioning, as if they have left the body. It is seen, however, that when a person dies his mouth is open. This is indicative of the desire of the chief prāṇa to eat and drink.
- Tam, that [the chief prāṇa]
- ha aṅgirāḥ, the sage Aṅgirā
- udgītham, as udgītha [the Supreme]
- upāsāñcakre, worshipped
- etam, this [Supreme Being, the chief prāṇa]
- u eva āṅgirasam, as Āṅgirasa
- manyante, [people] regard
- aṅgānām yat rasaḥ, for it is the essence [support] of all the aṅgas [the organs].
note The word āṅgirasa is derived from aṅga + rasa. That is, āṅgirasa is the rasa (essence) of the aṅgas (organs). It is the support of the organs. It is the same as prāṇa. When the sage Aṅgirā worships prāṇa, he is worshipping himself.
- Tena, for that reason
- bṛhaspatiḥ, Bṛhaspati
- ha tam, that [prāṇa]
- udgītham upāsāñcakre, worshipped prāṇa as udgītha [as Brahman, to whom Om is sung]
- etam u eva bṛhaspatim manyante, they regard this [prāṇa] as Bṛhaspati
- hi, for
- vāk, speech
- bṛhatī, is powerful
- tasyāḥ eṣaḥ patiḥ, prāṇa is its lord.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Tena, for that reason
- tam, that [i.e., the chief prāṇa]
- ha āyāsya, the sage Āyāsya [or, that which comes out of the mouth]
- udgītham, as udgītha
- upāsāñcakre, worshipped
- etam u eva āyāsyam manyante, they regarded this as Āyāsya
- yat āsyāt ayate, that which comes out of the mouth.
note Prāṇa is also Bṛhaspati because it is the lord of all speech. Āyāsya means ‘that which comes out of the mouth.’ It is prāṇa, but it is also the name of a sage. Aṅgirā, Bṛhaspati, and Āyāsya—these sages worshipped prāṇa as udgītha. They, in fact, worshipped themselves.
- Dālbhyaḥ, the son of Dalbha
- bakaḥ, the sage Baka
- ha tam, that [prāṇa]
- tena, with the qualities as stated
- vidāñcakāra, came to know
- saḥ, he [Baka]
- ha naimiṣīyānām, of the sages of Naimiṣa forest
- udgātā, the singer of the udgītha
- babhūva, became
- ha ebhyaḥ kāmān, according to the wishes [of the forest dwellers]
- saḥ āgāyati sma, he sang [the udgītha].
note Not only did Aṅgirā and other sages worship prāṇa, but Baka, son of Dalbha, also did the same. That is, he recognized the power of prāṇa. The sages of Naimiṣa forest were pleased with him, and appointed him to sing the udgītha for them. He thus sang the udgītha in praise of prāṇa and pleased the sages by his performance.
- Yaḥ, he who
- evam, as such
- vidvān, knows
- etat, this [prāṇa]
- udgītham akṣaram, as udgītha akṣara [akṣara means both ‘syllable’ and ‘the undecaying,’ which is a name of Brahman]
- upāste, worships [or meditates on]
- vai kāmānām āgātā ha bhavati, he thereby becomes the udgātā [singer] of all that he desires
- iti adhyātmam, this is so far as the udgītha relating to the body is concerned. Iti dvitīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ here ends the second section.
note Singing for prāṇa is the same as singing for all, for prāṇa is all. You may even achieve all you desire through it. This is so far as the individual is concerned. Praising Om has a threefold reward: relating to the body (adhyātma), relating to animals (adhibhūta), and relating to the elements (adhidaiva).
- Atha, next
- adhidaivatam, relating to the elements [such as rain, lightning, and other forces of nature]
- yaḥ eva asau, that [i.e., the sun] over there which
- tapati, gives us heat
- tam, to that
- udgītham upāsīta, worship as udgītha
- udyan, as it rises
- vai eṣaḥ, this [sun]
- prajābhyaḥ, for all living beings
- udgāyati, [as if] it prays for their well-being
- udyan, as [the sun] rises
- tamaḥ bhayam apahanti, it removes the fear of darkness
- yaḥ, one who
- evam veda, knows this
- vai bhayasya, the fear [of birth and death]
- tamasaḥ, ignorance
- apahantā bhavati, overcomes.
note There are many ways of using udgītha as worship. This verse gives an example of how you use it in worshipping the forces of nature (adhidaivata). There is the sun above giving us heat. The Upaniṣad says to worship udgītha as the sun. But if udgītha is Om, how can it stand for the sun? The sun helps the plants, such as paddy, to grow. Without the sun, life on this planet would be impossible. It is as if the sun sings the udgītha for us to sustain us. This is why the sun is referred to as the udgītha. As udgītha, the sun also dispels our fear of darkness. One who knows this is no longer afraid of birth and death. That is, he knows he is immortal.
- Ayam, this [prāṇa]
- ca asau, and that [sun]
- samānaḥ eva, are equivalent
- u ayam, this [prāṇa]
- uṣṇaḥ, is warm
- ca asau, and that [sun]
- uṣṇaḥ, is warm
- imam, this [prāṇa]
- svaraḥ iti ācakṣate, [sages] call it svara [‘outgoing,’ at the time of death]
- amum, that [sun]
- svaraḥ iti, has set
- pratyāsvaraḥ iti, [and] has returned [this is what people say]
- tasmāt vai, for that reason
- etam, this [going out]
- imam, this [prāṇa]
- ca amum, and that [sun]
- udgītham upāsīta, worship as udgītha.
note Prāṇa and āditya (the sun) are similar. Both are warm. Sages call both svara, which means ‘going out.’ The difference is that while prāṇa goes out (at the time of death), the sun goes out (when it sets) and also returns (pratyāsvara, when it rises). Thus, prāṇa and āditya are similar in name and quality. It is therefore appropriate to worship both as udgītha. Both are Om.
- Atha, indirectly
- khalu vyānam eva udgītham upāsīta, one should worship vyāna [the bridge between prāṇa (breathing in) and apāna (breathing out)] as udgītha
- yat vai prāṇiti, that which is breathed in
- saḥ prāṇaḥ, that is prāṇa
- yat apāniti, that which is breathed out
- saḥ apānaḥ, that is apāna
- atha yat prāṇa-apānayoḥ sandhiḥ, then the bridge between prāṇa and apāna
- saḥ vyānaḥ, that is vyāna
- yaḥ vyānaḥ sā vāk, that which is vyāna is speech
- tasmāt, therefore
- aprāṇan, without inhaling
- anapānan, without exhaling
- vācam abhivyāharati, a person speaks.
note Here vyāna is being presented for worship as udgītha, for vyāna is only a form of prāṇa. What is vyāna? Vyāna is the bridge between prāṇa and apāna, between breathing in and breathing out. Vyāna is the state in which you hold your breath. Vyāna is also called vāk, speech, for when you speak you have to hold your breath. Śaṅkara says prāṇa is breathing out and apāna is breathing in. According to Monier-Williams, it is the other way around—prāṇa is breathing in and apāna is breathing out. Macdowell is of the same opinion. Both meanings are correct, depending on the context in which the word is used.
- Yā vāk sā ṛk, that which is speech is Ṛk
- tasmāt, because [they are one]
- aprāṇan anapānan, breathing in and out are suspended
- ṛcam, the Ṛg Veda
- abhivyāharati, one recites
- yā ṛk tat sāma, that which is the Ṛk is also the Sāma
- tasmāt, because [they are one and the same]
- aprāṇan anapānan sāma gāyati, one suspends breathing in and out when singing the Sāma
- yat sāma saḥ udgīthaḥ, that which is the Sāma is the udgītha
- tasmāt aprāṇan anapānan udgāyati, because one sings the udgītha by suspending both breathing in and breathing out.
note The Ṛk is a collection of words, and the Sāma is based on the Ṛk. Again, the Sāma and the udgītha are the same. To recite any of these, or even to speak, you have to resort to vyāna—that is, you must hold your breath.
- Ataḥ, this is why
- yāni, those
- anyāni, other
- vīryavanti, demanding great strength
- karmāṇi, feats
- yathā, such as
- agneḥ manthanam, igniting a fire by rubbing one piece of wood against another
- ājeh, a target
- saraṇam, running up to
- dṛḍhasya dhanuṣaḥ āyamanam, bending a stiff bow
- aprāṇan anapānan, without breathing in or breathing out
- tāni, all those [feats]
- karoti, one accomplishes
- etasya hetoḥ, for this reason
- vyānam eva, vyāna
- udgītham, as udgītha [Om]
- upāsīta, one should worship.
note Whenever you do something that demands much application of strength, you must resort to vyāna. Take, for instance, deeds such as producing fire by grinding one piece of wood against another, or running up to a target, or bending a stiff bow. In doing each of these feats, you have to hold your breath. Even when you speak, you hold your breath. This distinguishes vyāna from other forms of breathing. Vyāna, therefore, deserves special worship, for vyāna is in a class by itself. It gives you strength.
- Atha, now
- khalu udgīthākṣarāṇi ‘ut-gī-tha’ iti upāsīta, worship the syllables ut, gī, and tha separately in the word udgītha
- prāṇaḥ eva ut, prāṇa is this ut
- prāṇena hi, because by prāṇa
- uttiṣṭhati, arises [everything]
- vāk gīḥ, vāk [speech] is gī
- vācaḥ ha giraḥ iti ācakṣate, because words are called ‘gira’
- annam tham, food is tha
- hi idam sarvam, for all this [i.e., this world]
- anne sthitam, is supported by food.
note The word udgītha is comprised of the syllables ut, gī, and tha. It is worthwhile meditating on these syllables, for each one is significant. For instance, ut, in brief, is uttham, rising. It stands for prāṇa, because out of prāṇa everything comes into being. From prāṇa everything ‘rises’; otherwise it goes down. The syllable gī stands for speech, because scholars prefer to use the word gira to mean speech. Similarly, the syllable tha stands for food, for tha means ‘that which supports.’ It is well known that food supports everything. Thus the syllables ut, gī, and tha stand for the whole word udgītha. It is like thinking of the name ‘Ram Misra.’ As you think of the name, you also think of the person who bears that name. Try to think of each syllable in the word udgītha as above.
- Dyauḥ, heaven
- eva ut, is ut
- antarikṣam gīḥ, the space between heaven and earth is gī
- pṛthivī tham, the earth is tha
- ādityaḥ eva ut, the sun is ut
- vāyuḥ gīḥ, air is gī
- agniḥ tham, fire is tha
- sāma vedaḥ eva ut, the Sāma Veda is ut
- yajur vedaḥ gīḥ, the Yajur Veda is gī
- ṛg vedaḥ tham, the Ṛg Veda is tha
- vāk, the Ṛg Veda and other scriptures
- asmai, to him [the spiritual seeker]
- doham, the goal [he is seeking]
- dugdhe, gives him of itself
- yaḥ vācaḥ dohaḥ, the goal is the knowledge of the scriptures
- yaḥ evam vidvān, the seeker who knows this
- etāni udgīthākṣarāṇi ut + gī + tha iti upāste, [and] worships these syllables of udgītha
- annavān, he has plenty of food
- annādaḥ bhavati, [and] he enjoys eating that food [i.e., he becomes illumined].
note Heaven is said to be ut because it is high above. Space is gī because it envelops the whole world. And the earth is tha because it is the support of all beings. Āditya, the sun, is ut because it is far above everything. Vāyu, air, is gī because it envelops everything. Agni, fire, is tha because it is the common element in every sacrificial rite. The Sāma Veda is said to be ut because it is known even in heaven. The Yajur Veda is gī because the butter used in performing the Yajur Vedic rites is eaten by the gods and goddesses. The Ṛg Veda is tha because it supports the Sāma Veda. What do you gain by worshipping ut-gī-tha? You gradually understand the meaning of the Ṛg Veda and other Vedas. You also have plenty to eat, and you become like ‘a blazing fire’—that is, you become an illumined person.
- Atha khalu, now
- āśīḥ samṛddhiḥ, instructions about how desired objectives can be obtained
- upasaraṇāni, the things desired
- iti, in this way
- upāsīta, one should meditate upon
- yena sāmnā, by that Sāma
- stoṣyan syāt, one sings
- tat sāma upadhāvet, one should meditate upon that Sāma.
note You sing a particular Sāma for a particular thing you wish to get. Sing it always, and remember that it is the source of what you are wishing for.
- Tām ṛcam, that Ṛk
- yasyām ṛci, on which Ṛk [the Sāma is based]
- tam ṛṣim yat ārṣeyam, that sage who conceived of it
- yām devatām abhiṣṭoṣyan syāt, the deity to whom the prayer is addressed
- tām devatām, that deity
- upadhāvet, one should meditate on.
note When you recite a Sāma mantra, you should remember the Ṛk mantra from which it is derived, the sage
- Yena chandasā, by the Gāyatrī or whatever other hymn
- stoṣyan syāt, one is going to pray
- tat chandaḥ upadhāvet, one should meditate on that hymn
- yena stomena stoṣyamāṇaḥ syāt, the group of Sāmas by which a person is going to pray
- tam stomam upadhāvet, one should meditate on those Sāmas [along with the deities to whom they are addressed].
note Whether you use the Gāyatrī or some other hymn while praying, you should not forget to meditate on that hymn. In fact, whatever mantras you use, you should meditate on them as well as on the deities to whom they are directed.
- Yām diśam abhiṣṭoṣyan syāt, whatever direction a person may face while praying
- tām diśam upadhāvet, one should worship that direction [and also the deities presiding over that direction].
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Antataḥ, as one ends one’s prayer
- kāmam dhyāyan apramattaḥ, one should think of whatever one desires, making sure that the pronunciation of words is correct
- ātmānam, oneself
- upasṛtya, thinking of [one’s name, lineage, and caste]
- stuvīta, praise
- yat kāmaḥ, whatever desire one has
- stuvīta, while praying
- kāmaḥ, that desire
- abhyāsaḥ, promptly
- ha, surely
- asmai, to the person concerned
- samṛdhyeta, prosperity goes. [The repetition is for emphasis.] Iti tṛtīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the third section.
note Here the udgātā (the singer) is told how he should pray. He should first repeat the Sāma songs, and then he should pray for whatever he desires. His prayer should be correct in every detail. And while praying, he should mention his own name, his lineage, and his caste. If these conditions are fulfilled, his prayer will be promptly granted. That this will happen is indicated by the repetition of the statement.
- Om iti, this Om [is closest to Brahman]
- etat akṣaram udgītham upāsīta, recite this syllable as part of your upāsanā [ritual]
- hi om iti udgāyati, how you recite this Om
- tasya upavyākhyānam, is being explained.
note This akśara is Brahman, and Om is that Brahman. Akṣara, Brahman, and Om are interchangeable words. As Brahman is abhaya, without fear, and amṛta, immortal, so Om and akṣara are also without fear and immortal.
- Devāḥ, the gods and goddesses
- vai mṛtyoḥ bibhyataḥ, are afraid of death
- trayīm vidyām prāviśan, they took refuge in the three Vedas [i.e., they decided to perform Vedic rites and rituals in order to escape death]
- te, they
- chandobhiḥ acchādayan, covered themselves with the mantras
- yat, because
- ebhiḥ,
note In ancient times the gods and goddesses decided to perform the sacrifices mentioned in the three Vedas to save themselves from death. It was as if they took ‘cover’ behind the Vedic mantras. It is from this word ‘cover’ (acchādan) that the mantras have come to be known as chandas.
- Yathā, just as
- udake, in shallow water
- matsyam, a fish [swimming]
- paripaśyet, a person can see
- evam, in the same way
- tatra, in those [Vedic rites and rituals]
- ṛci sāmni yajuṣi, in the Ṛg, Sāma, and Yajur Vedas
- tān, those gods and goddesses
- mṛtyuḥ, Death
- paryapaśyat, saw [i.e., they could not escape death through Vedic rituals]
- te, they [the gods and goddesses]
- nu viditvā, having realized [that they were still susceptible to death]
- ṛcaḥ sāmnaḥ yajuṣaḥ ūrdhvāḥ, turned away from Ṛk, Sāma, and Yajur rituals
- svaram eva prāviśan, took to [reciting] Om.
note Fish in shallow water are never safe, for people can easily catch them. Similarly, those who depend on karma (i.e., Vedic rituals) are always liable to being caught by death. When people realize this, they stop performing the rites and rituals and concentrate on reciting Om. They know that Om is a symbol of immortality and fearlessness.
- Yadā vai, whenever
- ṛcam āpnoti, a person recites Ṛk mantras
- om iti eva atisvarati, that person recites Om with great enthusiasm
- evam sāma evam yajuḥ, so also the Yajus and Sāma mantras
- eṣaḥ u svaraḥ yat etat akṣaram, this akṣara [Om] is svara
- etat amṛtam abhayam, this is immortal and fearless
- tat praviśya, having taken shelter in it
- devāḥ amṛtāḥ abhayāḥ abhavan, the gods and goddesses became immortal and fearless.
note Akṣara, Om, and svara are the same. When people recite Vedic mantras, they always start with the akṣara Om. By taking refuge in Om, one attains immortality and fearlessness.
- Saḥ yaḥ, one who
- evam etat akṣaram vidvān praṇauti, knows this akṣara and respects it as such
- etat eva svaram, that known as svara
- amṛtam abhayam akṣaram praviśati, becomes one with the immortal and fearless akṣara [Om]
- tat, that [akṣara]
- praviśya, having become one with [akṣara]
- devāḥ yat amṛtāḥ, by which the gods and goddesses became immortal
- tat amṛtaḥ bhavati, that person also becomes immortal. Iti caturthaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the fourth section.
note By worshipping svara (Om), the gods and goddesses entered into svara, which means they became one with it. And by becoming one with it, they became fearless and immortal. The same thing may happen to anyone who follows in their footsteps—that is, anyone who worships svara. The transformation is the same as in the case of the gods and goddesses—no more, no less.
- Atha, next
- yaḥ khalu udgīthaḥ, that which is udgītha
- saḥ praṇavaḥ, is praṇava [Om]
- yaḥ praṇavaḥ saḥ udgīthaḥ, that which is praṇava is also udgītha
- asau vai ādityaḥ udgīthaḥ, that sun is udgītha
- eṣaḥ praṇavaḥ, it is also praṇava
- hi, for
- eṣaḥ, the sun
- om iti svaran eti, appears with the word Om in its mind.
note This is how udgītha is to be worshipped: According to many scholars of the Ṛg Veda, udgītha is the same as praṇava (Om). What is praṇava to them is udgītha according to the Chāndogya. Similarly, according to many scholars, the sun is udgītha and also praṇava. How can the sun be referred to as udgītha? When the sun appears, it looks as if it is saying Om, or it has Om in its thoughts. According to Śaṅkara, the word svaran may also mean ‘uttering.’
- Kauṣītakiḥ putram uvāca, the sage Kauṣītaki said to his son
- etam, this [sun with its rays]
- eva, as one
- aham abhyagāsiṣam, I greeted [welcomed]
- tasmāt, because [of my worshipping it as one]
- tvam mama ekaḥ asi, you are my only son
- tvam raśmīn paryāvartayāt, if you worship the sun and its rays separately
- te bahavaḥ vai bhaviṣyanti, you will have many children
- iti adhidaivatam, this is the worship of the forces of nature.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Atha, now
- adhyātmam, concerning one’s own body
- yaḥ eva ayam mukhyaḥ prāṇaḥ, that which is the chief prāṇa [which divides itself into five functions: prāṇa, apāna, vyāna, udāna, and samāna]
- tam udgītham upāsīta, one should worship as udgītha
- hi, for
- eṣaḥ, this [prāṇa]
- om iti svaran, uttering Om
- eti, activates [all the organs—of speech, vision, etc.].
note As far as the physical body is concerned, the Upaniṣad says to treat the chief prāna as Om. The chief prāṇa is responsible for what the organs of perception (the eyes, ears, nose, etc.) and the organs of action (the hands, feet, speech, etc.) do. It makes them active. Just as some people say Om before they do or say anything, so prāṇa seems to say Om as it makes the organs function. Not that it really says Om, but because the organs cannot act without its support, it is suggested that the chief prāṇa has to give the signal (that is, by saying Om) and then only do the organs start operating.
- Kauṣītakiḥ ha putram uvāca, Kauṣītaki said to his son
- aham u etam eva abhyagāsiṣam, I worshipped this [prāṇa] as one
- tasmāt, that is why
- tvam mama ekaḥ, you are my only son
- tvam prāṇān bhūmānam abhigāyatāt, you should worship prāṇa as many [i.e., with manifold qualities and forms]
- me bahavaḥ vai bhaviṣyanti iti, thinking, ‘May my children be many.’
note The sun and its rays are not separate, but if a person wants more than one child, he or she will have to worship the sun and its rays as separate entities. The same applies to the worship of the chief prāṇa and its subsidiaries (vyāna, udāna, etc.).
- Atha khalu, for certain
- yaḥ udgīthaḥ saḥ praṇavaḥ, that which is udgītha is praṇava
- yaḥ praṇava saḥ udgīthaḥ, that which is praṇava is also udgītha
- hotṛṣadanāt api eva ha durudgītam, it is not unlikely that the person performing a sacrifice will err in pronunciation
- anusamāharati iti, that can be rectified [the statement is repeated to emphasize its importance]. Iti pañcamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the fifth section.
note It has already been stressed that praṇava and udgītha should be regarded as one. Where the consciousness of this sameness prevails, any mistakes made while reciting the mantras may easily be rectified. The statement is intended to illustrate how it helps to have the knowledge of the sameness of udgītha and praṇava.
- Iyam, this [earth]
- eva ṛk, is like the Ṛg Veda
- agniḥ sāma, fire is like the Sāma Veda
- tat etat sāma etasyām ṛci adhyūḍham, the Sāma Veda is based on the Ṛg Veda
- tasmāt, therefore
- ṛci adhyūḍham sāma gīyate, the Sāma Veda is sung based on the Ṛg Veda
- iyam eva sā, this [earth] is the sā [of Sāma]
- agniḥ amaḥ, fire is ama [of Sāma]
- tat sāma, that [if joined together] is Sāma [i.e., sā + ama].
note The Upaniṣad says to treat the earth as the Ṛg Veda and fire as the Sāma Veda. But how are they so related? The Sāma is based on the Ṛg Veda, and fire is based on the earth. Because of this relationship between them, they are thought of as identical.
- Antarikṣam, the space between heaven and earth
- eva ṛk, is nothing but the Ṛk
- vāyuḥ sāma, air is the Sāma
- tat etat sāma, this Sāma [called air]
- etasyām ṛci adhyūḍham, is based on the Ṛk [called the antarikṣa]
- tasmāt, this is why
- ṛci adhyūḍham sāma gīyate, the Sāma is sung as based on the Ṛk
- antarikṣam eva sā, the space between heaven and earth is sā
- vāyuḥ amaḥ, air is ama
- tat sāma, that [if joined together] is Sāma.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Dyauḥ, the heaven
- eva ṛk, is Ṛk
- ādityaḥ sāma, the sun is Sāma
- tat etat sāma, that Sāma [which is known as the sun]
- etasyām ṛci adhyūḍham, is based on the Ṛk [heaven]
- tasmāt, that is why
- ṛci adhyūḍham sāma [sāmagaiḥ] gīyate, the Sāma scholars sing the Sāma based on the Ṛk
- dyauḥ eva sā, heaven is nothing but sā
- ādityaḥ amaḥ, the sun is ama
- tat sāma, that [if joined together] is Sāma.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Nakṣatrāṇi era ṛk, the stars together constitute the Ṛk
- candramāḥ sāma, the moon is the Sāma
- tat etat sāma, that Sāma
- etasyām ṛci adhyūḍham, is based on the Ṛk
- tasmāt, that is why
- ṛci adhyūḍham sāma gīyate, the Sāma scholars sing the Sāma based on the Ṛk
- nakṣatrāṇi eva sā, the stars are the sā
- candramaḥ amaḥ, the moon is the ama
- tat sāma, that [if joined together] is Sāma.
note The moon is the lord of the stars. This is why it is given the status of the Sāma Veda.
- Atha, next
- yat etat, that which is this
- ādityasya śuklam, whiteness of the sun
- bhāḥ, the glow
- sā eva ṛk, that is the Ṛk
- atha, next
- yat nīlam, that which is blue
- paraḥ, deep
- kṛṣṇam, black
- tat sāma, that is the Sāma
- tat etat sāma, this Sāma
- etasyām ṛci adhyūḍham, is based on the Ṛk
- tasmāt, that is why
- ṛci adhyūḍham sāma gīyate, the Sāma is sung based on the Ṛk.
note The Upaniṣad gives another way of worshipping the udgītha: The white glow of the sun is compared to the Ṛk. But the sun also has a deep blue or black glow, which the Upaniṣad compares to the Sāma. This deep blue glow is not seen by many, people. Only a few persons who have studied the scriptures and have acquired an enlightened mind can see it.
- Atha, then
- yat eva etat ādityasya śuklam bhāḥ, that which is this white glow of the sun
- sā eva sā, that is the ‘sā’ [of Sāma]
- atha yat nīlam paraḥ kṛṣṇam, and that which is the deep black glow
- tat amaḥ, that is ‘ama’
- tat sāma, [when they are put together] that is Sāma
- atha antarāditye, again inside the orb of the sun
- yāḥ eṣaḥ hiraṇmayaḥ, there is a bright figure
- hiraṇyaśmaśruḥ, bright gold beard
- hiraṇyakeśaḥ puruṣaḥ dṛśyate, the person with bright gold hair seen [by the yogīs]
- āpraṇakhāt sarva eva suvarṇaḥ, bright gold all over the body, including even his nails.
note The sun is partly white and partly dark. These colours together make up ‘Sāma.’ The Upaniṣad does not mean to say that the sun is made of gold, and neither is the person in the orb of the sun. This is not to be taken literally. What is meant here is that the person in the sun is brilliant—brilliant in terms of moral and spiritual qualities. The word gold refers to his character and not to the colour of his skin. The word puruṣa means ‘one who covers the whole
- Tasya, his
- yathā, like
- kapyāsam [kapi, which means ‘he who drinks water’ (i.e, the sun) + āsa, which means blossomed], blossomed by the sun
- puṇḍarīkam evam, like the lotus
- akṣinī the eyes
- tasya ut iti nāma, his name is ‘ut’
- saḥ eṣaḥ sarvebhyaḥ pāpmabhyaḥ uditaḥ, he is above all weakness
- udeti, he rises
- ha vai sarvebhyaḥ pāpmabhyaḥ, above all weakness
- yaḥ, who
- evam veda, knows thus.
note It has been said that fire rests on the earth, space rests on air, the moon on the stars, and the dark glow of the sun on its white glow. But the Being in the orbit of the sun does not rest on anything He is above all that is evil, above everything. To signify this he is given the name ut (that which is above everything). This ‘ut’ suggests supremacy. It is the kind of supremacy which Vedānta attributes to Brahman. This ‘ut’ and Brahman are the same. Here, Rāmānuja’s interpretation has been followed for the word kāpyāsam. Śaṅkara gives another interpretation.
- Tasya, his
- ṛk ca sāma ca geṣṇau, the Ṛk and the Sāma are two singers [who sing his praise]
- tasmāt, this is why
- udgīthaḥ, he is [called] udgītha [the great God in whose praise songs are sung]
- tasmāt, this is why
- etasya hi gātā, the singers of it
- tu eva udgātā, are called udgātā, the musicians
- sāḥ eṣaḥ, he
- ye ca, who
- amuṣmāt parāñcaḥ, high above that [solar region]
- teṣām lokāḥ, those worlds
- ca iṣṭe, governs [decides]
- devakāmānām ca, the desires
note The word ut suggests supremacy. It is applied to that being who is the overlord of everything and also the source of everything—the earth, the- air, and fire; the Ṛk and Sāma; the gods and goddesses; and even the worlds above the sun. This ‘ut’ rules everything and is therefore identical with Brahman.
- Atha adhyātmam, now what relates to the body
- vāk eva ṛk, speech is Ṛk
- prāṇaḥ sāma, prāṇa is Sāma
- tat etat sāma, this Sāma [called prāṇa]
- etasyām ṛci adhyūdham, is based on Ṛk [speech]
- tasmāt, this is why
- ṛci adhyūḍham sāma gīyate, the Sāma is sung as based on the Ṛk
- vāk eva sā, speech is sā
- prāṇaḥ amaḥ, prāṇa is ama
- tat sāma, that [if joined together] is Sāma.
note The word prāṇa means both the vital breath and the organ by which we smell. Physically, the organ of speech is below the organ of smell. Similarly, Sāma is known to be based on the Ṛk. In view of their respective positions, Ṛk is equated with speech, and Sāma is equated with prāṇa.
- Cakṣuḥ eva ṛk, the eyes are like the Ṛg Veda
- ātmā sāma, the self [as seen in the eyes] is the Sāma
- tat etat sāma, this Sāma [called the ātmā]
- etasyām ṛci adhyūḍham, is based on Ṛk [i.e., on the eyes]
- tasmāt, this is why
- ṛci adhyūḍham sāma gīyate, the Sāma is sung as based on the Ṛk
- cakṣuḥ eva sā, the eyes are sā
- ātmā amaḥ, the self [the form reflected in the eyes] is ama
- tat sāma, that [if joined together] is Sāma.
note The ātmā, or self, here means the form which is reflected in the eyes. This is why the Upaniṣad says the eyes are the Ṛg Veda„ and the self is the Sāma Veda.
- Śrotram eva ṛk, the organ of hearing is the Ṛg Veda
- manaḥ sāma, the mind is the Sāma
- tat etat sāma, this Sāma [called the mind]
- etasyām ṛci adhyūḍham, is based on the Ṛk [the organ of hearing]
- tasmāt, this is why
- ṛci adhyūḍham sāma gīyate, the Sāma is sung as based on the Ṛk
- śrotram eva sā, the organ of hearing is sā
- manaḥ amaḥ, the mind is ama
- tat sāma, that [if joined together] is Sāma.
note The mind is said to be the Sāma because it controls the organ of hearing.
- Atha, then
- akṣṇaḥ yat etat śuklam bhaḥ, that which is the white glow in the eyes
- saḥ eva ṛk, that is the Ṛg Veda
- atha yat nīlam paraḥ kṛṣṇam, then that which is blue and very dark
- tat sāma, that is the Sāma
- tat etat sāma, this Sāma
- etasyām ṛci adhyūḍham, is based on the Ṛk
- tasmāt, this is why
- ṛci adhyūḍham sāma gīyate, the Sāma is sung as based on the Ṛk
- atha yat eva etat akṣṇaḥ śuklam bhāḥ, then this white glow in the eye
- sā eva sā, that is sā
- atha yat nīlam paraḥ kṛṣṇam, and that which is blue and very dark
- tat amaḥ, that is ama
- tat sāma, that [if joined together] is Sāma.
note The sun is the support of the power of vision, because without the sun we cannot see. Similarly, the deep blue glow, which is identified with the Sāma, is supported by the white glow, which is the Ṛk.
- Atha, now
- yaḥ eṣaḥ puruṣaḥ, that person who
- antarakṣiṇi, inside the eye
- dṛśyate, is seen
- saḥ, that person
- eva ṛk, is the Ṛk
- tat sāma, he is the Sāma
- tat uktham, he is the uktha [a part of the Sāma]
- tat yajuḥ, he is the Yajus [i.e., mantras ending with svāhā, svadhā, and vaṣaṭ]
- tat brahma, he is Brahman [i.e., the three Vedas]
- tasya etasya, of this person [seen in the eye]
- tat eva rūpam, that same form
- yat amuṣya rūpam, of the form of that person [in the sun, having golden hair, etc.]
- amuṣya, of that one [in the sun]
- yau geṣṇau, two singers [i.e., the Ṛk and the Sāma sing in his praise]
- tau geṣṇau, the same two singers [sing in praise of that one]
- yat nāma tat nāma, the name of this is the same as the name of that.
note The Lord who rules the solar region is seen also in the eye. That Lord stands for the Ṛk. He controls the organ of speech and other organs of the body, as well as the earth and other planets. They are all parts of him. The three Vedas—Ṛk, Sāma, and Yajus—are often referred to as Brahman, so Brahman and the Vedas are the same. Brahman includes everything. It is in the sun, in the human body, and in the planets. It is here referred to as the Lord called Hiraṇmaya, the Lord with a golden body, because he is luminous. The words uk and uktha, and also svāhā, svadhā, and vaṣat, are all used in different Vedas in praise of the same Lord who is in the sun (ādhidaivika) as well as in the eye (ādhyātmika).
- Saḥ eṣaḥ, the person [in the eye]
- etasmāt arvāñcaḥ ye ca lokāḥ, those worlds below him
- teṣām ca iṣṭe, rules over them
- manuṣya-kāmānām ca, as well as all human desires
- iti, this marks the limit
- tat, therefore
- ye ime, those people who
- vīṇāyām gāyanti, sing with the vīṇā
- te etam gāyanti, they in fact sing in his honour
- tasmāt, therefore
- te, they [the musicians]
- dhanasanayaḥ, become wealthy.
note That person in the eye is the Lord of the world below and also of the minds of human beings. When people sing accompanied by the vīṇā, that music is dedicated to him. And because they sing in honour of him, they acquire much wealth.
- Atha yaḥ, now he who
- etat evam vidvān, knows this in this way
- sāma gāyati, sings the Sāma
- saḥ, he [the musician]
- ubhau, to both [to Āditya, the sun, and to the person in the eye]
- gāyati, sings
- saḥ, he [the musician]
- amunā eva, as that [Āditya]
- ye ca amuṣmāt, from that [Āditya]
- parāñcaḥ, above
- lokāḥ, the planes
- tām devakāmān, the things the gods and goddesses wish for
- ca, also
- saḥ eṣaḥ, that musician
- āpnoti, attains [i.e., he finds a place in the solar orb, and he becomes divine].
note When a person knows the real identity of the deity to whom he is singing the Sāma—that is, when he knows he is singing the Sāma in praise of both Āditya, the sun, and the deity in the eye—what does he gain? He becomes one with Āditya and becomes the master of the worlds above Āditya. He is also entitled to the things that the gods and goddesses desire. He, in fact, becomes divine.
- Atha, now
- anena eva, by this [i.e., by the grace of the Lord in the eye]
- ye ca etasmāt arvāñcaḥ lokāḥ, those planes which are below [him—i.e., the person in the eye]
- tām ca, those [planes] also
- āpnoti manuṣyakāmān ca, he also attains things desired by human beings
- tasmāt, this is why
- u ha udgātā evamvit, the singer who knows this
- brūyāt, will say.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Kam, what
- te, for yon
- kāmam, desire
- āgāyāni iti, shall I sing for
- eṣaḥ hi eva, he is the person who
- kāmāgānasya iṣṭe, influences the fulfilment of the desires as expressed through songs
- yaḥ, the musician [udgātā]
- evam, this
- vidvān, having known
- sāma gāyati sāma gāyati, he sings the Sāma, he sings the Sāma. Iti saptamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the seventh section.
note The Lord in the eye controls everything—the earth and other worlds, those who live in them, and also the desires of those people. This is the purport of the verse.
- Trayaḥ ha udgīthe kuśalāḥ bābhūvuḥ, in early days there were three sages skilled in the udgītha
- śilakaḥ śālāvatyaḥ, Śilaka, the son of Śalāvat
- caikitāyanaḥ dālbhyaḥ, Caikitāyana, the son of Cikitāyana, of the Dalbha clan
- pravāhaṇaḥ jaivaliḥ, Pravāhaṇa, the son of Jīvala
- iti te ha ūcuḥ, they declared
- udgīthe vai kuśalāḥ smaḥ, we have mastered the art of the udgītha
- hanta udgīthe kathām vadāmaḥ iti, if you so wish we can discuss the udgītha.
note Śilaka, Caikitāyana Dālbhyah, and Pravāhaṇa—these three scholars had studied the udgītha very well, and in an assembly of scholars, they offered to discuss the subject, if the others so desired. It was not that they were trying to show off their knowledge. They just wanted the others to know that they were prepared to speak on this subject if the other scholars present so wished.
- Tathā iti, saying, ‘Let it be so’
- samupaviviśuḥ, they sat down
- saḥ pravāhaṇaḥ jaivaliḥ ha uvāca, Pravāhaṇa, the son of Jīvala, said
- bhagavantau agre vadatām, you two respected ones may kindly start the discussion
- vadatoḥ brāhmaṇayoḥ vācam śroṣyāmi iti, I will listen to the debate of you two brāhmins.
note The scholars agreed to the debate, and sat down. Lest this be construed as impertinence, Prince Pravāhaṇa said to the other two that he wanted to hear the two brāhmins debating. The fact that Pravāhaṇa addressed them as brāhmins, shows that he regarded himself as inferior, being a kṣatriya.
- Saḥ śilakaḥ śālāvatyaḥ ha caikitāyanam dālbhyam uvāca, Śilaka, the son of Śalāvat, said to Caikitāyana Dālbhya
- hanta tvā pṛcchāni iti, if you permit, I would like to ask you this question
- pṛccha iti ha uvāca, yes, ask, [replied Dālbhya].
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Sāmnaḥ kā gatiḥ iti, [Śilaka asked,] what is it that supports Sāma [i.e., the udgītha of the Sāma]
- svaraḥ iti ha uvāca, [Dālbhya] replied, it is the voice
- svarasya kā gatiḥ iti, what is the support of the voice
- prāṇaḥ iti ha uvāca, [Dālbhya] said, prāṇa [the vital breath]
- prāṇasya kā gatiḥ iti, what is the support of prāṇa [asked Śilaka]
- annam iti ha uvāca, [Dālbhya] replied, it is food
- annasya kā gatiḥ iti, what is the support of food
- āpaḥ iti ha uvāca, [Dālbhya] replied, water.
note Sāma here means the udgītha, the chanting. Dālbhya was asked what supported the chanting, and he replied, ‘The voice.’ Just as a pot is supported by the material of which it is made, which is earth, similarly, the chanting is supported by the voice. But what supports the voice? The vital breath. And the vital breath is supported by food. Similarly, food is supported by water, because it is from water that food grows.
- Apām kā gatiḥ iti, what is the support of water
- asau lokaḥ, that world [i.e., heaven]
- iti ha uvāca, said [Dālbhya]
- amuṣya lokasya kā gatiḥ iti, what is the support of that heaven
- svargam lokam na atinayet iti ha uvāca, one should not go beyond that heaven, replied [Dālbhya]
- svargam lokam, in that heavenly world
- vayam sāma abhisaṃsthāpayāmaḥ, we install Sāma
- svargasaṃstāvam hi sāma iti, this Sāma is worshipped as heaven.
note The next question Śilaka asked was about the support of water. To this Dālbhya replied, ‘That world—that is, heaven.’ Rain is said to come from heaven, so that is why heaven is called the support. But what supports heaven? When Śilaka put this question, Dālbhya replied that the question was irrelevant. There is nothing beyond heaven. Heaven is the ultimate. It is the real resort of Sāma. And this is why we say that Sāma is in heaven and why the scriptures show the same respect to heaven as to Sāma.
- Tam ha śilakaḥ śālāvatyaḥ caikitāyanam dālbhyam uvāca, Śilaka Śālāvatya said to Caikitāyana Dālbhya
- vai kila te dālbhya sāma, your Sāma is, O Dālbhya
- apratiṣṭhitam, without a base
- yaḥ tu etarhi brūyāt, if anyone says now
- te mūrdhā vipatiṣyati iti, your head will fall [if your statement about Sāma is found to be wrong]
- te mūrdhā vipatet iti, your head will surely fall.
note Śilaka said to Dālbhya that Sāma cannot have heaven as its support. He then quotes scriptures that what he says is true. He also adds that Dālbhya might be careful not to give the impression that he has any doubt about this. If he does, he will then risk being cursed by people who know the Sāma very well. They may curse him saying that his head will fall. Whether Dālbhya’s head will fall or not is a different matter. If you commit a mistake, you surely have to pay for it. The measure of your punishment, however, is decided by many factors.
- Hanta, if you permit
- aham etat bhagavataḥ vedāni iti, I would like to learn this from you, revered sir [said Dālbhya]
- viddhi iti ha uvāca, yes, learn from me, said [Śilaka]
- amuṣya lokasya kā gatiḥ iti, what is the support of that world [Dālbhya asked]
- ayam lokaḥ iti ha uvāca, this earth, said [Śilaka]
- asya lokasya kā gatiḥ iti, what is the support of this earth [Dālbhya asked]
- pratiṣṭhām lokam na atinayet iti ha uvāca, [in order to find the support of Sāma] don’t go beyond the earth, replied [Śilaka]
- pratiṣṭhām lokam vayam sāma abhisaṃsthāpayāmaḥ, we see Sāma based on this earth
- pratiṣṭhāsaṃstāvam hi sāma iti, Sāma is respected because it is based on this earth.
note Heaven is supported by the various Vedic rites performed on the earth, and this is why the earth is said here to be the support of heaven. To be more precise, however, the gods and goddesses in heaven depend upon what men and women on earth offer them through their Vedic rites. In this sense, the earth is the support of heaven. The earth is the support of everything, and it is also the base of the Sāma. This is why the earth is described as a kind of chariot (rathantara) in the Sāma Veda.
- Tam ha pravāhaṇaḥ jaivaliḥ uvāca, Pravāhaṇa Jaivali said to him
- antavat vai kila te sāma śālāvatya, O Śālāvatya [Śilaka], your Sāma is not without an end
- yaḥ tu, if anyone
- etarhi, now
- brūyāt, says
- mūrdhā te vipatiṣyati iti, your head will fall
- mūrdhā te vipatet, your head will fall off
- hanta aham bhagavataḥ vadāni iti, [Śilaka said,] if you please, O Lord, I would like to learn from you
- viddhi iti ha uvāca, yes, learn [from me, Pravāhaṇa replied]. Iti aṣṭamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the eighth section.
- Asya lokasya kā gatiḥ iti, [Śilaka Śālāvatya asked,] what is the end of this earth
- ākāśaḥ iti ha uvāca, [Pravāhaṇa] replied, space
- sarvāṇi ha vai imāni bhūtānī, all these beings
- ākāśāt eva samutpadyante, issue from space
- ākāśani prati astam yanti, they disappear into space
- ākāśaḥ hi eva ebhyaḥ jyāyān, Space is superior to these
- ākāśaḥ parāyaṇam, space is the highest goal.
note Space is described here as the source of everything. It is the source as well as the end of everything. In short, it is Paramātman, the Cosmic Self. Because space is the biggest thing visible, it can rightly claim to be the symbol of the Paramātman. All the other elements (air, fire, water, and earth) come from space and go back to space. But the scriptures also say that the Cosmic Self is the source and the end of the elements—indeed, of everything.
- Saḥ udgīthaḥ, that udgītha
- parovarīyān [paraḥ + varīyān], the best
- eṣaḥ, the Paramātman [i.e., the Supreme Self, earlier referred to as endless]
- saḥ eṣaḥ, the udgītha [which is also the Cosmic Self]
- anantaḥ, [is] endless
- yaḥ, the worshipper
- evam, as mentioned earlier
- vidvān, having known
- etat, this
- parovarīyāṃsam udgītham upāste, worships this udgītha knowing it as the best
- parovarīyasaḥ lokān jayati, he attains increasingly higher and higher worlds
- asya, the life of that worshipper
- parovarīyaḥ ha bhavati, also becomes higher and higher.
note It is important to realize that the udgītha is the Paramātman itself. When we know this we attain the highest—both materially and spiritually.
- Śaunakaḥ, the son of Śunaka
- atidhanvā, Atidhanvā [the sage having that name]
- tam, of that kind
- etam, this [udgītha]
- udaraśāṇḍilyāya, to Udaraśāṇḍilya [the disciple having that name]
- uktvā, having taught
- uvāca, he said
- ha yāvat, as long as
- te prajāyām, your progeny
- enam udgītham vediṣyante, will know this udgītha
- tāvat, so long
- [tāsām prajān, the life of those progeny]
- asmin loke, in this world
- jīvanam ebhyaḥ parovarīyaḥ ha bhaviṣyati, will grow better and better in quality judged by the standard of ordinary people.
note This udgītha is an invaluable asset which can uplift people both materially and spiritually for generations.
- Tathā, in the same way
- amuṣmin loke, in that other world
- lokaḥ iti, the place
- saḥ yaḥ, he who
- etat evam vidvān upāste, knows this and worships [the udgītha] accordingly
- parovarīyaḥ eva ha asya asmin loke jīvanam bhavati, his life in this world is the best possible
- tathā amuṣmin loke lokaḥ iti loke lokaḥ iti, his life in the other world [i.e., his life after death] is likewise the best, his life in the other world is likewise. Iti navamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the ninth section.
note The sage Atidhanvā told his disciple Udaraśāṇḍilya about the benefits of worshipping udgītha. He said that the benefits were not only material, but also spiritual. The worshipper is benefitted in this life as well as in his life after death. But the question may be raised, is this still valid today? What was true in earlier times may not be true now. Śaṅkara dispels this doubt. He says that even now people are enjoying the same benefits of worshipping the udgītha (that is, of chanting the Sāma Veda)—especially that part which is addressed to the Supreme Being.
- Maṭacīhateṣu, destroyed [hateṣu] by a thunderstorm [maṭacin]
- kuruṣu, in the land of the Kurus
- ātikyā jāyayā saha, with his child-wife
- uṣastiḥ, Uṣasti [a young man by that name]
- cākrāyaṇaḥ, the son of Cakra
- pradrāṇakaiḥ in great misery
- ibhyagrāme [ibhyaḥ, prosperous (i.e., where people owned elephants) + grāme, in a village], in a prosperous village
- uvāsa, lived.
note So far, much praise has been given to the udgītha, the purpose being to show the importance of the Sāma Veda. Now, prastāva and pratihāra are being introduced with the same object in view—that is, worship of the Sāma Veda. In order to introduce the subject, however, and to make it easy to understand, a story is given: At one time the land of the Kurus was hit by a very bad storm, which destroyed all the crops, and the country was in the grip of a famine. The son of Cakra, named Uṣasti, was starving and on the verge of death. He then moved with his child-wife to a prosperous village (that is, it was prosperous because people there owned elephants—ibha). According to Śaṅkara, the word maṭacī means ‘fire from thunder.’ According to the Śabdakalpadruma, it refers to a species of small red birds, and according to Ānandagiri it means ‘locusts.’ Another meaning is ‘hail.’
- Saḥ, he [Uṣasti]
- kulmāṣān, bad food grains
- khādantam, eating
- ibhyam, an elephant[-driver]
- bibhikṣe, begged
- ha tam uvāca, that [elephant-driver] said to him
- itaḥ, besides these [pulses]
- na anye vidyante, nothing further exists
- yat ye ca ime, that which [the pulses]
- me, my
- upanihitāḥ, thrown [into my eating bowl]
- [kim karomi, what should I do].
note The food itself was bad, and besides that, it was hardly enough for the elephant-driver, but there was nothing else he could give Uṣasti. By implication, he regretted his inability to help.
- Ha uvāca, [Uṣasti] said
- eteṣām, out of this
- me dehi iti, give me [some]
- tān, those [pulses]
- asmai, to him [i.e., to Uṣasti]
- pradadau, gave away
- hanta, [the elephant-driver said] here is
- anupānam iti, drinking water
- iti ha uvāca, [Uṣasti] said
- me ucchiṣṭam vai pītam syāt, [if I drink the water you are offering] I would be drinking unclean water [because someone else has drunk from it].
note Uṣasti must have been very hungry. Although the elephant-driver said he had no other food than what was in his bowl, Uṣasti begged for that anyway. The driver kindly obliged and then also offered him some water to drink. This, however, Uṣasti declined. He said he would then be drinking unclean (ucchiṣṭa) water—that is, water that someone else had already drunk from. But the driver raised the question: If Uṣasti could take the unclean (according to him) food, why could he not take the unclean water also?
- Svit ete api na ucchiṣṭāḥ iti, [the driver said, by the same token] aren’t these [pulses] also unclean
- ha uvāca, [Uṣasti] replied
- imān, these [pulses]
- akhādan, [if I] do not eat
- na vai ajīviṣyam iti, I will not survive
- udapānam, drinking water [on the other hand]
- me kāmaḥ iti, is left to me.
note Normally a person should not eat or drink, anything unclean (ucchiṣṭa)—that is, something which someone else has already eaten or drunk a part of. But when it is a question of survival, the scriptures condone such eating or drinking. Uṣasti was aware of the injunctions of the scriptures in this respect, and he knew they would permit his eating the unclean pulses, but not his drinking the unclean water. Clean water was easily available, so he would not have died if he refrained from drinking it. The scriptures take much pains to point out when eating or drinking unclean things is permissible. In this connection, the reader’s attention is drawn to sūtra 3.4.28 of the Brahma Sūtras.
- Ha khāditvā, having eaten
- atiśeṣān, whatever was left over
- saḥ jāyāyai ājahāra, he [Uṣasti] brought for his wife
- sā, she
- agre eva subhikṣā babhūva, had already obtained good alms
- tān, them [the pulses]
- pratigṛhya, she accepted
- nidadhau, [and] put them aside.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Saḥ, he [Uṣasti]
- prātaḥ, in the morning
- sañjihānaḥ, while getting up from bed
- ha uvāca, said [to his wife]
- yat bata, oh, if only
- annasya labhemahi, I could get some food
- labhemahi dhanamātrām, I could earn a little money
- asau, over there
- rājā, the king
- yakṣyate, is performing a sacrifice
- saḥ, he [the king]
- mā, me
- sarvaiḥ ārtvijyaiḥ, all the work of a ṛtvik [a priest who sings hymns or otherwise helps with the performance of a sacrifice]
- vṛṇīta iti, would have appointed.
note Uṣasti was a highly qualified ṛtvik, and he hoped the king would appoint him to assist at the sacrifice he was going to perform. If that hope of his materialized, he would then be able to earn some money. The snag was, however, that he was too weak from hunger to do anything. If he could only get something to eat!
- Jāyā tam uvāca, the wife said to him
- hanta pate, O dear husband
- ime eva kulmāṣāḥ iti, here are those pulses [you gave me]
- tān, them [the pulses]
- khāditvā, having eaten
- amum vitatam yajñam, that ensuing sacrifice
- eyāya, he went.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Tatra, there [at the site of the sacrifice]
- āstāve, at the place where hymns were being sung
- udgātṛn stosyamāṇān, those who were singing the hymns
- upa, near
- upaviveśa, he sat
- prastotāram, to him who was reciting the prastāva
- saḥ ha uvāca, he said.
note Prastāva, pratihāra, and udgītha—these are some of the Sāma mantras recited during a sacrifice. One who recites the prastāva is called the prastotā, one who recites the pratihāra is called the pratihartā, and one who recites the udgītha is called the udgātā.
- Prastotaḥ, O Prastotā
- yā devatā, that god who
- prastāvam anvāyattā, underlies this prastāva hymn
- tām avidvān, without knowing anything about him
- cet, if
- prastoṣyasi, you recite the prastāva
- te, your
- mūrdhā, head
- vipatiṣyati iti, will fall.
note Here the question arises whether or not an ignorant person is permitted to recite the scriptures. According to Śaṅkara, he is permitted, but if he commits errors, he will be liable to punishment. It may not cost him his head, but he may go after death to the world of his ancestors, rather than to the world of the gods. But perhaps he would have gone there anyway because of his other errors. As to the falling of the head, the curse need not be taken literally.
- Evam eva udgātāram uvāca, he then said the same thing to the udgātā [who sings the udgītha]
- udgātaḥ, O Udgātā
- yā devatā udgītham anvāyattā, the god who is related to the udgītha
- tām avidvān, without knowing anything about him
- cet udgāsyasi, if you sing about him
- te mūrdhā vipatiṣyati iti, your head will fall.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Evam eva pratihartāram uvāca, he said the same thing to the person who was singing the pratihāra
- pratihartaḥ, O Pratihartā
- yā devatā pratihāram anvāyattā, that god to whom your pratihāra relates
- tām avidvān, without knowing anything about him
- cet pratihariṣyasi, if you sing the pratihāra
- te mūrdhā vipatiṣyati iti, your head will fall
- te, they [the singers]
- ha samāratāḥ, stopped
- āsāñcakrire tūṣṇīm, [and] remained silent. Iti daśamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the tenth section.
note When Uṣasti spoke thus to the singers, they all stopped their hymns. They were afraid they would lose their heads because they did not know about the deities
- Atha, then
- yajamānaḥ, the person performing the sacrifice [the prince]
- ha enam uvāca, said to him [to Uṣasti]
- bhagavantam vai aham vividiṣāṇi iti, Sir, I want to know who you are
- iti ha uvāca, [Uṣasti] replied
- uṣastiḥ cākrāyaṇaḥ asmi, I am Uṣasti, the son of Cakra.
note Uṣasti’s reply suggests that he assumes the prince already knows him by name.
- Saḥ ha uvāca, he [the prince] said
- aham, I
- bhagavantam, you, revered sir
- vai ebhiḥ sarvaiḥ ārtvijyaiḥ, for all the work of the priests
- paryaiṣiṣam, looked for
- bhagavataḥ, you, sir
- avittyā, not being able to locate
- aham vai anyān avṛṣi, I chose others.
note The prince had obviously heard of Uṣasti’s reputation as a versatile scholar, and had wanted to give the responsibility of the sacrifice to him. As he could not find him, however, he had no option but to entrust the work to other brāhmins.
- Bhagavān, O Lord
- eva tu, for certain
- sarvaiḥ ārtvijyaiḥ me iti, [take on] all the work of the ṛtvik for me
- tathā iti, [Uṣasti said] let it be so
- atha tarhi, now therefore
- ete eva, these [priests already engaged by you]
- samatisṛṣṭāḥ, as instructed [by me]
- stuvatām, may recite
- tu ebhyaḥ yāvat dhanam dadyāḥ, but as much money as you are giving these [priests]
- tāvat, that much [money]
- mama dadyāḥ iti, you have to give me [also]
- yajamānaḥ, the performer of the sacrifice [the prince]
- iti ha uvāca, said
- tathā, it will be so.
note Uṣasti did not want the priests who had already been engaged to be dismissed. He only wanted them to follow his instructions about their recitations.
- Atha, then
- prastotā, the person reciting the prastāva
- ha enani upasasāda, came to him [i.e., to Uṣasti, and said]
- prastotaḥ yā devatā prastāvam anvāyattā, O Prastotā, that deity to whom the prastāva is related
- tām avidvān, without knowing anything about him
- cet prastoṣyasi, if you sing [about him]
- te mūrdhā vipatiṣyati iti, your head will fall
- bhagavān mā avocat, revered sir, you said to me
- katamā sā devatā iti, what is that deity?
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Prāṇa iti ha uvāca, [Uṣasti] said, it is prāṇa [the vital force]
- ha vai, for
- imāni sarvāṇi bhūtāni, all these beings [moving or unmoving]
- prāṇam eva, in prāṇa
- abhi, totally
- saṃviśanti, disappear [at the time of destruction]
- prāṇam abhi ujjihate, [and] out of prāṇa they appear [when they come into existence]
- sā eṣā devatā, that [prāṇa] is the deity
- prastāvam anvāyattā, the prastāva is addressed to
- cet, if
- tām, that [deity]
- avidvān, from ignorance
- prastoṣyaḥ, you had praised
- [then] tathā, like that
- mayā uktasya, in spite of being warned by me
- te mūrdhā vyapatiṣyat iti, your head would surely have fallen.
note The prastotā had immediately stopped singing and then had approached Uṣasti in a humble manner. This pleased Uṣasti, and he gladly proceeded to teach the brāhmin.
- Atha, then
- udgātā, the person reciting the udgītha
- ha enam upasasāda, came to him [i.e., to Uṣasti, and said]
- bhagavān mā avocat, revered sir, you said to me
- udgātaḥ yā devatā udgītham anvāyattā, O Udgātā, that deity to whom the udgītha is related
- tām avidvān, without knowing anything about him
- cet udgāsyasi, if you sing [about him]
- te mūrdhā vipatiṣyati iti, your head will fall
- katamā sā devatā iti, what is that deity?
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Ādityaḥ iti ha uvāca, [Uṣasti] said, it is āditya [the sun]
- ha vai for
- imāni sarvāṇi bhūtāni, all these beings [moving and unmoving]
- uccaiḥ santam ādityam gāyanti, sing in praise of āditya, who is high above
- sā eṣā devatā, that [āditya] is the deity
- udgītham anvāyattā, the udgītha is addressed to
- cet, if
- tām, that [deity]
- avidvān, from ignorance
- ’ udgāsyaḥ you had sung the udgītha
- [then] tathā, like that
- mayā uktasya, in spite of being warned by me
- te mūrdhā vyapatiṣyat iti, your head would surely have fallen.
note Earlier, prāṇa was described as the deity of the prastāva. The word prāṇa begins with pra, and prastāva also begins with pra. It is surmised that this is why prāṇa is the deity of the prastāva. By the same token, the udgītha is addressed to āditya, the sun, for āditya is urdhatva, which is ut (high), and udgītha is also ut. Therefore it is reasonable that the deity of the udgītha should be āditya.
- Atha, next
- pratihartā, the person reciting the pratihāra
- ha enam upasasāda, came to him [i.e., to Uṣasti, and said]
- bhagavān mā avocat, revered sir, you said to me
- pratihartaḥ yā devatā pratihāram anvāyattā, O Pratihartā, that deity to whom the pratihāra is related
- tām avidvān, without knowing anything about him
- cet pratihariṣyasi, if you sing the pratihāra
- te mūrdhā vipatiṣyati iti, your head will fall
- katamā sā devatā iti, what is that deity?
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Annam iti ha uvāca, [Uṣasti] said, it is anna [food]
- ha vai, for
- imāni sarvāṇi bhūtāni, all these beings
- annam eva pratiharamāṇāni jīvanti, support themselves by collecting food
- sā eṣā devatā, that [food] is the deity
- pratihāram anvāyattā, the pratihāra is addressed to
- cet, if
- tām, that [deity]
- avidvān, from ignorance
- pratyahariṣyaḥ, you had sung the pratihāra
- [then] tathā, like that
- mayā uktasya, in spite of being warned by me
- te mūrdhā vyapatiṣyat iti, your head would surely have fallen [the repetition is for the sake of emphasis]. Iti ekādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the eleventh section.
note Every living being has to support itself by collecting food. It involves much effort, but each one has to make that effort. Prati means ‘each and every.’ The deity is pratihāra because each and every being has to ‘collect’ (āharam) food for himself. In short, you worship prāṇa (the vital force) through the prastāva, āditya (the sun) through the udgītha, and anna (food) through the pratihāra. What is the result of this? The result is progress in every way.
- Atha ataḥ, since then
- tat ha, in this connection
- śauvaḥ udgīthaḥ, an udgītha [to food] sung by dogs [i.e., sages in the form of dogs]
- bakaḥ dālbhyaḥ, Baka, the son of Dalbha
- glāvaḥ maitreyaḥ vā, or Glāva, the son of Mitrā
- svādhyāyam udvavrāja, went to a quiet place to study the scriptures [i.e., the udgītha].
note Sometimes people are driven by hunger to eat ‘unclean’ food. The story of Uṣasti is an example. Here, in this section, a story is told of how some dogs avoid such a situation: There was a sage who was known as Baka on his father’s side and Glāva on his mother’s side. Wanting to learn an udgītha that would bring him food, he went to a quiet place to study the scriptures.
- Tasmai, [as a favour] to him
- śvā, a dog
- śvetāḥ, white
- prādurbabhūva, appeared
- tam, to him [i.e., to the white dog]
- anye śvānaḥ, other dogs
- upasametya, came
- ūcuḥ, [and] said
- annam, food
- naḥ, for us
- bhagavān, O Lord
- āgāyatu, please sing
- aśanāyāma vai iti, we are hungry [and want to eat].
note It would seem that some god or sage was pleased with Baka’s Vedic studies and as a favour, appeared before him as a white dog. Then, as if by coincidence, some other smaller dogs approached the white dog and told him they were very hungry and needed food. They asked the white dog to sing the appropriate Sāma so that they could get some food immediately. Very likely, these small dogs were also sages in disguise. Another explanation is also possible: The white dog represents prāṇa, and the smaller dogs are the sense organs controlled by prāṇa. Prāṇa is pleased when someone studies the scriptures. And if prāṇa is pleased, the sense organs are able to perceive their respective sense objects well. Like dogs, the sense organs are ‘hungry’ and enjoy perceiving. In order to express their appreciation of the scholar’s efforts, they appear before him as dogs.
- Tān, to them [the other dogs]
- ha uvāca, [the white dog] said
- iha eva, here
- prātaḥ, tomorrow morning
- mā upasamīyāta iti, all of you come to me
- bakaḥ dālbhyaḥ glāvaḥ maitreyaḥ vā, Baka, the son of Dalbha, who was also known as Glāva, the son of Mitrā
- pratipālayāñcakāra, waited [for the white dog]
- tat ha, there.
note The smaller dogs were obviously very hungry, so why didn’t the white dog sing immediately? He asked them to come back in the morning because the morning is the best time to sing the udgītha. In the afternoon the sun turns away from us. He is the one who gives us food, and if he has already begun to turn away, it is too late to ask him to give us anything. Morning is the time when we are face to face with him, and that is why morning is the best time to make a request of him. The sage Baka came early the next morning also and waited for the white dog.
- Te ha, they
- yathā era, just as
- idam, this
- bahiṣpavamānena, by the hymn called bahiṣpavamāna
- stoṣyamāṇaḥ, while reciting
- saṃrabdhāḥ, touching each other
- sarpanti, proceed
- iti evam āsasṛpuḥ, went about this way
- te ha, they
- samupaviśya, sitting down
- him, the word ‘him’
- cakruḥ, uttered.
note When sages sing the hymn baḥiṣpavamāna, they join their hands together, or otherwise touch each other, and then they move forward. The dogs did likewise. Each took the tail of the one in front in its mouth and started moving. Finally they sat down and uttered the sound him.
- Om adāma, Om, we will eat
- om pibāma, Om, we will drink
- om devaḥ varuṇaḥ prajāpatiḥ savitā, Om Deva [the shining one], Varuṇa, Prajāpati, Savitā
- annam iha āharat, bring food here
- annapate annam iha āhara āhara om, O Lord of food, bring food here, bring [food here], Om. Iti dvādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the twelfth section.
note This verse is also known as the hiṃkāra. The sun is the only thing that shines, so he is called here deva (that which shines). Varuṇa is the deity who gives rain, and Prajāpati protects all beings. Because Āditya, the sun, gives birth to all, he is known as Savitā. It is, in fact, Āditya who at one point gives us light, and at another gives us rain. It is because of him that there is food. This is why we ask him to bring us food (anna). As a mark of special respect, and also urgency, the request is repeated.
- Ayam vāva lokaḥ hāukāraḥ, this earth [is known by] the syllable ‘hāu’
- vāyuḥ hāikāraḥ, air by the syllable ‘hāi’
- candramā athakāraḥ, the moon by the syllable ‘atha’
- ātmā ihakāraḥ, the individual self by the syllable ‘iha’
- agniḥ īkāraḥ, fire by the syllable ‘ī’.
note So long the Upaniṣad has shown how Sāma can be worshipped through the udgītha. Now another way of worshipping Sāma is being shown—through stobhas. Stobhas are syllables such as hiṃ, hāu, hāi, and so forth, and they are all from the Sāma Veda. By themselves these syllables have no meaning. They are symbols representing objects, or they are used to fill in gaps in sentences. The idea here is that stobhas like hāu should be applied to the earth, fire, etc. A symbol has to have something in common with the object it represents. The Sāma Veda says, ‘This earth is also called rathantara.’ And in the Sāma, the stobha hāu stands for rathantara. Thus, it is reasonable to say that hāu stands for the earth. The stobha hāi occurs in the Sāma called Vāmadevya. The Vāmadevya Sāma is about the relationship of air with water. This is why vāyu (air) is represented by the symbol hāi. Why is the moon represented by atha? This world is sustained by food (anna), and the moon and food are identical. A stands for anna, and tha stands for stha in sthita, which means ‘sustained.’ A plus tha is atha. Thus, atha can rightly be said to represent the moon. Then the self is said to be iha, which means ‘here’ or ‘this,’ for the self is obvious to everyone. And the stobha ī represents fire, because wherever fire is referred to in the Sāma, the words end with ī. The syllable ī then is rightly used as a symbol of fire, and to meditate on this symbol is to meditate on fire.
- Ādityaiḥ Āditya, the sun
- ūkāraḥ, [is represented by] the stobha ‘ū’
- nihavaiḥ the welcoming address
- ekāraḥ, [is represented by] the stobha ‘e’
- viśvedevāḥ, the Viśvadevas [i.e., a class of gods]
- auhoyi-kāraḥ, [are represented by] the stobha ‘auhoyi’
- prajāpatiḥ, Prajāpati [the Lord of all beings]
- hiṃkāraḥ, [is represented by] the stobha ‘hiṃ’
- prāṇaḥ, prāṇa [the presiding deity of life]
- svaraḥ, [is represented by] the stobha ‘svara’
- annam, food
- yā, [is represented by] the stobha ‘yā’
- virāṭ Virāṭ
- vāk, [is represented by] the stobha ‘vāk’.
note Āditya, the sun, is far above in the sky. The letter ū suggests urdhvam, which means ‘above.’ So. in The word nihava means ‘welcome,’ which in Sanskrit is ehi. For this reason e stands for the nihava, the welcoming hymn. The stobha auhoyi stands for the Viśvadevas, the gods, for it occurs in the Sāma in honour of the Viśvadevas. The stobha hiṃ represents Prajāpati. No one knows the meaning of the word hiṃ; similarly, no one knows what Prajāpati, the Lord of all beings, is like. Prāṇa is represented by svara, because svara, the musical scale, is derived from prāṇa (the Lord of life, or the vital breath). Yā represents anna, food, for yāti (going) is possible because of food. The stobha vāk occurs in the Sāma called Vairāja or Virāṭa. Thus vāk stands for Virāṭ.
- Sañcaraḥ, variously interpreted
- aniruktaḥ, not clearly defined
- trayodaśaḥ stobhaḥ, the thirteenth stobha
- huṅkāraḥ, the syllable ‘huṃ’.
note Earlier, twelve stobhas were explained along with how they could be used for meditation. Those stobhas are: hāu, hāi, atha, iha, ī, ū, e, auhoyi, hiṃ, svara, yā, and vāk. Now the thirteenth stobha, huṃ, is being discussed. The Upaniṣad says here, however, that no one knows for certain what huṃ means, so people are free to meditate on it as they please.
- Yaḥ, that person who
- etām evam, this as stated earlier
- sāmnām, the Sāma with its stobhas
- upaniṣadam, the science of it
- veda, knows
- vācaḥ, of the organ of speech
- yaḥ dohaḥ, the essence
- doham, [that] essence
- vāk, the organ of speech
- asmai, to him [who knows]
- dugdhe, gives
- [saḥ, he]
- annavān, rich with food
- annādaḥ, a great eater of food
- bhavati, becomes. Iti trayodaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the thirteenth section. Iti chāndogya upaniṣadi prathamaḥ adhyāyaḥ, here ends the first chapter of the Chāndogya Upaniṣad.
note In the previous verses, mention was made of the stobhas. Now the benefit of meditating on them is being described. A person who knows the real import of those stobhas receives the best that the organ of speech has to offer.
- Samastasya khalu sāmnaḥ upāsanam, the worship of the Sāma as a whole [inclusive of all its parts]
- sādhu, [is] good
- yat khalu sādhu, whatever is good
- tat sāma iti ācakṣate, that is called sāma
- yat asādhu, whatever is bad
- tat asāma iti, that is asāma.
note Much has been said already about the Sāma and the udgītha. And it has also been said that much good follows from their worship. Similarly, the Upaniṣad has discussed the stobhas and shown their importance. So long, the Sāma has been discussed in parts. Now it will be discussed as a whole. The point of this verse is to emphasize how beautiful it is to worship the Sāma. The Sāma is beautiful and to worship the Sāma is beautiful. The qualifying word used is sādhu. Sādhu means ‘good,’ ‘beautiful,’ ‘chaste,’ ‘elegant,’ and so on. It also means ‘honest,’ ‘morally sound,’ ‘beneficial,’ ‘perfect,’ and ‘above reproach.’ Anything opposed to sādhu is asāma.
- Tat uta āhuḥ api, this is why people say
- sāmnā, by virtue of sāma
- enam, a [high-placed] person
- upāgāt iti, someone got access to
- sādhunā, [they mean] by good conduct
- enam upāgāt iti eva, he got access to him
- tat āhuḥ, [similarly] this is what people say
- asāmnā, by virtue of asāma
- enam upāgāt iti, he got access to him
- asādhunā, [when they mean] by bad conduct
- enam upāgāt iti eva, he got access to him
- tat āhuḥ, this is what people say.
note The question is: What is good and what is bad? Suppose you have to meet a very distinguished person who is far above you in status. It is very difficult to meet that person, but without doing anything wrong you are, somehow or other, able to meet him. This is called sādhu—fair, honest, good, beautiful, decent, elegant. The opposite of this is asādhu—bad, ugly, dishonest, condemnable.
- Atha uta api, then also
- āhuḥ, [people] say
- naḥ bata sāma iti, it is sāma for us
- yat sādhu bhavati, that which is good
- sādhu bata id eva tat āhuḥ, the words mean that what is good has happened
- naḥ bata asāma iti, [similarly, people say] it is asāma for us
- yat asādhu bhavati, that which is bad
- asādhu bata id eva tat āhuḥ, they mean to say that what is bad has happened.
note The words sādhu and sāma are synonymous. When people say, ‘We have had something sāma happen,’ they mean that they have had something sādhu happen. Both the words mean the same thing: good, beautiful, fair, and so on.
- Saḥ yaḥ, whoever
- etat, this [Sāma]
- evam vidvān, knows in this way
- sādhu sāma iti upāste, [and] worships Sāma as ‘sādhu’
- enam, to this worshipper
- sādhavaḥ dharmāḥ, the good qualities that are associated with a perfect [sādhu] person
- abhyāśaḥ ha, quickly
- yat āgaccheyuḥ ca, come
- upa ca nameyuḥ, and are a source of satisfaction. Iti prathamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the first section.
note First and foremost, a person should know the good qualities of the Sāma. But that is not enough. He should also worship the Sāma along with those good qualities. Then those qualities will soon manifest themselves in him, and they will eventually become a great source of satisfaction too.
- Pañcavidham sāma upāsīta, one should worship the Sāma in a fivefold manner
- lokeṣu, as the worlds [such as the earth]
- hiṃkāraḥ, [for instance, thinking of] the syllable hiṃ
- pṛthivī, [as] the earth
- prastāvaḥ agniḥ, the prastāva as fire
- udgīthaḥ antarikṣam, the udgītha as the sky
- pratihāraḥ ādityaḥ, the pratihāra as the sun
- nidhanam dyauḥ, the nidhana as heaven
- ūrdhveṣu iti, which is up above.
note What is the meaning of sādhu? It may mean either dharma or Brahman. Both, however, mean the same thing, more or less. Those who worship Sāma should know that they are worshipping either of these two, and that they are worshipping something uplifting, something propitious (sādhu). When a person worships thus, he becomes what he is worshipping. He becomes a new person altogether. He is totally transformed. But where is a person to find the Sāma? This Sāma is everywhere, in everything—in the earth, in fire, in the sky, in the sun, and in heaven. But since you cannot approach all of these, you can worship them through their symbols. In this verse, five symbols have been mentioned, which can be used for worship: hiṃkāra, prastāva, udgītha, pratihāra, and nidhana. This fivefold worship of Sāma is being recommended here for everyone.
- Atha, next
- āvṛtteṣu, from the highest [world] to the lowest
- dyauḥ hiṃkāraḥ, the heaven is the syllable hiṃ
- ādityaḥ prastāvaḥ, the sun is the prastāva
- antarikṣam udgīthaḥ, the sky is the udgītha
- agniḥ pratihāraḥ, fire is the pratihāra
- pṛthivī nidhanam, the earth is nidhana.
note As Sāma is everywhere, it is also in the five worlds most familiar to us. Starting from the top, these five worlds are dyauḥ (heaven), āditya (the sun), antarikṣa (the sky), agni (fire), and pṛthivī (the earth). To meditate on Sāma in these worlds, then, we can use the five symbols, which are respectively: hiṃkāra, prastāva, udgītha, pratihāra, and nidhana. When we use the term symbol, we understand that there is always a connection between the symbol and the thing symbolized. In this case, hiṃkāra is the first among the symbols, and heaven is the highest among the worlds. This is why hiṃkāra stands for heaven. Prastāva stands for the sun, for when the sun rises everyone gets ready to work. The word prastāva means ‘getting ready.’ The sky is gagana. It begins with ga, and the word udgītha also contains ga. So udgītha stands for gagana, the sky. Pratihāra stands for fire, because fire makes people ‘scatter’ (pratiharim). The earth is nidhana (extinction), for all things fall from above and finally disappear on the earth.
- Yaḥ, he who
- etaṭ, this [Sāma]
- evam, as such [i.e., as good]
- vidvān, having known
- lokeṣu, the worlds [the earth, etc.]
- pañcavidham, fivefold [i.e., using hiṃ and the other four symbols]
- sāma upāste, worships the Sāma
- ūrdhvāḥ ca, going upwards
- āvṛttāḥ ca, and coming downwards
- lokāḥ ha asmai kalpante, the worlds are there for him to enjoy. Iti dvitīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the second section.
note What benefit do you derive from worshipping Sāma in the worlds? The benefit is that you have all the five worlds—from the lowest to the highest and from the highest to the lowest—for your enjoyment. This is because you know Sāma is the essence of everything in these worlds.
- Vṛṣṭau, in the rain
- pañcavidham sāma upāsīta, one can perform the fivefold Sāma worship
- purovātaḥ, the wind that starts before the rainfall
- hiṃkāraḥ, is hiṃkāra
- meghaḥ jāyate, the clouds that gather
- saḥ prastāvaḥ, that is the prastāva
- varṣati saḥ udgīthaḥ, [when] the rain falls that is the udgītha
- vidyotate, [when] the lightning flashes
- stanayati, [and] roars
- saḥ pratihāra, that is the pratihāra.
note The syllable hiṃ indicates the beginning of something. When the wind starts blowing hard, we know that it will soon rain, so that is hiṃkāra. Then, when the clouds start gathering, that is the prastāva, for it means that rain is just about to start. Soon the rain follows. That is the udgītha, for the udgītha is always welcome. It is a blessing. The clouds produce lightning, and lightning is accompanied by thunder. That is the pratihāra, for the pratihāra is that which ‘scatters,’ or ‘spreads out,’ or is ‘extensive.’
- Udgṛhṇāti tat nidhanam, the end of the rainfall is the nidhana [literally, ‘the end’]
- varṣati, it pours
- ha asmai, for him [i.e., for the worshipper]
- varṣayati, he causes rain to fall
- ha yaḥ etat evam vidvān, he who, knowing all this as such
- vṛṣṭau, in the rain
- pañcavidham sāma upāste, performs the fivefold Sāma worship. Iti tṛtīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the third section.
- Sarvāsu apsu, in all kinds of water
- pañcavidham sāma upāsīta, a person should perform the fivefold Sāma worship
- meghaḥ yat saṃplavate, the clouds which join together and consolidate
- saḥ hiṃkāraḥ, that is hiṃkāra
- yat varṣati, that which pours rain
- saḥ prastāvaḥ, that is the prastāva
- yāḥ prācyaḥ syandante, that [water, or river] which goes eastward
- saḥ udgīthaḥ, that is the udgītha
- yāḥ pratīcyaḥ, that which goes westward
- saḥ pratihāraḥ, that is the pratihāra
- samudraḥ nidhanam, the sea is the nidhana.
note The fivefold Sāma worship can be performed in all forms of water. For instance, when clouds come together to produce rain, that can be thought of as hiṃkāra, because the syllable hiṃ marks the beginning. And when rain starts falling, that is thought of as the prastāva, because the rain is ‘ready’ to scatter in all directions. (This ‘readiness’ is prastāva.) The water, or river, that flows eastward (the Ganges, for instance) is called the udgītha, because both represent excellence. The water flowing westward (pratīcya) is the pratihāra, because of the prefix prāti being common to both. The sea is the nidhana, because when the water flows into the sea it loses its separate identity, which is ‘death’ (nidhana).
- Yaḥ, he who
- evam, as mentioned
- etat, this [Sāma]
- vidvān, having known
- sarvāsu apsu, in all forms of water
- pañcavidham sāma upāste, performs the fivefold worship of Sāma
- [saḥ, that worshipper]
- apsu, in water
- na ha praiti, does not die [unless he wants to]
- apsumān bhavati, he has much water at his disposal. Iti caturthaḥ khaṇḥaḥ, here ends the fourth section.
note A person who performs this Sāma worship, taking water as the object of worship, will never be drowned unless he himself seeks his death that way. Also, he may be so lucky about water that he will even get it in a desert.
- Ṛtuṣu, in the seasons [spring, etc.]
- pañcavidham sāma upāsīta, one should perform the fivefold Sāma worship
- vasantaḥ hiṃkāraḥ, spring is hiṃkāra
- grīṣmaḥ prastāvaḥ, summer is the prastāva
- varṣāḥ udgīthaḥ, the rainy season is the udgītha
- śarat pratihāraḥ, autumn
note Spring is the first among the seasons, just as hiṃkāra is the first among the Sāma stobhas. Summer is the prastāva, because in summer people ‘get ready’ to harvest. Then, the rainy season is very important for crops, just as the udgītha is important. Autumn is thought of as pratihāra, for that is the time when the old and the sick start being ‘taken away.’ Finally, winter is the nidhana, for that is the time when many people die.
- Yaḥ, he who
- etat evam vidvān, having known this [Sāma] as above
- ṛtuṣu, in the seasons
- pañcavi- dham sāma upāste, performs this fivefold Sāma worship
- asmai, to him
- ṛtavaḥ kalpante, the seasons come for his enjoyment
- ha ṛtumān bhavati, and he also gets the pleasant things of those seasons for his enjoyment. Iti pañcamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the fifth section.
note The change of seasons does not bother such a worshipper. Each of them is pleasant to hiṃ, and the best things that each of them has are easily available to him.
- Paśuṣu, in animals
- pañcavidham sāma upāsīta, one can perform the fivefold Sāma worship
- ajāḥ, goats
- hiṃkāraḥ, are the syllable hiṃ
- avayaḥ prastāvaḥ, sheep are the prastāva
- gāvaḥ udgīthaḥ, cows are the udgītha
- aśvāḥ pratihāraḥ, horses are the pratihāra
- puruṣaḥ nidhanam, a human being is the nidhana.
note Goats are the most common of these animals, and they are also the most widely used in sacrifices. This is why they are given the first place as hiṃkāra. Ajā, goats, and avi, sheep, are often seen together, and they are very similar. So also, hiṃkāra and the prastāva are often together. This is why avi, sheep, are said to be the prastāva. Cows are the udgītha because they are superior to other animals, as the udgītha is superior. Then horses ‘carry’ (pratiharaṇa) people, so they are the pratihāra. And as animals ‘depend’ entirely upon human beings, so human beings are their nidhana (here, nidhana means ‘support’).
- Yaḥ, he who
- etat evam vidvān, having known this [Sāma] in this way
- paśuṣu pañcavidham sāma upāste, performs the fivefold Sāma worship in animals
- asya paśavaḥ bhavanti ha, he has many animals [for his enjoyment]
- paśumān bhavati, he acquires a large number of animals [for his personal wealth]. Iti ṣaṣṭhaḥ khaṇḍaiḥ here ends the sixth section.
- Prāṇeṣu pañcavidham sāma upāsīta, one should perform the fivefold worship of Sāma in all forms of prāṇa, the vital breath [or, the organs]
- parovarīyaḥ, in an increasingly better way
- prāṇaḥ hiṃkāraḥ, prāṇa [or, the organ of smell] is hiṃkāra
- vāk prastāvaḥ, the organ of speech is the prastāva
- cakṣuḥ udgīthaḥ, the eyes are the udgītha
- śrotram pratihāraḥ, the ears are the pratihāra
- manaḥ nidhanam, the mind is the nidhana
- etāni parovarīyāṃsi vai, all these should be worshipped, each more than the one before.
note The first prāṇa is the organ of smelling. This may be regarded as hiṃkāra. Then the organ of speech may be regarded as the prastāva, for through speech we propose (prastāva) to do something. The organ of speech is superior to the organ of smelling because we express our thoughts through speech. The eyes are better than the organ of speech, because through the eyes we can express even more than what we can through speech, so the eyes are the udgītha. The ears are the pratihāra, and they are superior to the eyes because the ears can hear more than the eyes can see. The mind is the nidhana, and it is superior to all other organs. Whatever the other organs collect is all stored in the mind. Also the mind can grasp things that no other organ can perceive.
- Yaḥ, he who
- etat evam vidvān, having known this thus
- prāṇeṣu, in the organs
- pañcavidham sāma upāste, performs the fivefold Sāma worship
- parovarīyaḥ, in an increasingly higher order
- asya, his [life]
- parovarīyaḥ ha bhavati, becomes increasingly more excellent
- parovarīyasaḥ ha lokān jāyati, he also attains increasingly higher worlds
- iti tu pañcavidhasya, this is the benefit of the fivefold [Sāma worship]. Iti saptamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the seventh section.
note Here much attention has been given to the fivefold Sāma worship. This is only to prepare the worshipper for the next step, in which he will be asked to perform the sevenfold Sāma worship. It would be quite all right, however, if he bypasses the fivefold worship and goes straight to the sevenfold worship.
- Atha, next
- saptavidhasya, [a discussion] on the sevenfold [Sāma worship]
- saptavidham sāma upāsīta, one should perform the sevenfold worship of Sāma
- vāci, in speech
- yāt kiṃca vācaḥ huṃ iti, in whatever speech occurs the syllable ‘huṃ’
- saḥ hiṃkāraḥ, that is the syllable ‘hiṃ’
- yat pra iti, where the syllable ‘pra’ occurs
- saḥ prastāvaḥ, that is the prastāva
- yat ā iti, where ‘ā’ occurs
- saḥ ādiḥ, that is to be taken for ādi [the beginning].
note The fivefold Sāma worship has been discussed. Now The first meditation is on speech. Sometimes you may come across the sound huṃ in speech. This sound is to be thought of as hiṃkāra, because the letter h is common in both. Then, when you come across the sound pra, that is to be thought of as the prastāva. The sound ā in speech is to be thought of as ādi. But what is ādi? Ādi is that with which you begin something. It is Om, for everything in the Vedas starts with Om.
- Yat ut iti, where there is the sound ‘ut’
- saḥ udgīthaḥ, that is the udgītha
- yat prati iti, where there is the sound ‘prati’
- saḥ pratihāraḥ, that is the pratihāra
- yat upa iti, where there is the sound ‘upa’
- saḥ upadravaḥ, that is the upadrava [upadrava is anything in praise of the Sāma]
- yat ni iti, where there is the syllable ‘ni’
- tat nidhanam, that is the nidhana.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Yaḥ, the person who
- etat evam vidvān, having known this [about the Sāma]
- vāci, in speech
- saptavidham sāma upāste, performs the sevenfold Sāma worship
- asmai, to him [i.e., to the worshipper]
- vāk, speech
- doham, milk [i.e., a good, precious gift]
- yaḥ vācaḥ dohaḥ, which is the essence of the words
- dugdhe, presents
- annavān annādaḥ bhavati, he has plenty of food and he eats it [thereby becoming radiant]. Iti aṣṭamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the eighth section.
- Atha, next
- khalu, for certain
- amum ādityam, the sun over there
- saptavidham sāma upāsīta, worship as the sevenfold Sāma
- sarvadā samaḥ, [the sun is] always the same
- tena, therefore
- sāma, [the sun is] Sāma
- mām prati mām prati, [for instance, ‘It is looking] at me, [it is looking] at me’
- iti, in this way [it makes everyone think]
- sarveṇa samaḥ, it is the same to all
- tena, for this reason
- sāma, [the sun is called] Sāma.
note The question is, how can the sun be identified with the Sāma? The sun is always the same [i.e., sama], for it never changes. This is where the sun and the Sāma are the same. Again, when we look at the sun, we all think it is turned towards us. Similarly, the Sāma is also the same for everyone.
- Tasmin, on that [i.e., the sun]
- imāni sarvāṇi bhūtāni, all these beings
- anvāyattāni, are dependent
- iti vidyāt, one should know this
- tasya, of that [sun]
- yat, the way [it looks then]
- purodayāt, before it rises
- saḥ, that [form]
- hiṃkāraḥ, is hiṃkāra
- paśavaḥ, the animals
- tat asya anvāyattāḥ, are dependent on that [form] of it [i.e., of the sun as Sāma]
- tasmāt, this is why
- te, they
- hiṃ kurvanti, make the sound hiṃ
- hiṃkārabhājinaḥ hi etasya sāmnaḥ, they share in the hiṃkāra of the Sāma.
note As the sun rises, it has a very pleasant and favourable look. This is called hiṃkāra. It is an expression of love and adoration for the Sāma. The animals are devoted to this hiṃkāra, for they also make the sound hiṃ as the sun rises. This is how they pay their tribute to the hiṃkāra of the Sāma.
- Athā, next
- yatprathamodite [i.e., prathama + udite], that [form] which [the sun has] when it first rises
- saḥ prastāvaḥ, that is the prastāva
- manuṣyāḥ, all human beings
- tat asya anvāyattāḥ, are charmed by that [form] of it [i.e., of the sun, which is the Sāma]
- tasmāt, this is why
- te, they
- prastutikāmāḥ, wanting praise
- praśaṃsākāmāḥ, wanting adoration
- prastāvabhājinaḥ hi etasya sāmnaḥ, they join in the prastāva of the Sāma.
note The beauty that the sun has as it rises in the morning is the Sāma prastāva addressed to the sun god (Āditya). Human beings are under the spell of this beauty. And as they have the habit of praising and adoring the prastāva of the Sāma, they also desire praise and adoration for themselves. Praise means the good words you say about a person in his presence, and adoration means the good thoughts you cherish in your mind about that person.
- Atha, next
- yat, that
- saṅgavavelāyām, in the morning [i.e., after sunrise, when the sunlight has spread far and wide]
- saḥ ādiḥ, that is the ādi [of the Sāma worship]
- vayāṃsi, birds
- tat asya, that form of the sun [at that time]
- anvāyattāni, makes them feel secure
- tasmāt, this is why
- tāni, they [the birds]
- anārambaṇāni, without any support
- ātmānam, their own bodies
- ādāya,
note The sight of the sun after sunrise fascinates the birds. The form of the sun at this time is the ādi (or Om) of the Sāma, and the birds feel they are a part of this ādi. They feel secure. Though they have no support, they are able to fly about in the sky freely. It is as if they are joining in the ādi hymn offered to the Sāma. As the birds fly, they depend on their own ‘self’ (ātman). Because the words ātman and ādi have the common ā, the birds feel drawn towards the ādi.
- Atha, next
- yat, that
- samprati madhyandine, precisely at noon
- saḥ udgīthaḥ, that [form of the sun] is the udgītha
- devāḥ, the gods and goddesses
- tat asya, that form of the sun [at that time]
- anvāyattāni, are part of
- tasmāt, therefore
- prājāpatyānām, among all of Prajāpati’s children
- te, they [the gods and goddesses]
- sattamāḥ, are deemed the best
- hi, because
- etasya sāmnaḥ udgīthabhājinaḥ, they join in the udgītha of the Sāma.
note At midday the sun is at its brightest, and its form suggests that it is offering an udgītha. The gods and goddesses are devoted to the sun at this time, so they join in the offering of the udgītha. This is why they are the dearest to Prajāpati of all his children.
- Atha, next
- yat, that
- ūrdhvam madhyandināt, after midday
- prāk aparāhṇāt, before afternoon
- saḥ pratihāra, that is the pratihāra
- garbhāḥ, the foetuses in the womb
- tat asya, that [form] of [the sun]
- anvāyattāḥ are attached to
- tasmāt, that is why
- te, those [foetuses]
- pratihṛtāḥ, are held up
- na avapadyante, [and] do not drop down
- hi, for that reason
- etasya sāmnaḥ pratihārabhājinaḥ, they are entitled to share in the pratihāra of the Sāma.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Atha, next
- yat, that
- ūrdhvam aparāhṇāt, as the afternoon begins
- prāk astamayāt, before sunset
- saḥ upadravaḥ, that is the upadrava
- āraṇyāḥ, wild animals
- tat asya, that [form] of [the sun]
- anvāyattāḥ, are attached to
- tasmāt, that is why
- te, those [wild animals]
- puruṣam, a human being
- dṛṣṭvā, seeing
- kakṣam, into their lair [or, the forest]
- śvabhram, a hole
- upadravanti, quickly run to
- hi, for this reason
- etasya sāmnaḥ upadravabhājinaḥ, they join in the upadrava offered to the Sāma.
note In the later part of the afternoon, the animals are able to find food to sustain themselves, and they can also watch out for human beings. If they see one, they hurry back to the forest or to any place where they feel safe. Their going away in haste (upadruta) suggests that they worship the upadrava (i.e., ‘going back’) of the Sāma.
- Atha, next
- yat, that
- prathamāstamite [he., prathama + astamite], just as the sun sets
- tat nidhanam, that is the nidhana
- pitaraḥ, the ancestors
- tat asya, that [form] of [the sun]
- anvāyattāḥ, are attached to
- tasmāt, therefore
- tān, them
- nidadhati, one places on straws [or, one places offerings to the ancestors on straws while performing special rites in their honour]
- hi, for this reason
- etasya sāmnaḥ nidhanabhājinaḥ, they participate in the nidhana in honour of the Sāma
- khalu amum ādityam saptavidham sāma upāste, this is how the sun is offered the sevenfold Sāma worship. Iti navamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the ninth section.
note Because the ancestors love the form of the sun as it sets, people honour them at that time of the day by placing offerings to them on straw. And while doing so, they sing the nidhana hymn of the Sāma. If a person performs the sevenfold Sāma worship with the feeling that he is worshipping the sun this way, he becomes one with the sun.
- Atha, next [i.e., after worshipping the sun as the Sāma]
- khalu, for certain
- ātma-sammitam, with an equal number of parts [i.e., syllables]
- atimṛtyu, that which overcomes death
- saptavidham sāma upāsīta, one should perform the sevenfold Sāma worship
- hiṃkāraḥ, the word hiṃkāra
- iti tryakṣaram, is three-syllabled
- prastāvaḥ, the word prastāva
- iti tryakṣaram, is [also] three-syllabled
- tat samam, therefore they [hiṃkāra and prastāva] are equal.
note Śaṅkara says that the sun divides time into units. It therefore distinguishes between life and death, and it is death itself. Is there any way of overcoming death? Yes, it can be overcome by worshipping the Sāma, and that is why these instructions are being given here.
- Ādiḥ iti dvi-akṣaram, the word ādi is two-syllabled
- pratihāraḥ iti catuḥ-akṣaram, the word pratihāra is four-syllabled
- tataḥ, from that [i.e., from the word pratihāra]
- ekam, [take away] one [syllable]
- iha, [and add] here [to the word ādi]
- tat samam, that makes them equal [both three-syllabled].
note Om is the ādi of the sevenfold Sāma. It is ādi (the beginning) because a person begins singing the Sāma with Om.
- Udgīthaḥ iti tri-akṣaram, the word udgītha is three-syllabled
- upadravaḥ iti cataḥ-akṣaram, the word upadrava is four-syllabled
- tribhiḥ tribhiḥ samam bhavati, if they are taken as three-syllabled they become the same
- akṣaram atiśiṣyate, one syllable becomes superfluous
- tri-akṣaram tat samam, taken as three-syllabled they become identical.
note The syllable va, if taken away, makes no difference when a person recites the hymn.
- Nidhanam iti tri-akṣaram, the word nidhana is three-syllabled
- tat samam eva bhavati, that makes it the same [as the other three-syllabled words forming parts of the Sāma]
- tāni ha vai etāni, all these together constitute
- dvāviṃśatiḥ akṣarāṇi, twenty-two syllables.
note There are seven ways of worshipping the Sāma: through hiṃkāra, prastāva, ādi, pratihāra, udgītha, upadrava, and nidhana. Taken together these words have twenty-two syllables. Taken separately each of them may be treated as three-syllabled and recited accordingly. They are therefore all equal for purposes of the Sāma worship.
- Ekaviṃśatyā, by twenty-one [syllables]
- ādityam āpnoti, one attains union with the sun [because the sun marks the end of everything, and it is therefore death]
- ekaviṃśaḥ vai, [the sun is] the twenty-first [after the twelve months, the five seasons, and the three worlds]
- itaḥ, from this [world]
- asau ādityaḥ, the sun over there
- dvāviṃśena, by [knowing] the twenty-second [syllable]
- ādityāt param jayati, one attains the next higher world from the sun
- tat nākam, that [place is] joyful
- tat viśokaṃ, that [place is] free from all suffering.
note The Upaniṣad says that if you worship Sāma with these twenty-one syllables, you attain the sun, which is the same as death. But how is the number significant? It is significant because the sun occupies the twenty-first position after the things that intervene between the earth and the sun. According to the Vedas those things are the twelve months, the five seasons, and the three worlds. But if you worship the Sāma with twenty-two syllables, you then go beyond the sun. Where? To a place called Nāka, where there is only happiness and no suffering.
- Āpnoti ha ādityasya jayam, one wins the state of the sun
- paraḥ ha ādityajayāt asya jayaḥ bhavati, one wins a world even higher than the sun
- yaḥ, one who
- etat evam vidvān, knows this [Sāma] thus
- ātmasammitam, as oneself
- atimṛtyu saptavidham sāma upāste sāma upāste, performs the deathless sevenfold Sāma worship [the repetition marks the end of the section]. Iti daśamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the tenth section.
- Manaḥ hiṃkāraḥ, the mind is the hiṃkāra
- vāk prastāvaḥ, the organ of speech is the prastāva
- cakṣuḥ udgīthāḥ, the eyes are the udgītha
- śrotram pratihāraḥ, the ears are the pratihāra
- prāṇaḥ nidhanam, the vital breath is the nidhana
- etāt gāyatram, this Gāyatrī prayer
- prāṇeṣu protam, is rooted in the vital breath.
note So long the fivefold and the sevenfold Sāma worships have been discussed, but the names of those worships have not been mentioned. Gāyatra is the first among them. Corresponding to the Gāyatra is the hiṃkāra, with which the worship begins. Similarly, in any act of worship, the mind may be regarded as the hiṃkāra, for it is the mind that must act first before all the other organs. Next to the mind is the organ of speech. A person first thinks and then speaks out his intentions. The organ of speech is therefore the prastāva. The eyes are the udgītha because of their importance. The ears are the pratihāra, for you can ‘turn away from’ things you don’t want to hear. Prāṇa, the vital breath, is the nidhana, for when you have suṣupti, dreamless sleep, all the organs merge into the vital breath. The Gāyatrī is worshipped as the vital breath. This is why the Sāma called Gāyatra is. said to be rooted in the vital breath.
- Saḥ yaḥ, he who
- evam, this way
- etat gāyatram, this Gāyatra Sāma
- prāṇeṣu protam, rooted in the prāṇas
- veda, knows
- prāṇī, with life
- bhavati, is endowed
- sarvam āyuḥ, the full span of life
- eti, attains
- jyok jīvati, a bright [life]
- mahān prajayā, great in progeny
- paśubhiḥ, [and] animals
- bhavati, becomes [rich with]
- mahān kīrtyā, with a good reputation
- mahāmanāḥ syāt, is noble in character
- tat vratam, that is the aim of his life. Iti ekādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the eleventh section.
note Whoever knows that the Sāma named Gāyatra is based on the prāṇas is truly alive—that is, all his organs are strong and healthy and he is never physically handicapped. The full span of a person’s life is said to be a hundred years. A person who worships the Sāma lives that long. And he lives a wonderful life, able to influence many people. He is respected as one of the greatest people in the world. He has many children and many domestic animals, but his sole aim in life is to have a large heart, without a trace of meanness in his mind.
- Abhimanthati, rubbing [one piece of wood against another to produce fire]
- saḥ hiṃkāraḥ, that is the hiṃkāra
- dhūmaḥ jāyate, the smoke it produces
- saḥ prastāvaḥ, that is the prastāva
- jvalati, the flames that appear
- saḥ udgīthaḥ, that is the udgītha
- aṅgārāḥ bhavanti, the charcoals that result
- saḥ pratihāraḥ, that is the pratihāra
- upaśāmyati, when the fire begins to go out
- tat nidhanam, that is the nidhana
- saṃśāmyati, when the fire is completely extinguished
- tat nidhanam, that [also] is the nidhana
- etat rathantaram, this [Sāma] called Rathantara
- agnau protam, is rooted in fire.
note The rubbing of two pieces of wood together to produce fire is the hiṃkāra, for that is the beginning of the fire. And the smoke that results is the prastāva, for both are likely to continue. When the fire bursts into flame, that is the udgītha, because when there are flames the oblations are offered into them for the gods and goddesses. This is why this part is superior and why the flames are called the udgītha. The charcoals that are formed are called the pratihāra, for the charcoals are collected for future use. Upaśām means the process of subsiding—that is, the fire begins to subside but does not quite go out. Then the word saṃśām means ‘completely extinguished.’ The fire is then dead, so it is like the nidhana (death). The Rathantara Sāma is said to be based on fire, for when fire is being produced by rubbing the two sticks, the Rathantara Sāma is recited.
- Saḥ yaḥ evam etat rathantaram agnau protam veda, he who knows that this Rathantara Sāma is rooted in fire
- brahmavarcasī, acquires the glow that Vedic knowledge gives
- annādaḥ bhavati, he enjoys eating food
- sarvam āyuḥ eti, he lives the full span of his life
- jyok jīvati, he lives a bright life
- mahān prajayā paśubhiḥ bhavati, he distinguishes himself by his children and by the animal wealth he acquires
- mahān kīrtyā, his reputation spreads far and wide
- tat vratam, his principle is
- na pratyak agnim ācāmet, never to
note By his moral character and his scholarship in the Vedas, he acquires a radiance about him. [The underlying thought in these two mantras is that everything a person does is spiritual. This includes even physical experiences.]
- test, remove me.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Udyan, the rising sun
- hiṃkāraḥ, [is] the hiṃkāra
- uditaḥ, the sun that has already risen
- prastāvaḥ, [is] the prastāva
- madhyandina, the midday sun
- udgīthaḥ, [is] the udgītha
- aparāhṇaḥ, the afternoon sun
- pratihāraḥ, [is] the pratihāra
- yat astam, that which is setting
- nidhanam, [is] the nidhana
- etat bṛhat,
note The rising sun is the hiṃkāra, for that is the time when we first see the sun. When the sun has risen it is the prastāva, for that is when people start performing their daily religious riteṣ and rituals. The midday sun is the udgītha, because that is the best time of the day. Then the afternoon sun is the pratihāra, because that is the time when cattle are driven back home. And the setting sun is the nidhana, for at night domestic animals are kept confined in their pens. This Bṛhat Sāma is based on the sun, because the sun is its presiding deity.
- Saḥ yaḥ evam etat bṛhat āditye protam veda, he who knows that the Sāma called Bṛhat is rooted in the sun
- tejasvi, is spirited
- annādaḥ bhavati, has a great appetite
- sarvam āyuḥ etḥ lives the full span of his life
- jyok jīvati, has a brilliant life
- mahān prajayā paśubhiḥ bhavati, becomes famous for his children and for his animal wealth
- mahān kīrtyā, is highly respected
- tapantam na nindet, he never uses a bad word against the hot sun
- tat vratam, that is his vow. Iti caturdaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the fourteenth section.
- Abhrāṇi, light clouds [bearing water]
- saṃplavante, when they consolidate
- saḥ hiṃkāraḥ, that is the hiṃkāra
- meghaḥ jāyate, when clouds likely to pour rain appear
- saḥ prastāvaḥ, that is the prastāva
- varṣati saḥ udgīthaḥ, when it starts raining that is the udgītha
- vidyotate, when lightning flashes
- stanayati, [and] thunder roars
- saḥ pratihāraḥ, that is the pratihāra
- ut gṛhṇāti, when everything is over
- tat nidhanam, that is the nidhana
- etat vairūpam, this [Sāma called] Vairūpa
- parjanye protam, is rooted in the clouds.
note The word abhra means a cloud which bears ap, water. A cloud that pours rain is called megha. The English word ‘cloud’ is actually in Sanskrit parjanya. Abhra, megha, parjanya—these different names all mean cloud, but indicate the cloud in a different state. This is why the cloud is described here as vairūpa, with different forms. It is the sun that produces the cloud, and this is why the Sāma is first worshipped as the sun and then as the cloud.
- Saḥ yaḥ evam etat vairūpam parjanye protam veda, he who knows that this [Sāma called] Vairūpa is rooted in the clouds
- virūpān ca surūpān ca paśūn avarundhe, he comes to possess a large variety of animals and beautiful animals also
- sarvam āyuḥ eti, he lives the full span of his life
- jyok jīvati, he has a brilliant life
- mahān prajayā paśubhiḥ bhavati, he becomes famous for his children and for his animal wealth
- mahān kīrtyā, he is renowned for his achievements
- varṣantam na nindet tat vratam, his vow is not to criticize the clouds that pour rain. Iti pañcadaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the fifteenth section.
note It is a characteristic of those who worship the Sāma that they never find fault with others. This is why they do not say anything bad about even the clouds that give rain.
- Vasantaḥ hiṃkāraḥ, spring is the hiṃkāra
- grīṣmaḥ prastāvaḥ, summer is the prastāva
- varṣāḥ udgīthaḥ, the rainy season is the udgītha
- śarat pratihāraḥ, autumn is the pratihāra
- hemantaḥ nidhanam, winter is the nidhana
- etat vairājam, this [Sāma called] Vairāja
- ṛtuṣu protam, is rooted in the seasons.
note The clouds determine the seasons. This is why the Sāma is first worshipped as the clouds and after that as the seasons.
- Saḥ yaḥ evani etat vairājam ṛtuṣu protam veda, he who knows that this [Sāma called] Vairāja is rooted in the seasons
- virājati, he lives
- prajayā paśubhiḥ, surrounded by his children and animals
- brahmavarcasena, he has the kind of radiance that is born of Vedic scholarship
- sarvam āyuḥ eti, he lives the full span of his life
- jyok jīvati, he lives a brilliant life
- mahān prajayā paśubhiḥ bhavati, he is known to be great for his children and animals
- mahān kīrtyā, he is famous for his deeds
- ṛtūn na nindet tat vratam, his vow is that he will never criticize the seasons. Iti ṣoḍhśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the sixteenth section.
note The person who knows that the Vairāja Sāma is rooted in the seasons becomes like the seasons himself. Each season has a beauty of its own. Similarly, this person has within him the beauty and grandeur of the good things he possesses, such as his wealth, good children, scholarship, and character. The rules of the Sāma forbid him from saying anything bad about the seasons, and he follows this.
- Pṛthivī hiṃkāraḥ, the earth is the hiṃkāra
- antarikṣam prastāvaḥ, the space between the earth and heaven is the prastāva
- dyauḥ udgīthaḥ, heaven is the udgītha
- diśaḥ pratihāraḥ, the quarters are the pratihāra
- samudraḥ nidhanam, the ocean is the nidhana
- etāḥ śakvaryaḥ lokeṣu protāḥ, these [the Sāma called] Śakvarī are rooted in the earth and other worlds.
note If the seasons come and go, as they ought to, then things on the earth and the other worlds remain in balance. This is why the Sāma is first worshipped as the seasons and then as the worlds. But the question is: Sāma is singular. Why then has a plural word, śakvarī, been used here for the Sāma? Doesn’t it imply that there are many Sāmas? No, the Sāma is always one and the same. There are not many Sāmas. The word śakvarī has a plural form, but it stands for the singular Sāma. Śaṅkara gives the example of the word revatī, which is similarly always used in the plural.
- Saḥ yaḥ evam etāḥ śakvaryaḥ lokeṣu protāḥ veda, he who knows that these [i.e., the Sāma] known as Śakvarī are rooted in the worlds
- lokī bhavati, goes to the best world
- sarvam āyuḥ eti, lives the full span of his life
- jyok jīvati, has a brilliant life
- mahān prajayā paśubhiḥ bhavati, is well known for his children and for his animal wealth
- mahān kīrtyā, is well known for his great deeds
- lokān na nindet tat vratam, his vow is that he will never criticize the worlds. Iti saptadaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the seventeenth section.
- Ajāḥ hiṃkāraḥ, goats are the hiṃkāra
- avayaḥ prastāvaḥ, sheep are the prastāva
- gāvaḥ udgītha, cows are the udgītha
- aśvāḥ pratihāraḥ, horses are the pratihāra
- puruṣaḥ nidhanam, a human being is the nidhana
- etāḥ revatyaḥ paśuṣu protāḥ, these [i.e., the Sāma known as] Revatī are established in animals.
note Animals are useful to all the worlds. That is why, after worshipping the Sāma as the worlds, the worship as animals is suggested. As in the previous section in which the word śakvarī is always used in the plural (as śakvaryaḥ), here also, the word revatī is always used in the plural (revatyaḥ).
- Saḥ yaḥ evam etaḥ revatyaḥ protāḥ veda, he who knows that these [i.e., the Sāma] called Revatī are rooted in animals
- paśumān bhavati, comes to possess many animals
- sarvam āyuḥ eti, lives the full span of his life
- jyok jīvati, has a brilliant life
- mahān prajayā paśubhiḥ bhavati, becomes a highly respected person because of his children and also his animal wealth
- mahān kīrtyā, becomes a truly great person for his great deeds
- paśūn na nindet tat vratam, he observes the vow of never saying anything bad about animals. Iti aṣṭādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the eighteenth section.
- Loma hiṃkāraḥ, hair is the hiṃkāra
- tvak prastāvaḥ, skin is the prastāva
- māṃsam udgīthaḥ, flesh is the udgītha
- asthi pratihāraḥ, bone is the pratihāra
- majjā nidhanam, marrow is the nidhana
- etat yajñāyajñīyam, this [Sāma called] Yajñāyajñīya
- aṅgeṣu protam, is spread all over the limbs of the body.
note We get much nourishment from animals to sustain our bodies. That is why, in the previous section, the Sāma has been worshipped in the animals, and now it is being worshipped in the various parts of the body. Hair is on top of the body, so it is given first place—the place given to the hiṃkāra when the Sāma is recited. Next to the hair is the skin. Similarly, next to the hiṃkāra is the prastāva. The flesh is the udgītha, for both are the most important part. Then the bones are the pratihāra, because after a body is cremated there will still be pieces of bone left, and these are ‘collected’ by the relatives. The marrow is the nidhana, for that is the end of everything.
- Saḥ yaḥ evam etat yajñāyajñīyam aṅgeṣu protam veda, he who knows that this Sāma called Yajñāyajñīya is located in the different parts of the body
- aṅgī bhavati, has a firm body
- na aṅgena vihūrchati, has no defect in his limbs or organs
- sarvam āyuḥ eti, he lives the full span of his life
- jyok jīvati, he has a brilliant life
- mahān prajayā paśubhiḥ bhavati, he becomes great in respect of his children and his animal wealth
- mahān kīrtyā, he becomes great because of his great deeds
- saṃvatsaram, for one whole year
- majjñaḥ, meat
- na aśnīyāt, will not eat
- majjñaḥ na aśnīyāt iti vā, or will not eat meat at all
- tat vratam, this is his vow. Iti ekonaviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the nineteenth section.
note ‘A firm body’ means a good, sound body with none of its organs or limbs defective. Even his nails and his hair will be normal. The word majjña, meat, is in the plural here. This implies that both fish and meat should be avoided.
- Agniḥ hiṃkāraḥ, fire is the hiṃkāra
- vāyuḥ prastāvaḥ, air is the prastāva
- ādityaḥ udgīthaḥ, the sun is the udgītha
- nakṣatrāṇi pratihāraḥ, the stars are the pratihāra
- candramāḥ nidhanam, the moon is the nidhana
- etat rājanam, this [Sāma called] Rājana
- devatāsu protam, is rooted in the gods and goddesses.
note In the previous section the Sāma was worshipped in the parts of the body. Now it is being worshipped in the deities—that is, in the forces of nature. Fire is the first among the forces of nature, so it is the hiṃkāra. Next to the hiṃkāra is the prastāva. Air is called the prastāva because it comes next after fire, and it is also infinite. The sun is the udgītha, for just as the udgītha is the best among the Sāma songs, so also the sun is the best among the forces of nature. The stars lie scattered, and as we locate them it seems that we are ‘collecting’ (pratihāra) them. That is why the stars are said to be the pratihāra. The moon is said to be the nidhana, because active people go to Candraloka, the world of the moon, after death. The Sāma called Rājana is rooted in the gods and goddesses, for the deities are by nature luminous (rājana).
- Saḥ yaḥ evam etat rājanam devatāsu protam veda, he who knows that this Sāma known as Rājana is established in the gods and goddesses [such as Agni (fire), Vāyu (air), etc.]
- etāsām eva devatānām salokatām gacchati, he shares with those gods and goddesses the same worlds
- sārṣṭitām, the same rights and privileges
- [vā] sāyujyam, [or] the same form
- sarvam āyuḥ eti, he lives the full span of his life
- jyok jīvati, he has a brilliant life
- mahān prajayā paśubhiḥ bhavati, he becomes great by virtue of his children and also his animal wealth
- mahān kīrtyā, he is great by his great deeds
- brāhmaṇān na nindet tat vratam, it is his vow that he will not speak ill of the brāhmins. Iti viṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the twentieth section.
note What does a person gain from worshipping the Sāma in such a way? He gets the right to live with the gods and goddesses in the same world, or to share the same rights and privileges with them, or to have the same form. It is not that he would get all these things. He would get any one of them. The scriptures say that the brāhmins themselves are the gods and goddesses. Obviously then one should not say anything derogatory about the brāhmins. Section Twenty-One
- Trayī vidyā hiṃkāraḥ, the three Vedas [the Ṛk, the Yajuḥ, and the Sāma] are the hiṃkāra
- trayaḥ ime lokāḥ, these three worlds [bhūḥ, bhuvaḥ, svaḥ]
- saḥ prastāvaḥ, [together] that is the prastāva
- agniḥ vāyuḥ ādityaḥ, fire, air, and the sun
- saḥ udgīthaḥ, [together] that is the udgītha
- nakṣatrāṇi vayāṃsi marīcayaḥ, the stars, the birds, and the rays
- saḥ pratihāraḥ, [together] that is the pratihāra
- sarpaḥ gandharvāḥ pitaraḥ, serpents, gandharvas [celestial musicians], and the ancestors
- tat nidhanam, [together] that is the nidhana
- etat sāma sarvasmin protam, this Sāma rests in everything.
note According to the scriptures the Ṛg Veda comes from fire, the Yajur Veda comes from air, and the Sāma Veda comes from the sun. In the previous section the worship of the Sāma as fire, air, etc., was discussed. Now the worship of the Sāma as the three Vedas is taken up. Knowledge of the three Vedas may be regarded as the hiṃkāra, for you have to use the hiṃkāra before you start doing any worship. After the hiṃkāra comes the prastāva. Similarly, after the three Vedas come the three worlds, so they are said to be the prastāva. Fire, air, and the sun are like the udgītha, for among all things they are of a higher order. The stars, the birds, and the rays come and go, so they are like the pratihāra. The serpents, the gandharvas, and The word Sāma does not refer to any specific Sāma. It refers to anything bearing that name. The word is meant according to the context, just as oblations are offered according to the deities for whom they are meant.
- Saḥ yaḥ evam etat sāma sarvasmin protam veda, he who knows that this Sāma resides in everything
- sarvam ha bhavati, he becomes everything.
note This is an example of how far the benefit of the knowledge of the Sāma can extend: If you know that the Sāma is everywhere and in everything, you become the supreme Lord of everything.
- Tat eṣaḥ ślokaḥ, here is a verse on the subject
- yāni pañcadhā, that [Sāma] which is divided into five parts [hiṃkāra, prastāva, udgītha, pratihāra, and nidhana]
- trīṇi trīṇi, each again divided into three parts [such as hiṃkāra representing the three Vedas]
- tebhyaḥ jyāyaḥ param anyat na asti, there is nothing higher than these.
note So long we have discussed the five forms of the Sāma: hiṃkāra, prastāva, udgītha, pratihāra, and nidhana. In the present verse the Upaniṣad says that each of these five can be divided further into three: hiṃkāra as the Ṛk, the Yajuḥ, and the Sāma; prastāva as the earth, the intermediate space (between the earth and heaven), and heaven; udgītha as fire, air, and the sun; pratihāra as the stars, the birds, and the rays; and nidhana as the snakes, the celestial musicians, and the ancestors. It is Sāma which is manifest in all of these fifteen
- Yaḥ tat veda, he who knows that [Sāma]
- saḥ veda sarvam, he knows all
- sarvāḥ diśaḥ, all the quarters
- balim, gifts
- asmai, for him
- haranti, bring
- sarvam asmi, I am all
- iti upāsīta, this is how he will meditate
- tat vratam tat vratam, this is his vow, this is his vow. Iti ekaviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the twenty-first section.
note Sāma is the inmost being of all, and he who knows it as such becomes like Sāma—that is, he becomes the inmost being of all, and he knows everything. People come from everywhere with gifts to show him their respect. ‘I am Sāma, the inmost being of all’—this is how Sāma is to be worshipped. One should constantly repeat this to oneself. In fact, it should be treated as a vow. Section Twenty-Two
- Vinardi, the voice called vinardi, which is deep, like that of a bull
- sāmnaḥ, for [singing] the Sāma
- vṛṇe iti, I pray for
- paśavyam, good for animals
- agneḥ, of the god of fire
- udgītha aniruktaḥ, the udgītha sung in the anirukta voice, which is not very distinct
- prajāpateḥ, of Prajāpati, the Lord of all
- niruktaḥ, the voice called nirukta, which is clear
- somasya, of the god Soma
- mṛdu ślakṣṇam, the voice called ślakṣṇa that is soft and soothing
- vāyoḥ, of the god Vāyu, air
- ślakṣṇam balavat, the voice called ślakṣṇa that is soothing yet powerful
- indrasya, of Indra
- krauñcam, the voice called krauñca, which is like that of the krauñca bird
- bṛhaspateḥ, of Bṛhaspati
- apadhvāntam, the voice called apadhvānta, which sounds like a broken metal pot
- varuṇasya, of the god Varuṇa
- tān sarvān era upaseveta, practise on all of them
- tu eva vāruṇam, except that of Varuṇa
- varjayet, one should avoid.
note When you sing the udgītha, be careful that you sing it in the right voice. The voice is important because it determines the benefit you derive from your singing. For instance, there is a type of voice that sounds like that of a bull. Agni, fire, is the presiding deity of this voice. If you sing the udgītha in this type of voice, it means you are singing for the good of the animals and you are also praying that you may have that kind of voice. Similarly, there is a type of voice called anirukta, which has Prajāpati as its presiding deity. Prajāpati, the Lord of all beings, has no form of his own. Similarly, he does not have a distinct voice. This is why it is called anirukta, indistinct. The voice of Soma, the moon, is nirukta, clear; that of Indra is powerful; and that of Bṛhaspati sounds like a krauñca, a bird similar to a crane. Varuṇa’s voice is the worst. It is like the sound of a broken brass vessel. All these voices can be used except that of Varuṇa.
- Āgāyet, one should sing [with the resolve]
- amṛtatvam devebhyaḥ āgāyāni iti, I will get immortality for the gods and goddesses by singing
- svadhām, offerings
- pitṛbhyaḥ, for the ancestors
- āśām manuṣyebhyaḥ, hope for humanity
- tṛṇodakam paśubhyaḥ, food and water for the animals
- svargam lokam, heavenly worlds
- yajamānāya, for those who perform sacrifices
- annam ātmane, food for myself
- āgāyāni iti, I shall win by singing thus
- etāni, all these
- manasā dhyāyan, thinking mentally
- apramattaḥ, without raising the voice too much
- stuvīta, one should sing.
note When you sing the Sāma, you should keep in mind the things you are singing for—such as immortality for the gods and goddesses, etc. But you must also take care that when you sing, your pronunciation and accents are correct, and that you do not miss any syllables.
- Sarve svarāḥ, all the vowels
- indrasya ātmānaḥ, are like the body [with its limbs] of Indra
- sarve ūṣmāṇaḥ, all the sibilants
- prajāpateḥ ātmānaḥ, are like the body [with its limbs] of Prajāpati
- sarve sparśāḥ, all the consonants, starting with ka
- mṛtyoḥ ātmānaḥ, are like the body [with all its limbs] of Death
- yadi upālabheta, if anyone criticizes
- tam, him [the udgātā, who is singing the Sāma]
- svareṣu, regarding his pronunciation of the vowels
- indram śaraṇam prapannaḥ abhūvam, [the udgātā will then say:] I took refuge in Indra [when I started singing the vowels]
- saḥ, he [Indra]
- tvā prativakṣyati iti, will give you the right reply
- enam brūyāt, say to him.
note The vowels are said to be Indra’s body, for when you start doing something, including even a recitation, you have to feel strong enough to do the job fully and correctly. And in order that you may feel that you have the requisite strength, you pray for Indra’s blessings, and you feel that he is transmitting his strength to you. You feel that the vowels you are using are his body, the sibilants are the body of Prajāpati, and the consonants are the body of Death. Then if anyone criticizes your pronunciation of the vowels, you can tell him to ask Indra for the reason
- Atha, then
- yadi enam ūṣmasu upālabheta, if a person criticizes him for his pronunciation of the sibilants
- prajāpatim śaraṇam prapanṇaḥ abhūvam, I took refuge in Prajāpati [when I started singing]
- saḥ, he [Prajāpati]
- tvā pratipekṣati iti, will crush you
- enam brūyāt, he will say to him
- atha, then
- yadi enam sparśeṣu upālabheta, if someone criticizes him for his pronunciation of the consonants
- mṛtyum śaraṇam prapannaḥ abhūvam, I took refuge in Death [when I started singing]
- saḥ, he [Death]
- tvā pratidhakṣyati iti, will burn you to ashes
- enam brūyāt, he will say to him.
note If you are reciting a hymn, seek Prajāpati’s protection concerning the sibilants. Then, even if you err, he will protect you. Similarly, you should seek Death’s protection concerning the consonants. He will protect you from harm for any mistakes you might make. In fact, those who find fault with you will themselves be punished, for by criticizing your singing, they are insulting Prajāpati or Death.
- Sarve svarāḥ, all the vowels
- ghoṣavantaḥ balavantaḥ, clearly and powerfully
- vaktavyāḥ, articulated
- indre balam dadāni iti, [say to yourself] I have to give strength to Indra [as if you are stronger than Indra and can afford to give him some of your strength]
- sarve ūṣmāṇaḥ, all the sibilants
- agrastaḥ, clearly uttered [i.e., no part of the letter left within the mouth, as if you are swallowing it]
- anirastāḥ, not uttering the letter as if you are throwing it out of your mouth
- vivṛtāḥ vaktavyāḥ, clearly expressed
- prajāpateḥ ātmānam paridadāni iti, I surrender myself to Prajāpati
- sarve sparśāḥ leśena anabhinihitāḥ vaktavyāḥ, each of the consonants should be uttered separately and distinctly
- mṛtyoḥ ātmānam pariharāṇi iti, [while thinking] I save myself from Death. Iti dvāviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the twenty-second section.
note It is important that when we recite a hymn, we recite the vowels, consonants, and the sibilants clearly and loudly. Care has to be taken that no two letters get mixed up, or that any part of a letter remains inside the mouth or seems to be spat out. Here it is said that the vowels are to be pronounced powerfully and that you should pray to Indra while singing, offering him some of your strength. This suggests that you feel very strong, as if you are stronger than Indra. You should also try to surrender yourself to Prajāpati while singing. You will then attain immortality. Section Twenty-Three
- Trayaḥ dharmaskandhaḥ, three divisions of religion
- yajñaḥ adhyayanam dānam iti prathamaḥ, the first [division comprises] sacrifices, study, and charity
- tapaḥ eva dvitīyaḥ, the second is austerities
- tṛtīyaḥ, the third
- brahmacārī ācāryakulavāsī atyantam ātmānam ācāryakule avasādayan, the life of celibacy and living with the teacher in his house till death
- sarve ete, all these
- puṇyalokāḥ bhavanti, attain heavenly worlds
- brahmasaṃsthaḥ, [but] one devoted to Brahman
- amṛtatvam eti, attains immortality.
note You may practise religion in three ways: First, by performing sacrifices, studying the scriptures, and giving in charity; second, by performing austerities; and third, by observing celibacy and living with the teacher till death. All these are good, but they only lead to heaven. If you want immortality (that is, liberation), you have to devote yourself to realizing Brahman. There are certain words in our language that clearly distinguish one thing from another. For instance, barley is a particular type of grain. If you see the word ‘grain,’ it could mean wheat or rice or barley. But if you see the word ‘barley,’ you know exactly what is referred to. Similarly, the words brahmaniṣṭhā, or brahmasaṃstha, refer to a certain type of person whose only concern in life is to realize Brahman. This type of person may be of any age, any class, any caste, or any station of life. What distinguishes this type of person from any other is his or her total commitment to Brahman.
- Prajāpatiḥ lokān abhyatapat, Prajāpati meditated on the worlds
- tebhyaḥ abhitaptebhyaḥ, from [the worlds] which he meditated on
- trayī vidyā samprāsravat, emerged the three Vedas
- tām abhyatapat, [Prajāpati] meditated on them [the three Vedas]
- tasyāḥ abhitaptāyāḥ, out of [the Vedas] which he meditated upon
- etāni akṣarāṇi, these akṣaras [syllables]
- samprāsravanta, emerged
- bhūḥ bhuvaḥ svaḥ, bhūh, bhuvaḥ, and svaḥ
- iti, that is all.
note How can you attain liberation? You can attain it when you surrender everything for its sake. To make this clear, the story of how the world came into being is narrated: God (or Virāṭ, or Kaśyapa) created this world by practising austerities. What kind of austerities? He simply planned the creation in his mind. This planning, this mental exercise, is enough austerity for him. And as thinking is doing for him, whatever he thinks immediately comes into being. The worlds emerge from within him. The first to manifest, however, were the three Vedas: Ṛk, Yajuḥ, and Sāma. When these emerged, the Creator thought about them, and from the Vedas came the three vyāhṛtis (lit., utterances): bhūḥ, bhuvaḥ, and svaḥ. Then from these came Om, the symbol of Brahman. If we concentrate on Om, we attain Brahman. But we have to surrender everything for the sake of Brahman. This is the conclusion to be drawn from this story. Even the Creator has to concentrate on what he is going to create, and he has to surrender everything else.
- Tāni abhyatapat, he thought about those [vyāhṛtis]
- tebhyaḥ abhitaptebhyaḥ, out of those which he thought about
- oṃkāra samprāsravat, the syllable Om emerged
- tat yathā, just as
- śaṅkunā, by the ribs [of a leaf]
- sarvāṇi parṇāni saṃtṛṇṇāni, all parts of the leaf are held together
- evam, similarly
- oṃkāreṇa sarvā vāk saṃtṛṇṇā, Oṃkāra permeates every form of speech
- oṃkāraḥ eva idam sarvam oṃkāraḥ eva idam sarvam, all this is Oṃkāra, all this is Oṃkāra [the repetition is for emphasis]. Iti trayoviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the twenty-third section.
note Om is the essence of everything. Because Prajāpati meditated to create the three worlds, Om manifested itself. Om, in fact, is the support of everything. Section Twenty-Four
- Brahmavādinaḥ, those who believe in Brahman
- vadanti, say
- yat vasūnām prātaḥsavanam, the morning savana [i.e., the time when the soma juice is extracted from the soma creeper for the sacrifice] is meant for the eight Vasus
- mādhyandinam savanam rudrāṇām, the noon savana is meant for the eleven Rudras
- tṛtīya savanam, the third [i.e., the evening] savana
- ādityānām ca viśveṣām devānām, is meant for the twelve Ādityas and the Viśvadevas.
note ‘The morning savana belongs to the eight Vasus.’ This means that the Vasus control the earth. In the same way, since the midday savana belongs to the eleven Rudras, they control the interspace—the space between the earth and heaven. And as the evening savana belongs to the twelve Ādityas and the Viśvadevas, that means they control heaven. It follows then that there is no world left for the performer of the sacrifice.
- Kva tarhi yajamānasya lokaḥ iti, where then is the place for one who performs a sacrifice
- saḥ yaḥ, he who
- tam, that [place for the yajamāna]
- na vidyāt, does not know
- katham, how [can he]
- kuryāt, perform [a sacrifice]
- atha vidvān kuryāt, one who knows can [of course] perform [a sacrifice].
note When a person performs a sacrifice, he does so in order that he may attain a certain world for himself. But if the three worlds—bhūḥ, bhuvaḥ, and svaḥ—are already occupied by the Vasus and other gods, where is the place left for the sacrificer? In such a situation he would hardly have any inclination to perform a sacrifice, or even to sing attendant hymns such as the Sāma, or to. engage in rituals connected with a sacrifice. Ignorance on the part of a person is no bar to his performing a sacrifice. Rather, this verse is intended to praise knowledge. If a person knows how to recite the Sāma, that is a great help. It should be clearly understood, however, that though the Sāma or Oṃkāra is recited while a sacrifice is being performed, the
- Prātaḥ anuvākasya upākaraṇāt purā, before beginning the morning chant
- jaghanena, behind
- gārhapatyasya, the Gārhapatya fire
- udaṅmukhaḥ, facing north
- upaviśya, sits
- saḥ, he [the sacrificed
- vāsavam, about the Vasus
- sāma abhigāyati, sings the Sāma.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Lokadvāram apāvṛṇu, [O Fire,] please open the door of the world [i.e., make the path clear]
- vayam
note The additional syllables in the verse have no special meaning. They merely serve to make the Sāma complete.
- Atha juhoti, now the sacrificer begins the offerings
- pṛthivīkṣite, living on the earth
- lokakṣite, living in the loka [world]
- agnaye namaḥ, salutations to fire
- yajamānāya me, for me, the sacrificer
- lokam vinda, acquire the right world
- eṣaḥ vai yajamānasya lokaḥ etā asmi, I am going to this world fit for a sacrificer.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Atra, here [in this world]
- yajamānaḥ parastāt āyuṣaḥ, I, the sacrificer, have lived the full course of life
- svāhā, [with these words, he will say] svāhā
- parigham, the bolt [of the gateway to the world]
- apajahi, remove
- iti uktvā, saying this
- uttiṣṭhati, he rises
- vasavaḥ, the Vasus [to whom the morning savana is offered]
- tasmai, to him [the sacrificer]
- prātaḥsavanam samprayacchanti, give away the morning savana [i.e., give away this earth].
note The yajamāna (the sacrificer) keeps performing his sacrifices till he feels that it is time for him to die. He then offers his last oblation, saying, ‘Svāhā.’ Getting up, he says he is going to the world for which he is destined and demands that the door to that world be unbolted. The Vasus own the earth by virtue of the morning savana (that is, extracting the soma juice and having a morning wash with it). They are pleased with the yajamāna for his performance of the rituals, so they surrender the ownership of the earth to him.
- Saḥ, he [the yajamāna]
- upākaraṇāt purā, before beginning
- mādhyandinasya savanasya, the midday savana
- āgnīdhrīyasya jaghanena, behind the Dakṣiṇāgni fire
- udaṅmukhaḥ, facing north
- upaviśya, sitting
- raudram sāma abhigāyati, sings the Sāma to the Rudras.
note Earlier, the way the yajamāna conquers the earth was shown. Now how the mid-region can be won is described. After sitting behind the Dakṣiṇāgni fire, facing north, he starts singing the Sāma addressed to the Rudras. He continues doing this with the idea of attaining union with Virāṭ.
- Lokadvāram apāvṛṇu, [O Fire,] please open the door of the world [i.e., make the path clear]
- vayam vairājyāya, so we may gain control of the world of Virāṭ
- tvā paśyema, [and for that purpose] may see you.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Atha juhoti, now the sacrificer begins the offerings
- antarikṣakṣite, living in the mid-region
- lokakṣite, living in the loka [world]
- vāyave namaḥ, salutations to Vāyu [air]
- yajamānāya me, for me, the sacrificer
- lokam vinda, acquire the right world
- eṣaḥ vai
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Atra, here [in this world]
- yajamānaḥ parastāt āyuṣaḥ, I, the sacrificer, have lived the full course of life
- svāhā, [with these words, he will say] svāhā
- parigham, the bolt [of the gateway to the world]
- apajahi, remove
- iti uktvā, saying this
- uttiṣṭhati, he rises
- rudrāḥ, the Rudras [to whom the midday savana is offered]
- tasmai, to him [the sacrificer]
- mādhyandinam savanam samprayacchanti, give away the midday savana [i.e., give away the mid-region].
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Saḥ, he [the yajamāna]
- upākaraṇāt purā, before beginning
- tṛtīyasavanasya, the third savana
- āhavanīyasya jaghanena, behind the Āhavanīya fire
- udaṅmukhaḥ, facing north
- upaviśya, sitting
- saḥ ādityam vaiśvadevam sāma abhigāyati, he sings the Sāma to the Ādityas and the Viśvadevas.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Lokadvāram apāvṛṇu, [O Fire,] please open the door of the world [of heaven]
- vayam svārājyāya, so we may attain sovereignty
- tvā paśyema, [and for that purpose] may see you.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Ādityam, that was addressed to the Ādityas
- atha, next
- vaiśvadevam, to the Viśvadevas
- lokadvāram apāvṛṇu, [O Fire,] please open the door of the world [of heaven]
- vayam sāmrājyāya, so we may attain sovereignty
- tvā paśyema, [and for that purpose] may see you.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Atha juhoti, then the sacrificer begins the offerings
- namaḥ ādityebhyaḥ ca viśvebhyaḥ ca devebhyaḥ, salutations to the Ādityas and the Viśvadevas
- divikṣidbhyaḥ, to those living in heaven
- lokakṣidbhyaḥ, to those living in the worlds
- lokam me yajamānāya vindata, help me, the yajamāna, acquire the right world.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Eṣaḥ vai yajamānasya loke etā asmi, I am ready to go to a world appropriate for one who performs sacrifices
- atra yajamānaḥ parastāt āyuṣaḥ, I, the yajamāna, will live here after my death
- svāhā, [saying] Svāhā [he completes the sacrifice]
- uttiṣṭhati, he rises
- iti uktvā, saying this
- apahata parigham, may the bolt be removed.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Tasmai, to him
- ādityāḥ ca viśve devāḥ ca, the Ādityas and the Viśvadevas
- tṛtīya savanam sampra- yacchanti, present the result of the third savana
- yaḥ evam veda, he who knows this
- eṣaḥ ha vai yajñasya mātrām veda, he knows the true purport of the sacrifice. Iti caturviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the twenty-fourth section. Iti chāndogyopaniṣadi dvitīyaḥ adhyāyaḥ, here ends the second chapter of the Chāndogya Upaniṣad.
- Asau vai ādityaḥ devamadhu, the sun over there is the honey of the gods
- tasya dyauḥ eva tiraścinavaṃśaḥ, heaven is its crossbeam [that supports it]
- antarikṣam apūpaḥ, the mid-region is the beehive
- marīcayaḥ putrāḥ, the rays are the eggs.
note This section begins the praise of the sun. The sun represents the sum total of the good work done by human beings. This is why the sun is like honey to the gods and why they love it. Heaven is said to be the crossbeam. It supports the mid-region, which is the beehive. The sun-rays attract water from the earth, and the water-drops in these rays are like the eggs of the bees.
- Tasya, of that [sun]
- ye, those which are
- prāñcaḥ raśmayaḥ, the rays in the east
- tāḥ eva, they all
- asya prācyaḥ madhunāḍyaḥ, are its eastern honey-cells
- ṛcaḥ eva madhukṛtaḥ, the Ṛk mantras are the bees
- ṛgvedaḥ eva puṣpam, the Ṛg Veda is the flower
- tāḥ āpaḥ amṛtāḥ, the water [of the soma and other things offered as oblations] is the nectar
- tāḥ vai etāḥ ṛcaḥ, these Ṛks—
note The first rays of the sun seen in the east are like the honey cells of a beehive. In these cells are the bees, which are compared to the Ṛk mantras. The sun in the morning is red, like honey. The Ṛk mantras are called bees because bees produce honey, and the Ṛg Veda is called the flower because that is where the bees get the nectar to make the honey. Here, the term Ṛg Veda does not mean words. It means work—that is, the rituals prescribed in the Veda. It is the result of the rituals that is described as honey. Just as the bees collect the juice from the flowers and change it into honey, so the Ṛks seem to collect from the sacrificial fire the liquid, consisting of the soma juice, butter, etc., from the oblations. This is called nectar because after the ingredients have been in the fire, they are transformed into the sweetest and purest thing possible. The result of the sacrificial ritual is the nectar (amṛta), because it leads to immortality. The word amṛta means both ‘nectar’ and ‘immortality.’
- Etam ṛgvedam, this Ṛg Veda
- abhyatapan, stimulated
- tasya abhitaptasya, from that [Ṛg Veda] so stimulated
- yaśaḥ, fame
- tejaḥ, vitality
- indriyam, the power of the organs
- vīryam, energy
- annādyam rasaḥ, the essence of food
- ajāyata, grew.
note Earlier the Ṛk mantras were described as the bees and the Ṛg Veda as the flower, and so on. What then is produced from all this? Fame in the worlds, the beauty that comes from strength, the power of the organs, the strength and vigour which give the gods and goddesses supremacy, and so on. The essence of all this comes from the sacrifices performed according to the Ṛg Veda.
- Tat, that [fame, etc.]
- vyakṣarat, spread out
- tat, it
- ādityam abhitaḥ, towards [in] the sun
- aśrayat, took shelter
- tat vai etat, it is this
- yat etat, which is that
- rohitam rūpam, red look
- ādityasya, of the sun. Iti prathamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the first section.
note The idea here is to praise good work done according to the scriptures. Such work gives people name and fame, strength, vigour, good health, and so on. And with these qualities a person can attain supremacy in the world. These qualities all collect around the sun in the morning, and this is why the sun looks red at that time. Name and fame, strength, etc., are there waiting for those who do virtuous work. This verse is to encourage people to do such work.
- Atha, then
- ye, that which
- asya, of it [the sun]
- dakṣiṇāḥ raśmayaḥ, the rays in the south
- tāḥ eva, they all
- asya dakṣiṇāḥ madhunādyaḥ, are its southern honey-cells
- yajūṃṣi eva madhukṛtaḥ, the Yajuḥ mantras are the bees
- yajurvedaḥ eva puṣpam, the Yajur Veda is the flower
- tāḥ āpaḥ amṛtāḥ, the water [of the soma and other things offered as oblations] is the nectar.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Tāni vai etāni, all these
- yajūṃṣi, Yajuḥ mantras
- etam yajurvedam, this Yajur Veda
- abhyatapan, stimulated
- tasya abhitaptasya, from that [Yajur Veda] so stimulated
- yaśaḥ, fame
- tejaḥ, vitality
- indriyam, the power of the organs
- vīryam, energy
- annādyam rasaḥ, the essence of food
- ajāyata, grew.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Tat, that [fame, etc.]
- vyakṣarat, spread out
- tat, it
- ādityam abhitaḥ, towards [in] the sun
- aśrayat, took shelter
- tat vai etat, it is this
- yat etat, which is that
- śuklam rūpam, white look
- ādityasya, of the sun. Iti dvitīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the second section.
- Atha, then
- ye, that which
- asya, of it [the sun]
- pratyañcaḥ raśmayaḥ, the rays in the west
- tāḥ eva, they all
- asya pratīcyaḥ madhunāḍyaḥ, are its western honey-cells
- sāmāni eva madhukṛtaḥ, the Sāma mantras are the bees
- sāmavedaḥ eva puṣpam, the Sāma Veda
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Tāni vai etāni, these very
- sāmāni, Sāma mantras
- etam sāmavedam, this Sāma Veda
- abhyatapan, stimulated
- tasya abhitaptasya, from that [Sāma Veda] so stimulated
- yaśaḥ, fame
- tejaḥ, vitality
- indriyam, the power of the organs
- vīryam, energy
- annādyam rasaḥ, the essence of food
- ajāyata, grew.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Tat, that [fame, etc.]
- vyakṣarat, spread out
- tat, it
- ādityam abhitaḥ, towards [in] the sun
- aśrayat, took shelter
- tat vai etat, it is this
- yat etat, which is that
- kṛṣṇam rūpam, black look
- ādityasya, of the sun. Iti tṛtīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the third section.
- Atha, then
- ye, that which
- asya, of it [the sun]
- udañcaḥ raśmayaḥ, the rays in the north
- tāḥ eva, they all
- asya udīcyaḥ madhunāḍyaḥ, are its northern honey-cells
- atharvāṅgirasaḥ eva madhukṛtaḥ, the mantras envisioned by Atharvā and Aṅgirā are the bees
- itihāsapurāṇam eva puṣpam, history and legends are the flower
- tāḥ āpaḥ amṛtāḥ, the water [of the soma and other things offered as oblations] is the nectar.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Te vai ete, these very
- atharvāṅgirasaḥ, mantras of Atharvā and Aṅgirā
- etat itihāsapurāṇam, the Itihāsas and Purāṇas
- abhyatapan, stimulated
- tasya abhitap- tasya, from that so stimulated
- yaśaḥ, fame
- tejaḥ, vitality
- indriyam, the power of the organs
- vīryam, energy
- annādyam rasaḥ, the essence of food
- ajāyata, grew.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Tat, that [fame, etc.]
- vyakṣarat, spread out
- tat, it
- ādityam abhitaḥ, towards [in] the sun
- aśrayat, took shelter
- tat vai etat, it is this
- yat etat, which is that
- param kṛṣṇam rūpam, deep black look
- ādityasya, of the sun. Iti caturthaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the fourth section.
- Atha, next
- asya ye urdhvāḥ raśmayaḥ, those rays [of the sun] which are in the higher region
- tāḥ eva asya urdhvāḥ madhunāḍyaḥ, they are its honeycomb in the higher region
- guhyāḥ ādeśāḥ eva madhukṛtaḥ, all secret directions are the bees
- brahma eva puṣpam, Brahman [i.e., praṇava, Om] is the flower
- tāḥ āpaḥ amṛtāḥ, the water [used in this connection] is the nectar.
note The mantras used in the sacrifices are both secret and mystical. So also are the directions for a successful performance of a sacrifice. The mantras and the directions together constitute the bees in the illustration given here. The word brahman is used here in the sense of ‘word,’ so it means here praṇava, or Om. It is the flower.
- Te vai ete, these very
- guhyāḥ ādeśāḥ, secret directions
- etat brahma, this Brahman [as praṇava]
- abhyatapan, stimulated
- tasya abhitaptasya, from that so stimulated
- yaśaḥ, fame
- tejaḥ, vitality
- indriyam, the power of the organs
- vīryam, energy
- annādyam rasaḥ, the essence of food
- ajāyata, grew.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Tat, that [fame, etc.]
- vyakṣarat, spread out
- tat, it
- ādityam abhitaḥ, towards [in] the sun
- aśrayat, took shelter
- tat vai etat, it is this
- yat etat, which is that
- kṣobhate iva, seems to be vibrating
- ādityasya madhye, within the sun.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Te ete, these [the red and other colours]
- vai rasānām rasāḥ, are the essence of the essences
- vedāḥ hi rasāḥ, since the Vedas are the essence
- teṣām ete rasāḥ, these [colours] are the essence of them [the Vedas]
- tāni etāni vai amṛtānām amṛtāni, these [colours] are the nectar of the nectar [the Vedas]
- hi vedāḥ amṛtāḥ, as the Vedas are the nectar [or, eternal]
- etāni, these [colours]
- teṣām amṛtāni, are the nectar of them [the Vedas]. Iti pañcamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the fifth section.
note Honey has been shown to be in different directions. This is just to stimulate our interest in seeking the essence of everything. The essence of everything is the Vedas, because through the Vedas we attain immortality. The term Vedas here means the Vedic ceremonies. Through these ceremonies we attain only relative immortality—that is, a long life, but a life that must end sooner or later. The expression ‘essence of the essences’ means that results which follow from the ceremonies are better than the ceremonies themselves. They are better, but they are short-lived. The implication is that we must not stop there.
- Tat yat, that which
- prathamam amṛtam, the first nectar [i.e., the red colour of the sun]
- tat, that
- vasavaḥ, the Vasus
- upajīvanti, enjoy
- agninā mukhena, led by fire
- vai, as a matter of fact
- devāḥ, the gods and goddesses
- na aśnanti na pibanti, neither eat nor drink
- etat amṛtam, this nectar
- eva dṛṣṭvā tṛpyanti, they are pleased by only seeing.
note Earlier it was described what the nectar is and how it may be meditated upon. The gods and goddesses enjoy this nectar. How these gods and goddesses may be meditated upon is now being stated. Early in the morning the sun is red, and this red colour is the first nectar, which is enjoyed by the Vasus led by fire. They enjoy it by seeing, not by eating and drinking. They, in fact, enjoy it by using all their organs. The body is a source of bad odour and bad secretions, but because the gods are all under the protection of the sun, they are therefore exempt from them.
- Te, they [the gods and goddesses]
- etat eva rūpam, this [red] colour
- abhisaṃviśanti, enter into [i.e., they keep looking at it and make no further attempt to enjoy it]
- etasmāt rūpāt, from this colour [i.e., attracted by this colour]
- udyanti, they come out [i.e., they try to reach it].
note The gods and goddesses look at the red colour and keep quiet. Why do they keep quiet? Why do they not try to reach it? Because they feel that the time is not yet ripe for them to get it. When they feel it is the right time, then they start trying. They are fully aware that they must try, and try hard, to attain the things they desire.
- Saḥ yaḥ, he who
- evam, thus
- etat amṛtam veda, knows this nectar
- vasūnām eva ekaḥ bhūtvā, having become one of the Vasus
- agninā eva mukhena, led by fire
- etat eva amṛtam dṛṣṭvā tṛpyati, enjoys by seeing the nectar
- saḥ etat eva rūpam abhisaṃviśati, he enters into this [red] colour
- etasmāt rūpāt udeti, he also comes out of this colour.
note Anyone can perform the ceremonies mentioned in the Ṛg Veda and thus attain the results mentioned earlier. These ceremonies are like flowers, and by reciting the Ṛk mantras, you can collect the honey in the form of fame, strength, etc. Not only that, when you attain these things, you are also able to preserve them by the grace of the sun. Further, the beauty and grandeur of the sun in the early morning is like a special gift meant just for you. You are then one of the gods known as the Vasus. You can enjoy this state at will, and if you wish, can enjoy whatever the sun has to give. If you do not want to enjoy anything, you can merely look at it and that is enough enjoyment for you.
- Yāvat, so long as
- ādityaḥ, the sun
- purastāt udetā, rises in the east
- paścāt astam-etā, sets in the west
- eva tāvat, that long
- saḥ, he
- vasūnām, of the Vasus
- ādhipatyam, sovereignty
- svārājyam, freedom
- pari-etā, will enjoy. Iti ṣaṣṭhaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the sixth section.
note There is a difference between those who merely perform sacrifices and those who perform sacrifices but are, at the same time, deeply concerned with their spiritual development. The former may attain heaven, but only for a short while. The latter attain a status like the Vasus and become sovereigns. They attain liberation as and when they like.
- Atha, next
- yat, that which
- dvitīyam amṛtam, the second nectar [i.e., the white colour of the sun]
- tat, that
- rudrāḥ, the Rudras
- upajīvanti, enjoy
- indreṇa mukhena, led by Indra
- vai, as a matter of fact
- devāḥ, the gods and goddesses
- na aśnanti na pibanti, neither eat nor drink
- etat amṛtam, this nectar
- eva dṛṣṭvā tṛpyanti, they are pleased by only seeing.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Te, they [the Rudras]
- etat eva rūpam, this [white] colour
- abhisaṃviśanti, enter into [i.e., they keep looking at it and make no further attempt to enjoy it]
- etasmāt rūpāt, from this colour [i.e., attracted by this colour]
- udyanti, they come out [i.e., they try to reach it].
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Saḥ yaḥ, he who
- evam, thus
- etat amṛtam veda, knows this nectar
- rudrāṇām eva ekaḥ bhūtvā, becomes one of the Rudras
- indreṇa eva mukhena, led by Indra
- etat eva amṛtam dṛṣṭvā tṛpyati, enjoys by seeing the nectar
- saḥ etat eva rūpam abhisaṃviśati, he enters into this [white] colour
- etasmāt rūpāt udeti, he also comes out of this colour.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Yāvat, so long as
- ādityaḥ, the sun
- purastāt udetā, rises in the east
- paścāt astam-etā, sets in the west
- saḥ, he [who knows this]
- dviḥ-tāvat, twice that long
- dakṣiṇataḥ udetā, will rise in the south
- uttarataḥ astam-etā, [and] set in the north
- eva tāvat, that long
- rudrāṇām, of the Rudras
- ādhipatyam, sovereignty
- svārājyam, freedom
- pari-etā, will attain. Iti saptamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the seventh section.
- Atha, next
- yat, that which
- tṛtīyam amṛtam, the third nectar [i.e., the dark colour of the sun]
- tat, that
- ādityāḥ, the Ādityas
- upajīvanti, sustain themselves with
- varuṇena mukhena, led by Varuṇa
- vai, as a matter of fact
- devāḥ, the gods and goddesses
- na aśnanti na pibanti, neither eat nor drink
- etat amṛtam, this nectar
- eva dṛṣṭvā tṛpyanti, they become happy by only seeing.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Te, they [the Ādityas]
- etāt eva rūpam, this [dark] colour
- abhisaṃviśanti, enter into [i.e., they keep looking at it and make no further attempt to enjoy it]
- etasmāt rūpāt, from this colour [i.e., attracted by this colour]
- udyanti, they come out [i.e., they try to reach it].
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Saḥ yaḥ he who
- evam, thus
- etat amṛtam veda, knows this nectar
- ādityānām eva ekaḥ bhūtvā, becomes one of the Ādityas
- varuṇena era mukhena, led by Varuṇa
- etat era amṛtam dṛṣṭvā tṛpyati, enjoys by seeing the nectar
- saḥ etat eva rūpam abhisaṃviśati, he enters into this [dark] colour
- etasmāt rūpāt udeti, he also comes out of this colour.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Yāvat, so long as
- ādityaḥ, the sun
- dakṣiṇataḥ udetā, rises in the south
- uttarataḥ astam-etā, [and] sets in the north
- saḥ, he [who knows this]
- dviḥ-tāvat, twice that long
- paścāt udetā, will rise in the west
- purastāt astam-etā, [and] set in the east
- eva tāvat, that long
- ādityānām, of the Ādityas
- ādhipatyam, sovereignty
- svārājyam, freedom
- pari-etā, will attain. Iti āṣṭamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the eighth section.
note The sun neither rises nor sets; it is always stationary. It merely gives the impression of rising and setting.
- Atha, next
- yat, that which
- caturtham amṛtam, the fourth nectar [i.e., the deep black colour of the sun]
- tat, that
- marutaḥ, the Maruts
- upajīvanti, enjoy
- somena mukhena, led by Soma
- vai, as a matter of fact
- devāḥ, the gods and goddesses
- na aśnanti na pibanti, neither eat nor drink
- etat amṛtam, this nectar
- eva dṛṣṭvā tṛpyanti, they become happy by only seeing.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Te, they [the Maruts]
- etat eva rūpam, this [deep black] colour
- abhisaṃviśanti, enter into [i.e., they keep looking at it and make no further attempt to enjoy it]
- etasmāt rūpāt, from this colour [i.e., attracted by this colour]
- udyanti, they come out [i.e., they try to reach it].
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Saḥ yaḥ, he who
- evam, thus
- etat amṛtam veda, knows this nectar
- marutām eva ekaḥ bhūtvā, becomes one of the Maruts
- somena eva mukhena, led by Soma
- etat eva amṛtam dṛṣṭvā tṛpyati, he enjoys by seeing the nectar
- saḥ etat eva rūpam abhisaṃviśati, he enters into this [deep black] colour
- etasmāt rūpāt udeti, he also comes out of this colour.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Yāvat, so long as
- ādityaḥ, the sun
- paścāt udetā, rises in the west
- purastāt astam-etā, [and] sets in the east
- saḥ, he [who knows this]
- dviḥ-tāvat, twice that long
- uttarataḥ udetā, will rise in the north
- dakṣiṇataḥ astam-etā, [and] set in the south
- eva tāvat, that long
- marutām, of the Maruts
- ādhipatyam, sovereignty
- svārājyam, freedom
- pari-etā, will attain. Iti navamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the ninth section.
- Atha, next
- yat, that which
- pañcamam amṛtam, the fifth nectar [i.e., what appears to be vibrating within the sun]
- tat, that
- sādhyāḥ, the Sādhyas
- upajīvanti, enjoy
- brahmaṇā mukhena, led by Brahman [i.e., praṇava]
- vai, as a matter of fact
- devāḥ, the gods and goddesses
- na aśnanti na pibanti, neither eat nor drink
- etat amṛtam, this nectar
- eva dṛṣṭvā tṛpyanti, they become happy by only seeing.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Te, they [the Sādhyas]
- etat eva rūpam, this form [of the sun which seems to be vibrating]
- abhisaṃviśanti, enter into [i.e., they keep looking at it and make no further attempt to enjoy it]
- etasmāt rūpāt, from this form [i.e., attracted by this form]
- udyanti, they come out [i.e., they try to reach it].
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Saḥ yaḥ, he who
- evam, thus
- etat amṛtam veda, knows this nectar
- sādhyānām eva ekaḥ bhūtvā, becomes one of the Sādhyas
- brahmaṇā eva mukhena, led by Brahman [as praṇava]
- etat eva amṛtam dṛṣṭvā tṛpyati, he enjoys by seeing the nectar
- saḥ etat eva rūpam abhisaṃviśati, he enters into this form [of
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Yāvat, so long as
- ādityaḥ, the sun
- uttarataḥ udetā, rises in the north
- dakṣiṇataḥ astam-etā, [and] sets in the south
- saḥ, he [who knows this]
- dviḥ-tāvat, twice that long
- ūrḍhvaḥ udetā, will rise above
- arvāk astam-etā, [and] set down below
- eva tāvat, that long
- sādhyānām, of the Sādhyas
- ādhipatyam, sovereignty
- svārājyam, freedom
- pari-etā, will attain. Iti daśamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the tenth section.
note The sun is stationary. It neither rises nor sets. If it appears to rise or set, it is because of how we perceive it. Similarly, the sun may seem to rise in a different direction, depending on where we are when we see it. The Vasus, Rudras, Ādityas, etc., are minor gods and goddesses. They have not yet attained the status of Brahman, but they are on their way to doing so. However, anyone can attain the status of a minor god or godddess—that is, he can be like a Rudra, for instance. By performing sacrifices mentioned in the scriptures a person can share with those minor gods and goddesses the special worlds reserved for them. Such a person may even enjoy many powers and privileges, but he is still far away from the status of Brahman.
- Atha, next
- tataḥ, after that [i.e., after giving the living beings the fruits of their work]
- ūrdhvaḥ udetyā, [and] having risen above [such tasks]
- na eva udetā, it [the sun] will not rise again
- na astam-etā, nor will it set
- ekalaḥ, alone
- eva madhye sthātā, it will stay midway
- tat eṣaḥ ślokaḥ, here is a verse on the subject.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- [You ask about the sunrise and sunset in Brahmaloka]—na vai, no indeed
- tatra, there [in Brahmaloka]
- kadācana na nimloca, [the sun] never set
- na udiyāya, nor did it rise
- devāḥ, O gods [listen to me]
- tena satyena, by this which is true
- aham brahmaṇā mā virādhiṣi, may I not have any hindrance to my realization of Brahman.
note This is an assertion that there is no day or night in Brahmaloka. When a person makes a statement like this, he invokes the gods to bear witness to what he is saying. He is confident that what he is saying is true and that it will be no bar to his being one with Brahman.
- Na, not
- ha vai asmai, so far as he is concerned
- udeti, does [the sun] rise
- na nimlocati, nor does it set
- asmai, for him
- sakṛt divā ha eva bhavati, there is always day [i.e., light]
- yaḥ, he who
- etām, this
- evam, in this way
- brahmopaniṣadam, the secret teachings about Brahman
- veda, knows.
note Earlier it was described how Brahman manifests itself in various forms—as a crossbeam, a honeycomb, etc., or as various gods enjoying various nectars. If you understand the underlying meaning of such manifestations, you then attain the knowledge of Brahman. To you then there is no day or night. You are like the sun—self-luminous. You are, in fact, one with Brahman—always the same, eternal, infinite.
- Tat ha etat, that [i.e., the teaching on honey]
- brahmā prajāpataya uvāca, Brahmā [first] taught to Prajāpati
- prajāpatiḥ manave, Prajāpati [taught it] to Manu
- manuḥ prajābhyaḥ, Manu [taught it] to his children
- tat ha etat, that
- brahma, [knowledge of] Brahman
- pitā provāca, the father [Aruṇa] taught
- jyeṣṭhāya putrāya uddālakāya āruṇaye, to his eldest son Uddālaka Āruṇi.
note Starting from Brahmā, this knowledge has passed from generation to generation. The mention of this is only to emphasize its importance. This instruction on honey is nothing but Brahma-vidyā, the knowledge of Brahman. It is the secret of how to attain Brahman.
- Tat vāva idam brahma, this knowledge of Brahman [previously mentioned as passing from teacher to student]
- pitā jyeṣṭhāya putrāya, the father to his eldest son
- vā, or
- praṇāyyāya, a fit
- antevāsine, resident student
- prabrūyāt, will teach [or, pass on].
note The knowledge of Brahman is the highest gift a person can confer on another. A father who has this knowledge can give it to his eldest son, or a competent teacher can pass it on to a competent student living with him.
- Na anyasmai kasmaicana, to nobody else
- yadi api asmai, even if to him [to the teacher]
- imām, this [world]
- adbhiḥ parigṛhītām, surrounded by water
- dhanasya pūrṇām, full of gold
- dadyāt, gives
- etat, this [instruction on honey]
- eva tataḥ bhūyaḥ. iti, is more precious than that [the repetition is for emphasis]. Iti ekādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the eleventh section.
- Gāyatrī vai idam sarvam bhūtam, all these beings are gāyatrī
- yat idam kiñca, whatever is there
- vāk vai gāyatrī, the word is gāyatrī
- vāk vai idam sarvam bhūtam gāyati ca, it is vāk that gives names [or sings] to all things
- trāyate ca, and also gives protection.
note Here the importance of the gāyatrī is Being emphasized. True, the gāyatrī is poetry, but it is that poetry which leads to Brahman. This gāyatrī is also called vāk, word, because it is vāk which identifies everything that exists. Vāk gives everything a name and thereby gives it a status. The word gāyatrī means gāyati ca trāyate ca—that which gives names (or sings) to things and also gives them protection. It also means gāyantam trāyate—that is, he who repeats the gāyatrī is saved. (Ga means singing, and tra means saving or protecting.)
- Yā vai sā gāyatrī, that which is this gāyatrī
- iyam vāva sā, it is that
- yā iyam pṛthivī, which is this earth
- hi, for
- asyām, to this [earth]
- sarvam bhūtam, all things [moving or unmoving]
- pratiṣṭhitam, are attached
- etām eva na atiśīyate, cannot get away from it.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Yā vai sā pṛthivī, that which [has earlier been referred to as] this earth
- iyam vāva sā, it is that
- yat idam asmin puruṣe śarīram, the body which is associated with a human being
- hi, because
- asmin, on this [body]
- ime prāṇāḥ, these prāṇas [i.e., prāṇa, apāna, etc., and also the five elements—ākāśa, vāyu, etc.]
- pratiṣṭhitāḥ, are based
- etat eva na atiśīyante, they cannot go beyond this [body—i.e., they cannot exist independent of this body].
note The earth is the gāyatrī and this gāyatrī is also the human body because the human body is born of the earth. How is the human body borm of the earth? This body is made up of the same elements (space, air, fire, etc.) that the earth is. The five prāṇas (prāṇa, apāna, vyāna, udāna, and samāna) are also known as elements, and they rest on this body. The body is therefore the gāyatrī like the earth. It is the gāyatrī because the prāṇas cannot exist without the body.
- Yat vai tat puruṣe śarīram, that which is in this human body
- idam vāva tat, it is that
- yat idam asmin antaḥ puruṣe hṛdayam, which is in this human heart
- hi, because
- asmin, in this [heart]
- ime prāṇāḥ, these prāṇas [the vital forces]
- pratiṣṭhitāḥ, are based
- etat eva na atiśīyante, they cannot go beyond this [heart—i.e., they cannot exist independent of this heart].
note The human body has been described as the gāyatrī. But where is that gāyatrī? It is in the heart. In fact, the heart is the gāyatrī. In what sense can the heart be called the gāyatrī? In the sense that all the prāṇas are in the heart and cannot exist separate from it. And since the body is the gāyatrī, the heart is also the gāyatrī.
- Sā eṣā gāyatrī catuṣpadā, this gāyatrī has four feet [i.e., quarters]
- ṣaṣvidhā, each of them sixfold
- tat etat ṛcā abhyanūktam, this is what is stated in a Ṛk mantra [Ṛg Veda 10.10.3].
note The gāyatrī is also known as Brahma-gāyatrī. It is one with everything. The Upaniṣad says here that the gāyatrī has four quarters and each quarter has six parts (that is, it
- Tāvān, like this
- asya mahimā, its glory
- tataḥ jyāyān ca puruṣaḥ, that [i.e., the glory] of the puruṣa [i.e., Brahman, who fills the whole world] is still greater
- pādaḥ asya sarvā [i.e., sarvāṇi] bhūtāni, all things constitute one foot [or, quarter] of him
- tripād asya, [the remaining] three feet [or, quarters] of him
- amṛtam divi, are like nectar in heaven.
note Brahman has been described as the gāyatrī, having four feet (or, quarters) and being sixfold. This is just figurative, however. Brahman is Brahman and there is no way of describing it. In reality, it is without name and form, beyond thought and speech. It is the Absolute. Brahman can be conceived as both the cause and the effect. As the cause (karaṇa) nothing can be predicated about it; it is nirupādhika, without attributes. As the effect (kārya) it is sopādhika, with attributes. Similarly, the gāyatrī is said here to have four quarters and six parts. These are attributes used to help a disciple understand. As the Pañcadaśi says (verse II.58), ‘Niraṃśe api aṃśam āropya....’ (that is, parts are superimposed on that which has no parts in order to explain what cannot be described).
- Yat vai tat brahma iti, that which is Brahman
- idam vāva tat, it is that
- yaḥ, which
- ayam, is this
- ākāśaḥ, space
- bahirdhā puruṣāt, outside the human body
- yaḥ vai saḥ ākāśaḥ, that which is the space
- bahirdhā puruṣāt, outside the human body
- ayam vāva saḥ, it is that
- yaḥ ayam ākāśaḥ, which is this space
- antaḥ puruṣe, inside the human body
- yaḥ vai saḥ antaḥ puruṣe ākāśaḥ, that which is the space inside the human body
- ayam vāva saḥ, it is that
- yaḥ ayam ākāśaḥ, which is this space
- antaḥ hṛdaye, inside the heart
- tat etat, it is that
- pūrṇam, full
- apravarti, unchanging
- śriyam, treasure
- yaḥ evam veda, he who knows this
- pūrṇām apravartinīm labhate, becomes full and is not subject to change. Iti dvādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the twelfth section.
note Earlier Brahman was described as the gāyatrī with four quarters and also as amṛta, nectar. Here it is described as space. It is the same space which is inside as well as outside the human body, and also within the heart. The Upaniṣad says that this ākāśa in the heart is full and never changes. That is to say, it is free from desire and because of that it is never subject to change. Anyone who knows that ākāśa in the heart as such is himself always full and free from desire.
- Tasya ha vai etasya hṛdayasya, of this heart
- pañca devasuṣayaḥ, five passages guarded by the gods
- saḥ yaḥ, that which
- asya prāṅsuṣiḥ, is its eastern passage
- saḥ prāṇaḥ, that is prāṇa
- tat cakṣuḥ, that is [also] the eye
- saḥ ādityaḥ, [and] that is Āditya [the sun]
- tat etat, it is that
- tejaḥ annādyam iti upāsīta, meditate on as the source of brightness and food
- yaḥ evam veda, he who knows this
- tejasvī annādaḥ bhavati, becomes bright and an eater of food.
note If you want to enter a house, you must please those who are at the gates. Similarly, if you want to enter heaven, you must worship Brahman as prāṇa. As you do so, you should attribute to prāṇa the qualities of Àditya and annāda—that is, of brightness and strength. If. prāṇa is pleased with you, you have no difficulty attaining heaven.
- Atha, next
- yaḥ asya dakṣiṇaḥ suṣiḥ, that which is its southern passage
- saḥ vyānaḥ, that is vyāna
- tat śrotram, that is [also] the ear
- saḥ candramāḥ, [and] that is the moon
- tat etat, it is that
- śrīḥ ca yaśaḥ iti upāsīta, meditate on as prosperity and fame
- yaḥ evam veda, he who knows this
- śrīmān yaśasvī bhavati, becomes fortunate and famous.
note Vyāna is the air that is spread all over the body. It is also the breath you need when you are doing some hard work. Vyāna is the door, or passage, in the southern part of the heart, and it is connected with hearing and the moon. A person learns by hearing, so the ear is said to be the source of knowledge. The moon is the source of food, which gives a person strength, and from strength and knowledge a person acquires prosperity and fame. By worshipping vyāna as Brahman a person can attain heaven, which is his primary concern, and secondarily he attains prosperity and fame.
- Atha, next
- yaḥ asya prātyāṅsuṣiḥ, that which is its western passage
- saḥ apānaḥ, that is apāna
- sā vāk, that is [also] vāk [word]
- saḥ agniḥ, [and] that is fire
- tat etat, it is that [Brahman as apāna]
- brahmavarcasam ca annādyam iti upāsīta, meditate on as the radiance of Brahman [that comes from living a disciplined life and from scholarship] and as food
- yah evam veda, he who knows this
note Apāna’s function is to remove all waste from the body. It is connected with speech and fire. Brahmavarcasa is the radiance a person acquires when he has much scholarship and has led a disciplined life. One who meditates on apāna as Brahman acquires this radiance and also food.
- Atha, next
- yaḥ asya udaṅsuṣiḥ, that which is its northern passage
- saḥ samānaḥ, that is samāna
- tat manaḥ, that is [also] the mind
- saḥ parjanyaḥ, [and] that is the god of rain
- tat etat, it is that [Brahman as samāna]
- kīrtiḥ ca vyuṣṭiḥ ca iti upāsīta, meditate on as fame and beauty
- yaḥ evam veda, he who knows this
- kīrtimān vyuṣṭimān bhavati, becomes famous and beautiful.
note Samāna is so called because it digests all food and drink and makes them equal (sama). The mind and rain are connnected with samāna, and since fame is connected with the mind, it is attributed to samāna. Like fame, physical beauty is also the result of samāna.
- Atha, next
- yaḥ asya ūrdhvaḥ suṣiḥ, that which is its passage at the top [of the heart]
- saḥ udānaḥ, that is udāna
- saḥ vāyuḥ, that is [also] vāyu [air]
- saḥ ākāśaḥ, [and] that is ākāśa [space]
- tat etat, it is that [Brahman as udāna]
- ojaḥ ca mahaḥ ca
note There is an aperture at the upper part of the heart, and this is known as udāna. Air passes through this aperture from the feet to the head to help maintain the necessary operations of the body. The air that passes thus is also called udāna. Ākāśa (space) is the support of this udāna. Because udāna is one of the gateways to Brahman, it is meditated on as Brahman. If you do this, you become strong and famous. But, more important, you also attain heaven.
- Te vai ete pañca brahma-puruṣāḥ, these five [prāṇas] are the employees of Brahman
- svargasya lokasya dvārapāḥ, the gatekeepers of the heavenly world
- sāḥ yaḥ veda, he who knows
- etān pañca brahma-puruṣān, these five Brahma-puruṣas
- svargasya lokasya dvārapān, as gatekeepers of the heavenly world
- evam, thus
- asya kule vīraḥ jāyate, a heroic child is born in his family
- yaḥ etān pañca brahma-puruṣān evam svargasya lokasya dvārapān veda, he who knows these five Brahma-puruṣas thus as the gatekeepers of the heavenly world
- svargam lokam pratipadyate, attains the heavenly world.
note Here the advice is to regard everything as Brahman. If you practise thinking that everything is Brahman, you acquire self-restraint, which is the sine qua non of Self-realization. The advice here is to treat the five prāṇas with great respect, so that they may allow you to enter straight into heaven.
- Atha, next
- ataḥ paraḥ divaḥ, higher than this heaven
- yat jyotiḥ dīpyate, the light which shines
- viśvataḥ pṛṣṭheṣu, above the world
- sarvataḥ pṛṣṭheṣu, above everything
- anuttameṣu uttameṣu lokeṣu, in the highest worlds not excelled by any other world [known as satyaloka]
- idam vāva tat, it is that
- jyotiḥ, light
- yat idam asmin antaḥ puruṣe, which is the same as in a human being.
note Brahman is said to be above everything else. It is the highest and the best. It shines in the highest world and it also shines in the heart of a human being.
- Tasya, its [i.e., of the Self in the bodies]
- eṣā dṛṣṭiḥ, this visible [proof]
- yatra, when
- etat asmin śarīre, in this body
- saṃsparśena, by touch
- uṣṇimānam, warmth
- vijānāti, one can feel
- tasya eṣā śrutiḥ, this audible [proof] of it
- yatra etat karṇau apigṛhya, when one covers the ears
- ninadam iva, like the sound of a moving chariot
- nadathuḥ iva, like the bellowing of a bullock
- agneḥ iva jvalataḥ, like the sound of a burning fire
- upaśṛṇoti, one can hear
- tat etat, that [light]
- iti upāsīta, one should meditate on
- dṛṣṭam ca śrutam ca, as seen and as heard
- yaḥ evam veda, he who knows this
- cakṣuṣyaḥ śrutaḥ bhavati, becomes worth seeing and famous. Iti trayodaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the thirteenth section.
note What proof is there that there is any light in the heart? One proof is the warmth of the body. This warmth comes from the light within. But there is yet another proof: If you cover your ears you will hear all manner of sounds. The sounds and the feeling of warmth both prove that Brahman is within.
- Sarvam idam, all this
- khalu
- no doubt
- brahma, is Brahman
- tajjalān, from this everything comes, into this everything disappears, and on this everything is sustained
- iti śāntaḥ upāsīta, meditate on this fact quietly
- atha khalu kratumayaḥ puruṣaḥ, because each person has a mind of his own
- asmin loke, [therefore] in his present life
- yathā kratuḥ puruṣaḥ bhavati, just as a person wills
- itaḥ pretya tathā bhavati, he becomes that when he leaves this world
- saḥ kratum kurvīta, [therefore] he should be careful about what he wants.
note The word brahman means ‘the oldest,’ ‘the biggest.’ Tejas (fire), jala (water), and pṛthivī (earth) emerged from Brahman in that order, so they are called tajja. Then they disappear in Brahman in the reverse order, so they are called talla. In the past, in the present, and in the future—they are sustained in Brahman. They are, therefore, one with Brahman. The Upaniṣad says here to think over this with kratu—that is, with great effort, and with deep concentration. Kratu also means will, or will power. It is your will that decides your destiny. Śrī Kṛṣṇa said to Arjuna (Bhagavad Gītā 8.6): ‘O son of Kunti, at the time of death when a person leaves the body, he attains whatever object he thinks of, as he has been [previously] constantly absorbed in its thought.’ This shows the importance of your kratu.
- Manomayaḥ, dominated by the mind
- prāṇaśarīraḥ, with a subtle body
- bhārūpaḥ, whose body is luminous
- satyasaṅkalpaḥ, whose thoughts always prove true
- ākāśātmā, spotless like the sky
- sarvakarmā, whose creation is this world
- sarvakāmaḥ, whose desires are always pure
- sarvagandhaḥ, who possesses good odours
- sarvarasaḥ, whose tastes are all pure
- idam sarvam abhyāttaḥ, this is all-pervasive
- avākī anādaraḥ, has no sense organs and no desires.
note This is how you meditate on your Self. You have a mind, and with the help of that mind you can decide what you will or will not do. You have a subtle body consisting of the five organs of action (pañca karmendriyas), the five organs of perception (pañca jñānendriyas), the vital breath in its five forms (prāṇa, apāna, vyāna, udāna, and samāna), plus the mind and the intellect. You are luminous. Whatever you wish for, you acquire. You are spotless, like the sky, and all-pervasive. You are the sole doer of things. You are the source of all desires, and all your desires are pure. You are also the source of all odours and tastes. You have no organs, and you are everywhere. There is nothing you have not already achieved.
- Eṣaḥ me ātmā, this my Self
- antaḥ hṛdaye, inside the heart
- aṇīyān, smaller than
- vrīheḥ vā, a grain of rice
- yavāt vā, or a grain of barley
- sarṣapāt vā, or a mustard seed
- śyāmākāt vā, or a grain of millet
- śyāmākataṇḍulāt vā, or the kernel of a grain of millet
- eṣaḥ me ātmā antaḥ hṛdaye, this Self within my heart
- jyāyān pṛthivyā, is larger than the earth
- jyāyān antarikṣāt, larger than the mid-region
- jyāyān divaḥ, larger than heaven
- jyāyān ebhyaḥ lokebhyāḥ, larger than all these worlds.
note The underlying idea in the verse is that the Self is everything and everywhere. It is therefore smaller than the smallest and bigger than the biggest.
- Yaḥ, he who
- sarvakarmā, is the sole creator of everything
- sarvakāmaḥ, whose desires are the desires of all
- sarvagandhaḥ, whose odours are the odours of all
- sarvarasaḥ, whose tastes are the tastes of all
- sarvam idam abhyāttaḥ, who is in all this
- avākī, who is without any organs
- anādaraḥ, who is not interested in anything
- eṣaḥ me ātmā antaḥ hṛdaye, this Self of mine is within my heart
- etat brahma, this is Brahman
- itaḥ pretya, upon leaving this body
- etam abhisambhavitāsmi iti, I shall attain him
- yasya syāt addhā, one who has this kind of belief
- na vicikitsā asti, has no doubt in his mind
- iti ha sma āha śāṇḍilyaḥ, this is what Śāṇḍilya said
- śāṇḍilyaḥ, [this is what] Śāṇḍilya [said]. Iti caturdaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the fourteenth section.
note The word Self here means the Cosmic Self (Paramātman). If you believe that you are the Cosmic Self, and that you will be free as soon as your prārabdha karma (the results of your past actions that are now bearing fruit) is exhausted and your
- Kośaḥ, the chest
- antarikṣa-udaraḥ, with the midregion as its inside
- bhūmi-budhnaḥ, the earth as its bottom
- na jīryati, never decays
- diśaḥ, the quarters
- hi asya sraktayaḥ, are its sides
- dyauḥ, the heaven
- asya uttaram bilam, is its opening above
- saḥ eṣaḥ kośaḥ, this chest
- vasudhānaḥ, [is] the container of treasures
- tasmin, in it
- viśvam idam śritam, rests this universe.
note The universe is here compared to a chest. Whatever you put inside a chest is safe there. Similarly, whatever is in the universe is safe and sound. It may change its form, but it does not totally disappear.
- Prācī dik, the eastern quarter
- tasya, of it [i.e., of the chest]
- juhūḥ nāma, is called juhū [after the vessel used for offering oblations facing the east]
- dakṣiṇā, the southern [quarter]
- sahamānām nāma, is named sahamānā
- pratīcī, the western [quarter]
- rājñī nāma, is named rājñī [because the western sky is red in the evening]
- udīcī, the northern [quarter]
- subhūtā nāma, is named subhūtā [because those who are rich dominate this quarter]
- vāyaḥ, air
- tāsām, their [i.e., the quarters’]
- vatsaḥ, son
- saḥ yaḥ etam veda, he who knows this
- vāyum diśām vatsam, that Vāyu is the child of the quarters
- putrarodam na roditi, does not have to weep over the loss of his child
- saḥ aham etam evam veda, I know this thus
- vāyum diśām vatsam, that Vāyu is the son of the quarters
- mā putrarodam rudam, may I not have to weep over the loss of my child.
note The eastern quarter is called juhū because you face that direction when you offer that oblation in the sacrifice. The southern side is sahamānā because sinners go to that quarter to suffer the consequences of the sins they commit. The western side is called rājñī because when the sun sets in that direction, the sky becomes red. Subhūtā is the name of the northern side, because it is dominated by Śiva, Kubera, and other deities of good fortune. Vāyu (air) is considered the child of the quarters because it arises from the quarters. If you believe that Vāyu is immortal and is the child of the quarters, you will then never suffer the loss of your child.
- Amunā amunā amunā, for the sake of that [child’s life], for the sake of that [child’s life], for the sake of that [child’s life]
- ariṣṭam kośam, in the immortal chest
- prapadye, I take refuge
- amunā amunā amunā, for the sake of that [child’s life—etc.]
- prāṇam prapadye, I take refuge in prāṇa
- amunā amunā amunā, for the sake of that [child’s life—etc.]
- bhūḥ prapadye, I take refuge in bhūh [the earth]
- amunā amunā amunā, for the sake of that [child’s life—etc.]
- bhuvaḥ prapadye, I take refuge in bhuvaḥ [the mid-region]
- amunā amunā amunā, for the sake of that [child’s life—etc.]
- svaḥ prapadye, I take refuge in svah [heaven].
note For the welfare of your child, surrender to every power on earth, in the mid-region, and in heaven. Repeat this three times, each time saying the name of the child thrice. Here the word amunā has been used instead of the name of the child.
- Saḥ yat avocam, when I said
- prāṇam prapadye iti, I take refuge in prāṇa
- prāṇaḥ vai idam sarvam bhūtam, I meant prāṇa is everything
- yat idaṃ kiñca, whatever is here [visible]
- tat, therefore
- tam eva prāpatsi, I am under the care of that [prāṇa].
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Atha, next
- yat avocam, when I said
- bhūḥ prapadye hi, I take refuge in bhūḥ [the earth]
- iti eva tat avocam, it is this that I meant
- pṛthivīm prapadye, I take refuge in the earth
- antarikṣam prapadye, I take refuge in the mid-region
- divam prapadye, I take refuge in heaven.
note That is to say, I meant that I had taken refuge in all the three worlds.
- Atha, next
- yat avocam, when I said
- bhuvaḥ prapadye hi, I take refuge in bhuvaḥ [the mid-region]
- hi eva tat avocam, it is this that I meant
- agnim prapadye, I take refuge in fire
- vāyum prapadye, I take refuge in air
- ādityam prapadye, I take refuge in the sun.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Atha, next
- yat avocam, when I said
- svaḥ prapadye iti, I take refuge in svaḥ [heaven]
- iti eva tat avocam, it is this that I meant
- ṛg vedam prapadye, I take refuge in the Ṛg Veda
- yajur vedam prapadye, I take refuge in the Yajur Veda
- sāma vedam prapadye, I take refuge in the Sāma Veda
- tat avocam tat avocam, it is this that I meant, this that I meant. Iti pañcadaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the fifteenth section.
note One should first meditate on the immortal chest, and then repeat the mantras following the meditation. To emphasize the importance of the worship, the mantras are repeated again and again.
- Puruṣaḥ vāva yajñaḥ, the human body is like a sacrifice
- tasya yāni cāturviṃśati varṣāṇi, its first twenty-four years
- tat, that
- prātaḥ savanam, is the morning libation
- gāyatrī caturviṃśati akṣarā, the gāyatrī is constituted of twenty-four syllables
- gāyatram prātaḥ savanam, the morning libation is accompanied by the gāyatrī
- asya, of this [i.e., this sacrifice of the human body]
- tat, it [the morning libation covering the first twenty-four years]
- vasavaḥ, the deities called Vasus
- anvāyattāḥ, are connected
- prāṇāḥ vāva vasavaḥ, the prāṇas [together with the sense organs] are the Vasus
- hi, for
- ete, these [Vasus]
- idam sarvam, everything in this [world]
- vāsayanti, cause to live [and they themselves also live (vasu)].
note In the previous section, meditation and repetition of certain mantras was recommended for the long life of one’s children. The same thing is being recommended now for one’s own life. Here the meditation is that one’s life is a sacrifice, and that the first twenty-four years are the morning offering. This offering is connected with the gāyatrī, which has twenty-four syllables. The Vasus are also connected with this offering, and they are thought of as the organs, which abide (vasu) and which also make others abide.
- Cet, if
- etasmin vayasi, within these [twenty-four] years of his life
- tam kiñcit upatapet, something troubles him
- saḥ brūyāt, he will say
- prāṇāḥ, O Prāṇas
- vasavaḥ, O Vasus
- idam me prātaḥ savanam, this, my morning libation
- mādhyandinam savanam, to the midday libation
- anusantanuta iti, extend
- mā aham, may I not
- yajñaḥ, as the sacrifice
- madhye prāṇānām vasūnām, in the midst of the prāṇas, who are the Vasus
- vilopsīya iti, disappear
- tataḥ ha eva ut-eti, he gets rid of that [ailment]
- agadaḥ ha bhavati, [and] becomes well.
note W SRrīTñī: 5fFTT ^ ^ iūḍpñ II 3 II
- Atha, then
- yāni catuścatvāriṃśat varṣāṇi, that which is the next forty-four years
- tat, that
- mādhyandinam savanam, is the midday libation
- triṣṭup catuścatvāriṃśat akṣarā, the triṣṭubh metre is constituted of forty-four syllables
- traiṣṭubham mādhyandinam savanam, the midday libation is accompanied by a hymn in the triṣṭubh metre
- asya, of this [i.e., this sacrifice of the human body]
- tat, it [the midday libation covering the next forty-four years]
- rudrāḥ, the deities called Rudras
- anvāyattāḥ, are connected
- prāṇāḥ vāva rudrāḥ, the prāṇas [together with the sense organs] are the Rudras
- hi, for
- ete, these [Rudras]
- idam sarvam rodayanti, make everyone in this world weep.
note The sense organs become very powerful when a person has reached middle age, and they may make him do things he will regret and for which he will have to ‘weep.’ In this sacrifice, these next forty-four years correspond to the midday worship. The libation offered at this worship is accompanied by a hymn in the triṣṭubh metre, which has forty-four syllables. In this way, one can easily meditate on a human being as a ritualistic sacrifice.
- Cet, if
- etasmin vayasi, within these [forty-four] years of his life
- tam kiñcit upatapet, something troubles him
- saḥ brūyāt, he will say
- prāṇāḥ, O Prāṇas
- rudrāḥ, O Rudras
- idam me mādhyandinam savanam, this, my midday libation
- tṛtīya savanam, to the third libation
- anusantanuta iti, extend
- mā aham, may I not
- yajñaḥ, as the sacrifice
- prāṇānām rudrāṇām madhye, in the midst of the prāṇas, who are the Rudras
- vilopsīya iti, disappear
- tataḥ ha eva ut-eti, he gets rid of that [ailment]
- agadaḥ ha bhavati, [and] becomes well.
note The idea behind this prayer is: ‘O Rudras, you are like my life. I am the sacrifice, and now the midday libation is going on. Will you please extend this libation so that I may do the third libation without a break [that is, may I live long enough to do the evening libation]? I am the sacrifice, and I don’t want the sacrifice to be stopped before it reaches the end. And I don’t want to be separated from the Rudras, who are like my life.’ If the afflicted person (who is the sacrifice) keeps praying like this, he will then get well and be fully fit again.
- Atha, next
- yāni aṣṭācatvāriṃśat varṣāṇi, that which is the next forty-eight years
- tat, that
- tṛtīya savanam, is the third libation
- jagatī aṣṭācatvāriṃśat akṣarā, the jagatī metre is constituted of forty-eight syllables
- jāgatam tṛtīya savanam, the third libation is accompanied by a hymn in the jagatī metre
- asya, of this [i.e., this sacrifice of the human body]
- tat, it [the third libation covering the next forty-eight years]
note A human being is supposed to live a total of a hundred and sixteen years, which has three phaṣes: the first twenty-four years, the next forty-four years, and the last forty-eight years. When this life is thought of as a sacrifice, the first twenty-four years would be the morning offering, the next forty-four years would be the midday offering, and the last forty-eight years would be the evening offering. Just as the morning libation is connected with the Vasus, so the first twenty-four years of one’s life are also connected with the Vasus. The gāyatrī is sung during the morning offering, and it has twenty-four syllables. The offering made at midday is connected with the Rudras, and it is accompanied by a hymn in the triṣṭubh metre, having forty-four syllables. Then the evening offering is connected with the Ādityas, and it is sung in the jagatī metre, having forty-eight syllables. The concept of a human life as a sacrifice arises from the similarity to the components of a ritualistic sacrifice.
- Cet, if
- etasmin vayasi, within these [forty-eight] years of his life
- tam kiñcit upatapet, something troubles him
- saḥ brūyāt, he should say
- prāṇāḥ, O Prāṇas
- ādityāḥ, O Ādityas
- idam me tṛtīya savanam, this, my evening libation
- āyuḥ, to the full length
- anusantanuta iti, extend
- mā aham, may I not
- yajñaḥ, as the sacrifice
- prāṇānām ādityānām madhye, in the midst of the prāṇas, who are the Ādityas
- vilopsīya iti, disappear
- tataḥ ha eva ut-eti, he gets rid of that [ailment]
- agadaḥ ha eva bhavati, [and] becomes well.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Etat ha vai vidvān, having known this
- mahidāsaḥ aitareyaḥ, Mahidāsa Aitareya, the son of Itarā
- āha sma, said
- saḥ [i.e
- , tvam] kim me etat upatapasi, O disease, why are you troubling me
- yaḥ aham anena na preṣyāmi iti, who for certain will not die of this
- saḥ, he [Mahidāsa Aitareya]
- ha ṣoḍaśam varṣaśatam, one hundred and sixteen years
- ajīvat, lived
- yaḥ evam veda, he who knows thus
- ha -ṣoḍaśam varṣaśatam prajīvati, also lives one hundred and sixteen years Iti ṣoḍaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the sixteenth section.
note Mahidāsa is an example of one who conquered death by his knowledge and strong will.
- Saḥ, he [the person who is performing the puruṣa sacrifice just mentioned]
- yat aśiśiṣati, that he wants to eat
- yat pipāsati, that he wants to drink
- yat na ramate, that he has no desire to indulge in sense pleasure
- tāḥ, all these
- asya dīkṣaḥ, are the initiation rites [to perform the sacrifice].
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Atha, after this
- yat aśnāti, what he eats
- yat pibati, what he drinks
- yat ramate, the pleasure he enjoys
- tat upasadaiḥ eti, that is his upasad [when one fasts by only taking milk or water].
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Atha, next
- yat hasati, he laughs
- yat jakṣati, he eats
- yat maithunam carati, he indulges in sense pleasure
- stuta-śastraiḥ eva tat eti, they are like [the sounds of] the stutas and śastras [certain hymns and mantras recited during the sacrifice].
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Atha, next
- yat tapaḥ, the austerity
- dānam, charity
- ārjavam, straightforwardness
- ahiṃsā, non-violence
- satyavacanam, truthfulness
- iti tāḥ, all these [good qualities]
- asya, of him [the person who regards his life as a sacrifice]
- dakṣiṇāḥ, are the special fee paid after the sacrifice.
note These qualities of austerity, charity, etc., are an additional gain, besides what you get by living a life as if it is a sacrifice. These moral qualities and the life you live both contribute much to the growth of your religious life.
- Tasmāt, therefore
- āhuḥ, it is said
- soṣyati, will give birth to
- asoṣṭa iti, has given birth to
- punaḥ utpādanam eva, [because] it is a rebirth
- tat maraṇam eva asya, the death of the person
- avabhṛthaḥ, is the conclusion of the sacrifice.
note Life is a kind of sacrifice, but when a person dedicates his life as such, he is said to be reborn. The words soṣyati and asoṣṭa are used when a mother is about to give birth, or has given birth, to a child. But they are also used at the time when someone is about to begin performing a sacrifice (soṣyati), or has already begun performing it (asoṣṭa), because it is his rebirth. When death comes to the person who treats his life as a sacrifice, it is the end of the sacrifice, just as it is the end of his life. Just as aṭ the end of a sacrifice, a person bathes and puts on new clothes, so also, when a person dies, his body is bathed and new clothes are put on it. The treatment is the same, whether the sacrifice is that person’s life or it is the usual sacrificial ritual. And the words used on both occasions are the same. This makes the similarity between the ritualistc sacrifice and life as a sacrifice more meaningful.
- Tat ha etat, this [truth]
- ghoraḥ āṅgirasaḥ, the sage Ghora, of the family of Aṅgirasa
- kṛṣṇāya devakīputrāya uktvā, having taught to Kṛṣṇa, the son of Devakī
- apipāsaḥ, free from desire
- eva saḥ babhūva, he [Kṛṣṇa] became
- uvāca, [Ghora] said
- saḥ, a person
- antavelāyām, at the time of death
- etat trayam, these three [mantras]
- pratipadyeta, should take refuge in
- akṣitam asi, you never decay
- acyutam asi, you never change
- prāṇasaṃśitam asi iti, you are the essence of life
- tatra, in this connection
- ete dve ṛcau bhavataḥ, there are these two Ṛk mantras.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Ādit, [has no meaning except that it introduces a new line of thought]
- pratnasya, ancient
- retasaḥ, seed [of the world]
- jyotiḥ, light [manifestation]
- paśyanti, they see [eveṛywhere]
- vāsaram, daylight [i.e., as all-pervasive]
- paraḥ, the best
- yat, that which
- idhyate, shines
- divi, in heaven [i.e., in Para-Brahman], Tamasaḥ, darkness [i.e., ignorance]
- pari, beyond [dispels]
- uttaram, the best
- jyotiḥ, light
- paśyantaḥ, having seen
- svaḥ, in oneself [i.e., in one’s own heart]
- devam, bright
- devatrā, among all the gods
- sūryam, the sun
- vayam ut-aganma, we have attained
- jyotiḥ uttamam iti jyotiḥ uttamam iti, the best light, the best light. Iti saptadaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the seventeenth section.
note The greatest light is that which dispels the darkness of ignorance. Having seen this light within our own hearts, we have attained that shining god who is the Supreme Light of all. There is an eternal light which is the cause of this universe. This light is the source of the light we see in the luminous Jodies such as the sun, the moon, and the stars. This light is everywhere. Everything in this phenomenal universe moves and works the way it does because of this light. Those who have lived a life of self-discipline, with their minds on the highest thoughts, and have thereby acquired a pure heart, can see this light. They see it within themselves and they also see it outside. They know this light as their own Self and as the Self of all. They know this light as Para Brahman.
- Manaḥ brahma iti upāsīta, meditate on the mind as Brahman
- iti adhyātmam, this is so far as the body and mind is concerned
- atha adhidaivatam, next is [the meditation] on the elements and the worlds
- ākāśaḥ brahma iti, space is Brahman
- ubhayam ādiṣṭam bhavati, two ways [of meditation] are advised
- adhyātmam ca adhidaivatam ca, adhyātma and adhidaivata.
note Brahman is extremely subtle. Similarly, the mind is also subtle. And it is in the mind that Brahman can be realized. This is why it is comparatively easy to think that the mind is Brahman. In the same way, ākāśa (space) is also close to Brahman. Like Brahman, it is vast, invisible, all-pervasive, and without any attributes whatsoever. It is therefore appropriate to meditate on ākāśa as Brahman.
- Tat etat catuṣpāt brahma, this Brahman [as the mind] is fourfold
- vāk pādaḥ, speech is a foot
- prāṇaḥ pādaḥ, prāṇa [the vital force] is a foot
- cakṣuḥ pādaḥ, the eyes are a foot
- śrotram pādaḥ, the ears are a foot
- iti adhyātmam, this is the adhyātma [meditation—i.e., on the body and mind]
- atha adhidaivatam, next, the meditation relating to the elements and worlds
- agniḥ pādaḥ, fire is a foot
- vāyuḥ pādaḥ, air is a foot
- ādityaḥ pādaḥ, the sun is a foot
- diśaḥ pādaḥ, the quarters are a foot
- ubhayam ādiṣṭam bhavati, two ways [of meditation] are advised
- adhyātmam ca adhidaivatam ca, adhyātma and adhidaivata.
note The word pāda is not to be taken literally, for Brahman has no feet. Brahman is infinite, but here it is conceived as having four feet—as if it is covering the whole universe with them. Pāda also means a quarter, or a part. First let us imagine our mind and body together as Brahman. This is a meditation on the adhyātma level. Then let us imagine that this Brahman has four feet. What are the four feet? They are the organ of speech, the vital breath, the eyes, and the ears. We can also do this meditation on the adhidaivata level—that is, as the worlds and the elements. First, let us imagine Brahman as ākāśa, space. Brahman’s four feet would then be fire (agni), air (vāyu), the sun (āditya), and the quarters (diśa). A cow has four feet to take it where it wants to go. Similarly, a human being is guided to where he wants to go by his organ of speech, his organ of smelling, his eyes, and his ears. Again, just as the four legs and feet of a cow come out of her body, in the same way, fire, air, the sun, and the quarters seem to come out of space
- Vāk eva brahmaṇaḥ caturthaḥ pādaḥ, speech is the fourth foot of [manomaya] Brahman
- agninā jyotiṣā, by the light it gets from fire
- saḥ bhāti ca tapati ca, it shines and gives heat
- yaḥ evam veda, he who knows thus
- bhāti ca tapati ca, shines and radiates warmth
- kīrtyā, through good work
- yaśasā, through fame
- brahmavarcasena, through the radiance that comes from a scholarly and disciplined life.
note Animals move where they want by their feet. Similarly, people find their way to Brahman by hearing someone speak about it. This is why the organ of speech is called one of the four feet of Brahman. Fire gives both light and heat. And because fire is the presiding deity of speech, speech also is said to give light and heat. A person who can speak well acquires fame and popularity; It is as if he has done much good work, or has given away much money in charity, or is a great scholar and has lived a disciplined life. Such a person has a shining personality and radiates heat (i.e., energy).
- Prāṇaḥ eva brahmaṇaḥ caturthaḥ pādaḥ, prāṇa [the organ of smelling] is the fourth foot of [manomaya] Brahman
- vāyunā jyotiṣā, by the light it gets from air [its presiding deity]
- saḥ bhāti ca tapati ca, it shines and gives heat
- yaḥ evam veda, he who knows thus
- bhāti ca tapati ca, shines and radiates warmth
- kīrtyā, through good work
- yaśasā, through fame
- brahmavarcasena, through the radiance that comes from a scholarly and disciplined life.
note Vāyu, air, is the presiding deity of the organ of smell, because vāyu carries odours and reveals them.
- Cakṣuḥ eva brahmaṇaḥ caturthaḥ pādaḥ, the organ of vision is the fourth foot of [manomaya] Brahman
- ādityena jyotiṣā, by the light it gets from the sun [its presiding deity]
- saḥ bhāti ca tapati ca, it shines and gives heat
- yaḥ evam veda, he who knows thus
- bhāti ca tapati ca, shines and radiates warmth
- kīrtyā, through good work
- yaśasā, through fame
- brahmavarcasena, through the radiance that comes from a scholarly and disciplined life.
note The eyes can distinguish colours because of the light they get from the sun. Just as cows can feel their way with their feet, similarly, human beings can recognize things through their eyes. When a person knows how the eyes serve as feet, he acquires fame, glory, and the brightness of Brahman, for he can then make good use of his eyes. He can read and learn the best things possible, things that transform him into a realized soul.
- Śrotram eva brahmaṇaḥ caturthaḥ pādaḥ, the organ of hearing is the fourth foot of [manomaya] Brahman
- digbhiḥ jyotiṣā, by the light it gets from [its presiding deity,] the quarters
- sāḥ bhāti ca tapati ca, it shines and gives heat
- yaḥ evam veda yaḥ evam veda, he who knows thus, he who knows thus
- bhāti ca tapati ca, shines and radiates warmth
- kīrtyā, through good work
- yaśasā, through fame
- brahmavarcasena, through the radiance that comes from a scholarly and disciplined life. Iti aṣṭādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the eighteenth section.
note The organ of hearing derives its power from the quarters, and through this organ we get knowledge. The results of that knowledge may be direct or indirect. True knowledge, however, is knowledge of Brahman. To emphasize this, ‘he who knows’ is repeated. This emphasis suggests that it is the knowledge of Brahman. The organ of hearing is our ‘foot’ because it is the means by which we can know Brahman. Those who know the importance of the organ of hearing and use it in the right way, acquire name, fame, and become radiant like Brahman. They will also eventually realize Brahman.
- Ādityaḥ brahma, Āditya [the sun] is Brahman
- iti ādeśaḥ, so it is said
- tasya upavyākhyānam, [here is] an explanation of that [statement]
- idam, this [universe of name and form]
- agre asat eva āsīt, was at first unmanifested [i.e., it was without its names and forms]
- [lest the word asat give the impression that the universe was like ‘a flower in the sky,’ it is said,] tat, this [universe with its names and forms in a subtle state]
- sat āsīt, became manifest
- tat, that [subtle universe]
- samabhavat, first emerged as a seed
- tat āṇḍam niravartata, that developed into an egg
- tat, it [i.e., the egg]
- saṃvatsarasya mātrām aśayata, lay still for a period of a year
- tat, it [the egg]
- nirabhidyata, split open
- te āṇḍakapāle, those two parts of the egg
- rajatam ca suvarṇam ca abhāvatām, turned silver and gold respectively.
note Earlier Āditya, the sun, was described as a foot of Brahman. Now this is being explained. Many people think that the universe was created. But Vedānta says that something cannot be created out of nothing. The universe has always existed, though sometimes it exists like a seed—invisible and without any names and forms. But why is the sun being called Brahman? Because without the sun there is only darkness, and we are then not conscious of this universe with its names and forms. The universe is non-existent then. And in the absence of the universe, there is no way of knowing that Brahman exists, for it is this universe with its names and forms that makes us aware that Brahman is behind everything. Brahman manifests itself as this universe.
- Tat yat rajatam, that [half] which is silver
- sā iyam pṛthivī, that is this earth
- yat suvarṇam, that [half] which is gold
- sā dyauḥ, that is heaven
- yat jarāyu, that which is the thick membrane
- te parvatāḥ, they are the mountains
- yat ulbam, that which is the thin membrane
- sameghaḥ nīhāraḥ, are the clouds and mist
- yāḥ dhamanayaḥ, that which are the veins
note It has already been stated that at a certain point in time the cosmos takes the shape of an egg, and after remaining in that state for a while, the egg splits in two. The lower part iṣ silver and represents the earth. The upper half is gold and represents heaven. The thick outer membrane around the baby represents the mountains, and the thin inner membrane represents the clouds and mist. The veins of the infant are likened to rivers, and the fluid inside the bladder to the ocean. It is to be noted that these diverse things have all come from one source.
- Atha, next
- yat tat ajāyata, that which was born
- saḥ asau ādityaḥ, it is that sun
- tam jāyamānam anu, after it was born
- ulūlavaḥ ghoṣāḥ, the sounds of ‘uh’
- sarvāṇi ca bhūtāni’, from all beings
- sarve ca kāmāḥ, and all desirable things
- udatiṣṭhan, came forth
- tasmāt, therefore
- udayam prati, at the rising
- pratyāyanam prati, at the setting
- tasya, of that [sun]
- ulūlavaḥ ghoṣāḥ, the sounds of ‘ulu’
- sarvāṇi ca bhūtāni, from all beings
- sarve ca kāmāḥ, and all desirable things
- anūttiṣṭhanti, appear.
note Here it is said that the sun was born from the egg. When a child is born, there is much jubilation in the house, and also in the neighbourhood. Even today, people in India sometimes make the sound of ‘ulu’ on such occasions. Not only that, many precious gifts are also exchanged.
- Saḥ yaḥ etam evam vidvān, he who knows this as such
- ādityam brahma iti upāste, [and] worships the sun as Brahman
- abhyāśaḥ, soon
- ha, surely
- ya, enam āgaccheyuḥ, to him come
- sādhavaḥ ghoṣāḥ, pleasant sounds
- ca upa-nimreḍeran ca nimreḍeran and also good things to enjoy, good things to enjoy. [The repetition marks the end of the chapter.] It ekonaviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the nineteenth section. Iti chāndogyopaniṣadi tṛtīyaḥ adhyāyaḥ, here ends the third chapter of the Chāndogya Upaniṣad.
- Pautrāyaṇaḥ, the grandson
- jānaśrutiḥ, the son of Janaśruta
- śraddhādeyaḥ, gave away in charity with due respect
- bahudāyī, gave many gifts
- bahupākyaḥ, cooked large quantities of food for free distribution
- āsa ha, it happened like this
- saḥ, he [Jānaśruti]
- sarvataḥ, from all quarters
- me annam, my food
- atsyanti, [people] will eat
- iti, this [i.e., with this thought in mind]
- sarvataḥ eva, in all directions
- āvasathān, rest-houses
- māpayāñcakre, built.
note There was once a king named Jānaśruti, who was the great-grandson of Janaśruta. He was a highly charitable person. He not only made large donations, but whatever he gave he gave with love and respect. Every day large quantities of food were cooked and he fed many people. He also had rest-houses built all over the country. He wanted people to come, stay in those rest-houses, and enjoy his food.
- Atha ha, once
- haṃsāḥ, swans [i.e., some sages who had taken the form of swans]
- niśāyām, at night
- atipetuḥ, were flying
- tat, then
- haṃsaḥ, one of the swans
- evam ha abhyuvāda, loudly said
- haṃsam, to the other swan
- ho ho ayi bhallākṣa bhallākṣa, hey, you short-sided one [don’t you see?]
- jānaśruteḥ pautrāyaṇasya jyotiḥ, the light [emanating] from Jānaśruti
- divā, in the sky
- samam ātatam, has spread like daylight
- tat, that [light]
- mā prasāṅkṣīḥ, don’t touch
- tat tvā mā pradhākṣī iti, don’t let it burn you.
note One evening the king was resting on the roof of his palace and he noticed a couple of swans flying above him in the sky. These swans were actually sages or gods in disguise. Just then the swan flying behind joked with the one ahead about the king, within the king’s hearing.
- Paraḥ, the other [i.e., the swan in front]
- pratyuvāca, replied
- are kam u enam etat santam, [feigning contempt and a mood to debate] say, who is this one
- sayugvānam raikvam iva āttha iti, you are talking as if he were Raikva with the cart
- yaḥ nu katham sayugvā raikvaḥ iti, [the other swan asked] who is this Raikva with the cart that you are referring to?
note What the swan in front meant was: ‘This prince is a worthless fellow. He by no means deserves the honour you are paying him. You are talking of him as if he had attained Self-knowledge—as if he were a great person like Sayugvā Raikva (that is, Raikva who rides the small cart).’ But the other swan did not know who this Sayugvā Raikva was.
- Yathā, just as
- kṛtāya-vijitāya, if a person wins the toss of dice called kṛta
- adhareyāḥ, all lower tosses [i.e., tretā, three
- dvāpara, two
- and kali, one]
- samyanti, are included [i.e., are also won]
- evam, in the same way
- yat kiñca prajāḥ sādhu kurvanti, whatever good work people do
- enam sarvam tat abhisamaiti, all that comes under that one [i.e., it
note Kṛta is the highest number possible in a toss of dice, so it is said to include all the lower numbers within it. The swan says that Raikva is a person like kṛta, because he includes within himself all the good things that other people do. He is the sum total of all that is good in the world. If anyone has the knowledge that Raikva has, then he becomes the same as Raikva.
- U tat, that [what the swan said]
- jānaśrutiḥ pautrāyaṇa upaśuśrāva, the great-grandson of Janaśruta overheard
- saḥ ha sañjihānaḥ, he got up from his bed
- eva kṣattāram uvāca, and immediately said to his charioteer
- aṅga are, O my child
- sayugvānam iva raikvam āttha ha iti, do you compare me with Raikva with the cart
- yaḥ sayugvā raikva iti, who is this Raikva with the cart
- nu katham, what sort of person is he?
- Yathā, just as
- kṛtāya-vijitāya, if a person wins the toss of dice called kṛta
- adhareyāḥ, all lower tosses [i.e., tretā, three
- dvāpara, two
- and kali, one]
- samyanti, are included [i.e., are also won]
- evam, in the same way
- yat kiñca prajāḥ sādhu kurvanti, whatever good work people do
- enam sarvam tat abhisamaiti, all that comes under that one [i.e., it goes to the credit of Raikva]
- yaḥ tat veda, he who knows that
- yat saḥ veda, whatever he [Raikva] knows
- saḥ mayā etat uktaḥ iti, this is said of him by me.
note Jānaśruti was disturbed by what the swans had said about him. Maybe he could not be compared with Raikva, but in what way did Raikva excel over him? Who was this Raikva with a cart? Jānaśruti had a sleepless night. The next morning when he got up, the first thing he did was to question his attendant about this Raikva. He wanted to somehow find out in what respect Raikva was superior to him.
- Saḥ ha kṣattā, that attendant
- anviṣya, having looked [for Raikva]
- na avidam iti, thought ‘I have not found him’
- pratyeyāya, came back
- tam ha uvāca, [then Jānaśruti] said to him
- are yatra brāhmaṇasya anveṣaṇā, well, wherever brāhmins are to be found [i.e., in
note Jānaśruti’s attendant looked for Raikva in many places, but obviously they were unlikely places. Raikva could be found only in a quiet place, such as a forest or by the side of a river. It would be there that such a person would prefer to stay. So Jānaśruti asked the attendant to search in those places.
- Saḥ, he [the attendant]
- śakaṭasya adhastāt, [noticed a man sitting] under a cart
- pāmānam, with a rash on his skin
- kaṣamāṇam, scratching
- upa upaviveśa, he sat close to him
- tam ha abhyuvāda, he said to him
- tvam nu bhagavaḥ sayugvā raikva iti, Sir, are you Raikva with the cart
- aham hi arā iti, well, yes, I am the same
- pratijajñe, he admitted [rather contemptuously]
- saḥ ha kṣattā, that attendant
- avidam iti, thought ‘I have found him’
- pratyeyāya, came back. Iti prathamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, heṛe ends the first section.
- Tat u ha, next
- jānaśrutiḥ pautrāyaṇaḥ, the great-grandson of Janaśruta
- ṣaṭ śatāni gavām, six hundred cows
- niṣkam, a gold necklace
- aśvatarīratham, a chariot drawn by mules
- tat ādāya, that with him
- praticakrame, went [there]
- tam ha abhyuvāda, he said to him.
note Hearing the report from his attendant, and thinking that Raikva might be poor and in need of money, Jānaśruti went with some gifts to offer Raikva, so that Raikva would teach him.
- Raikva, O Raikva
- imāni, all these
- ṣaṭ śatāni gavām, six hundred cows
- ayam niṣkaḥ, this gold necklace
- ayam aśvatarīrathaḥ, this chariot drawn by mules
- bhagavaḥ, sir
- anuśādhi me, please teach me
- etām devatām, about the god
- yām devatām upāsse iti, that god which you worship.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Tam u, to him [Jānaśruti]
- ha paraḥ, the other [i.e., Raikva]
- pratyuvāca, replied
- aha śūdra, O you śūdra
- hāra-itvā, the necklace and chariot
- saha gobhiḥ, along with the cows
- tava eva astu iti, they may be with you
- tat u ha jānaśrutiḥ pautrāyaṇaḥ, then Jānaśruti Pautrāyaṇa
- punaḥ eva, again
- sahasram gavām, one thousand cows
- niṣkam, a gold necklace
- aśvatarīratham, a chariot drawn by mules
- duhitaram, his own daughter
- tat ādāya, taking that with him
- praticakrame, he went back.
note Jānaśruti was a kṣatriya. Why then did Raikva address him as a śūdra? Because Jānaśruti thought he could tempt Raikva to teach him Brahmavidyā, the knowledge of Brahman, through wealth. He did not understand
- Tam, to him [Raikva]
- ha abhyuvāda, [Jānaśruta] said
- raikva, O Raikva
- idam sahasram gavām, these thousand cows
- ayam niṣkaḥ, this gold necklace
- ayam aśvatarīrathaḥ, this chariot drawn by mules
- iyam jāyā, this wife [my daughter]
- ayam grāmaḥ, this village
- yasmin āsse, where you live
- [I am presenting all these to you]
- bhagavaḥ, sir
- eva anuśādhi iti, now please teach me.
note Jānaśruti offered Raikva many things, but most important, he offered his daughter in marriage and
- Tasyāḥ ha mukham upodgṛhṇan, lifting her face
- uvāca, [Raikva] said
- śūdra, O śūdra
- ajahāra, you have brought
- imāḥ, all these
- anena eva mukhena, by this face [or, mouth]
- ālāpayiṣyathā iti, you will make me speak
- te ha ete raikvaparṇāḥ nāma, these [villages] known as Raikvaparṇā
- mahāvṛṣeṣu, in the province of Mahāvṛṣa
- yatra, where
- uvāsa, [Raikva] lived
- asmai, [and where Raikva taught] him [i.e., Jānaśruti]
- tasmai ha uvāca, he said to him. Iti dvitīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the second section.
note Raikva was a brahmacārin. He had no home, and he lived an austere life. He had, however, attained Self-knowledge. When Jānaśruti approached him for spiritual instructions, he was unwilling. He did not like Jānaśruti’s offering him wealth. This is why he called him a śūdra. But When Jānaśruti offered him his daughter in marriage, Raikva was impressed by his keenness. He then agreed to teach him.
- Vāyuḥ vāva samvargaḥ, the air swallows everything
- yadā vai agniḥ udvāyati, when fire is extinguished
- vāyum eva apyeti, it disappears into the air
- yadā sūryaḥ astam eti, when the sun sets
- vāyum eva apyeti, it disappears into the air
- yadā candraḥ astam eti, when the moon sets
- vāyum eva apyeti, it disappears into the air.
note Earlier, the question of imparting spiritual instructions has been discussed. Here, how the instruction is given is being shown. The instruction begins with the forces of nature (adhidaivata)—by stressing the importance of air. Air can overcome everything, including even the sun, the moon, and fire.
- Yadā āpaḥ ucchuṣyanti, when water dries up
- vāyum eva apiyanti, it goes into the air
- vāyuḥ hi etān sarvān saṃvṛṅkte, the air swallows all these
- iti adhidaivatam, this is the worship of the forces of nature.
note This is to show that air is supreme. It can even destroy such a powerful thing as fire.
- Atha adhyātmam, now, that relating to the body
- prāṇaḥ vāva samvargaḥ, prāṇa [the vital force] swallows everything
- saḥ yadā svapiti, when a person is sleeping
- prāṇam eva vāk apyeti, speech disappears into prāṇa
- prāṇam cakṣuḥ, the eyes [disappear] into prāṇa
- prāṇam śrotram, the ears [disappear] into prāṇa
- prāṇam manaḥ, the mind [disappears] into prāṇa
- prāṇaḥ hi eva etān sarvān saṃvṛṇkte iti, prāṇa swallows all these.
note When a person falls asleep, the sense organs stop working. They retire into prāṇa, as if they have been swallowed by it.
- Tau vai etau dvau, these are those two
- samvargau, all-swallowing
- vāyuḥ eva deveṣu, the air among the gods
- prāṇaḥ prāṇeṣu, prāṇa [the vital breath] among the organs.
note Briefly, vāyu, air, is the source of fire, the sun, the moon, and water. Therefore one should worship vāyu as outside, in nature (adhidaivata). Likewise, prāṇa, the vital breath, is the source of speech, the eyes, the ears, and the mind, and therefore one should worship this prāṇa as within oneself (adhyātma).
- Atha ha, once
- śaunakam kāpeyam ca abhipratāriṇam kākṣasenim ca pariviṣyamāṇau, food was being served to Śaunaka, the son of Kapi, and Abhipratārin, the son of Kaksasena
- brahmacārī bibhikṣe, a brahmacārin
note Śaunaka and Abhipratārin were having their meals, and the cook was serving. Just then a brahmacārin came to them for some food. He was one who had attained the knowledge of Brahman. Śaunaka and Abhipratārin, however, wanted to see if the brahmacārin’s knowledge was genuine, so they did not give him anything.
- Saḥ ha uvāca, he [the brahmacārin] said
- ekaḥ devaḥ, one god
- mahātmanaḥ caturaḥ, four sages
- jagāra, swallowed
- kaḥ saḥ, who is that [god]
- bhuvanasya gopāḥ, the guardian of the world
- kāpeya abhipratārin, O Kāpeya, O Abhipratārin
- martyāḥ tam na abhipaśyanti, human beings cannot see him
- bahudhā vasantam, existing in many forms
- yasmai, for whom
- vai etat annam, this food
- tasmai, to him
- etat na dattam iti, did not give it.
note Fire, the sun, the moon, and water—these are said to be four sages. Air controls all these, and air is called the god Prajāpati. Similarly, prāṇa is also the god Prajāpati, and the sages are speech, the eyes, the ears, and the mind. Prajāpati is the protector of all, and he resides in diverse forms—sometimes within the human body (ādhyātmika), Sometimes in the forces of nature (ādhidaivika), and sometimes within other living beings (ādhibautika). People are ignorant about him and do not recognize him. They prepare food for him but do not know it, and they refuse to give it to him.
- Tat u ha, that [statement]
- śaunaka kāpeyaḥ pratimanvānaḥ, thought over
- pratyeyāya, [and then] went to him
- ātmā devānām, the self of all the gods and goddesses
- janitā, the creator
- prajānām, of all things [moving or unmoving]
- hiraṇyadaṃstraḥ, with teeth made of gold
- babhasaḥ, the eater
- anasūriḥ, intelligent
- mahāntam, great
- asya, its
- mahimānam, greatness
- āhuḥ, is so described
- anadyamānaḥ, uneatable
- yat, that
- anannam, no food
- atti, eats
- brahmacārin, O brahmacārin
- vayam, we
- idam vai ā-upāsmahe iti, worship this one
- datta asmai bhikṣām iti, give alms to him.
note Śaunaka told the brahmacārin: ‘It is not correct that we do not know him. We do know him. He is Prajāpati. He creates and also destroys everything. He is the self of all, and he is also the destṛoyer of all. He is supreme. All wise people worship him as such.’ Śaunaka then told his servant to give the brahmacārin some food.
- Tasmai, to him [the brahmacārin]
- u ha daduḥ, they gave [alms]
- te vai ete, all these
- pañca anye, five other [i.e., air, plus the four others (fire, the sun, the moon, and water) constituting its food]
- pañca anye, five other [i.e., prāṇa, plus the four others (speech, the eyes, the ears, and the mind) constituting its food]
- daśa santaḥ, make ten
- tat kṛtam, that is kṛta [the turn of the dice that swallows all others]
- tasmāt, therefore
- sarvāsu dikṣu daśa, these which are in the ten directions
- annam eva, are the food
- kṛtam, [and also] kṛta
- sā eṣā virāṭ, that is Virāṭ
- annādi, that which swallows
- tayā, by that [Virāṭ]
- sarvam idam dṛṣṭam, all this is seen
- yaḥ evam veda, he who knows thus
- asya sarvam idam dṛṣṭam bhavati, all this to him becomes seen
- annādaḥ bhavati, [and] he becomes an eater of food. Iti tṛtīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the third section.
note Prāṇa (the vital force), speech, the eyes, the ears, and the mind—these five represent our physical (adhyātmika) self. Air, fire, the sun, the moon, and water—these five represent nature (adhidaivika), which surrounds us. These ten together are compared to the dice throw called kṛta. Being the highest number, kṛta ‘swallows’ the other throws of dice, adds their numbers to itself, and then becomes ten. (Kṛta is 4, so the other numbers are 3, 2, and 1; therefore 4+3+2+1 = 10.) Then if is said that the adhyātmika and adhidaivika elements together are the ten quarters. They represent the whole world, so they are Virāṭ. This Virāṭ is both the eater and the food. The person who knows this then becomes Virāṭ.
- Satyakāmaḥ jābālaḥ ha, once Satyakāma Jābāla
- jabālām mātaram āmantrayāñcakre, said to his mother Jabālā
- brahmacaryam bhavati vivatsyāmi, O revered mother, I want to live as a brahmacārin [with a teacher]
- kim gotraḥ nu aham asmi iti, what is my lineage?
note To attain Self-realization, one has to practise austerities, study the scriptures, and live a life of self-discipline. The story of Satyakāma illustrates this.
- Sā, she [Jabālā]
- ha enam uvāca, said to him
- na aham etat veda, I don’t know this
- tāta, my son
- yat gotraḥ tvam asi, what your lineage is
- bahu aham carantī paricāriṇī, I was busy serving many people
- yauvane tvām alabhe, I had you when I was young
- sā etat, for this reason
- aham yat gotraḥ tvam asi na veda, I know nothing about what your lineage is
- jabālā tu nāma aham asmi, but my name is Jabālā
- satyakāmaḥ nāma tvam asi, your name is Satyakāma
- saḥ satyakāmaḥ eva jābālaḥ bruvīthāḥ iti, [when asked about your lineage] say this that you are Satyakāma Jābāla.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Saḥ ha hāridmmatam gautamam etya, he went to Gautama, the son of Haridrumata
- uvāca, [and] said
- brahmacaryam bhagavati vatsyāmi, revered sir, I wish to live [with you] as a celibate student
- upeyām bhagavantam iti, I have come to you, revered sir, [as a disciple].
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Tam ha uvāca, he [Gautama] said to him
- kim gotraḥ nu somya asi iti, O Somya, what is your lineage
- saḥ ha uvāca, he [Satyakāma] said
- na aham etat veda bhoḥ, I do not know this, sir
- yat gotraḥ aham asmi, of what lineage I am
- apṛccham mātaram, I asked my mother
- sā mā pratyabravīt, she said to me
- bahu aham carantī paricāriṇī, I was busy serving many people
- yauvane tvām alabhe, I had you when I was young
- sā etat, for this reason
- aham yat gotraḥ tvam asi na veda, I know nothing about what your lineage is
- jabālā tu nāma aham asmi, but my name is Jabālā
- satyakāmaḥ nāma tvam asi, your name is Satyakāma
- saḥ aham satyakāmaḥ jābālaḥ asmi bhoḥ iti, so I am Satyakāma Jābāla, sir.
note Jabālā told Satyakāma the truth and, should anyone ask him, she told him to tell the truth also—irrespective
- Tam ha uvāca, he [Gautama] said to him
- na etat abrāhmaṇaḥ vivaktum arhati, no non-brāhmin could speak like this
- samidham āhara, get some fuel
- somya, O Somya
- tvā upaneṣye, I shall initiate you
- na satyāt agāḥ iti, you have not deviated from truth
- tam upanīya, having initiated him
- kṛśānām abalānām catuḥśatāḥ gāḥ, four hundred thin and famished cows
- nirākṛtya uvāca, having chosen, he said
- somya, O Somya
- anusaṃvraja iti, take these away
- tāḥ abhiprasthāpayan, as he was leaving with them
- uvāca, he [Satyakāma] said
- na āvarteya asahasreṇa, I will not come back until they are a thousand in number
- saḥ ha varṣagaṇam provāsa, he lived away for a long time
- tāḥ yadā sahasram sampeduḥ, until they were a thousand. Iti caturthaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the fourth section.
note The point is, no matter what Satyakāma’s birth was, he had the qualities of a brāhmin—love of truth and learning. Though he had to suffer much hardship living in the forest looking after the cows, he was more concerned with keeping his word than with seeking physical comforts.
- Atha, then
- ha enam ṛṣabhaḥ abhyuvāda iti, a bull called to him [Satyakāma] saying
- satyakāma, O Satyakāma
- bhagavaḥ iti ha pratiśuśrāva, he replied, ‘Yes, lord’
- prāptāḥ somya sahasram smaḥ, we are now a thousand
- prāpaya naḥ ācāryakulam, lead us to the teacher’s house.
note Vāyu (air) is the presiding deity of the quarters (the directions). Being pleased with Satyakāma for the way he fulfilled his promise to his teacher, Vāyu entered the body of a bull and spoke to Satyakāma in a very heavy voice. Satyakāma recognized the deity, and so he addressed him as ‘lord.’
- Brahmaṇaḥ ca te pādam bravāṇi iti, [the bull said,] let me also tell you about a foot [a quarter] of Brahman
- bravītu me bhagavān iti, yes, lord, please tell me
- tasmai ha uvāca, [the bull] said to him
- prācī dik kalā, the east is one part [i.e., one sixteenth—a quarter of a quarter]
- pratīcī dik kalā, the west is one part
- dakṣiṇā dik kalā, the south is one part
- udīcī dik kalā, the north is one part
- eṣaḥ vai somya catuṣkalaḥ pādaḥ brahmaṇaḥ, O Somya, this is one foot of Brahman having four parts
- prakāśavān nāma, it is called Prakāśavān [the shining].
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Saḥ yaḥ etam evam vidvān, he who knows this thus
- catuṣkalam pādam brahmaṇaḥ, one foot [or quarter] of Brahman having four parts
- prakāśavān iti, known as the shining
- upāste, [and] meditates on it
- prakāśavān asmin loke bhavati, becomes famous in this world
- yaḥ etam evam vidvān, he who knows this thus
- catuṣkalam pādam brahmaṇaḥ, one foot of Brahman having four parts
- prakāśavān iti, known as the shining
- upāste, [and] meditates on it
- prakāśavataḥ ha lokān jayati, wins luminous worlds after death. Iti pañcamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the fifth section.
note If you worship Brahman as luminous, you yourself become luminous—that is, you become famous. But not only that, after your death you go to those luminous worlds where gods and goddesses live.
- Agniḥ te pādam vaktā iti, Agni [fire] will tell you about [another] foot
- saḥ ha śvaḥ-bhūte gāḥ abhiprasthāpayāñcakāra, the next day he led the cows [towards his teacher’s house]
- yatra sāyam, when it was dusk
- tāḥ abhi-babhūvuḥ, they arrived at a place
- tatra agnim upasamādhāya, having made a fire there
- gāḥ uparudhya, keeping the cows confined
- samidham ādhāya, having collected fuel
- paścāt agneḥ, behind the fire
- prāk upa-upaviveśa, sat facing the east.
note The next day Satyakāma finished his morning rites and then started for the teacher’s house with the cows. They halted for the night at a suitable spot, and after gathering the cows together, Satyakāma lit a fire and sat by it facing east. The bull had told him that Agni (fire) would teach him about another foot of Brahman. He began to wonder what Agni would say and when he would say it. He could not think of anything else.
- Agniḥ, fire
- tam abhyuvāda, called to him
- satyakāma iti, O Satyakāma
- bhagavaḥ iti ha pratiśuśrāva, he replied, ‘Yes, lord.’
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Somya, O Somya
- brahmaṇaḥ te pādam bravāṇi iti, I will now tell you about a foot of Brahman
- bravītu me bhagavān iti, yes, lord, please tell me
- tasmai ha uvāca, [fire] said to him
- pṛthivī kalā, the earth is one part
- antarikṣam kalā, the space between heaven and earth is one part
- dyauḥ kalā, heaven is one part
- samudraḥ kalā, the ocean is one part
- eṣaḥ vai somya catuṣkalaḥ pādaḥ brahmaṇaḥ, O Somya, these are the four parts that make up one foot of Brahman
- anantavān nāma, named Anantavān, the Unlimited.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Saḥ yaḥ etam evam vidvān, he who knows this thus
- catuṣkalam pādam brahmaṇaḥ, one foot of Brahman having four parts
- anantavān iti, known as the Unlimited
- upāste, [and] meditates on it
- anantavān asmin loke bhavati, becomes long-lived in this world
- yaḥ etam evam vidvān, he who knows this thus
- catuṣkalam pādam brahmaṇaḥ, one foot of Brahman having four parts
- anantavān iti, known as the Unlimited
- upāste, [and] meditates on it
- anantavataḥ ha lokān jayati, wins long-lasting worlds after death. Iti ṣaṣṭhaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the sixth section.
- Haṃsaḥ te pādam vaktā iti, the swan will tell you about [another] foot
- saḥ ha śvaḥ-bhūte gāḥ abhiprasthāpayāñcakāra, the next day he led the cows [towards his teacher’s house]
- yātra sāyam, when it was dusk
- tāḥ abhi-babhūvuḥ, they arrived at a place
- tatra agnim upasamādhāya, having made a fire there
- gāḥ uparudhya, keeping the cows confined
- samidham ādhāya, having collected fuel
- paścāt agneḥ, behind the fire
- prāk upa-upaviveśa, sat facing the east.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Haṃsaḥ upanipatya, the swan flew near
- tam abhyuvāda satyakāma iti, [and] called to him, ‘O Satyakāma’
- bhagavaḥ iti ha pratiśuśrāva, he replied, ‘Yes, lord.’
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Somya, O Somya
- brahmaṇaḥ te pādam bravāṇi iti, I will now tell you about a foot [quarter] of Brahman
- bravītu me bhagavān iti, yes, lord, please tell me
- tasmai ha uvāca, [the swan] said to him
- agniḥ kalā, fire is one part
- sūryaḥ kalā, the sun is one part
- candraḥ kalā, the moon is one part
- vidyut kalā, ūghtning is one part
- eṣaḥ vai somya catuṣkalaḥ pādaḥ brahmaṇaḥ, O Somya, these are the four parts that make up a foot of Brahman
- jyotiṣmān nāma, named Jyotiṣmān, the Luminous.
note The swan is speaking here of luminous things, such as fire, the sun, etc. Its partiality for luminous things gives rise to the suspicion that it is itself something luminous. It is, in fact, Āditya, the sun.
- Saḥ yaḥ etam evam vidvān, he who knows this thus
- catuṣkalam pādam brahmaṇaḥ, one foot [or quarter] of Brahman having four parts
- jyotiṣmān iti, known as the Luminous
- upāste, [and] meditates on it
- jyotiṣmān asmin loke bhavati, becomes illustrious in this world
- yaḥ etam evam vidvān, he who knows this thus
- catuṣkalam pādam brahmaṇaḥ, one foot of Brahman having four parts
- jyotiṣmān iti, known as the Luminous
- upāste, [and] meditates on it
- jyotiṣmataḥ ha lokān jayati, wins luminous worlds after death. Iti saptamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the seventh section.
note If you know luminous things well, you yourself become luminous—that is to say, famous—in this world. Then after death you win a luminous world. The idea is that you attain whatever you worship.
- Madguḥ te pādam vaktā iti, the diver-bird will tell you about [another] foot
- saḥ ha śvaḥ-bhūte gāḥ abhiprasthāpayāñcakāra, the next day he led the cows [towards his teacher’s house]
- yatra sāyam, when it was dusk
- tāḥ abhi-babhūvuḥ, they arrived at a place
- tatra agnim upasamādhāya, having made a fire there
- gāḥ uparudhya, keeping the cows confined
- samidham ādhāya, having collected fuel
- paścāt agneḥ, behind the fire
- prāk upa-upaviveśa, sat facing the east.
note The madgu, or diver-bird, is most of the time in water. Because of its close connection with water, and because water sustains life, the diver-bird stands for life (prāṇa).
- Madguḥ upanipatya, the diver-bird flew down
- tam abhyuvāda satyakāma iti, [and] called to him, ‘O Satyakāma’
- bhagavaḥ iti ha pratiśuśrāva, he replied, ‘Yes, lord.’
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Somya, O Somya
- brahmaṇaḥ te pādam bravāṇi iti, I will now tell you about a foot [or quarter] of Brahman
- bravītu me bhagavān iti, yes, lord, please tell me
- tasmai ha uvāca, [the madgu] said to him
- prāṇaḥ kalā, prāṇah [the vital force] is one part
- cakṣuḥ kalā, the eyes are one part
- śrotram kalā, the ears are one part
- manaḥ kalā, the mind is one part
- eṣaḥ vai somya catuṣkalaḥ pādaḥ brahmaṇaḥ, O Somya, these are the four parts that make up a foot of Brahman
- āyatanavān nāma, named Āyatanavān, the Support.
note This part of the story, about the madgu, is devoted to the teaching of prāṇa. In fact, the madgu represents prāṇa. Here the role of the mind has to be understood. The mind is the fourth part of this foot of Brahman, and it is the repository of all that we experience through our diverse organs. This is why it is called Āyatanavān, the Support.
- Saḥ yaḥ etam evam vidvān, he who knows this thus
- catuṣkalam pādam brahmaṇaḥ, one foot [or quarter] of Brahman having four parts
- āyatanavān iti, known as the Support
- upāste, [and] meditates on it
- āyatanavān asmin loke bhavati, becomes āyatanavān [i.e., a support to others] in this world
- yaḥ etam evam vidvān, he who knows this thus
- catuṣkalam pādam brahmaṇaḥ, one foot of Brahman having four parts
- āyatanavān iti, known as the Support [i.e., it is spacious and therefore able to support things]
- upāste, [and] meditates on it
- āyatanavataḥ ha lokān jayati, wins spacious worlds after death. Iti aṣṭamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the eighth section.
note If a person worships this foot of Brahman as āyatanavān—that is, as spacious—he himself becomes spacious. Being spacious means that he can give shelter to many. He has this advantage as long as he is alive. Then when he dies he is able to attain many larger worlds.
- Prāpa ha, he reached
- ācāryakulam, the teacher’s house
- tam ācāryaḥ abhyuvāda, the teacher greeted him
- satyakāma iti, O Satyakāma
- bhagavaḥ iti ha pratiśuśrāva, [Satyakāma] replied,’Yes, lord.’
note Satyakāma tended his teacher’s cattle, but while doing so he lived an austere life and a life of deep meditation.
- Brahmavit iva vai somya bhāsi, [the teacher, Gautama, said to Satyakāma,] Somya, you are shining like one who has known Brahman
- kaḥ nu tvā anuśaśāsa iti, who taught you
- anye manuṣyebhyaḥ, somebody other than a human being
- iti ha pratijajñe, he assured him
- bhagavān tu eva me kāme bruyāt, but, Lord, teach me now about Brahman, the subject closest to my heart.
note The look on Satyakāma’s face surprised his teacher. He looked like a knower of Brahman. He was shining. What are the signs of a person who has known Brahman? According to Śaṅkara, that person is happy and cheerful, with a smile on his face all the time. His mind is always under control, as are his sense organs. He is also free from desires and therefore from worries. Satyakāma had these signs. This is why his teacher asked him who had taught him. Satyakāma emphatically said that no human being had taught him. He meant thereby that so long as his teacher was there he needed no other human being to teach him. He also assured his teacher that he had now come to him to learn about Brahman, the subject dearest to him.
- Śrutām hi eva me, I have heard
- bhagavat-dṛśebhyaḥ, from revered ones like you
- ācāryāt ha eva vidyā viditā sādhiṣṭham prāpati iti, knowledge learned from a competent teacher is the best
- tasmai, to him [Satyakāma]
- ha etat eva uvāca, he taught all this [i.e., what Satyakāma had already learnt from the bull, fire, the swan, and the madgu]
- atra ha na kiñcana vīyāya iti vīyāya iti, nothing was left out, nothing was left out. Iti navamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the ninth section.
note You learn things best when you learn them from a good teacher. This is why Satyakāma asked Gautama to teach him. Gautama then taught him all sixteen kalās, or parts, about Brahman. That is to say, he taught him everything. Earlier, the bull, fire, the swan, and the madgu had taught him about Brahman. Gautama did not leave that out. He taught him everything. The word vīyāya is repeated twice to emphasize that Gautama did not leave out anything.
- Upakosalaḥ kāmalāyanaḥ ha vai satyakāme jābāle brahmacaryam uvāsa, Upakosala Kāmalāyana lived with Satyakāma Jābāla as a celibate student
- tasya ha dvādaśa varṣāṇi agnīn paricacāra, for twelve years he looked after his [teacher’s] sacrificial fires
- saḥ, he [Satyakāma]
- ha sma anyān antevāsinaḥ samāvartayan, permitted the other disciples to return home [after the completion of their Vedic studies]
- tam ha eva na samāvartayati sma, but did not let him [Upakosala] go home.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Tam, to him [Satyakāma]
- jāyā uvāca, his wife said
- taptaḥ, much reduced by austerities
- brahmacārī
- the brahmacārin
- kuśalam, with great efficiency
- agnīn paricacārīt, has tended the fires
- mā tvā agnayaḥ paripravocan, may the fires not speak ill of you
- prabrūhi asmai iti, please teach him
- tasmai ha aprocya eva, he did not teach him
- pravāsāñcakre, he left on a journey.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Saḥ, he [Upakosala]
- ha vyādhinā, due to mental affliction
- anaśitum dadhre, started fasting
- tam ācārya-jāyā uvāca, the teacher’s wife said to him
- brahmacārin aśāna, brahmacārin, start eatine
- kim nu na āśnāsi iti, why are you not eating
- saḥ ha uvāca, he [Upakosala] said
- bahavaḥ ime asmin puruṣe kāmāḥ there are many desires in this person
- nānātyayāḥ, they are pulling me in different directions
- vyādhibhiḥ pratipūrṇaḥ asmi, I am full of ailments
- na aśiṣyāmi iti, I will not eat anything.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Atha ha agnayaḥ samūdire, then the fires [the Dakṣiṇāgni, the Gārhapatya, and the Āhavanīya] began to say
- taptaḥ brahmacārī, the austere brahmacārin
- kuśalam, with great care
- naḥ paryacārīt, looked after us
- hanta asmai prabravāma iti, so we will teach him
- tasmai ha ucuḥ, they said to him
- prāṇaḥ brahma, prāṇa is Brahman
- kam brahma, happiness is Brahman
- kham brahma iti, ākāśa [space] is Brahman.
note The three fires that had been so well taken care of by Upakosala were moved to see his condition. They also felt that a great injustice had been done to him by his teacher, Satyakāma. They then decided to take it upon themselves to teach him.
- Saḥ ha uvāca, he [Upakosala] said
- vijānāmi aham yat prāṇa brahma, I know that prāṇa is Brahman
- kam ca tu kham ca na vijānāmi iti, but I don’t know that ‘ka’ and ‘kha’ are Brahman
- te ha ucaḥ, they [the fires] said
- yat vāva kam tat eva kham, that which is ‘ka’ is also ‘kha’
- yat eva kham tat eva kam iti, that which is ‘kha’ is also ‘ka’
- prāṇam ca ha asmai tat ākāśam ca ucaḥ, then they taught him about prāṇa and ākāśa [space]. Iti daśamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the tenth section.
note Upakosala had no difficulty accepting that prāṇa was Brahman, for prāṇa is the vital breath and Without the vital breath, life is impossible. In view of its importance it may be conceded that prāṇa is Brahman. But how can ka and kha be Brahman? Upakosala thought to himself: ‘Ka is happiness, but what kind of happiness? It is happiness born of sense experience. It is therefore transitory. It cannot be the same as Brahman. Similarly, kha is also transitory, for it means ākāśa, space. Ākāśa is material and therefore transitory.’ The fires then said that ka and kha are used as both nouns and adjectives, and sometimes they qualify each other. Kha as an adjective may qualify ka when ka stands for Brahman. What does ka mean here? Here it means Brahman without any attributes. Similarly, when we say kha, we mean ākāśa. When we say ka is kha, we mean ‘pleasure’ is ākāśa. But this is not the material ākāśa. Here it means the ākāśa, space, inside the heart. The idea is that Brahman and joy (ka) are both in the space inside the heart (khā).
- Atha ha enam gārhapatyaḥ anuśaśāsa, next the Gārhapatya fire gave him this instruction
- pṛthivī agniḥ annam ādityaḥ iti, the earth, fire, food, and the sun [are all part of me—i.e., of Brahman]
- yaḥ eṣaḥ āditye puruṣaḥ dṛśyate, the person seen in the sun
- saḥ aham asmi saḥ eva aham asmi iti, I am he, I am he.
note First the fires taught Upakosala together. Now they are teaching him separately. The Gārhapatya fire begins. He said: ‘The earth, fire, food, and the sun—these constitute my body. I divide myself into these things. There in the solar region is a person. That is me. I am known as the Gārhapatya fire and I am also this person in the solar region. Earth and food are both objects of enjoyment and consumption, but fire and the sun are not in this category. They are similar to each other, however, just as food and the earth are similar to each other, being objects that people can enjoy.’
- Saḥ yaḥ, he who
- etam evam vidvān, knowing this in this way
- upāste, [and] worships
- apahate pāpa-kṛtyām, he destroys his sins
- lokī bhavati, becomes a dweller in the world of the god of fire
- sarvam āyuḥ eti, lives the full range, of his life
- jyok jīvati, he lives a bright life
- asya āvarapuruṣāḥ, his descendants
- na kṣīyante, do not perish [i.e., his line is never broken]
- asmin ca loke amuṣmin ca, in this world and also in the other world
- vayam tam upabhuñjāmaḥ, we will look after him
- yaḥ etam evam vidvān upāste, he who knows this [fire] thus and worships it. Iti ekādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the eleventh section.
note Here the benefit of worshipping the Gārhapatya fire in the right manner is being given. The first benefit is that all the worshipper’s sins are burned away. He also attains the world reserved for the worshippers of this fire. When the fire says that the worshipper’s descendants do not perish, he means that his line will not be broken.
- Atha ha enam anvāhārya-pacanaḥ anuśaśāsa, next the Anvāhārya Pacana [the Dakṣiṇāgni, or Southern] fire gave him this instruction
- āpaḥ diśaḥ nakṣatrāṇi candramā iti, water, the quarters, the stars, and the moon [are all part of me—i.e., of Brahman]
- yaḥ eṣaḥ candramasi puruṣaḥ dṛśyate, the person seen in the moon
- saḥ aham asmi saḥ eva aham asmi iti, I am he, I am he.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Saḥ yaḥ, he who
- etam evam vidvān, knowing this in this way
- upāste, [and] worships
- apahate pāpakṛtyām, he destroys his sins
- lokī bhavati, becomes a dweller in the world of the god of fire
- sarvam āyuḥ eti, lives the full range of his life
- jyok jīvati, he lives a bright life
- asya āvarapuruṣāḥ, his descendants
- na kṣīyante, do not perish [i.e., his line is never broken]
- asmin ca loke amuṣmin ca, in this world and also in the other world
- vayam tam upabhuñjāmaḥ, we will look after him
- yaḥ etam evam vidvān upāste, he who knows this [fire] thus and worships it. Iti dvādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the twelfth section.
- Atha ha enam āhavanīyaḥ ānuśaśāsa, next the Āhavanīya fire gave him this instruction
- prāṇaḥ ākāśaḥ dyauḥ vidyut iti, prāṇa, space, heaven, and lightning [are all part of me—i.e., of Brahman]
- yaḥ eṣaḥ vidyuti puruṣaḥ dṛśyate, the person seen in lightning
- saḥ aham asmi saḥ eva aham asmi iti, I am he, I am he.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Saḥ yaḥ, he who
- etam evam vidvān, knowing this in this way
- upāste, [and] worships
- apahate pāpa- kṛtyām, he destroys his sins
- lokī bhavati, becomes a dweller in the world of the god of fire
- sārvam āyuḥ eti, lives the full range of his life
- jyok jīvati, he lives a bright life
- asya āvarapuruṣāḥ, his descendants
- na kṣīyante, do not perish [i.e., his line is never broken]
- asmin ca loke amuṣmin ca, in this world and also in the other world
- vayam tam upabhuñjāmaḥ, we will look after him
- yaḥ etam evam vidvān upāste, he who knows this [fire] thus and worships it. Iti trayodaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the thirteenth section.
- Te ha ucuḥ, they [the fires] said
- upakosala somya, O Somya Upakosala
- eṣā te asmat vidyā, this knowledge about us [we have given] to you
- ca ātma-vidyā, that is also Self-knowledge
- ācāryaḥ tu te gatim vakta iti, but the teacher will tell you about the way [to the next world]
- asya ācāryaḥ, his teacher
- ājagāma ha, returned
- ācāryaḥ abhyuvāda tam upakosala iti, the teacher called him, ‘O Upakosala.’
note What the fire meant was that Upakosala’s teacher would give him the final lesson. He would tell Upakosala what he should do to get the full benefit of what he had learned from the fires.
- Bhagavaḥ iti ha pratiśuśrāva, ‘Yes, lord,’ he replied
- brahmavidaḥ iva somya te mukham bhāti, your face is shining like that of a knower of Brahman
- kaḥ nu tvā anuśaśāsa iti, who has taught you
- kaḥ nu mā anuśiṣyāt bho iti, who will teach me, sir
- iha iva apanihnute, [he said this] as if he was trying to hide [the truth]
- ime, these [pointing to the fires]
- nūnam īdṛśāḥ, look like this [as if they are frightened]
- anyādṛśāḥ iti, looked different before
- iha agnīn abhyūde, in this way he spoke about the fires
- kim nu somya kila te avocan iti, Somya, what did they teach you?
note Upakosala knew the limitations of the fires, and that is why he did not want to tell his teacher what they had taught him, or that they had taught him anything at all. Further, he noticed that in the presence of his teacher the fires appeared to be frozen with fear. This is why he was vague and evasive in his reply.
- Idam iti ha pratijajñe, ‘This [is what they taught,]’ he [Upakosala] replied
- lokān vāva kila somya te avocan, they have only told you about the worlds, O Somya
- aham tu te tat vakṣyāmi, but I will tell you about that [Brahman]
- yathā puṣkara-palāśe āpaḥ na śliṣyante, as water does not stick to the lotus leaf
- evam, in the same way
- vidi, one who knows [Brahman]
- evam, thus
- pāpam karma na śliṣyate iti, is not tainted by sinful work
- bravītu me bhagavān iti, sir, please teach me
- tasmai ha uvāca, he said to him. Iti caturdaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the fourteenth section.
note Just as water never sticks to a lotus leaf, similarly, sin never sticks to one who knows Brahman thus.’ Upakosala replied, ‘Sir, please teach me about Brahman.’ The teacher said— A person who has known Brahman is always pure. Nothing can taint him. He is incapable of doing anything wrong.
- Yaḥ eṣaḥ akṣiṇi puruṣaḥ dṛśyate, this person who is seen in the eyes
- eṣaḥ ātmā, this is the Self
- iti ha uvāca, he [the teacher] said
- etat amṛtam abhayam, this is immortal and fearless
- etat brahma iti, this is Brahman
- tat, this is why
- asmin, into this [eye]
- yadi api sarpiḥ vā udakam vā siñcati, if anyone puts clarified butter or water
- vartmanī eva gacchati, it goes into the comers [of the eye].
note How do you know the Self? You have to have full self-control. You have to have a gentle nature, and you must withdraw your mind completely from the external world. Then you can see the Self in the eyes. That Self is immortal, fearless, and it is Brahman (literally, ‘the biggest’). As water does not stick to a lotus leaf, so also, if water or something else is put in the eyes, it does not hurt them because the eyelids protect them. This is why the eyelids are called ‘lotuses.’ The eyes are the seat of the Self. What the Upaniṣad is saying is that if the seat of the Self is pure and not susceptible to any impurity, the Self is naturally the same.
- Etam saṃyadvāmaḥ iti ācakṣate, they call him Saṃyadvāma [i.e., one in whom everything that is good is concentrated]
- hi, because
- etam sarvāṇi vāmāni abhisaṃyanti, all good and beautiful things come to him
- yaḥ evam veda, he who knows thus
- sarvāṇi enam vāmāni abhisaṃyanti, all good and beautiful things come to him.
note The word vāma means ‘attractive,’ ‘beautiful,’ or ‘desirable.’ The Self is Saṃyadvāma because all good things become concentrated in it. And one who knows the Self also becomes the receptacle of all good things.
- Eṣaḥ u eva vāmanīḥ, and this [person in the eyes] is Vāmanī [the source of all that is good and pure]
- hi, for
- eṣaḥ, this [person in the eyes]
- eva, surely
- sarvāṇi vāmāni nayati, grants all that is good and pure
- yaḥ evam veda, he who knows thus
- sarvāṇi vāmāni nayati, grants all that is good and pure.
note The word vāmanī means one who carries the fruits of good work to all beings according to what they deserve. He is the support of all that is good. One who knows this conveys the fruits of good work to others.
- Eṣaḥ u eva bhāmanīḥ, and this [person in the eyes] is Bhāmanī [shining]
- eṣaḥ hi sarveṣu lokeṣu bhāti, for he shines in all the worlds [including the sun]
- yaḥ evam veda, he who knows thus
- sarveṣu lokeṣu bhāti, shines in all the worlds.
note This person in the eyes is the source of all light. The Kaṭha Upaniṣad [II.2.15] says, ‘All this shines because he shines.’
- Atha, then
- yat, if
- u ca eva asmin, in this situation [i.e., for those who know the Self in the eyes]
- śavyam, funeral rites
- kurvanti, they perform
- yadi ca na, or if not
- arciṣam, to light
- eva abhisambhavanti, they go
- arciṣaḥ, from light
- ahaḥ, to day
- ahnaḥ, from day
- āpūryamāṇapakṣam, to the bright fortnight
- āpūryamāṇapakṣāt, from the bright fortnight
- ṣaṭ māsān, to the six months
- yān udan eti, [when the sun] moves to the north
- tān, to that
- māsebhyaḥ, from those months
- saṃvatsaram, to the year
- saṃvatsarāt, from the year
- ādityam, to the sun
- ādityāt, from the sun
- candramasam, to the moon
- candramasaḥ, from the moon
- vidyutam, to lightning
- tat, there
- puruṣaḥ, a person [existing there]
- amānavaḥ, not human
- enān, those [human beings]
- saḥ gamayati, he leads
- brahma, to brahmaloka
- eṣaḥ devapathaḥ, this is the path of the gods
- brahmapathaḥ, the way to Brahman
- etena, by this [path]
- pratipadyamānāḥ, those who go
- imam mānavam āvartam, to this world of human beings
- na āvartante, do not return
- na āvartante, do not return. Iti pañcadaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the fifteenth section.
note Normally when a person dies, his funeral rites should be performed with great care. This, however, does not apply in the case of one who has known Brahman. If the funeral rites are performed for him, it is good. But if for one reason or another they are not, it As regards those who worship the Self in the eyes by attributing to it qualities such as saṃyadvāma, vāmanī, or bhāmanī, or those who worship the fires as earth, water, prāṇa, etc., they go after death to the deity of light. From there they go to the deities of day, the bright fortnight, the six months of the northern solstice, and so on. Finally they reach a point where someone appears who is higher than a human being. He leads them to satyaloka, which is the realm of Brahmā. This is not, however, Para Brahman (Pure Consciousness). To attain liberation, one must realize one’s identity with Para Brahman, where there is no going or coming from one realm to another.
- Eṣaḥ ha vai yajñaḥ, he is a sacrifice
- yaḥ ayam pavate, this one who blows [i.e., air]
- eṣaḥ ha, he
- yan, while moving
- idam sarvam, all this
- punāti, purifies
- yat, since
- eṣaḥ yan idam sarvam punāti, he purifies all this while moving
- tasmāt, therefore
- eṣaḥ eva yajñaḥ, he is the sacrifice
- manaḥ ca vāk ca, mind and speech
- tasya vartanī, are his paths.
note Anything that moves can clean or purify things, and this process of cleaning or purifying is a kind of sacrifice. Air is called here a sacrifice because it moves and by moving it purifies. There are two ways by which the air purifies—by speech and by the mind. By speech we utter mantras, and by the mind we understand them. Speech and the mind both operate by the power derived from air.
- Brahmā, the priest called brahmā [in a sacrifice]
- tayoḥ anyatarām, one of these two
- manasā, mentally
- saṃskaroti, purifies
- vācā, by speech
- hotā adhvaryuḥ udgātā anyatarām, the hotā, the adhvaryu, and the udgātā priests [purify] the other
- yatra, when
- prātaḥ anuvāke upākṛte, the anuvāka which is read in the morning has begun
- purā paridhānīyāyāḥ, before the Ṛk hymn called paridhānīya
- saḥ, he [the brahmā priest]
- vyavavadati, breaks his silence
- anyatarām eva vartanīm saṃskaroti, only one path [i.e., the path of speech] he purifies
- anyatarā, the other [the path of the mind]
- hīyate, is spoiled
- yathā, just as
- ekapāt, a person with one leg
- vrajan, walking
- vā, or
- rathaḥ ekena cakreṇa vartamānaḥ, a chariot moving on one wheel
- riṣyati, is doomed
- evam, likewise
- asya yajñaḥ riṣyati, his sacrifice is ruined
- yajñam riṣyantam, when the sacrifice is ruined
- yajamānaḥ anu-riṣyati, the sacrificer is also ruined
- saḥ, he [the sacrificed
- iṣṭvā, having performed the sacrifice in this way
- pāpīyān bhavati, becomes a sinner.
note In the previous verse, two paths were mentioned for the performance of a sacrifice—the path of speech (vāk) and the path of the mind (manas). In a sacrifice, there are four types of priests: brahmā, hotā, adhvaryu, and udgātā. The brahmā priest is supposed to purify the path of the mind by his own purified mind, while observing silence. The other three priests take care of the path of speech, purifying it by their pure words. But suppose the brahmā priest breaks his silence while the reading of the morning anuvāka is going on, before the paridhānīya Ṛk hymn has begun. He is supposed to remain silent then, with his mind on a high level. Through this he is to purify the path of the mind. But if he breaks his silence, his mind is no longer ‘pure.’ Then the sacrificer has to make do with only one path—the path of speech. His position is now like that of a one-legged man trying to walk, or like a one-wheeled chariot trying to move. Both the sacrificer and the sacrifice are doomed, and the sacrificer is to be regarded as having committed a sin.
- Atha yatra, in the case of that sacrifice
- upākṛte prātaḥ anuvāke, in which the reading of the morning anuvāka has begun
- purā paridhānīyāyāḥ, before the beginning of the paridhānīya Ṛk hymn
- brahmā na vyavavadati, the brahmā priest does not speak
- ubhe eva vartanī, both the paths
- saṃskurvanti, they purify
- na hīyate anyatarā, neither of them is destroyed.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Yathā, as
- ubhayapāt, a person with both legs
- vrajam, walking
- vā, or
- rathaḥ ubhābhyām cakrābhyām, a chariot with both wheels
- vartamānaḥ, moving
- pratitiṣṭhati, succeeds
- evam, so also
- asya yajñaḥ pratitiṣṭhati, his [the sacrificer’s] sacrifice succeeds
- yajñam pratitiṣṭhantam yajamānaḥ anupratitiṣṭhati, if the sacrifice succeeds, the sacrificer also succeeds
- saḥ, he [the sacrificer]
- iṣṭvā śreyān bhavati, becomes greater through his sacrifice. Iti ṣoḍaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the sixteenth section.
- Prajāpatiḥ lokān abhyatapat, Prajāpati worshipped the worlds
- teṣām tapyamānānām, from those which were worshipped
- rasān prāvṛhat, he extracted the essence
- agnim pṛthivyāḥ, fire from the earth
- vāyum antarikṣāt, air from the space between the earth and heaven
- ādityam divaḥ, and the sun from heaven.
note The brahmā priest must observe silence to maintain the sanctity of the sacrifice he is performing. If the sanctity is lost, then the purpose of the sacrifice will be defeated. So if, for some reason or other, the sanctity is lost, due amends have to be made. One way to make amends is to seek the blessings of the lokas, the worlds. You pray to the worlds and then you are able to get their essence to support Your worship of the worlds is the amends you make, and the extracts you get in return are the blessings that protect you.
- Saḥ etāḥ tisraḥ devatāḥ abhyatapat, [then] he worshipped these three deities [fire, air, and the sun]
- tāsām tapyamānānām, from those which he worshipped
- rasān prāvṛhat, he extracted the essence
- agneḥ ṛcaḥ, the Ṛk mantras from fire
- vāyoḥ yajūṃṣi, the Yajuḥ mantras from air
- sāmāni ādityāt, the Sāma mantras from the sun.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Saḥ etām trayīm vidyām abhyatapat, [then] he worshipped the knowledge from these three
- tasyaḥ tapyamānāyāḥ, from these that he worshipped
- rasān prāvṛhat, he extracted the essence
- bhūḥ iti ṛgbhyaḥ, ‘bhūḥ’ from the Ṛg Veda
- bhuvaḥ iti yajurbhyaḥ, ‘bhuvaḥ’ from the Yajur Veda
- svaḥ iti sāmabhyaḥ, ‘svaḥ’ from the Sāma Veda.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Tat, that is why
- yat ṛktaḥ riṣyet, if there should be any harm done [to the sacrifice] because of [a mistake] in the Ṛk
- bhūḥ svāhā iti gārhapatye juhuyāt, then he should offer oblations in the Gārhapatya fire saying, ‘Bhūḥ svāhā’
- ṛcām eva tat rasena, by that essence of the Ṛk
- ṛcām vīryeṇa, by the strength of the Ṛk
- ṛcām yajñasya viriṣṭam, the harm done to the sacrifice by the mistake in the Ṛk
- sandadhāti, is averted.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Atha yadi yajuṣṭaḥ riṣyet, then if there should be any harm done [to the sacrifice] because of [a mistake] in the Yajuḥ
- bhuvaḥ svāhā iti dakṣiṇāgnau juhuyāt, then he should offer oblations in the Dakṣiṇāgni fire saying, ‘Bhuvaḥ svāhā’
- yajuṣām eva tat rasena, by that essence of the Yajuḥ
- yajuṣām vīryeṇa, by the strength of the Yajuḥ
- yajuṣām yajñasya viriṣṭam, the harm done to the sacrifice by the mistake in the Yajuḥ
- sandadhāti, is averted.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Atha yadi sāmataḥ riṣyet, then if there should be any harm done [to the sacrifice] because of [a mistake] in the Sāma
- svaḥ svāhā iti āhavanīye juhuyāt, then he should offer oblations in the Āhavanīya fire saying, ‘svaḥ svāhā’
- sāmnām eva tat rasena, by that essence of the Sāma
- sāmnām vīṛyeṇa, by the strength of the Sāma
- sāmnām yajñasya viriṣṭam, the harm done to the sacrifice by the mistake in the Sāma
- sandadhāti, is averted.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Tat yathā, it is like
- lavaṇena, with the help of borax
- suvarṇam sandadhyāt, one joins gold
- suvarṇena rajatam, silver with the help of gold
- rajatena trapu, tin with the help of silver
- trapuṇā sīsam, lead with the help of tin
- sīsena loham, iron with the help of lead
- lohena dāru, wood with the help of iron
- dāru carmaṇā, [and] wood with the help of leather.
note Two things can join together when the right combination of materials is used. In the same way, if there is
- Evam, in this way
- vīryeṇa, by the strength
- eṣām lokānām, of these worlds
- āsām devatānām, of these deities
- asyāḥ trayyāḥ vidyāyāḥ, of these three holy scriptures
- yajñasya viriṣṭam sandadhāti, he [the brahmā priest] makes up for the flaws of a sacrifice
- yatra evamvit brahmā bhavati, when there is a knowledgeable brahmā priest
- eṣaḥ yajñaḥ, this sacrifice
- bheṣajakṛtaḥ ha vai, gets the right medicine.
note When a person is sick he must take the appropriate medicine. Similar is the case of a sacrifice that has gotten off to a bad start. If the priest is a knowledgeable one, he will take the right steps to rectify the errors. Like a good doctor, he will apply the right medicine—that is, the combined powers of the worlds, the deities, and the scriptures.
- Eṣaḥ ha vai yajñaḥ udakpravaṇaḥ, this sacrifice is the way to the uttarāyaṇa [the path of the gods]
- yatra evamvit brahmā bhavati, where there is a knowledgeable brahmā priest
- evam vidam ha vai eṣaḥ brahmāṇam anu gāthā, there is this praise for such a learned brahmā priest
- yataḥ yataḥ āvartate, wherever there is a flaw [in the sacrifice]
- tat tat gacchati, he [the brahmā priest] goes there [to make amends].
note Whenever a sacrifice is to be held, a competent priest should be placed in charge. This will ensure A capable priest is always in demand wherever a sacrifice is being held, because, first, he can avoid mistakes, and second, should there be any mistake, in spite of all the care taken, the priest knows how to correct it.
- Mānavaḥ brahmā eva ekaḥ ṛtvik, a true brahmā priest is one who is thoughtful [or, is able to observe silence]
- kurūn aśvā abhirakṣati, [just as] a horse protects the soldiers
- evamvit ha vai brahmā, such a learned brahmā priest
- yajñam yajamānam sarvān ca ṛtvijaḥ abhirakṣati, protects the sacrifice, the sacrificer, and all the other priests
- tasmāt, therefore
- evam vidam eva brahmāṇam kurvīta, one should appoint only such a learned brahmā priest
- na anevam vidam, not one who is otherwise
- na anevam vidam, not one who is otherwise. Iti saptadaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the seventeenth section. Iti chāndogyopaniṣadi caturthaḥ adhyāyaḥ, here ends the fourth chapter of the Chāndogya Upaniṣad.
note When a priest is able to maintain silence and is by nature thoughtful, he may be appointed as the brahmā for a sacrifice. He is the chief priest by virtue of his scholarship and his character. The Upaniṣad compares him to a horse which protects his master when he is in trouble. A good brahmā priest can take care of the sacrifice, the sacrifices, and the subordinate priests. For this reason, only one who is qualified should be appointed. One who is not fit should not be given the honour.
- Yaḥ ha vai, he who
- jyeṣṭham ca śreṣṭham ca veda, knows the oldest and the best
- jyeṣṭhaḥ ca ha vai śreṣṭhaḥ ca bhavati, himself becomes the oldest and the best
- prāṇaḥ vāva jyeṣṭhaḥ ca śreṣṭhaḥ ca, prāṇa is indeed the oldest and the best.
note The importance of prāṇa has been mentioned earlier. True, it works in conjunction with the organs of speaking, hearing, seeing, etc., but it is the first and foremost of all of them. Prāṇa is in a child even when it is still in it’s mother’s womb. It is active before the various organs are active. Prāṇa therefore commands respect from all. The reason why so much importance is given to prāṇa is to teach us to show respect where respect is due. We should respect both age and merit. Then we also shall command respect from all because of our age and merit. Indirectly, this is a hint that we should respect knowledge.
- Yaḥ ha vai, he who
- vasiṣṭham veda, knows that which is of high standing
- vasiṣṭhaḥ ha svānām bhavati, becomes of high standing among his own relatives
- vāk vāva vasiṣṭhaḥ, speech [i.e., eloquence] is surely of high standing [i.e., it is the secret of high standing].
note If a person respects another for his power to influence others, he himself some day has the same power and commands respect from others. It is, in fact, the power of eloquence which is behind this influence.
- Yaḥ ha vai, he who
- pratiṣṭhām veda, knows the support
- asmin ca loke, in this world
- amuṣmin ca, and in the other [world]
- pratitiṣṭhati, attains a support
- cakṣuḥ vāva pratiṣṭhā, the eye is surely the support.
note Good sight is necessary for success in life. A sharp eye is not merely a physical asset; it is also a mental asset. It means a good and sharp sense of judgement. One can easily avoid the pitfalls of life, physical as well as moral, with good sight. Given this quality, you are safe in this world as well as in the other.
- Yaḥ ha vai, he who
- sampadam veda, knows affluence
- asmai, to him
- kāmāḥ, desirable things
- sam-padyante, come
- daivāḥ ca, [things meant for] gods
- mānuṣāḥ ca, and [things meant for] human beings
- śrotram vāva sampat, the ears are surely affluence.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Yaḥ ha vai, he who
- āyatanam veda, knows the abode
- āyatanam ha svānām bhavati, becomes the abode [i.e., shelter] of his family
- manaḥ ha vai āyatanam, the mind is surely the abode.
note There is something in the body-mind complex of human beings called āyatana. If a person knows this ‘āyatana,’ it is to be understood that he is a wise person. And such a person is able to serve as an āyatana to his own relatives. That is to say, he is The mind is the āyatana of the body-mind complex. Why? Because the sense organs have their experiences, but all those experiences take shelter in the mind.
- Atha ha, once
- prāṇāḥ, the sense organs
- vyūdire, began to quarrel [among themselves]
- aham-śreyasi, each thinking it was the best
- aham śreyān asmi aham śreyān asmi iti, saying, ‘I am the best, I am the best.’
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Te ha prāṇāḥ, those organs
- pitaram prajāpatim etya, coming to their father Prajāpati
- ucuḥ, said
- bhagavan, revered sir
- naḥ, among us
- kaḥ śreṣṭhaḥ iti, who is the best
- tān ha uvāca, he said to them
- vaḥ, among you
- yasmin utkrānte, on whose leaving
- śarīram pāpiṣṭhataram iva dṛśyeta, the body appears to be untouchable
- saḥ vaḥ śreṣṭhaḥ, he is the best among you.
note We all know what happens when life leaves the body. It is not the same body. It shrinks. It becomes ugly. And soon it starts decomposing. No one wants to touch it. Prajāpati indirectly declared in this way that prāṇa was the best among them. When Prajāpati said this, he changed his voice lest he hurt the other organs. The way he changed his voice is called kaku.
- Sā ha vāk, that speech
- ut-cakrāma, left [the body]
- saṃvatsaram proṣya, after staying away one year
- sā paretya uvāca, he came back and said
- mat ṛte, in my absence
- katham, how
- jīvitum aśakata iti, did you manage to survive
- yathā kalāḥ, [the other organs said:] just as the mute
- avadantaḥ, do not speak
- praḥantaḥ prāṇena, [but] are able to survive with the help of prāṇa, the vital force
- paśyantaḥ cakṣuṣā, to see with the help of the eyes
- śṛṇvantaḥ śrotreṇa, to hear with the help of the ears
- dhyāyantaḥ manasā, to think with the help of the mind
- evam iti, in the same way
- vāk praviveśa ha, [hearing this] speech re-entered the body.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Cakṣuḥ ha, the organ of vision
- ut-cakrāma, left [the body]
- saṃvatsaram proṣya, after staying away one year
- tat paretya uvāca, it came back and said
- mat ṛte, in my absence
- katham, how
- jīvitum aśakata iti, did you manage to survive
- yathā andhāḥ, [the other organs said:] just as the blind
- apaśyantaḥ, do not see
- prāṇantaḥ prāṇena, [but] are able to survive with the help of prāṇa, the vital force
- vadantaḥ vācā, to speak with the help of the organ of speech
- śṛṇvantaḥ śrotreṇa, to hear with the help of the ears
- dhyāyantaḥ manasā, to think with the help of the mind
- evam iti, in the same way
- cakṣuḥ praviveśa ha, [hearing this] the organ of vision re-entered the body.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Śrotram ha, the organ of hearing
- ut-cakrāma, left [the body]
- saṃvatsaram proṣya, after staying away one year
- tat paretya uvāca, it came back and said
- mat ṛte, in my absence
- katham, how
- jīvitum aśakata iti, did you manage to survive
- yathā badhirāḥ, [the other organs said:] just as the deaf
- aśṛṇvantaḥ, do not hear
- prāṇantaḥ prāṇena, [but] are able to survive with the help of prāṇa, the vital force
- vadantaḥ vācā, to speak with the help of the organ of speech
- paśyantaḥ cakṣuṣā, to see with the help of the eyes
- dhyāyantaḥ manasā, to think with the help of the mind
- evam iti, in the same way
- śrotram praviveśa ha, [hearing this] the organ of hearing re-entered the body.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Manaḥ ha, the mind
- ut-cakrāma, left [the body]
- saṃvatsaram proṣya, after staying away one year
- tat paretya uvāca, he came back and said
- mat ṛte, in my absence
- katham, how
- jīvitum aśakata iti, did you manage to survive
- yathā bālāḥ, [the other organs said:] just as the children
- amanasaḥ, do not receive much support from the mind
- prāṇantaḥ prāṇena, [but] are able to survive with the help of prāṇa, the vital force
- vadantaḥ vācā, to speak with the help of the organ of speech
- paśyantaḥ cakṣuṣā, to see with the help of the eyes
- śṛṇvantaḥ śrotreṇa, to hear with the help of the ears
- evam iti, in the same way
- manaḥ praviveśa ha, [hearing this] the mind re-entered the body.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Atha ha saḥ prāṇaḥ, now that prāṇa, the vital force
- uccikramiṣan, wishing to go out
- yathā, just as
- suhayaḥ, a good horse
- paḍvīśa-śaṅkūn, the pegs to which his feet are tied
- saṃkhidet, uproots
- evam, in the same way
- itarān prāṇān, the other organs
- samakhidat, began to leave with him
- tam abhisametya, coming to him [with great humility]
- ucuḥ ha, land] said
- bhagavan, lord
- edhi, be our leader
- naḥ tvam śreṣṭhaḥ asi, you are the best among us
- mā utkramīḥ iti, please do not leave us.
note The organs, beginning with vāk (speech), left the body one after another. But that made little or no difference to the body or to the rest of the organs. Then prāṇa decided to leave. Just as he started to go, all the other organs felt that they were being forced to leave also. They realized then that they were not free; they were utterly dependent on the chief prāṇa. Coming to him, they showed him respect and said that they now recognized his superiority.
- Atha ha enam vāk uvāca, next vāk [speech] said to him [i.e., to prāṇa]
- yat aham vasiṣṭhaḥ asmi, I am as much endowed with [the quality of] high standing
- tat tvani vasiṣṭhaḥ asi iti, as you are endowed with [the quality of] high standing
- atha ha enam cakṣuḥ uvāca, next the organ of vision said to him
- yat aham pratiṣṭhā asmi, I am as much endowed with [the quality of] support
- tat tvam pratiṣṭhā asi iti, as you are a support.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Atha ha enam śrotram uvāca, next the organ of hearing said to him [i.e., to prāṇa]
- yat aham sampat asmi, I am as much endowed with [the quality of] affluence
- tat tvam sampat asi iti, as you are endowed with [the quality of] affluence
- atha ha enam manaḥ uvāca, next the mind said to him
- yat aham āyatanam asmi, I am as much endowed with [the quality of] a shelter
- tat tvam āyatanam asi iti, as you are a shelter.
note Tenants may go to their landlord and say many things to please him and exhibit their loyalty. Like that, the various sense organs which had earlier fought among themselves, each claiming superiority, are now, with great humility, declaring that they have nothing of their own—that whatever good qualities they have they owe to their master, the chief prāṇa.
- Na vai vācaḥ, not organs of speech
- na cakṣūṃṣi, not eyes
- na śrotrāṇi, not ears
- na manāṃsi, not minds
- iti eva ācakṣate, they say
- prāṇāḥ iti eva ācakṣate, they say the prāṇas
- hi, for
- prāṇaḥ bhavati, prāṇa has become
- etāni sarvāṇi, all these. Iti prathamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the first section.
note The Self is the source of everything that exists, living or non-living. The Self manifests itself in many forms—as human beings, animals, plants, etc. And it is because of the Self that we live, speak, and act. Human beings have two sets of organs—organs of perception and organs of action. We also have a mind. These organs are powerful, but the most powerful is the mind. Yet none of these organs is independent. Each one exists and functions only to serve the Self, the master. The Self is within the body as well as without. Within the body it is the Ātman, which functions through prāṇa, the vital breath. As prāṇa, it animates the body and all the organs. Without prāṇa, the body with all its organs is dead, useless.
- Saḥ ha uvāca, he [prāṇa] asked
- kim me annam bhaviṣyati iti, what will be my food
- iti ucuḥ ha, [the other organs] replied
- ā-śvabhyaḥ ā-śakunibhyaḥ, for dogs as well as birds
- yat idam kiñcit, whatever there is
- tat vai, all that
- etat anasya annam, is this food for prāṇa
- anaḥ ha vai nāma pratyakṣam, ‘ana’ is the name of prāṇa itself
- ha vai evam vidi, for one who knows thus
- kiñcana na anannam bhavati iti, nothing becomes uneatable [i.e., anything an animal can eat is food for him].
note There is some difference between the words prāṇa and ana. Prāṇa has a limited meaning. It refers to something characterized by breathing. It breathes, and in order to keep breathing it needs food. It may be a specific kind of food. It may not eat every kind of food. Ana, however, is that which can eat any kind of food. The Bṛhadāraṇyaka Upaniṣad (1.5.23) says, ‘The sun rises and sets in prāṇa.’ It also says that the person who knows the true nature of prāṇa is one from whom the sun rises and into whom it sets.
- Saḥ ha uvāca, he [prāṇa] said
- kim me vāsaḥ bhaviṣyati iti, what will be my covering
- āpaḥ iti ha ucuḥ, [the other organs] replied, ‘Water’
- tasmāt, that is why
- vai aśiṣyantaḥ purastāt ca, people before eating
- upariṣṭāt ca, and after [eating]
- etat adbhiḥ paridadhati, cover him [prāṇa] with water [i.e., they sip water]
- lambhukaḥ ha vāsaḥ bhavati, thereby he becomes covered with a cloth
- anagnaḥ ha bhavati, he is no longer naked.
note The water that is sipped before the meal is said to be the lower cloth, and that which is sipped afterwards is said to be the upper cloth.
- Tat ha etat, this [teaching]
- satyakāmaḥ jābālaḥ, Satyakāma Jābāla
- gośrutaye vaiyāhrapadyāya uktva, saying to Vyāghrapada’s son Gośruti
- uvāca, he said
- yadi api, even if
- etat, this [teaching]
- śuṣkāya athāṇave brūyāt, a person gives to a dry stump
- śākhāḥ praroheyuḥ palāśān, branches and leaves
- jāyeran eva asmin, will grow off it.
note This verse is meant to praise the philosophy of prāṇa. Teaching this philosophy to Gośruti, the son of Vyāghrapada, Satyakāma said that this teaching is capable of restoring life to a dead tree. Even if there is only a dry stump of a tree, leaves and branches will begin to sprout from it on hearing this teaching. Imagine then what effect it will produce if it is taught to a living human being.
- Atha yadi, then if
- mahat jigamiṣet, a person wants to attain greatness
- amāvāsyāyām dīkṣitvā, having been initiated on the day of a new moon
- paurṇamāsyām rātrau, on the night of the full moon
- sarvauṣadhyasya mantham, a paste of various herbs
- dadhi-madhunoḥ upamathya, [and] mixing with curd and honey
- jyeṣṭhāya śreṣṭhāya svāhā iti, say ‘Svāhā to the oldest and the best’
- agnau ājyasya hutvā, offer this as oblations to the fire
- manthe sampātam avanayet, put the residue from the offering spoon in the pot.
note If a person wants to attain greatness, it should not be for worldly gain, but for his spiritual benefit. Here, some instructions are given concerning the sacrifices he should perform. Prior to those sacrifices, however, he should practise strict self-control for some time. This whole discipline is intended to take him to a higher world after death, but the over-all result is that he becomes a better person spiritually.
- Vasiṣṭhāya svāhā iti, saying ‘Vasiṣṭhāya svāhā’ [i.e., Svāhā to high standing]
- agnau ājyasya hutvā, one should offer the oblation to the fire
- manthe sampātam avanayet, and put whatever is left over in the offering spoon into the homa pot
- pratiṣṭhāyai svāhā iti, saying ‘Pratiṣṭhāyai svāhā’ [i.e., Svāhā to the support]
- agnau ājyasya hutvā, one should offer the oblation to the fire
- manthe sampātam avanayet, and put whatever is left over in the offering spoon into the homa pot
- sampade svāhā iti, saying ‘Sampade svāhā’ [i.e., Svāhā to affluence]
- agnau ājyasya hutvā, one should offer the oblation to the fire
- manthe sampātam avanayet, and put whatever is left over in the offering spoon into the homa pot
- āyatanāya svāhā iti, saying ‘Āyatanāya svāhā’ [i.e., Svāhā to the abode]
- agnau ājyasya hutvā, one should offer the oblation to the fire
- manthe sampātam avanayet, and put whatever is left over in the offering spoon into the homa pot.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Atha, then
- pratisṛpya, moving away [from the fire]
- añjalau mantham ādhāya, holding the homa pot in his hands
- japati, he keeps repeating
- amaḥ nāma asi, you are named ‘ama’
- amā hi te, because on you [as prāṇa]
- sarvam idam, all this [rests]
- saḥ hi jyeṣṭhaḥ śreṣṭhaḥ, he [i.e., prāṇa, called here ‘ama’] is the oldest and the best
- rājā, princely
- adhipatiḥ, supreme
- saḥ, that [prāṇa]
- mā gamayatu, make me
- jyaiṣṭhyam śraiṣṭhyam rājyam ādhipatyam, the first, the best, outstanding, and supreme
- aham eva idam sarvam asāni iti, may I be all this.
note According to Śaṅkara, ama is another name for prāṇa. The whole world rests on prāṇa. This is why prāṇa is also called ama (all). Prāṇa is the best and the highest. Prāṇa is this world.
- Atha khalu etayā ṛcā, then while [saying] this Ṛk mantra
- pacchaḥ foot by foot
- ācāmati, he eats a little [of what is in the homa pot]
- tat savituḥ vṛṇīmahe, we pray for that [food] of the shining deity
- iti ācāmati, saying this he eats a little [of what is in the homa pot]
- vayam devasya bhojanam, we eat the food of the deity
- iti ācāmati, saying this he eats a little [of what is in the homa pot]
- śreṣṭham sarvadhātamam, it is the best and the support of all
- iti ācāmati, saying this he eats a little [of what is in the homa pot]
- turam, quickly
- bhagasya dhīmahi, we meditate on Bhaga
- iti sarvam pibati, saying this he drinks the rest
- nirṇijya kaṃsam, [and] washing the vessel [i.e., the homa pot]
- vā camasam, or spoon
- aprasāhaḥ, with his mind under control
- vācaṃyamaḥ, [and] his speech under control
- agneḥ paścāt, behind the fire
- carmaṇi vā sthaṇḍile vā, on the skin of an animal or directly on the sacrificial ground
- saṃviśati, he sleeps
- saḥ yadi, if he
- striyam paśyet, sees a woman [in his dream]
- karma samṛddham, the sacrificial rite is successful
- iti vidyāt, he knows that.
note While eating, the sacrificer should repeat the appropriate mantra. That is, he should eat a little and then repeat one foot of the Ṛk mantra; then eat a little more and repeat another foot, and so on. What is this mantra? It is a prayer to Savitā, the sun god. If you repeat this prayer with the appropriate rite, you will become as bright and pure as the sun.
- Tat eṣaḥ ślokaḥ, here is a verse on the subject
- yadā, when
- karmasu kāmyeṣu, in a rite for fulfilling a desire
- striyam svapneṣu paśyati, one sees a woman in a dream
- samṛddhim tatra, there is success
- jānīyāt tasmin svapnanidarśane tasmin svapnanidarśane, one knows from seeing this in a dream, from seeing this in a dream. Iti dvitīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the second section.
- Śvetaketuḥ āruṇeyaḥ ha, once Śvetaketu, the grandson of Aruṇa
- pañcālānām samitim eyāya, went to the court of the Pañcālas
- tam ha, to him
- pravāhaṇaḥ jaivaliḥ uvāca, Pravāhaṇa, the son of Jīvala, said
- kumāra, young man
- tvā pitā anu-aśiṣat iti, did your father teach you
- bhagavaḥ anu hi iti, yes, revered sir, he did.
note Those who want liberation should have a strong spirit of renunciation, and they should know the nature of everything, from Brahmā to a blade of grass. Earlier there was a discussion on prāṇa. Now a discussion on agni, fire, begins. The story of Śvetaketu and his father is being introduced here for that purpose.
- Vettha, do you know
- yat, where
- itaḥ, from this place
- adhi, high up
- prajāḥ, living beings
- prayanti iti, go
- na bhagavaḥ iti, no, revered sir, I don’t
- vettha, do you know
- yathā, the way
- punaḥ āvartante iti, they come back
- na bhagavaḥ iti, no, revered sir, I don’t
- vettha, do you know
- pathoḥ, of the two paths
- devayānasya, the path of the gods
- pitṛyāṇasya ca, and the path of the ancestors
- vyāvartanā iti, where they part
- na bhagavaḥ iti, no, revered sir, I don’t.
note The path of the gods and the path of the manes both go the same way for some distance. They separate only towards the end. Śvetaketu did not know at what point they separate, nor did he know what path those who are reborn take while coming back to the earth.
- Vettha yathā, do you know why
- asau lokaḥ, that world [i.e., the world of the moon]
- na sampūryate iti, is not filled up
- na bhagavaḥ iti, no, revered sir
- vettha yathā, do you know why
- pañcamyām āhutau, after the fifth oblation
- āpaḥ puruṣavacasaḥ bhavanti iti, water becomes known as ‘man’
- na eva bhagavaḥ iti, no, revered sir, I don’t.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Atha kim anuśiṣṭaḥ anu avocathāḥ, then why did you say, ‘I have been taught’
- yaḥ hi imāni na vidyāt, for he who does not know these things
- katham saḥ anuśiṣṭaḥ bruvīta iti, how can he say ‘I have been taught’
- saḥ, he [Śvetaketu]
- ha āyastaḥ, was hurt
- pituḥ ardham eyāya, went back to his father’s place
- tam ha uvāca, he said to him [i.e., to his father]
- mā ananuśiṣya vāva kila, without really teaching me
- bhagavān, revered sir
- abravīt tvā anu aśiṣam iti, you said, ‘I have taught you.’
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Rājanyabandhuḥ, the friend of princes
- pañca praśnān mā aprākṣīt, asked me five questions
- teṣām na ekañcana aśakam vivaktum iti, I was not able to answer a single one of them
- saḥ ha uvāca, he [his father] said
- yathā mā tvam tadā, [on your return from the court] as you were then
- etān, all these [questions]
- avadaḥ, you told [me]
- yathā, so
- aham eṣām na ekañcana veda, I do not know even one of them
- yadi aham imān avediṣyam, if I knew them
- katham te na avakṣyam iti, why should I not have told you?
note The word rājanyabandhuḥ, a friend of kings or princes, is not to be taken literally. Here the word is used sarcastically. Actually, the man is a rogue.
- Saḥ ha gautamaḥ, then Gautama
- rājñaḥ ardham eyāya, went to the king’s palace
- prāptāya, when he arrived
- tasmai ha arhām cakāra, the king respectfully welcomed him
- saḥ, he [Gautama]
- ha prātaḥ, the next morning
- sabhāge udeyāya, went to see the king in the court
- tam ha uvāca, he [the king] said to him [Gautama]
- bhagavan gautama, revered Gautama
- mānuṣasya vittasya varam vṛṇīthāḥ iti, ask for any precious thing a person may wish for as a boon
- saḥ ha uvāca, he [Gautama] said
- rājan, O king
- tava eva mānuṣam vittam, let the human wealth be yours
- yām eva kumārasya ante vācam abhāṣathāḥ, that which you said to my son
- tām eva, the same
- me brūhi iti, tell me
- saḥ ha kṛcchrī babhūva, he [the king] was very depressed.
note It was against the custom for a kṣatriya, a king, to teach a brāhmin. This is why the king became depressed.
- Tam, to him [to Gautama]
- ciram vasa ha iti, stay for a long time
- ājñāpayāñcakāra, he issued orders
- tam ha uvāca, he said to him [to Gautama]
- gautama, O Gautama
- yathā mā tvam āvadaḥ, as you said to me
- yathā iyam vidyā, because this knowledge
- prāk tvattaḥ, before you
- brāhmaṇān na gacchati, did not go to the brāhmins
- purā, in the past
- tasmāt u, that is why
- sarveṣu lokeṣu, in all the worlds
- kṣatrasya eva praśāsanam abhūt iti, only kṣatriyas had the right to teach it
- tasmai ha uvāca, he said to him. Iti tṛtīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the third section.
- Gautama, O Gautama
- asau vāva lokaḥ agniḥ, that world there [i.e., heaven] is the fire
- ādityaḥ eva tasya samit, the sun is its fuel
- raśmayaḥ dhūmaḥ, the rays are the smoke
- ahaḥ arciḥ, the day is the flame
- candramāḥ aṅgārāḥ, the moon is the embers
- nakṣatrāṇi visphuliṅgāḥ, the stars are the sparks.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Tasmin etasinin agnau, in that fire [which is also heaven]
- devāḥ, the gods [i.e., the organs of the sacrificer]
- śraddhām juhvati, offer faith [as water] as the oblation
- tasyāḥ āhuteḥ, out of that oblation
- rājā somaḥ, King Soma [i.e., the shining moon]
- sambhavati, appears. Iti caturthaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the fourth section.
- Gautama, O Gautama
- parjanyaḥ vāva agniḥ, the god of rain is the fire
- vāyuḥ eva tasya samit, air is its fuel
- abhram dhūmaḥ, the cloud is the smoke
- vidyut arciḥ, lightning is the flame
- aśaniḥ aṅgārāḥ, the thunderbolt is the embers
- hrādanayaḥ visphuliṅgāḥ, thunder is the sparks.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Tasmin etasmin agnau, in that fire
- devāḥ, the gods
- somam rājānam juhvati, offer King Soma [the shining moon] as the oblation
- tasyāḥ āhuteḥ, out of that oblation
- varṣam, rain
- sambhavati, appears. Iti pañcamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the fifth section.
- Gautama, O Gautama
- pṛthivī vāva agniḥ, earth is the fire
- saṃvatsaraḥ eva tasyāḥ samit, the year is its fuel
- ākāśaḥ dhūmaḥ, the sky is the smoke
- rātriḥ arciḥ, night is the flame
- diśaḥ aṅgārāḥ, the quarters are the embers
- avāṅtaradiśaḥ visphuliṅgāḥ, the intermediate directions are the sparks.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Tasmin etasmin agnau, in that fire
- devāḥ, the gods
- varṣam juhvati, offer rain as the oblation
- tasyāḥ āhuteḥ, out of that oblation
- annam, food
- sambhavati, appears. Iti ṣaṣṭhaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the sixth section.
- Gautama, O Gautama
- puruṣaḥ vāva agniḥ, man is the fire
- vāk eva tasya samit, speech is his fuel
- prāṇaḥ dhūmaḥ, prāṇa is the smoke
- jihvā arciḥ, the tongue is the flame
- cakṣuḥ aṅgārāḥ, the eyes are the embers
- śrotram visphuliṅgāḥ, the ears are the sparks.
note Speech is said to be the fuel because it is the source of strength. A person who cannot speak is helpless. Prāṇa is the smoke because the breath comes out of the mouth just as smoke comes out of fire. The tongue is the flame because both are red. The eyes are the embers because both appear to be shining. And the ears are the sparks because both spread out and cover a large area.
- Tasmin etasmin agnau, in that fire
- devāḥ, the gods
- annam juhvati, offer food as the oblation
- tasyāḥ āhuteḥ, out of that oblation
- retaḥ, semen
- sambhavati, appears. Iti saptamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the seventh section.
- nothing, here.
- Iti tu, thus [the fifth question has been answered]
- pañcamyām āhutau, after the fifth oblation
- āpaḥ, water
- puruṣavacasaḥ bhavanti iti, becomes known as ‘man’
- ulbāvṛtaḥ, covered with membrane
- saḥ garbhaḥ, that foetus
- daśa vā nava vā māsān, for nine or ten months
- yāvat vā, or so
- antaḥ śayitvā, lying inside [the mother’s womb]
- atha jāyate, is then born.
note If all five oblations have been offered, then the water of the first oblation becomes a puruṣa, a human being. It lies in its mother’s womb for nine or ten months and is then born as a child. This is the answer to the last of the five questions that Pravāhaṇa asked Śvetaketu. By answering the last question first, he could answer the others more easily.
- Saḥ jātaḥ, [when] he is born
- yāvat-āyuṣam jīvati, he lives as long as he is destined
- diṣṭam pretam, dying as ordained
- itaḥ, from here [his home]
- taw agnaye eva haranti, they take him to the fire
- yataḥ eva itaḥ, from which he came here
- yataḥ sambhūtaḥ bhavati, that from which he was born. Iti navamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the ninth section.
note From each oblation, something is born that is offered as the next oblation in the fire. The last thing born is a human being. This is why it is said that a human being is born of fire. In the end, when that person dies, his body also is offered in that same fire.
- Tat ye viduḥ, those who know this [i.e., about the five fires]
- ittham, thus
- ye ca ime, and these people who
- araṇye, in the forest
- śraddhā tapaḥ iti upāsate, practise austerities with faith
- te arciṣam abhisambhavanti, they become [attain] light
- arciṣaḥ, from light
- ahaḥ, to the day
- ahnaḥ, from the day
- āpūryamāṇapakṣam, to the bright fortnight
- āpūryamāṇapakṣāt, from the bright fortnight
- yān ṣaṭ māsān, to the six months
- udan eti, [when the sun] moves to the north
- tān, to that
- māsebhyaḥ, from those months
- saṃvatsaram, to the year
- saṃvatsarāt, from the year
- ādityam, to the sun
- ādityāt, from the sun
- candramasam, to the moon
- candramasaḥ, from the moon
- vidyutam, to lightning
- tat, there
- puruṣaḥ, a person [existing there]
- amānavaḥ, not human
- enān, those [human beings]
- saḥ gamayati, leads
- brahma, to brahmaloka
- eṣaḥ devayānaḥ panthāḥ iti, this is the path of the gods
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Atha, then
- ye ime, these who
- grāme, live in the village
- iṣṭāpūrte dattam iti upāsate, perform works of public service and give in charity, and so on
- te, they
- dhūmam abhisambhavanti, go to the world of smoke
- dhūmāt rātrim, from the world of smoke to the world of night
- rātreḥ aparapakṣam, from the world of night to the world of the dark fortnight
- aparapakṣāt yān ṣaḍ māsān tān, from the world of the dark fortnight to the world of the six months when
- dakṣiṇa eti, [the sun] moves to the south
- ete, they
- saṃvatsaram abhiprāpnuvanti, never attain the world of the year.
note Here, ‘smoke,’ ‘night,’ and so on mean the presiding deities of those realms. This is how ordinary human beings are raised to divine realms through good work.
- Māsebhyaḥ, from the months [of the southern solstice]
- pitṛlokam, [they go] to the world of the ancestors
- pitṛlokāt ākāśam, from the world of the ancestors to the sky
- ākāśāt candramasam, from the sky to the world of the moon
- eṣaḥ somaḥ rājā, this is King Soma [the shining moon]
- tat, that
- devānām annam, is the food of the gods [i.e., Indra and others]
- tam devāḥ bhakṣayanti, the gods eat that [food].
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Tasmin, in that [world of the moon]
- yāvat sampātam, until the fruits of their work are exhausted
- uṣitvā, living
- atha, thereafter
- etam eva punaḥ nivartante, they return again to this [world]
- adhvānam, along this path
- yathā itam, as one came
- ākāśam, to the sky
- ākāśāt vāyum, from the sky to the air
- vāyuḥ bhūtvā dhūmaḥ bhavati, having become air he becomes smoke
- dhūmaḥ bhūtvā, having become smoke
- abhram bhavati, he becomes mist.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Abhram bhūtvā meghaḥ bhavati, having become mist, it becomes a cloud
- meghaḥ bhūtvā pravarṣati, having become a cloud, it comes down as rain
- te, they
- iha, in this world
- vrīhi-yavāḥ, paddy and barley
- oṣadhi-vanaspatayaḥ, plants and trees
- tila-māṣaḥ iti, sesame, beans, and so forth
- jāyante, this.is how they are born
- ataḥ, from this [state]
- vai khalu, for sure
- durniṣprapataram, the way is difficult
- yaḥ yaḥ, whoever [humans or animals]
- hi annam atti, eats this food
- yaḥ retaḥ siñcati, as it procreates
- tat bhūyaḥ eva bhavati, he becomes like that [its parents].
note Here Śaṅkara explains that a person does not become the mist or cloud or paddy, etc. He merely becomes associated with these things as a person is associated with a vehicle he is riding on. Śaṅkara also says that when a person ascends to the higher worlds, he does so in full consciousness. But when he descends, to return to this earth, he is like a person who falls from a tree and immediately becomes unconscious. His friends come and pick him up and carry him to his home without his ever being aware of it. Similarly, a person who descends from the lunar world is never aware of how he returns to the earth.
- Tat, among them
- ye, those who
- iha, in this world
- ramaṇīyacaraṇāḥ, did good work
- abhyāśaḥ ha yat, like that
- te, they
- ramaṇīyām yonim, a good birth
- āpadyeran, get
- brāhmaṇa yonim vā, a birth as a brāhmin
- kṣatriya yonim vā, or a birth as a kṣatriya
- vaiśya yonim vā, or a birth as a vaiśya
- atha, but
- ye iha kapūyacaraṇāḥ, those who did bad work here in this world
- abhyāśaḥ ha yat, like that
- te, they
- kapūyām yonim āpadyeran, get a bad birth
- śva yonim yā, a birth as a dog
- sūkara yonim vā, or a birth as a pig
- caṇḍāla yonim vā, or a birth as a casteless person.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Atha, then
- etayoḥ pathoḥ, of these two paths [the path of light (i.e., the path of the gods) or the path of smoke (i.e., the path of the ancestors)]
- na katareṇa ca na, not by either
- tāni imāni, all these
- kṣudrāṇi bhūtāni, small beings [i.e., animals and insects, etc.]
- asakṛt āvartīni, which are born again and again
- jāyasva mriyasva iti, ‘be born and die’
- etat tṛtīyaṃ sthānum, this is the third position [which is neither of the two previous paths]
- tena, this is why
- asau lokaḥ, that world
- na sampūryate, is not filled up [with people]
- tasmāt, therefore
- jugupseta, one should despise it
- tat eṣaḥ ślokaḥ, here is a verse on the subject.
note Those born in this state are so short-lived that no sooner are they born than they die, as if life has no other purpose for them. This completes the answers to the five questions.
- Stenaḥ, a thief
- hiraṇyasya, of gold
- surām piban ca, and one who drinks liquor
- guroḥ talpam āvasan, uses his teacher’s bed [i.e., goes to bed with his teacher’s wife]
- brahmahā ca, and a murderer of a brāhmin
- ete, these
- catvāraḥ, four
- patanti, are lost
- pañcamaḥ ca, and the fifth
- ācaran taiḥ iti, is one who mixes with them.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Atha ha, but
- yaḥ, he who
- evam, thus
- etān pañcāgnīn veda, knows these five fires
- pāpmanā na lipyate, is not tainted with sin
- saha taiḥ api, even with them [the previous five people]
- ācaran, he mixes
- śuddhaḥ, pure
- pūtaḥ, innocent
- puṇyalokaḥ, an inhabitant of a holy world
- bhavati, he becomes
- yaḥ evam veda yaḥ evam veda, he who knows thus,
- Prācīnaśālaḥ aupamanyavaḥ, Upamanyu’s son, Prācīnaśāla
- satyayajñaḥ pauluṣiḥ, Puluṣa’s son, Satyayajña
- indradyumnaḥ bhāllaveyaḥ, Bhāllavi’s son, Indradyumna
- janaḥ śārkarākṣyaḥ, Śarkarākṣa’s son, Jana
- buḍilaḥ āśvatarāśviḥ, Aśvatarāśva’s son, Buḍila
- te ha ete, these
- mahāśālā, eminent householders
- mahāśrotriyāḥ, well read in the Vedas
- sametya, got together
- mīmāṃsām cakruḥ, to decide the issue
- kaḥ, who
- naḥ ātmā, is our Self
- kim brahma iti, what is Brahman?
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Te ha, they
- sampādayān cakruḥ, decided about the matter
- bhagavantaḥ, [one of them said to the others:] revered sirs
- ayam, this
- uddālakaḥ āruṇiḥ, Uddālaka, the son of Aruṇa
- samprati, at the moment
- imam ātmānam vaiśvānaram adhyeti, knows about the Vaiśvānara Self
- tam, to him
- hanta abhyāgacchāma iti, then let us go
- tam ha abhyājagmuḥ, they all went to him.
note The word vaiśvānara has three meanings: (a) he who is within all; (b) he who leads all; and (c) the friend of all.
- Saḥ, he [Uddālaka]
- ha sampādayāñcakāra, decided
- ime mahāśālāḥ, these eminent householders
- mahāśrotriyāḥ, and Vedic scholars
- mām prakṣyanti, will ask me questions
- tebhyaḥ, to them
- sarvam iva na pratipatsye, I will not be able to answer everything
- hanta aham anyam abhyanuśāsāni iti, therefore I will direct them to another [teacher].
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Tān, to them [the Vedic scholars]
- ha uvāca, he said
- bhagavantaḥ, O sirs
- samprati, at the present time
- ayam kaikeyaḥ, this son of Kekaya
- aśvapatiḥ, Aśvapati
- imam, this
- vaiśvānaram ātmānam, Vaiśvānara Self [the Self that iṣ in the heart of everyone]
- adhyeti, knows
- tam hanta abhyāgacchāma iti, if you permit, we will go to him
- tam ha abhyājagmuḥ, they went to him.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Tebhyaḥ ha prāptebhyaḥ, when they arrived
- pṛthak arjāṇikārayāñcakāra, he had each one of them worshipped
- prātaḥ, the next morning
- sañjihānaḥ, getting up from bed
- saḥ ha uvāca, he said
- na me stenaḥ janapade, there is no thief in my kingdom
- na kadaryaḥ, no miserly person
- na madyapaḥ, no drunkard
- na anāhitāgniḥ, no brāhmin who does not perform the agnihotra sacrifice
- na avidvān, no one who is uneducated
- na svairī, no adulterer
- kutaḥ svairiṇī how can there be an adulteress
- bhagavantaḥ, O sirs
- aham yakṣyamāṇaḥ vai asmi, I am performing a sacrifice
- yāvat dhanam, as much wealth
- eka-ekasmai ṛtvije dāsyāmi, I will give to each priest
- tāvat, that same amount
- bhagavadbhyaḥ dāsyāmi, I will give to each of you revered sirs
- vasantu bhagavantaḥ iti, sirs, please stay here.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Te ha ūcuḥ, they said
- yena ha eva arthena, the purpose for which
- puruṣaḥ caret, a person visits [another]
- tam ha eva vadet, he should state that [first]
- imam eva ātmānam vaiśvānaram, this Vaiśvānara Ātman
- samprati, now
- adhyeṣi, you know
- tam eva naḥ brūhi iti, please tell us about it.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Tān ha uvāca, he said to them
- prātaḥ, in the morning
- vaḥ prativaktā asmi iti, I will give you the answer
- te, they
- ha samitpāṇayaḥ, with fuel in their hands
- pūrvāhṇe praticakramire, came again the next day in the forenoon
- tān ha anupanīya eva, without initiating them
- etat uvāca, he said this. Iti ekādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the eleventh section.
- Aupamanyava, O son of Upamanyu
- kam, whom
- tvam, you
- ātmānam, as your self
- upāsse iti, worship
- bhagavaḥ rājan, revered king
- divam eva iti, [I worship] heaven
- ha uvāca, he [the king] said
- yam tvam ātmānam upāsse, the Self which you worship
- eṣaḥ, this [heaven]
- vai, for sure
- ātmā vaiśvānaraḥ, is Vaiśvānara Ātman
- sutejāḥ, as Suteja [i.e., beautiful and bright]
- tasmāt, therefore
- tava kule, in your family
- sutam, soma juice [i.e., children]
- prasutam, better soma juice
- āsutam, and much better soma juice
- dṛśyate, are seen [i.e., better, much better, and still better children are seen].
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Annam atsi, [the king said:] you eat food
- priyam paśyasḥ you see everything pleasant [i.e., your children, grandchildren, etc.]
- yaḥ, he who
- etam evam vaiśvānaram ātmānam upāste, worships this Vaiśvānara Ātman thus
- annam atti, eats food
- priyam paśyati, [and] sees everything pleasant [or, sees his dear ones]
- asya kule, in his family
- brahmavarcasam bhavati, are born those who shine with the brightness of Brahman
- eṣaḥ tu ātmanaḥ mūrdhā iti, but this [heaven] is like the head of the Self
- ha uvāca, he [the king] said
- te mūrdhā vyapatiṣyat, your head would have fallen
- yat mām na āgamiṣyaḥ iti, if you had not come to me. Iti dvādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the twelfth section.
- Atha, next
- ha uvāca, he [the king] said
- satyayajñam pauluṣim, to Satyayajña Pauluṣi
- prācīnayogya, O Prācīnayogya
- kam, whom
- tvam ātmānam upāsse iti, do you worship as the Self
- bhagavaḥ rājan, revered king
- ādityam eva iti, [I worship] Āditya [the sun]
- ha uvāca, [the king] said
- yam tvam ātmānam upāsse, the Self which you worship
- eṣaḥ, this [Āditya]
- vai, for sure
- ātmā vaiśvānaraḥ, is the Vaiśvānara Ātman
- viśvarūpaḥ, as Viśvarūpa [having many forms]
- tasmāt, therefore
- tava kule, in your family
- bahu viśvarūpam, wealth in many forms
- dṛśyate, is seen.
note Āditya, the sun, has many colours—white, blue, etc. For that reason Āditya is called Viśvarūpa, ‘of many forms.’ And this is why, by the favour of Āditya, one who worships him is able to have good fortune, both spiritual and material.
- Aśvatarīrathaḥ, a chariot drawn by mules
- dāsī-niṣ-kaḥ, maidservants and a necklace
- pravṛttaḥ, you have
- annam atsi, you eat food
- priyam paśyasi, you see everything pleasant [i.e., your children, grandchildren, etc.]
- yaḥ, he who
- etam evam vaiśvānaram ātmānam upāste, worships this Vaiśvānara Ātman thus
- annam atti, eats food
- priyam paśyati, [and] sees everything pleasant [or, sees his dear ones]
- asya kule, in his family
- brahmavarcasam bhavati, are born those who shine with the brightness of Brahman
- eṣaḥ tu ātmanaḥ cakṣuḥ iti, but this [Āditya] is like the eye of the Self
- ha uvāca, he [the king] said
- andhaḥ abhaviṣyaḥ, you would have become blind
- yat mām na āgamiṣyaḥ iti, if you had not come to me. Iti trayodaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the thirteenth section.
note Āditya is like the eye of the Vaiśvānara Ātman, but it is not the whole of it. If one mistakes the part for the whole, that is a great blunder. He misses the truth and is like one who is blind. The king says to Satyayajña, ‘Luckily you have come to me and have been saved from that misfortune.’
- Atha, next
- ha uvāca, he [the king] said
- indradyumnam bhāllaveyam, to Indradyumna Bhāllaveya
- vaiyāghrapadya, O Vaiyāghrapadya
- kam, whom
- tvam ātmānam upāsse iti, do you worship as the Self
- bhagavaḥ rājan, revered king
- vāyum eva iti, [I worship] Vāyu [air]
- ha uvāca, [the king] said
- yam tvam ātmānam upāsse, the Self which you worship
- eṣaḥ, this [Vāyu]
- vai, for sure
- ātmā vaiśvānaraḥ, is the Vaiśvānara Ātman
- pṛthagvartmā, as Pṛthagvartmā [going in many directions]
- tasmāt, therefore
- pṛthak, from different directions
- balayaḥ, gifts
- tvām, to you
- āyanti, come
- pṛthak rathaśreṇayaḥ anuyanti, different lines of chariots follow you [i.e., they are at your disposal].
note Air is always the same, but it can change its direction and also serve different purposes. This is why one who worships it as the Self is rewarded with gifts coming from different directions.
- Annam atsi, [the king said:] you eat food
- priyam paśyasi, you see everything pleasant [i.e., your children, grandchildren, etc.]
- yaḥ, he who
- etam evam vaiśvānaram ātmānam upāste, worships this Vaiśvānara Ātman thus
- annam atti, eats food
- priyam paśyati, [and] sees everything pleasant [or, sees his dear ones]
- asya kule, in his family
- brahmavarcasam bhavati, are born those who shine with the brightness of Brahman
- eṣaḥ tu ātmanaḥ prāṇaḥ iti, but this [Vāyu] is like the life of the Self
- ha uvāca, he [the king] said
- te prāṇaḥ udakramiṣyat, your life would have left the body
- yat mām na āgamiṣyaḥ iti, if you
- Atha, next
- ha uvāca, he [the king] said
- janam, to Jana
- śārkarākṣya, O Śārkarākṣya
- kam, whom
- tvam ātmānam upāsse iti, do you worship as the Self
- bhagavaḥ rājan, revered king
- ākāśam eva iti, [I worship] Ākāśa [space]
- ha uvāca, [the king] said
- yam tvam ātmānam upāsse, the Self which you worship
- eṣaḥ, this [Ākāśa]
- vai, for sure
- ātmā vaiśvānaraḥ, is the Vaiśvānara Ātman
- bahulaḥ, as Bahula [pervasive]
- tasmāt, therefore
- tvam, you
- bahulaḥ asi prajayā ca dhanena ca, have a great number of children and much wealth.
note The qualifying word bahula is applied to ākāśa (space) because it is vast and pervasive and it also has many other qualities. Those who worship space acquire some of those qualities.
- Annam atsi, [the king said:] you eat food
- priyam paśyasi, you see everything pleasant [i.e., your children, grandchildren, etc.]
- yaḥ, he who
- etam evam vaiśvānaram ātmānam upāste, worships this Vaiśvānara Ātman thus
- annam atti, eats food
- priyam paśyati, [and] sees everything pleasant [or, sees his dear ones]
- asya kule, in his family
- brahmavarcasam bhavati, are born those who shine with the brightness of Brahman
- eṣaḥ tu ātmanaḥ sandehaḥ iti, but this [Ākāśa] is like the mid part of the Self
- ha uvāca, he [the king] said
- te sandehaḥ vyaśīryat, the middle part of your body would have shrunk
- yat mām na āgamiṣyaḥ iti, if you had not come to me. Iti pañcadaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the fifteenth section.
note Space is only the middle part of the Vaiśvānara Ātman, and is not the whole of it. Anyone who makes the
- Atha, next
- ha uvāca, he [the king] said
- buḍilam āśvatarāśvim, to Buḍila Āśvatarāśvi
- Vaiyāghrapadya, O Vaiyāghrapadya
- kam, whom
- tvam ātmānam upāsse iti, do you worship as the Self
- bhagavaḥ rājan, revered king
- apaḥ eva iti, [I worship] water
- ha uvāca, [the king] said
- yam tvam ātmānam upāsse, the Self which you worship
- eṣaḥ, this [water]
- vai, for sure
- ātmā vaiśvānaraḥ, is the Vaiśvānara Ātman
- rayiḥ, as Rayi [wealth]
- tasmāt, therefore
- tvam, you
- rayimān puṣṭimān asi, are rich and have a strong, healthy body.
note Water is ‘wealth’ (rayi) because it is from water that we get food and all the good things we need.
- Annam atsi, [the king said:] you eat food
- priyam paśyasi, you see everything pleasant [i.e., your children, grandchildren, etc.]
- yaḥ, he who
- etam evam vaiśvānaram ātmānam upāste, worships this Vaiśvānara Ātman thus
- annam atti, eats food
- priyam paśyati, [and] sees everything pleasant [or, sees his dear ones]
- asya kule, in his family
- brahmavarcasam bhavati, are born those who shine with the brightness of Brahman
- eṣaḥ tu ātmanaḥ bastiḥ itḥ but this [water] is like the bladder of the Self
- ha uvāca, he [the king] said
- te bastiḥ vyabhetsyat, your bladder would have burst
- yat mām na āgamiṣyaḥ iti, if you had not come to me. Iti ṣoḍaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the sixteenth section.
- Atha, next
- ha uvāca, he [the king] said
- uddālakam āruṇim, to Uddālaka Āruṇi
- gautama, O Gautama
- kam, whom
- tvam ātmānam upāsse iti, do you worship as the Self
- bhagavaḥ rājan, revered king
- pṛthivīm eva iti, [I worship] the earth
- ha uvāca, [the king] said
- yam tvam ātmānam upāsse, the Self which you worship
- eṣaḥ, this [earth]
- vai, for sure
- ātmā vaiśvānaraḥ, is the Vaiśvānara Ātman
- pratiṣṭhā, as Pratiṣṭhā [the support]
- tasmāt, therefore
- tvam, you
- pratiṣṭhitaḥ prajayā ca paśubhiḥ ca asi, are supported by children and animals.
note The earth is like the feet of Vaiśvānara Ātman. This is why it is ‘the support.’
- Annam atsi, [the king said:] you eat food
- priyam paśyasi, you see everything pleasant [i.e., your children, grandchildren, etc.]
- yaḥ, he who
- etam evam vaiśvānaram ātmānam upāste, worships this Vaiśvānara Ātman thus
- annam atti, eats food
- priyam paśyati, [and] sees everything pleasant [or, sees his dear ones]
- asya kule, in his family
- brahmavarcasam bhavati, are born those who shine with the brightness of Brahman
- eṣaḥ tu ātmanaḥ pādau iti, but this [earth] is like the two feet of the Self
- ha uvāca, he [the king] said
- te pādau vyamlāsyetām, your feet would have become very weak
- yat mām na āgamiṣyaḥ iti, if you had not come to me. Iti saptadaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the seventeenth section.
- Tān, to them [the brāhmins]
- ha uvāca, [the king] said
- ete yūyam vai khalu, those of you here
- imam vaiśvānaram ātmānam vidvāṃsaḥ, have known this [undivided] Vaiśvānara Ātman
- pṛthak iva, only in part [and as separate in each individual]
- annam attha, [and that is why] you eat food [thinking you are eating separately
- yaḥ tu, but he who
- etam evam vaiśvānaram ātmānam upāste, worships this Vaiśvānara Ātman thus
- prādeśamātram, as all-pervasive [i.e., as covering the various worlds]
- abhivimānam, [and] infinite
- saḥ, he
- sarveṣu lokeṣu, in all the worlds
- sarveṣu bhūteṣu, in all beings
- sarveṣu ātmasu, in all selves
- annam atti, eats food.
note Prādeśamātra means one who covers all the worlds, from heaven to the earth—including everything and every being. Abhivimāna means infinite, beyond measure. Here the principle is that if you worship God as finite, you remain finite; if you worship him as infinite, you become infinite. Another principle suggested is that you are one with all. You are happy if all are happy. You cannot expect anything for yourself to the exclusion of others. Yet another principle is to regard your body as the place of an Agnihotra sacrifice, and the food you eat as the oblation. The six scholars mentioned here worshipped the Vaiśvānara Ātman in part—as either heaven, the sun, air, space, water, or the earth. Aśvapati told them their worship was not complete. They should include their own self also as the Vaiśvānara Ātman. In fact, they should realize that there is but one Self and that Self is in everything and in every being.
- Tasya etasya ha vai vaiśvānarasya ātmanaḥ, of this Vaiśvānara Ātman
- sutejāḥ eva mūrdhā, heaven is the head
- viśvarūpaḥ cakṣuḥ, the sun is the eye
- pṛthakvartmātmā prāṇaḥ, air is prāṇa
- bahulaḥ sandehaḥ, the sky is the middle part of the body
- rayiḥ bastiḥ eva, water is the bladder
- pṛthivī eva pādau, the earth is the feet
- vediḥ, the sacrificial altar
- ura eva, is the chest
- barhiḥ lomāni, the kuśa grass [used in the sacrifice] is the hair [on the chest]
- gārhapatyaḥ hṛdayam, the Gārhapatya fire is the heart
- anvāhāryapacana manaḥ, the Anvāhāryapacana fire [i.e., the Dakṣiṇāgni fire] is the mind
- āhavanīyaḥ āsyam, the Āhavanīya fire is the mouth. Iti aṣṭādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the eighteenth section.
note The implication is that none of these taken separately can be the Vaiśvānara Self. It is only a part of it.
- Tat, therefore
- yat bhaktam, that food which
- prathamam āgacchet, comes first
- tat, that
- homīyam, is meant as an oblation
- saḥ, he [who eats]
- yām prathamām āhutim, that first oblation
- juhuyāt, offers
- tām, that
- juhuyāt, offers
- prāṇāya svāhā iti, [with the mantra] ‘Prāṇāya svāhā’
- prāṇaḥ tṛpyati, [then] prāṇa is pleased.
note Here eating is being compared to performing a sacrifice. Every time you put food into your mouth, it is as if you are offering an oblation. Prāṇa is the deity to whom you offer the first oblation. The word prāṇa in this context means that aspect of the vital force which is responsible for respiration.
- Prāṇe tṛpyati, when prāṇa is pleased
- cakṣuḥ tṛpyati, the eye is pleased
- cakṣuṣi tṛpyati, when the eye is pleased
- ādityaḥ tṛpyati, the sun is pleased
- āditye tṛpyati, when the sun is pleased
- dyauḥ tṛpyati, heaven is pleased
- divi tṛpyantyām, when heaven is pleased
- yat kiñca, whatever
- dyauḥ ca ādityaḥ ca adhitiṣṭhataḥ, is there ruled by heaven and the sun
- tat tṛpyati, that is pleased
- tasya anu tṛptim, with its being pleased
- tṛpyati, he [the eater] is pleased
- prajayā, by children
- paśubhiḥ, by animals
- annādyena, by food
- tejasā, by vigour
- brahmavarcasena iti, by the radiance of Brahman derived from good character and scholarship. Iti ekonaviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the nineteenth section.
- Atha, next
- yām dvitīyām juhuyāt, when he offers the second [oblation]
- tām juhuyāt, he offers that
- vyānāya svāhā iti, [with the mantra] ‘Vyānāya svāhā’
- vyānaḥ tṛpyati, [then] vyāna is pleased.
note Vyāna is the aspect of the vital force responsible for our speech and for feats requiring great effort. It operates on the nerves.
- Vyāne tṛpyati, when vyāna is pleased
- śrotram tṛpyati, the ear is pleased
- śrotre tṛpyati, when the ear is pleased
- candramāḥ tṛpyati, the moon is pleased
- candramasi tṛpyati, when the moon is pleased
- diśaḥ tṛpyanti, the quarters are pleased
- dikṣu tṛpyantīṣu, if the quarters are pleased
- yat kiñca, whatever
- diśaḥ ca candramāḥ ca adhitiṣṭhanti, there is ruled by the quarters and the moon
- tat tṛpyati, that is pleased
- tasya anu tṛptim, with its being pleased
- tṛpyati, he [the eater] is pleased
- prajayā, by children
- paśubhiḥ, by animals
- annādyena, by food
- tejasā, by vigour
- brahmavarcasena iti, by the radiance of Brahman derived from good character and scholarship. Iti viṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the twentieth section.
note Section Twenty-One
- Atha, next
- yām tṛtīyām juhuyāt, when he offers the third [oblation]
- tām juhuyāt, he offers that
- apānāya svāhā iti, [with the mantra] ‘Apānāya svāhā’
- apānaḥ tṛpyati, [then] apāna is pleased.
note Apāna is the aspect of the vital force responsible for elimination of waste from the body.
- Apāne tṛpyati, when apāna is pleased
- vāk tṛpyati, the organ of speech is pleased
- vāci tṛpyantyām, the organ of speech being pleased
- agniḥ tṛpyati, fire is pleased
- agnau tṛpyati, when fire is pleased
- pṛthivī tṛpyati, the earth is pleased
- pṛthivyām tṛpyantyām, the earth being pleased
- yat kiñca, whatever
- pṛthivī ca agniḥ ca adhitiṣṭhataḥ, is under the control of the earth and fire
- tat tṛpyati, that is pleased
- tasya anu tṛptim, with its being pleased
- tṛpyāti, he [the eater] is pleased
- prajayā, by children
- paśubhiḥ, by animals
- annādyena, by food
- tejasā, by vigour
- brahmavarcasena iti, by the radiance of Brahman derived from good character and scholarship. Iti ekaviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the twenty-first section.
note Section Twenty-Two
- Atha, next
- yām caturthīm juhuyāt, when he offers the fourth [oblation]
- tām juhuyāt, he offers that
- samānāya svāhā iti, [with the mantra] ‘Samānāya svāhā’
- samānaḥ tṛpyati, [then] samāna is pleased.
note Samāna is the aspect of the vital force responsible for digestion and assimilation of food.
- Samāne tṛpyati, when samāna is pleased
- manaḥ tṛpyati, the mind is pleased
- manasi tṛpyati, when the mind is pleased
- parjanyaḥ tṛpyati, the cloud is pleased
- parjanye tṛpyati, when the cloud is pleased
- vidyut tṛpyati, lightning is pleased
- vidyuti tṛpyantyām, lightning being pleased
- yat kiñca, whatever
- vidyut ca parjanyaḥ ca adhitiṣṭhataḥ, is under the control of lightning and the cloud
- tat tṛpyati, that is pleased
- tasya am tṛptim, with its being pleased
- tṛpyati, he [the eater] is pleased
- prajayā, by children
- paśubhiḥ, by animals
- annādyena, by food
- tejasā, by vigour
- brahmavarcasena iti, by the radiance of Brahman derived from good character and scholarship. Iti dvāviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the twenty-second section.
note Section Twenty-Three
- Atha, next
- yām pañcamīm juhuyāṭ when he offers the fifth [oblation]
- tām juhuyāt, he offers that
- udānāya svāhā iti, [with the mantra] ‘Udānāya svāhā’
- udānaḥ tṛpyati, [then] udāna is pleased.
note Udāna is the aspect of the vital force responsible for helping the individual self leave the body at the time of death.
- Udāne tṛpyati, when udāna is pleased
- tvak tṛpyati, the organ of touch [i.e., the skin] is pleased
- tvaci tṛpyantyām, the organ of touch being pleased
- vāyuḥ tṛpyati, air is pleased
- vāyau tṛpyati, when air is pleased
- ākāśaḥ tṛpyati, space is pleased
- ākāśe tṛpyati, when space is pleased
- yat kiñca, whatever
- vāyuḥ ca ākāśaḥ ca adhitiṣṭhataḥ, is under the control of air and space
- tat tṛpyati, that is pleased
- tasya anu tṛptim, with its being pleased
- tṛpyati, he [the eater] is pleased
- prajayā, by children
- paśubhiḥ, by animals
- annādyena, by food
- tejasā, by vigour
- brahmavarcasena iti, by the radiance of Brahman derived from good character and scholarship. Iti trayoviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the twenty-third section.
note Section Twenty-Four
- Saḥ yaḥ, he who
- agnihotram juhoti, performs the Agnihotra sacrifice
- idam avidvān, without knowing this [i.e., about the Vaiśvānara Ātman]
- yathā, just
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Atha, but
- yaḥ, he who
- agnihotram juhoti, performs the Agnihotra sacrifice
- etat evam vidvān, knowing it accordingly
- tasya, his
- hutam bhavati, oblation is offered
- sarveṣu lokeṣu, to all the worlds
- sarveṣu bhūteṣu, to all beings
- sarveṣu ātmasu, to all selves.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Tat yathā, just as
- iṣīkā-tūlam, the cotton-like fibre of the iṣīkā grass
- agnau, into the fire
- protam, on being thrown
- pradūyeta, is totally consumed
- evam, like this
- asya ha, his
- sarve pāpmānaḥ, all sins
- pradūyante, are burnt up
- yaḥ, he who
- etat evam vidvān, having known this in this way
- agnihotram juhoti, performs the Agnihotra sacrifice.
note Iṣīkā is a kind of grass that grows very tall and has a cotton-like substance coming from it which is easily consumed when thrown into fire. Similarly, the knowledge that a person is one with all easily consumes the fruits of his sañcita (accumulated) karma and his āgāmī (future) karma. But a person may have to suffer from prārabdha karma, which is already in the process of bearing fruit. Prārabdha karma is like an arrow that has already been shot.
- Tasmāt, therefore
- u ha evam vit, one who knows [the Vaiśvānara Self]
- yadi api, even if
- caṇḍālāya, to a caṇḍāla [an outcaste]
- ucchiṣṭam, part of the food left after eating
- prayacchet, one gives
- tat, that [leftover food]
- asya ha eva hutam syāt, will be his oblation offered
- vaiśvānare ātmani iti, to the Vaiśvānara Ātman
- tat eṣaḥ ślokaḥ, here is a verse on the subject.
note Normally food that is left over after eating should not be given to anyone. But suppose a person has realized his Vaiśvānara Self and he gives such food to an outcaste. That is not a breach of any rule. Rather, it will be like an oblation offered to his own Self, for it is the same Self who is giving and who is receiving.
- Yathā, just as
- iha, in this world
- kṣudhitāḥ bālāḥ, hungry children
- mātaram paryupāsate, go to their mother [for food]
- evam, in the same way
- sarvāṇi bhūtāni, all living beings
- agnihotram upāsate iti, wait for the Agnihotra sacrifice to begin
- agnihotram upāsate iti, wait for the Agnihotra sacrifice to begin. Iti caturviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the twenty-fourth section. Iti chāndogyopaniṣadi pañcamaḥ adhyāyaḥ, here ends the fifth chapter of the Chāndogya Upaniṣad.
note Here the reference is to a person who has attained Self-knowledge. When such a person performs his Agnihotra sacrifice as described before, by taking his meal, it is as if all living beings are eating. This happens because he is one with all.
- Śvetaketuḥ ha Āruṇeyaḥ āsa, Āruṇi had a son named Śvetaketu
- tam ha pita uvāca, his father said to him [to Śvetaketu]
- śvetaketo, O Śvetaketu
- vasa brahmacaryam, live as a brahmacārin [i.e., a celibate student]
- na vai somya asmat kulīnaḥ, no one in our family, my child
- ananūcya, has not studied the scriptures
- brahma-bandhuḥ iva bhavati iti, and has not been a good brāhmin.
note Om. The word brahma-bandhu literally means a relative or friend of a brāhmin—in other words, one who is a brāhmin in name only. The question arises here, why did Āruṇi himself not invest his son with the sacred thread, initiating him into the life of a brahmacārin? Why did he suggest that his son go to another brāhmin for his sacred thread and for his education and training? Śaṅkara says, it is likely that Āruṇi was about to start on a journey and would be away from home for some time, and that is why he decided to send his son to another brāhmin.
- Saḥ ha, he [Śvetaketu]
- dvādaśa-varṣaḥ, at the age of twelve
- upetya, having gone [to his teacher as directed by his father]
- caturviṃśati-varṣaḥ, till he was twenty-four
- sarvān vedān adhītya, having studied all the Vedas
- eyāya, returned home
- mahāmanāḥ, very serious
- anūcānamānī, vain
- stabdhaḥ, having a high opinion of his scholarship
- tam ha pita uvāca, his father said to him
- śvetaketo, O Śvetaketu
- yat nu idam somya, now young man
- mahāmanāḥ asi, you have become very serious
- anūcānamānī, vain
- stabdhaḥ, thinking yourself to be a great scholar
- tam ādeśam, that teaching
- aprākṣyaḥ uta, did you ask [your teacher].
note Āruṇi must have been disappointed to see Śvetaketu’s manners when he returned home. In order to instil into Śvetaketu the spirit of humility, Āruṇi put a question to him. He wanted to remind his son that scholarship was not the same as Self-knowledge. He also wanted Śvetaketu to understand that unless he knew the secret of Self-knowledge, his education was pointless. This secret of Self-knowledge is ādeśa.
- Yena, [that teaching] by which
- aśrutam, what is never heard
- śrutam bhavati, becomes heard
- amatam matam, what is never thought of [becomes] thought of
- avijñātam vijñātam iti, what is never known [becomes] known
- bhagavaḥ, O lord
- katham nu saḥ ādeśaḥ bhavati iti, what is that teaching?
note How can there be such a thing by knowing which you know everything else? This is what is puzzling Śvetaketu. Is it possible that by knowing one thing you also know something else? Separate things are to be known separately. But the claim is being made here that unless you know the Self you know nothing. And if you know the Self you know everything. This sounds like an absurd proposition. This ādeśa, or teaching, that Āruṇi is talking about is the secret that opens up one’s eyes, that makes one conscious of the fact that until and unless one knows the Self, one knows nothing.
- Somya, young man
- yathā, just as
- ekena mṛtpiṇḍena, from one single lump of earth
- sarvam mṛnmayam vijñātam, all objects made of earth are known
- vācārambhaṇam nāmadheyam vikāraḥ, all changes are mere words, in name only
- mṛttika iti eva satyam, the earth is the reality.
note What is this ādeśa that Śvetaketu’s father wanted him to learn from his teacher? It is that there is only one single reality in this world, and that reality appears to be many because of the different names and forms superimposed on it. Here he is using earth as an example. If you know a single thing made of earth—for instance, a pot—then you know all things made of earth. How? The word ‘pot’ is merely a name; the real object is earth. Earth may assume different names and forms, but it remains the same earth.
- Somya, young man
- yathā, just as
- ekena lohamaṇinā, from one single lump of gold
- saryam lohamayam vijñātam, all objects made of gold [bangles, crowns, necklaces, etc.] are known
- vācārambhaṇam nāmadheyam vikāraḥ, all changes are mere words, in name only
- loham iti eva satyam, the gold is the reality.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Somya, young man
- yathā, just as
- ekena nakhanikṛntanena, from one single nail-cutter
- sarvam kārṣṇāyasam vijñātam, all objects made of iron are known
- vācārambhaṇam nāmadheyam vikāraḥ, all changes are mere words, in name only
- kṛṣṇāyasam iti eva satyam, the iron is the reality
- somya, O Somya
- evam saḥ ādeśaḥ bhavati iti, this is that teaching [I told you of].
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Bhagavantaḥ te, those revered teachers
- na vai nūnam avediṣuḥ, surely did not know
- etat, this [fact that if you know one you know all]
- yat, if
- hi, for sure
- etat avediṣyan, they knew this
- me, to me [their favourite disciple]
- katham, why
- na avakṣyan iti, did they not impart it
- bhagavān, sir
- tu eva me tat bravītu iti, so please explain it to me
- tathā, let it be so
- somya, young man
- iti ha uvāca, he [the father] said. Iti prathamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the first section.
- Somya, young man
- idam, this [world as we see it, with its names and forms]
- agre, before [its manifestation]
- sat eva, was existence only
- ekam eva advitīyam, one without a second
- āsīt, existed
- tat, about that
- eke, some [Buddhists and others]
- āhuḥ, say
- idam, this [world]
- agre, first [before its manifestation]
- asat eva, nothingness only
- ekam eva advitīyam, one without a second
- āsīt, existed
- tasmāt, from that
- asataḥ, nothingness
- sat jāyata, existence emerged.
note ‘Something out of nothing’ is an absurd idea. If there is a tree, it must have come out of a seed, whether the seed was seen by anyone or not. Sometimes you see a tree sprouting from a crack on the roof of a building. Where did it come from? From a seed which the wind must have blown on to the roof. A tree can only grow from a seed. Similarly, existence can only come from existence. This is what the Upaniṣad is suggesting when it says that before the world was manifest there was existence, one without a second. The word means ‘existence.’ The Vedānta scriptures describe this existence as a state of being. It is one without a second. It is pure, all-pervasive, beyond thought and speech, and formless. It is consciousness. Some philosophers maintain, however, that before the world originated there was nothing, one without a second. They claim that the world emerged from this nothing. Vedānta says, suppose you are passing by a potter’s house and you see him with a huge lump of clay. Then you return that same way a few hours later, and you are surprised to see that the nameless and formless lump of clay is transformed into a number of pots, plates, bowls, cups, etc.—each distinct with a name and a form. Similarly, existence becomes manifest as this world, but it remains existence. It The Naiyāyikas, the Buddhists, and others think just the opposite—that existence has come out of non-existence. But how can they know anything about a past non-existence? And how can they know, in particular, that it is one only without a second? In fact, the concept of non-existence is being introduced here only to make a stronger foundation for the concept of existence. In order to know what to avoid, one must be able to see it. Similarly, the concept of non-existence is added only to make it clear what is meant by existence.
- Somya, O Somya
- kutaḥ tu, but what [proof is there]
- khalu, indeed
- evam syāt, could this be so
- iti ha uvāca, he [Āruṇi] said
- katham, in what way
- asataḥ, from non-existence
- sat, existence
- jāyata iti, will come
- tu, on the other hand
- somya, O Somya
- idam agre, before this [world]
- sat eva āsīt, there
note Let us say the world was not here before, but it came into existence at a certain point of time. What does this mean? Does this mean that there was a void and out of that void the world as we now see it emerged? As has been stated already, the idea of something coming out of nothing is absurd. Yet some Buddhist scholars, who believe that existence comes from non-existence, argue that unless a seed is destroyed, a tree cannot grow from it. So according to them something comes out of nothing. Śaṅkara argues that it is only the form of the seed that is destroyed. The material that makes up the seed goes on to produce the tree. There is no example anywhere of something coming from nothing. A potter makes pots out of clay. Can he make a pot out of nothing? No. But then the Buddhists argue, can a pot produce another pot? Vedānta says, no, but a pot can change its form. It can become potsherds or it can go back to the form of clay. Vedānta says, the world always existed, but it did not always exist in the form we see it now. A snake is always a snake, whether it is lying like a long rope or it is coiled up. The world is Sat (Existence), and it is nameless and formless. But how it does come to have names and forms? The answer is that Existence is the only reality, but if it seems to have different names and forms, they are merely superimpositions and are not real.
- Tat, that [existence]
- aikṣata, decided
- bahu syām, I shall be many
- prajāyeya iti, I shall be born
- tat, that [existence]
- asṛjata, created
- tejaḥ, fire
- tat tejaḥ, that [existence as] fire
- aikṣata, decided
- bahu syām, I shall be many
- prajāyeya iti, I shall be born
- tat, that [fire]
- apaḥ, water
- asṛjata, created
- tasmāt, that is why
- yatra kva ca, whenever and wherever
- puruṣaḥ, a person
- śocati, grieves
- svedate vā, or perspires
- tat, [it happens] that
- tejasaḥ eva, from fire
- āpaḥ adhijāyante, water comes.
note The word aikṣata means ‘saw,’ ‘thought,’ or ‘decided.’ It can only apply to a conscious principle, because only a conscious principle can decide or think or see. And only a conscious being can say that he will be many. The scriptures say that this Existence, or Brahman, is one without a second, always the same, unchanging, and unchangeable. So how can it at the same time be many? Vedānta says that it is like a lump of earth sometimes taking different forms of pots, cups, etc. Or it is like a rope which sometimes looks like a snake. The change is only in names and forms. It is not a real change. Vedānta says, this applies to all that we see in this world. Underlying the seeming diversity there is unity. This unity—this One—supports the diversity. It is this One that has become many, but only in appearance. To go back to the example of the earth, the earth remains earth, though in appearance it may take the form of a lump or of some pots or of some other things. An apt description of this is ‘unity in diversity.’ It is Brahman that has become everything—space, air, fire, water, earth. Then the question arises, how can fire, which is inanimate, think? The answer is that here fire stands for Brahman. Brahman as fire is making things happen. Brahman is the source of everything. It is the base, the reality. Just as earth can be in the form of a lump or a pot, similarly, Brahman can be in the form of fire, water, or something else. It is not that Brahman undergoes any change. Brahman remains Brahman. It is Sat, eternal Existence. It is the Absolute. It is never conditioned by anything. When it says it will be ‘many,’ it means it will appear in many forms, just as earth or gold can be in many forms. But it must be borne in mind that this Existence is also pure consciousness.
- Tāḥ āpaḥ, that water
- aikṣanta, decided
- bahvyaḥ syāma, I shall be many
- prajāyemahi iti, I shall be born
- tāḥ, that [water]
- annam asṛjanta, produced food
- tasmāt, that is why
- yatra kva ca, whenever and wherever
- varṣati, it rains
- taṭ at once
- bhūyiṣṭham, in great abundance
- annam bhavati, food grows
- adbhyaḥ eva, it is from water
- tat, then
- annādyam adhijāyate, food is produced. Iti dvitīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the second section.
note Here, food represents earth.
- Teṣām khalu eṣām bhūtānām, of these living beings
- trīṇi eva bījāni bhavanti, there are three kinds of origin
- āṇḍajam, birth from eggs
- jīvajam, from parents
- udbhijjam iti, from plants.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Sā iyam devatā, that deity [i.e., Sat, Existence]
- aikṣata, decided
- hanta, so
- aham, I
- imāḥ tisraḥ devatāḥ, these three gods [i.e., fire, water, and earth]
- anena jīvena ātmanā, as the jīvātman [i.e., the individual self]
- anupraviśya, having entered
- nāmarūpe, as names and forms
- vyākaravāṇi iti, I shall manifest.
note The Self (Sat) is within fire, water, and earth, but that is not to say that it is in any way affected by them. If you stand before a mirror, you see your reflection. The reflection may be good or it may not be good, but does that affect the mirror? The sun gives light to the eyes, but if there is anything wrong with the eyes, does that affect the sun? Similarly, the Self is everywhere and in everything. But wherever it is, it is the same. Names and forms, apart from the Self, are false. But there is, in reality, nothing apart from the Self. Everything is the Self. In that sense, the names and forms are also the Self and therefore real.
- Tāsām, of these [three deities]
- trivṛtam trivṛtam, dividing them threefold
- ekaikām, each of them
- karavāṇi iti, I shall make
- sā iyam devatā, that deity [Existence]
- imāḥ tisraḥ devatā, these three deities
- anena jīvena eva ātmanā, as the individual self
- anupraviśya, having entered
- nāmarūpe vyākarot, manifested himself as names and forms.
note Trivṛtam is applied in the case of fire, water, and earth as follows: gross fire = 1/2 subtle fire + 1/4 subtle water + 1/4 subtle earth gross water = 1/2 subtle water + 1/4 subtle fire + 1/4 subtle earth gross earth = 1/2 subtle earth + 1/4 subtle fire + 1/4 subtle water This mixture turns the subtle elements into gross elements. It makes them separate and yet one. A similar process, called pañcikaraṇa, is applied in the case of the five elements—space, air, fire, water, and earth. Sat, or Brahman, is present in all the elements as their Self. First he is manifest as their sum total, called Virāṭ He then manifests himself as names and forms.
- Tāsām of those [three elements]
- ekaikām, each one of them
- trivṛtam trivṛtam akarot, he made threefold
- somya, O Somya
- yathā tu khalu, but as to how
- imāḥ tisraḥ devatā, these three deities
- trivṛt trivṛt ekaikā bhavati, each becomes threefold
- tat me vijānīhi iti, learn this from me. Iti tṛtīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the third section.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Yat agneḥ rohitam rūpam, that red colour of [gross] fire
- tat rūpam tejasaḥ, that colour is from [subtle] fire
- yat śuklam, that which is white
- tat apām, that is from [subtle] water
- yat kṛṣṇam, that which is dark
- tat annasya, that is from [subtle] earth [lit., food]
- agneḥ agnitvam apāgāt, [thus] the ‘fire’-ness of fire is gone
- vācārambhaṇam nāmadheyam vikāraḥ, all changes are mere words, in name only
- trīṇi rūpāṇi iti eva satyam, only the three colours are the reality [i.e., outside of the three colours, there is no fire].
note When fire is gross it has a red colour which comes from its subtle aspect. But there is also a white colour in it which comes from the subtle water element. Similarly, sometimes it has a dark colour which comes from the subtle earth element. The Upaniṣad says, in reality, fire is nothing beyond these three colours—red, white, and black. This proves the falsity of the idea of gross fire.
- Yat ādityasya rohitam rūpam, that red colour of the sun
- tat rūpam tejasaḥ, that colour is from fire
- yat śuklam, that which is white
- tat apām, that is from water
- yat kṛṣṇam, that which is dark
- tat annasya, that is from earth [lit., food]
- ādityāt ādityatvam apāgāt, [thus] the ‘sun’-ness of the sun is gone
- vācārambhaṇam nāmadheyam vikāraḥ, all changes are mere words, in name only
- trīṇi rūpāṇi iti eva satyam, only the three colours are the reality [i.e., outside of the three colours, there is no sun].
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Yat candramasaḥ rohitam rūpam, that red colour of the moon
- tat rūpam tejasaḥ, that colour is from fire
- yat śuklam, that which is white
- tat apām, that is from water
- yat kṛṣṇam, that which is dark
- tat annasya, that is from earth [lit., food]
- candrāt candratvam apāgāt, [thus] the ‘moon’-ness of the moon is gone
- vācārambhaṇam nāmadheyam vikāraḥ, all changes are mere words, in name only
- trīṇi rūpāṇi iti eva satyam, only the three colours are the reality [i.e., outside of the three colours, there is no moon].
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Yat vidyutaḥ rohitam rūpam, that red colour of lightning
- tat rūpam tejasaḥ, that colour is from fire
- yat śuklam, that which is white
- tat apām, that is from water
- yat kṛṣṇam, that which is dark
- tat annasya, that is from earth [lit., food]
- vidyutaḥ vidyuttvam apāgāt, [thus] the ‘lightning’-ness of lightning is gone
- vācārambhaṇam nāmadheyam vikāraḥ, all changes are mere words, in name only
- trīṇi rūpāṇi iti eva satyam, only the three colours are the reality [i.e., outside of the three colours, there is no lightning].
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Tat etat vidvāṃsaḥ ha, having known this
- vai pūrve, the earlier
- mahāśālāḥ, great householders
- mahāśrotriyāḥ, who were well read in the Vedas
- āhuḥ sma, said
- adya, now
- kaścana, anyone [i.e., any scholar]
- naḥ, to us
- aśrutam, unheard of
- amatam, unthought of
- avijñātam, unknown
- udāhariṣyati iti, can speak of
- hi, since
- ebhyaḥ, these three [colours]
- vidāñcakraḥ, they came to know [that by knowing one, a person knows all].
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Yat u rohitam iva abhūt iti, whatever else was seen as red
- tat rūpam tejasaḥ iti, that is the colour of fire
- tat vidāñcakruḥ, they knew that
- yat u śuklam iva abhūt iti, whatever else was seen as white
- tat apām rūpam iti, that is the colour of water
- vidāñcakruḥ, they knew
- yat u kṛṣṇam iva abhūt iti, whatever else was seen as dark
- tat annasya rūpam iti, that is the colour of earth [lit., food]
- vidāñcakruḥ, they knew.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Yat u avijñātam iva abhūt iti, and whatever they saw that was not properly known
- samāsaḥ iti, the combination
- etāsām eva devatānām, of these deities [fire, water, and earth]
- tat vidāñcakruḥ, that they knew
- somya, my son
- yathā, as to how
- imāḥ khalu nu, these very
- tisraḥ devatāḥ, three deities
- puruṣam, a living being
- prāpya, entering [as food]
- trivṛt trivṛt ekaikā bhavati, each one becomes threefold
- tat me vijānīhi iti, learn that from me. Iti caturthaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the fourth section.
note Previously the scholars did not know these deities—the three elements—separately. They began to understand better when they saw the elements working in living beings.
- Annam aśitam, when food is eaten
- tredhā, in three ways
- vidhīyate, is divided
- tasya, of it
- yaḥ sthaviṣṭhaḥ, that which is the grossest
- dhātuḥ, part
- tat purīṣam bhavati, that becomes excreta
- yaḥ madhyamaḥ, that which is less gross [lit., middle]
- tat māṃsam, that [becomes] flesh
- yaḥ aṇiṣṭhaḥ, that which is the subtlest
- tat manaḥ, that [becomes] the mind.
note When we eat, the food nourishes the body in different ways. How? First, the grossest part of the food is rejected by the body. Then that which is less gross, a bit finer, becomes our flesh. And finally the finest part becomes the mind. According to Vedānta, the mind is material. It functions through the nervous system, which is called hitā. How does this food get transformed into the mind? Śaṅkara says that the subtlest part of the food becomes blood and enters into the heart. From there it goes through the veins and nerves, nourishing the mind. The term mind refers here to the phenomena of our thinking, feeling, willing, etc., plus the aggregate of our sense organs—our seeing, hearing, and so forth. Suppose you do not eat anything. What happens? Slowly you will feel that your mind is becoming more and more feeble. Your memory starts failing, and you cannot concentrate. The finest part of your system is affected. Then the body begins to shrink. You become thinner and thinner, and finally you die. Food nourishes all these. This is why Vedānta says that the mind is material.
- Āpaḥ, water
- pītāḥ, when drunk
- tredhā, in three ways
- vidhīyante, is divided
- tāsām, of it
- yaḥ sthaviṣṭaḥ dhātuḥ, that which is the grossest part
- tat mūtram bhavati, that becomes urine
- yaḥ madhyamaḥ, that which is less gross
- tat lohitam, that [becomes] blood
- yaḥ aṇiṣṭhaḥ, that which is the finest part
- saḥ prāṇaḥ, that is prāṇa.
note Water also has a threefold function. When we drink water, the grossest part of it flushes our whole system and at last passes out of the body as urine. Then that which is less gross becomes blood. If I do not drink water, the blood would clot and there would be no more blood supply. Then the finest aspect becomes prāṇa, the vital force. Without water, we could not breathe or live.
- Tejaḥ aśitam, when fire [i.e., oil, butter, etc., which produce energy] is eaten
- tredhā, in three ways
- vidhīyāte, is divided
- tasya, of it
- yaḥ sthaviṣṭhaḥ, that which is the grossest
- dhātuḥ, part
- tat asthi bhavati, that becomes bone
- yaḥ madhyamaḥ, that which is midway
- saḥ majjā, that [becomes] marrow
- yaḥ aṇiṣṭhaḥ, that which is the subtlest
- sā vāk, that is speech.
note Tejas literally means ‘fire.’ The idea here is that if you eat butter or fatty substances such as oil, it is like eating fire. Why? Because butter and oil are sources of tejas—that is, they provide us energy and vitality. These substances, when eaten, also become transformed into three different things. That which is gross becomes our bones; that which is between the gross and the subtle becomes our marrow; and that which is subtle becomes our speech. If our organ of speech is supported by the right kind of food, we are able to speak logically and articulately. The Upaniṣad is showing us here how we depend on these elements—earth, water, and fire. We. are able to think, speak, and move about all because of the support we get from them. But all these things depend on Brahman, pure Spirit. If you think of the way nature functions, and how the planets rotate in their orbits, and so forth, you are extremely impressed. Everything is so well organized. But we must remember, it is Brahman that is manifesting as nature, as the planets, as you and me and each individual—as even the tiny insects. The idea is that the One has become the many. Let us not be deluded by seeing the many.
- Somya, O Somya
- manaḥ hi annamayam, the mind is nourished by food
- prāṇaḥ āpomayaḥ, the vital force is nourished by water
- vāk tejomayī iti, speech is nourished by fire
- bhagavān, sir
- bhūyaḥ eva, again
- mā, to me
- vijñāpayatu iti, will you please explain
- tathā, so be it
- somya iti, O Somya
- ha uvāca, he [the father] said. Iti pañcamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the fifth section.
note In the Vedānta philosophy there are said to be five elements. The first two—ākāśa (space, or ether) and vāyu (air)—are not visible to us. The other three—pṛthivī (earth—here referred to as annam, food), āpa (water), and agni, or tejas (fire, or energy)—are visible, and this is why they have been discussed here. These three elements, however, are never to be found in their pure form. When we perceive them, they are always in a combined state. For instance, the water that we see always has some earth and other elements mixed with it. In reality, though, it is pure Spirit which we see as earth, water, or fire. The father has been telling his son that the mind is the finest product of food, that prāṇa, the vital force, is the finest product of water, and that speech is the finest product of fire. Naturally the son is confused. It is not very clear. So he asks his father to explain it further.
- Somya, O Somya
- dadhnaḥ mathyamānasya, of curd when it is churned
- yaḥ aṇimā, what is the finest part
- sāḥ ūrdhvaḥ samudīṣati, that rises to the surface
- tat sarpiḥ bhavati, that becomes butter.
note Even now, in many homes in India, people make their own butter by churning curd. When you churn the curd, cream starts appearing on the surface. Gradually that cream turns into butter. It was already in the curd. In fact, it was the finest part of the curd. Only the churning was needed to make it rise to the top.
- Evam eva khalu, in the same way
- somya, O Somya
- annasya aśyamānasya, of the food that is eaten
- yaḥ aṇimā, that which is the finest part
- saḥ ūrdhvaḥ samudīṣati, it rises to the surface
- tat manaḥ bhavati, that becomes the mind.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Anna means the food that you eat—any food. Wheat, rice, fish, meat, vegetables, milk, and so on—all this is anna. The Upaniṣad says, that which is the finest part of the food rises to the surface, like the butter in curd. It then becomes the mind. It is the subtlest part of the food, the essence. According to Vedānta, the mind is material. It is a by-product of food and is nourished by food.
note Similarly, if you drink water, the finest part of that water becomes separated from the rest and rises to the surface to become prāṇa, the vital force. This is why in Sanskrit water and life (jala and jīvana) are synonymous. Without water, life cannot exist. In fact, science says that life first appeared in water.
- Somya, O Somya
- tejasaḥ aśyamānasya, of the fire [butter, etc.] that is eaten
- yaḥ aṇima, that which is the finest part
- saḥ ūrdhvaḥ samudīṣati, it rises to the surface
- sā vāk bhavati, that becomes speech.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Somya, O Somya
- manaḥ hi annamayam, the mind is certainly nourished by food
- prāṇaḥ āpomayaḥ, the vital force is nourished by water
- vāk tejomayī iti, speech is nourished by fire
- bhagavān, sir
- bhūyaḥ eva, again
- mā, to me
- vijnāpayatu iti, will you please explain
- tathā, so be it
- somya iti, O Somya
- ha uvāca, he [the father] said. Iti ṣaṣṭhaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the sixth section.
- Somya, O Somya
- puruṣaḥ, a person
- ṣoḍaśakalaḥ, has sixteen parts
- pañcadaśa ahāni, for fifteen days
- mā aśīḥ, do not eat
- apaḥ piba, drink water
- kāmam, as much as you like
- prāṇaḥ āpomayaḥ, life is dependent on water
- na pibataḥ, if you do not drink water
- vicchetsyate iti, it will leave.
note Now the son says, ‘I still can’t understand.’ So the father tries something else. A normal human being in good health is said, in Vedānta, to be made up of sixteen parts. If a person neither eats nor drinks water for fifteen days, he will die. But if he does not eat yet continues to drink water during that time he will remain alive. When Gandhiji used to fast, he would drink plenty of water and would put some lemon juice in it. That would keep him alive. But what happens to a person when he drinks water but does not eat? His mind fails. He cannot remember anything. So, to convince his son, the father asks him to fast for fifteen days but to drink water.
- Saḥ, he [Śvetaketu]
- ha pañcadaśa ahāni, for fifteen days
- na āśa, did not eat anything
- atha, then [on the sixteenth day]
- enam ha upasasāda, he went to him [his father]
- bhoḥ, O Father
- kim bravīmi iti, what shall I recite
- somya, O Somya
- ṛcaḥ yajūṃṣi sāmāni iti, the Ṛk, the Yajuḥ, and the Sāmas
- saḥ ha uvāca, [Śvetaketu] said
- bhoḥ, O Father
- na vai mā pratibhānti iti, they do not come to my mind.
note Now the father says to his son, ‘Will you please recite to me the Ṛk, Yajuḥ, and Sāma mantras?’ But the son replies: ‘They are completely gone. I do not remember them. They do not appear in my mind at all.’ Having been without food for fifteen days, Śvetaketu’s mind was almost gone. The mind is the finest part, the essence, of food—not of water, not of anything else. Therefore, the mind must be material.
- Tam ha uvāca, he said to him [to Śvetaketu]
- somya, O Somya
- yathā, as
- mahataḥ abhyāhitasya, of a big blazing fire
- ekaḥ aṅgāraḥ, one ember
- khadyotamātraḥ, the size of a firefly
- pariśiṣṭaḥ syāt, that is left
- tena, by that
- tataḥ api bahu, anything larger than its size
- na dahet, cannot bum
- evam, like that
- somya, my son
- ekā kalā, only one part
- ṣoḍaśānām kalānām, of [yourl sixteen parts
- atiśiṣṭā syāt, has remained
- etarhi, now
- tayā, by that [small part]
- vedān, the Vedas
- na anubhavasi, you do not remember
- aśāna, eat
- atha, then
- me, my [words]
- vijñāsyasi iti, you will grasp.
note Suppose you have a big pile of wood, and you start a fire with it. After awhile practically the whole pile is consumed, and there is only a small spark left—a spark as small as a firefly. Very little can be burnt with such a tiny spark, yet even so, if you add some fuel to it you can again start a big fire. ‘Similarly,’ Uddālaka says to his son, ‘your mind is like that tiny spark. It is not functioning now because you have not given it any fuel these last fifteen days. There is just a flicker of your mind working, and it cannot serve any useful purpose. If you eat something now, everything will come back to your mind.’
- Saḥ, he [Śvetaketu]
- ha āśa, ate
- atha, then
- enam, to him [his father]
- ha upasasāda, he went
- tam, to him [to Śvetaketu]
- yat kiñca, whatever
- papraccha, he asked
- sarvam ha pratipede, he was able to follow everything.
note After eating, Śvetaketu’s mind was back to normal. He then approached his father, and everything his father said was clear to him.
- Tam ha uvāca, he said to him [to Śvetaketu]
- somya, O Somya
- yathā, just as
- mahataḥ abhyāhitasya, of a big blazing fire
- ekam aṅgāram, one ember
- khadyotamātram, the size of a firefly
- pariśiṣṭam, that is left
- tam, that
- tṛṇaiḥ upasamādhāya, with some grass
- prājvalayet, becomes blazing
- tena, by that [grass]
- tataḥ api bahu, even more than before
- dahet, bums.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Evam, in the same way
- somya, O Somya
- ekā kalā, one part
- te ṣoḍaśānām kalānām, of your sixteen parts
- atiśiṣṭā abhūt, remained
- sā, it
- upasamāhitā annena, nourished by food
- prājvālī, has revived
- etarhi, now
- tayā, by that [remaining part]
- vedān, the Vedas
- anubhavasi, you can understand
- somya, O Somya
- hi, this is why [I said]
- manaḥ annamayam, the mind is nourished by food
- prāṇaḥ āpomayaḥ, prāṇa is nourished by water
- vāk tejomayī iti, speech is nourished by fire
- asya, of that [what his father had said]
- tat ha vijajñau iti, he understood it
- vijajñau iti, he understood. Iti saptamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the seventh section.
note Just as a fire will go out if fuel is not added to it, so also the mind will cease to function if you do not eat. After fasting for fifteen days, Śvetaketu still had a small portion of his mind left working. It was reduced to a fragment, as it were. But after eating, his memory returned and his mind was again active and vigorous. The idea is, this human body is a very powerful instrument. The mind is powerful; speech is powerful; life itself is powerful. But it is all dependent on food (i.e., earth), water, and energy (i.e., fire). Yet even these gross elements are not independent. As we have seen earlier, earth is a mixture of water and fire with earth. Water also is a mixture of earth and fire with water. Similarly, fire is a mixture of earth and water with fire. This process is called trivṛta, or triplication. It is the permutation and combination of the three elements. Vedānta says, we cannot see these elements in their pure form, because that pure form is Existence, sat. What the Upaniṣad is saying is suggestive: That which we do not see in its pure form, but in a form which is a by-product of a combination of other things, really does not exist. This is the argument Buddhism also advances. They say: ‘You talk about a chariot, but where is the chariot? Is it a reality? No, it can’t be a reality, because a chariot is a combination of different things put together. Where is the chariot? Is it the wheels? The platform? The canopy? No. When you speak of an object which is not independent, which is dependent on factors combining together, then it is not real.’ Here is the same argument. All objects are dependent. What exists then? Vedānta says it is sat, Existence. That Existence is our own Self, the real Self, the essence, the real being, pure Spirit. When the Upaniṣad refers to our mind, our life force, and our speech, it is referring to this phenomenal world. We have to look at these things from two levels: From the cosmic level there is one Reality, one Existence. From the individual level we owe our mind, life force, and speech to these elements. But in reality all these elements, all these manifestations of creation, are pure Spirit. One Reality, pure Spirit, has assumed diverse forms. The whole manifestation of this universe is dependent. Even the mind. Where does the mind come from? Science has not yet been able to answer this question. According to Vedānta, the mind is nothing but matter; yet consciousness, which is pure Spirit, is the source. Vedānta does not make any distinction between matter and consciousness. We say it is one and the same. Consciousness is the source, and out of that one source, all that exists—call it matter, call it energy, call it mind—has come. Science has its own terms. They may call the source of life DNA or something else. Vedānta says it is tat, That. Or it is sat, Existence. From Existence, everything has emerged. In essence there is one—the same thing appearing in different forms. You may ask, how did the. One became manifest as many? Why did it happen? The fact that we can ask this question shows that that One is conscious. Only a conscious being can think, plan, and wish. Because that one Reality is consciousness it can say, ‘I will be many.’ If it were inert, it could not wish to become many. So Vedānta says, that one Reality, pure Spirit, is consciousness. Yet, that consciousness can also take the form of something inert. Matter and consciousness are not different. For instance, if you break a paperweight into atoms, and then smash even those atoms, you will find so much energy—so much motion. So, whether the manifestations of this creation are conscious or unconscious, intelligent or unintelligent, they all have their source in that one conscious Reality.
- Uddālakaḥ āruṇih, Uddālaka Āruṇi [the son of Aruṇa]
- śvetaketum putram, to his son Śvetaketu
- ha uvāca, said
- svapnāntam, the concept of [deep] sleep
- me, from me
- somya, O Somya
- vijānīhi iti, learn
- yatra, when
- etat puruṣaḥ, this person
- svapiti nāma, is said to be in deep sleep
- somya, O Somya
- tadā, then
- sampannaḥ bhavati, he is merged
- satā, with Sat [Existence, Paramātmā]
- svam apītaḥ bhavati, he attains his real Self
- tasmāt, for this, reason
- ācakṣate, people say
- enam, about him
- svapiti iti, he is sleeping
- svam hi apītaḥ bhavati, he attains his real Self.
note In ancient India, all skills were passed from the father to the son. This is how the caste system eventually became so rigid. A father tended to be selfish and favour his son over his other students, especially if the father was a great scholar. Unless he had a student who was exceptionally good and intelligent, he would generally pass on the best things to his own son. Why does Uddālaka call his son Śvetaketu by the name Somya? The name Somya means one who is quiet, humble, very good, and gentle. If you want to learn something, you must be quiet and modest. So the father is saying, vijānīhi—‘learn from me, you who are so quiet and humble.’ The word puruṣa means pure, ‘in the heart,’ and śayate, ‘residing.’ That which resides in the heart—i.e., the Self. It is a living being. It could be a man, a woman, an animal, or an insect. The word svapnāntam means the concept of deep sleep, or dreamless sleep. When we dream, our sleep is disturbed, and it does not give us any rest. But dreamless sleep is very restful. If we have that kind of sleep for even a few minutes, we become temporarily free from this world. When we wake up then, it takes us some time to realize where we are and what time of day it is. While we were sleeping, the whole world was wiped out for us. When we say, ‘This person is sleeping,’ what does that mean? What happens when we sleep? Where does the mind go? That is what is being discussed here. The Upaniṣad says, during deep sleep a person becomes united with the Self. The individual self—that is, the jīva who is ignorant—merges into the Cosmic Self. The individual self has to have a body and a mind, and it is the mind that is closest to the Self. In fact, many people think the mind is the Self. The mind, however, is like a crystal. A crystal has no colour of its own, but suppose you put a red flower next to it. What happens? The crystal assumes the colour of the flower. Similarly, the mind has no consciousness of its own. But because it is close to the Paramātman, the Supreme Self, it gets the reflection of consciousness from the Self. Then, through the mind, all our organs function—the eyes, the ears, the hands, the feet, etc. The organs and the mind are all dependent on the Self. When we are awake, the body and mind are both functioning. Then when we are dreaming, the body is not functioning but the mind is still functioning. But when we are in deep sleep, the mind also ceases to function. We then become one with our own Self. That is why deep sleep is so refreshing. Yet when we wake up we are the same individual that we were before we slept. The Self is there. We are always one with it. Yet sleep does not give us any knowledge of our Self. Why? Because our ignorance creates a barrier that keeps us from knowing our real nature. But if we are one with the Self, how can we be separate from it? In reality, we are never separate from the Self, but when we are attached to our names and forms, we have desires. And when we have desires, ignorance has its full grip on us. During dreamless sleep the barrier that keeps us from the Self is temporarily removed, but we are not conscious of it. That is why, when we wake up, we are exactly the same person we were before we slept. If I was a tiger before I went to sleep, I am a tiger again when I get up. A sleeping tiger cannot do any harm, but if it wakes up, beware! Similarly, if I was a bad person before, I am still a bad person when I wake up. So, when I sleep, for the time being my ignorance is also sleeping, as it were. Only Self-knowledge can dispel my ignorance and give me true peace. It is a common belief in India that if you bathe in the Ganga, you will get rid of all your sins. Sri Ramakrishna used to say, though, that the sins are very clever. As you go to the river the sins say to each other: ‘Well, this person is going into the Ganga. Let’s take shelter on that tree.’ So they fly off and perch on a tree. Then, when you come out of the river, they all pounce back on you and once again you are in their grip. Similarly, deep sleep can give us temporary rest, but it cannot remove our ignorance. Only if we have real knowledge, knowledge of the Self, can we remove the seeds of our karma. Knowledge is like a sword. With that sword we can cut off the roots of our ignorance and become free. Once we attain Self-knowledge we are totally transformed, because it goes to the root of our being. And when we wake up from our sleep of ignorance we are no longer the same individual.
- Saḥ yathā, it is like
- śakuniḥ, a bird
- sūtreṇa prabaddhaḥ, tied to a rope
- diśam diśam, in all directions
- patitvā, fluttering
- anyatra, elsewhere
- āyatanam, a shelter
- alabdhvā, without getting
- bandhanam eva upaśrayate, surrenders to its bondage
- evam eva khalu, similarly
- somya, O Somya
- tat manaḥ, this mind
- diśam diśam, in all directions
- patitvā, running about
- anyatra, elsewhere
- āyatanam, a shelter
- alabdhvā, without getting
- prāṇam eva upaśrayate, surrenders to prāṇa
- somya, O Somya
- prāṇa-bandhanam hi manaḥ iti, the mind is tied to prāṇa.
note When we are sound asleep, what happens to the mind? The mind withdraws; it retires and temporarily goes back to the Self. Is this the same as samādhi, the superconscious state? Vedānta says, no, there is a distinction between samādhi and this experience of sound sleep. Both experiences bring great joy and peace, but deep sleep is only temporary. It is just for a while. We are still held by the rope of ignorance, and we do not know our real Self. When we come back from deep sleep, we are just as tightly bound as we were before we slept. The Upaniṣad gives the example here of a bird tied to a rope, struggling to get free. It starts flying in all directions, seeking a safe place—any place, anywhere else than where it is bound. At last it must give up and return to its place of bondage. Sri Ramakrishna used to give an illustration very similar to this. A bird is sitting on the mast of a ship and soon falls asleep. It does not notice that the ship has set sail. Finally, when the ship has gone far out to sea, it wakes up and starts looking around for land. Flying to the east, it eventually gets tired, and, not finding any land, comes back to the ship. In the same way, it flies out to the west, to the north, and to the south, but all it sees is water everywhere. At last the bird decides to take refuge on the mast of the ship. Swami Vivekananda says that all of us are struggling to be free. Freedom is our birthright. You are trying to be free; a student is trying to be free; a teacher is trying to be free. All of us, irrespective of our situation in life, are trying in one way or another to attain freedom. The Upaniṣad is saying that when we are awake, we are like the bird flying in different directions. We are constantly fluttering around, doing this and doing that. Sometimes we are attracted by something here, and then again by something there. Our minds are always roaming about. But finally we get tired and surrender our minds to prāṇa—that is, we lie down and go to sleep. And if we are lucky, we have good sound sleep. The word prāṇa here means the Self. Meister Eckhart once said that the mind has two eyes. One eye is always looking outside, looking at the things around. But the other eye is looking inside, looking and searching, as it were, into one’s own Being. Finally one discovers the ‘Castle of Security.’ What is this Castle of Security? It is the Self. When we enter into this castle we are at peace. That is what the Upaniṣad also says here. When a person is able to retreat into his own Self, even temporarily, he attains a state of peace and joy. In deep sleep, we temporarily enter the castle. It
- Somya, O Somya
- me, from me
- aśanā pipāse, about hunger and thirst
- vijānīhi iti, learn
- yatra, when
- puruṣaḥ, a person
- aśiśiṣati etat nāma, is said to be hungry
- tat, then
- āpaḥ eva aśitam, the water which has been drunk
- nayante, has carried [the food that he ate] away
- tat yathā, just as, for example
- go-nāyaḥ, a leader of cows
- aśva-nāyaḥ, a leader of horses
- puruṣa-nāyaḥ, one who leads other people
- iti, these terms people use
- evam, similarly
- tat apaḥ, that water
- ācakṣate, people say
- aśanāya iti, is the leader of food
- tatra, so also
- vijānīhi, know
- somya, O Somya
- etat śuṅgam, this sprout [i.e., the body]
note In this universe we always see two things—one is the cause, and the other is the effect. These two forces are always at work. The cause becomes the effect, and again the effect becomes the cause of something else. For instance, a duck is the effect of an egg, and again, that same duck is the cause of another egg. Buddhism also emphasizes this point. Many people are under the impression that Buddhism is an entirely new religion. But really speaking, it is not a new religion, as Buddha himself pointed out. In Buddhism, the cause and effect theory is termed pratītya-samutpāda, ‘dependent-arising’—that is, an effect arises dependent on its cause. The Upaniṣad here takes the example of a sprout and its roots. When you see a sprout, you know at once that there must be roots, and out of those roots the sprout has come. Similarly, we see ṃ this universe many things. They seem to have come from different sources, but in reality the ultimate source is one and the same. It is Sat, pure Existence, Brahman. In this verse, the father begins by telling his son about hunger and thirst. What does it mean when a person says, ‘I am hungry’? A few hours previously he ate something, but again he is hungry. What happened? It means that whatever he ate before has been carried away by water. Some of the water becomes blood and distributes the food to different parts of the body, and then the water carries away the waste part of the food and takes it out of the body. Then the person feels hungry again. This is why. water is said to be the leader of food. The Upaniṣad says it is like a herd of cows. Wherever there is a herd of cows, you will find that the herd chooses a particular cow as the leader. When the cows move from place to place, the leader is ahead and all the others follow behind. Similarly, water is the leader, and the food you eat is distributed and then taken away by the water. The idea is, this body comes from food, and water is what gives it life. They go together. Nothing is independent. Just as this body has a source, this universe also has a source. The Upaniṣad says that when you see a sprout, you know it has its source in a root. Similarly, this universe and everything that makes up this universe—such as food and water—has a source, and that source is Sat, pure Existence.
- Tasya, of it [the body]
- annāt, [besides] from food
- anyatra kva, where else
- mūlam syāt, can the root [of the body] be
- evam eva khalu, in this way
- somya, O Somya
- annena śuṅgena, with food as the sprout
- apaḥ mūlam, water as the root
- anviccha, search for
- adbhiḥ śuṅgena, water as the sprout
- somya, O Somya
- tejaḥ mūlam, fire as the root
- anviccha, search for
- tejasā śuṅgena, fire as the sprout
- somya, O Somya
- sat mūlam, Sat [Existence] as the root
- anviccha, search for
- somya, O Somya
- imāḥ sarvāḥ prajāḥ, all these beings
- sat mūlam, have Sat as the root
- sat āyatanāḥ, Sat as the abode
- sat pratiṣṭhāḥ, Sat as the support.
note Where there is a sprout, you know there is a root. Similarly, where there is a body, you know there is a root—that is, a source, and that source is food. Then what is the root of food? It is water. Again, water has its root in fire, and fire has its root in Existence. The Upaniṣad gives a number of links here. They follow one after another. But the ultimate root, the ultimate source, is Sat, Existence—pure Spirit. All beings—men, women, children, trees, animals, everything—are based on Sat. Praja means what is born. All that are born (sarvā prajā) are dependent on and resting on Sat.
- Atha, next
- yatra, when
- puruṣaḥ, a person
- pipāsati etat nāma, is said to be thirsty
- tat, then
- tejaḥ eva pītam nayate, fire has earned away [the water that he drank]
- tat yathā, just as, for example
- go-nāyaḥ, a leader of cows
- aśva-nāyaḥ, a leader of horses
- puruṣa-nāyaḥ, one who leads other people
- iti, these terms people use
- evam, similarly
- tat tejaḥ, that fire
- ācaṣṭe, is called
- udanyā iti, the leader of water
- tatra, so also
- vijānīhi, know
- somya, O Somya
- etat eva śuṅgam, this sprout [i.e., the body]
- utpatitam, is produced [by something]
- idam, it
- amūlam na bhaviṣyati iti, is not without a root.
note When does a person feel thirsty? When there is a shortage of water in his body. How does this shortage occur? It occurs when the heat in the body turns the water into blood and other things. As soon as the water is consumed in this way a person feels that he has to drink more water.
- Tasya, of it [the body]
- adbhyaḥ, [besides] from water
- anyatra kva, where else
- mūlam syāt, can the root [of the body] be
- somya, O Somya
- adbhiḥ śuṅgena, with water as the sprout
- tejaḥ mūlam, fire as the root
- anviccha, search for
- tejasā śuṅgena, fire as the sprout
- somya, O Somya
- sat mūlam, Sat [Existence] as the root
- anviccha, search for
- somya, O Somya
- imāḥ sarvāḥ prajāḥ, all these beings
- sat mūlam, have Sat as the root
- sat āyatanāḥ, Sat as the abode
- sat pratiṣṭhāḥ, Sat as the support
- yathā nu khalu, as to how
- somya, O Somya
- imāḥ tisraḥ devatāḥ, these three deities [fire, water, and earth]
- puruṣam prāpya, enter a person
- ekaikā bhavati, each one becomes
- trivṛt trivṛt, threefold
- tat uktam purastāt eva bhavati, this has been explained already
- somya, O Somya
- asya puruṣasya prayataḥ, as this person is dying
- vāk, the organ of speech
- manasi sampadyate, merges into the mind
- manaḥ prāne, the mind into prāṇa
- prāṇaḥ tejasi, prāṇa into fire
- tejaḥ parasyām devatāyām, fire into the Supreme Deity [Brahman],
note What happens when a person dies? First, his speech merges into his mind. He cannot speak any more, but his mind is still active. Sometimes when a person has a stroke, he cannot speak but his mind is alert. Then the mind merges into prāṇa, his life force. The mind ceases to function, but he is still breathing. Then prāṇa merges into fire. Fire here means the heat in the body. If the body is still warm, you
- Saḥ yaḥ, that which
- eṣaḥ, this
- aṇimā, the subtlest of all
- idam sarvam aitadātmyam, the Self of all this
- tat satyam, that is the Truth
- saḥ ātmā, that is the Self
- tat, that
- tvam, you
- asi, are
- śvetaketo iti, O Śvetaketu
- bhagavān, sir
- bhūyaḥ eva, again
- mā, to me
- vijñāpayatu iti, will you please explain
- tathā, so be it
- somya iti, O Somya
- ha uvāca, he [the father] said. Iti aṣṭamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the eighth section.
note That which is the finest of all things, the subtlest, has that Existence, Sat, as its Self. That is the Truth, the Reality. We see all these forms before us. They are constantly changing. But that which we cannot see, which is the essence of everything, does not change. And that is our real identity. ‘That thou art’—this is the final message that Vedānta has to give. That Self, that essence, that pure Spirit, is your real identity. The phenomena we see before us are nothing but names and forms—nāma and rūpa. They are attributes superimposed on that which is constant, unchanging, unchangeable. You may call a person by one name today, but tomorrow he may have another name. And as regards forms, these are always changing. We are never the same. Then again, after some time these forms are gone. Vedānta defines satya, real, as that which existed in the past, which exists now, and which will exist in the future. But the names and forms we see before us are ephemeral. One day they are here and the next they are gone, so they cannot be real. Vedānta says, forget about your name and form. You are that eternal, unchanging Reality. Our form, our body, is the starting point of all our troubles. As soon aṣ we identify ourselves with the body we feel we are separate and different from others. ‘I am a brāhmin.’ ‘I am learned.’ ‘I am ignorant.’ ‘I come from such-and-such a place.’ Then you go on adding and adding—‘I am tall.’ ‘I am short.’ ‘I am fair.’ ‘I am dark.’ Remove these. Go to the essence, to the root—mūlā. Sir P.C. Roy did not believe in the caste system. In fact, he had contempt for it. Sometimes he would get together with some students and argue with them. Among the students, some were brāhmins and some were non-brāhmins. He would say: ‘Look, I am a chemist. I can prove that the blood of the brāhmin and the blood of the śūdra are both the same. They are composed of the same elements. But you say that this is a person of brāhmin blood and this is a person of śūdra blood. These distinctions are not real.’ Vedānta also says these differences are mere upādhis, attributes. They are superimpositions. What is real? Pure Spirit. In essence we are all one.
- Yathā, as
- somya, O Somya
- madhukṛtaḥ, bees
- madhu nistiṣṭhanti, produce honey
- nānātyayānām
note Śvetaketu was still having a hard time understanding, so his father gave another example: You see bees going around to different places. They collect pollen from many different trees and put it all together to make honey. Can you distinguish which flower a particular drop of honey came from? No, The pollen has become mixed together to make the honey.
- Te, those [juices which have mixed together]
- yathā tatra, now as [honey]
- aham amuṣya vṛkṣasya rasaḥ asmi iti, I am the juice of such-and-such tree
- aham amuṣya vṛkṣasya rasaḥ asmi iti, I am the juice of such-and-such tree
- vivekam na labhante, this kind of consciousness [i.e., discrimination] they do not have
- somya, O Somya
- evarn eva, like this
- khalu, surely
- imāḥ sarvāḥ prajāḥ, all these beings
- sati, in the Self [Brahman]
- sampadya, having attained unity
- sati sampadyāmahe, we are now all one with the Self
- na viduḥ iti, are not conscious of this.
note Can a drop of honey say, ‘I am from one tree, and you are from another tree’? No, there is no such discrimination there. The pollen from different flowers becomes one mass of honey. Similarly, we may seem to come from different sources, but in essence we are all one. When we merge into pure Being, we are free from all such discriminating ideas. There is no more diversity there.
- Te, these
- iha, here [in this world]
- vyāghraḥ vā, a tiger
- siṃhaḥ vā, or a lion
- vṛkaḥ vā, or a leopard
- varāhaḥ vā, or a boar
- kīṭaḥ vā, or a bug
- pataṅgaḥ vā, or an insect
- daṃśaḥ vā, or a flea
- maśakaḥ vā, or a mosquito
- yat yat, whatever
- bhavanti, they are [before]
- tat, that
- ābhavanti, they are after [because they do not yet know the Self].
note We are born again and again till we overcome our ignorance and attain Self-knowledge. Death, for an ignorant person, is not liberation. It is like going into deep sleep. And when you are reborn it is as if you are waking up. You die again and again, and again and again you are reborn. This goes on until you attain Self-knowledge. Once you know the Self, you are free—free from birth and death.
- Saḥ yaḥ, that which
- eṣaḥ, this
- aṇimā, the subtlest of all
- idam sarvam aitadātmyam, the Self of all this
- tat satyam, that is the Truth
- saḥ ātmā, that is the Self
- tat, that
- tvam, you
- asi, are
- śvetaketo iti, O Śvetaketu
- bhagavān, sir
- bhūyaḥ eva, again
- mā, to me
- vijñāpayatu iti, will you please explain
- tathā, so be it
- somya iti, O Somya
- ha uvāca, he [the father] said. Iti navamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the ninth section.
note “Tat tvam asi”—thou art that. This is called the mahāvākya, the great saying, it is the magic formula. If your mind has been purified, as soon as the mahāvākya is uttered your eyes are opened and you realize your own Self. But this can happen only after a long process of preparation. It does not come by a fluke. After years of hard work and after shedding many tears, at last one day your mind becomes pure and free from ego. You have attained cittaśuddhi, purification of the mind. Your mind is then like a clean mirror. Now there is a layer of dust on the Once you know who you are you can never be deluded. Can there be darkness where there is light? If you are really enlightened there can be no room for ignorance in your mind. But without cittaśuddhi, even if the teacher tells you that you are the Self, you will not believe it. You will think: ‘No, that is nonsense. I am this body.’ The father is again telling Śvetaketu, ‘You are That,’ but still it is not clear to him. How does it become clear? First we must study the Upaniṣads. Then we have to try and grasp the ideas intellectually. So long as the teacher is giving us instructions the idea fascinates us. That’s fine, but it’s not enough. We must realize it. We must feel it in the very depth of our being. Spiritual knowledge does not come through an intellectual process. It’s something more, something deeper, something that touches the very root of our being. It’s an experience. When you have this experience you are totally transformed. You are not the same individual anymore.
- Imāḥ, these
- somya, O Somya
- nadyaḥ, rivers
- purastāt, of the east
- prācyaḥ syandante, flow to the east
- pratīcyaḥ, of the west
- paścāt, to the west
- tāḥ, they
- samudrāt, [rising] from the sea
- samudram eva apiyanti, go to the sea
- saḥ samudraḥ eva bhavati, become one with that sea
- yathā, as
- tatra, there
- tāḥ, they
- na viduḥ, do not know
- iyam aham asmi iyam aham asmi iti, I am this [river], I am this [river].
note Uddālaka gives another illustration. There are so many rivers in this country, and each originates from a different area. Ultimately, however, they all flow into the sea. They then lose their separate identities and become one with the sea. When the Ganga flows into the sea, you can no longer identify it as such. Can a drop of water in the sea say, ‘I am the Ganga,’ or ‘I am the Sindhu’? No. So also, when we die our sense of identity disappears temporarily. Then again, where did these rivers come from? They came from the sea. Sea water becomes vapour, rises, and forms into clouds. The clouds then go over the land and pour down rain, which eventually goes into the rivers and at last into the sea. The rivers come from the sea and go back to the sea. The sea is the source, but the rivers do not know this. This cycle is going on all the time. So also we come from pure Spirit and go back to pure Spirit, but we are not aware of it. We are only conscious of our separate identities. In dreamless sleep, our separate identities are wiped out for the time being. We sleep so soundly we do not even know we exist. We are then part of the Cosmic Self. Then when we wake up, we resume our separate identities again. Similarly, when we die, it is the body that dies. The individual self continues and is one with Existence. This does not mean liberation, however. We do not know that we have become one with Existence. It is as if we are in deep sleep. As the water rises from the sea and again falls down to become the Ganga or the Sindhu, so also, we again become some individual with a new body. Why are we not liberated? Because ignorance is there. When we die our ignorance is suspended for some time, and we are temporarily not conscious of our separate existence. But when we are reborn we resume our life from the point where we left off. We then have a new body but we retain all the impressions that we had in our previous life. These impressions manifest themselves again in our new birth because they have become part of our being. This is why we often find so much difference between one brother and another. Two brothers may be close in age but poles apart in temperament. One may be very studious, with scholarly inclinations, and the other may be very outgoing, more interested in sports and other activities. Even in terms of physical appearance they may be quite different. They are two separate identities. So, unless we attain Self-knowledge and become free, death is like going into deep sleep. It is a temporary pause in our life’s struggle. But the struggle must go on because of our ignorance.
- Evam eva khalu, in the same way
- somya, O Somya
- imāḥ sarvāḥ prajāḥ, all these beings
- sataḥ, from Sat [Brahman]
- āgamya, having come
- sataḥ āgacchāmahe iti, we have come from Sat
- na viduḥ, do not know
- te, these [beings]
- iha, here [in this world]
- vyāghraḥ vā, a tiger
- siṃhaḥ vā, or a lion
- vṛkaḥ vā, or a leopard
- varāhaḥ vā, or a boar
- kīṭaḥ vā, or a bug
- pataṅgaḥ vā, or an insect
- daṃśaḥ vā, or a flea
- maśakaḥ vā, or a mosquito
- yatyat, whatever
- bhavanti, they are [before]
- tat, that
- ābhavanti, they are after [because they do not yet know the Self].
note The Upaniṣad does not mean to imply in this example of the rivers that we are not divine now and we are trying to become divine. No, we are always divine. Whether we know it or not, we are never separate from pure Spirit. But it is our misfortune that we do not know it. Here the Upaniṣad is giving us a warning. Our goal is Self-knowledge. Death or deep sleep is not our goal.
- Saḥ yaḥ, that which
- eṣaḥ, this
- aṇimā, the subtlest of all
- idam sarvam aitaḍātmyam, the Self of all this
- tat satyam, that is the Truth
- saḥ ātmā, that is the Self
- tat, that
- tvam, you
- asi, are
- śvetaketo iti, O Śvetaketu
- bhagavān, sir
- bhūyaḥ eva, again
- mā, to me
- vijñāpayatu iti, will you please explain
- tathā, so be it
- somya iti, O Somya
- ha uvāca, he [the father] said. Iti daśamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the tenth section.
- Somya, O Somya
- asya mahataḥ vṛkṣasya, of this big tree
- yaḥ mūle abhyāhanyāt, [if] a person strikes at the root
- jīvan, it [the tree] continues to live
- sravet, [though] it exudes juice
- yaḥ madhye abhyāhanyāt, [if] a person strikes in the middle
- jīvan, it [the tree] continues to live
- sravet, [though] it exudes juice
- yaḥ agre abhyāhanyāt, [if] a person strikes at the top
- jīvan, it [the tree] continues to live
- sravet, [though] it exudes juice
- saḥ eṣaḥ, this [tree]
- jīvena ātmanā anuprabhūtaḥ, is pervaded by the living Self
- pepīyamānaḥ, it continues drinking
- modamānaḥ tiṣṭhati, [and] living happily, Yat, if
- jīvaḥ, the self [life]
- asya ekām śākhām, one branch of it [the tree]
- jahāti, abandons
- atha, then
- sā śuṣyati, it [the branch] withers away
- dvitīyām, a second [branch]
- jahāti, [if] it leaves
- atha sā śuṣyati, then it [the branch] withers away
- tṛtīyām, a third [branch]
- jahāti, [if] it leaves
- atha sā śuṣyati, then it [the branch] withers away
- sarvam jahāti, [if] it leaves all [the whole tree]
- sarvaḥ śuṣyati, the whole tree withers away.
note Suppose you strike at a tree. If the tree is not dead, water will come out of the wound, and eventually the wound will heal. According to Vedānta, a tree is a living individual, like a human being. It has life; it has a self. As my self permeates the whole of my body, similarly, the self of a tree permeates the whole body of the tree. If one part of my body becomes paralyzed, it means that the self which previously permeated the whole of my body has withdrawn itself from that part. So also, if the self of a tree leaves a limb of the tree, that limb becomes dried up. The Upaniṣad is trying to say here that death merely means the withdrawal of the individual self from the whole body. Suppose you are living at a certain house. If you leave that house and move somewhere else, that house becomes vacant and useless. It’s exactly like that. When the Self leaves the body, the body becomes empty and useless.
- Evam eva khalu, like this
- somya, O Somya
- viddhi, know
- iti ha uvāca, he said
- jīva-apetam, deserted by the self
- idam, this [body]
- vāva kila mriyate, is truly dead
- jīvaḥ na mriyate, the self never dies
- saḥ yaḥ, that which
- eṣaḥ, this
- aṇimā, the subtlest of all
- idam sarvam aitadātmyam, the Self of all this
- tat satyam, that is the Truth
- saḥ ātmā, that is the Self
- tat, that
- tvam, you
- asi, are
- śvetaketo iti, O Śvetaketu
- bhagavān, sir
- bhūyaḥ eva, again
- mā, to me
- vijñāpayatu iti, will you please explain
- tathā, so be it
- somya iti, O Somya
- ha uvāca, he [the father] said. Iti ekādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the eleventh section.
note The self is immortal. It is the body that dies, and it dies when the self leaves it. Suppose you go to sleep leaving some of your work incomplete. As soon as you wake up, you remember that it was not finished, and you immediately start doing the work from where you left off. Your sleep was like the death of your body, for it was inactive and you were totally unconscious of your body. But the self never dies, and that is why when you wake up you remember your work is unfinished. Whether you are awake or asleep, you are the same self. The self never changes. You may have seen how a new-born kitten behaves. It knows where to get its mother’s milk. No one teaches it, but how does it know? It knows from its past life. Some of the scriptures say to perform sacrifices such as the Agnihotra. They say we will be duly rewarded for this. But we are asked to perform them to the last day of our life. If we perform them till we die, when are we going to get the reward? Obviously in our future life. The individual is born again and again to receive rewards and punishments, but the real Self remains the same.
- Nyagrodha-phalam ataḥ āhara iti, [Uddālaka said,] bring me a fruit from this banyan tree
- idam bhagavaḥ iti, [Śvetaketu replied,] here it is, sir
- bhinddhi iti, break it
- bhinnam bhagavaḥ iti, I have broken it sir
- kim atra paśyasi iti, what do you see in it
- aṇvyaḥ iva imāḥ dhānāḥ, these tiny seeds
- bhagavaḥ iti, sir
- āsām ekām bhinddhi, break one of them
- aṅga iti, my child
- bhinnā bhagavaḥ iti, it is broken, sir
- kim atra paśyasi iti, what do you see in it
- na kiñcana bhagavaḥ iti, nothing, sir.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Tam, to him [his son]
- ha uvāca, [Uddālaka] said
- somya, O Somya
- etam vai aṇimānam, that subtle part
- yam na nibhālayase, which you do not see
- etasya vai, of this very
- aṇimnaḥ, subtle part
- somya, O Somya
- eṣaḥ mahānyagrodhaḥ, this big banyan tree
- tiṣṭhati, exists
- śraddhatsva somya iti, have faith [in what I say], O Somya.
note A banyan tree is such a huge tree, but its seed is very tiny. If you split open the seed what do you see? Nothing. Yet the essence of that big tree is there in that tiny seed. How do you know? If you put the seed in the ground, very soon a sprout will appear. Then that sprout will grow and gradually become a big tree. Though there seems to be nothing inside the seed, the essence of the tree must be there; otherwise a tree could not grow from it. Then the father says, ‘Have śraddhā, faith—faith in what I am saying.’ Śaṅkara says that faith makes the mind concentrated. If your mind is restless and always running after sense pleasures, you will never realize the Self. How can a mind that is outgoing and attached to gross external things, see that which is fine? It can’t. In the Kaṭha Upaniṣad, Yama said to Naciketā that our senses are all outgoing. The eyes, the ears, the mind—they are all going to the sense objects. We must reverse the process—that is, we must turn the senses inward. But this is very difficult to do if you lack faith. Sri Ramakrishna used to say that the mind was like a bag of mustard seeds. Suppose there is a leak in a bag of mustard seeds. The mustard seeds will fall out and be scattered all over the place, and it is then very difficult to gather them up again. Similarly, the leak in the bag is like our attachment to sense enjoyments. Once the mind is scattered on external things, it is difficult to bring it back and focus it on the Self. But if you have faith—faith that the Self is the Reality—then it becomes easy to concentrate the mind. Once you have control over the mind, you can grasp the subtleties of spiritual truths very quickly. In fact, it is said that the Truth reveals itself to you. This is quite rational. If you really want to know something, your mind will automatically be focussed on it. And if you are not interested, your mind will be elsewhere. You may be sitting in front of the teacher, but if your mind is on a cricket game you will not hear anything the teacher says.
- Saḥ yaḥ, that which
- eṣaḥ, this
- aṇimā, the subtlest of all
- idam sarvam aitadātmyam, the Self of all this
- tat satyam, that is the Truth
- saḥ ātmā, that is the Self
- tat, that
- tvam, you
- asi, are
- śvetaketo iti, O Śvetaketu
- bhagavān, sir
- bhūyaḥ eva, again
- mā, to me
- vijñāpayatu iti, will you please explain
- tathā, so be it
- somya iti, O Somya
- ha uvāca, he [the father] said. Iti dvādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the twelfth section.
note This idea is very difficult to grasp, but how much patience the father has. Now Śvetaketu has another doubt: You say that the Self exists, but it cannot be seen. You say it is aṇimā, extremely fine—finer than an atom. Yet everything has come from the Self. How then did the Self become so gross? How did it become this physical universe that we can see? Here we must remember the principle of cause and effect. The cause becomes the effect. The cause is subtle, fine, but when it becomes the effect it becomes gross. The tiny seed becomes the vast banyan tree. The Self manifests itself as everything that exists. The goal of life is to realize the Self. Life is useless otherwise. This is why Śvetaketu keeps bothering his father. Again and again he says, ‘Father, please explain further.’ Uddālaka is patient. The relationship between the Self and the world is quite a riddle. How the invisible Self becomes the visible world is difficult to comprehend. The example of the seed and the banyan tree helps, but it is still not clear, so Śvetaketu pesters his father for more explanation. His father then tells him to have faith. ‘Faith’ means faith in the teacher, in the scriptures, and even in oneself. Faith is what at last clears all doubts.
- Lavaṇam etat, this salt
- udake, in water
- avadhāya, put
- atha mā, then to me
- prātaḥ, in the morning
- upasīdathāḥ iti, come
- saḥ, he [Śvetaketu]
- tathā, that way
- ha cakāra, did
- tam ha uvāca, he said to him [to Śvetaketu]
- yat lavaṇam, that salt which
- doṣā, at night
- udake avādhāḥ, you put into water
- aṅga, my son
- tat, that
- āhara iti, bring it back
- tat, that
- ha avamṛśya, having searched for
- na viveda, he did not find, Yathā, since
- vilīnam eva, it had disappeared [in the water]
- aṅga, my son
- asya antāt ācāma iti, drink from its surface
- katham iti, how is it
- lavaṇam iti, saline
- madhyāt ācāma iti, drink from the middle
- katham iti, how is it
- lavaṇam iti, saline
- antāt ācāma iti, drink from the bottom
- katham iti, how is it
- lavaṇam iti, saline
- abhiprāya etat, throw this away
- atha mā upasīdathāḥ iti, then come to me
- tat ha tathā cakāra, he did likewise
- tat, that [salinity]
- śaśvat, always
- saṃvartate, prevails everywhere
- tam ha uvāca, he said to him [to Śvetaketu]
- atra vāva kila, here [in this body]
- somya, O Somya
- sat, the self [exists]
- na nibhālayase, [but] you do not see it
- atra eva kila iti, here [in the body].
note ‘There is salt in every part of the water, yet you cannot see it. Similarly, O Somya, Sat [the Self] is here in this body, yet you cannot see it in the body.’ The question that is being examined is, why are we not able to perceive the Self, which is the essence of our being? It is because the Self is all-pervasive. The Self and I are one and the same. If the Self were something separate from me, then I could see it. Can I see myself? I can see myself if I have a mirror—something else. But there is nothing but the Self, so how can I see it? It’s not possible. Because you don’t see something that doesn’t mean it does not exist. The process of seeing involves separate entities: the seer and the seen—that is, the subject and the object. These two must be separate. Then only the process of seeing can take place. But if there is only one, who sees whom? The Upaniṣad gives two examples of how things may exist that we do not perceive. One is of the banyan tree and the seed, and the other is of salt in water. Suppose you put a lump of salt in a glass of water. Soon the salt dissolves. You no longer see it, but that doesn’t mean it is not there. If you taste the water you will find that it tastes salty throughout. Similarly, just because we do not see the Self, that doesn’t prove it does not exist. Reality is not something that is perceptible to our sense organs. It is vākyamanātīta—beyond speech and mind, beyond thought. Words fail to describe it and our mind cannot grasp it, because it is so fine, so subtle. The Self is not something on the relative plane that we can see or touch. Our sense organs are very limited. Our eyes can see things only up to a point and beyond that they cannot see any more. There are many things around us that our eyes cannot see. Similarly with our hearing and other organs. So, in order to perceive the Self we must go beyond the relative plane to the transcendental level. Śaṅkara says that this body is a product of food (or, earth), water, and fire, and the Self is within this body. Though you cannot see the Self, it permeates the body—just as the salt permeates the water
- Saḥ yaḥ, that which
- eṣaḥ, this
- aṇimā, the subtlest of all
- idam sarvam aitadātmyam, the Self of all this
- tat satyam, that is the Truth
- saḥ ātmā, that is the Self
- tat, that
- tvam, you
- asi, are
- śvetaketo iti, O Śvetaketu
- bhagavān, sir
- bhūyaḥ era, again
- mā, to me
- vijñāpayatu iti, will you please explain
- tathā, so be it
- somya iti, O Somya
- ha uvāca, he [the father] said. Iti trayodaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the thirteenth section.
note Again, the same idea: Just as salt is everywhere in the glass of water, pervading all the particles of the water, so also, the Self is all-pervasive. It is the essence. That is the Reality, and you are that.
- Yathā, just as
- somya, O Somya
- puruṣam, a person, gandhārebhyaḥ, from the Gandhāra region
- abhinaddha-akṣam-ānīya, is brought blindfolded
- tataḥ, from there
- tam visṛjet, [and] leaves him
- atijane, in a deserted place
- yathā, as
- saḥ, he
- tatra, there
- prāṅ vā, facing the east
- udaṅ vā, or facing the north
- adharāṅ vā, or facing the south
- pratyaṅ vā, or facing the west
- pradhmāyīta, shouts
- abhinaddhākṣaḥ ānītaḥ, I have been brought blindfolded
- abhinaddhākṣaḥ visṛṣṭaḥ, I have been left blindfolded.
note The Upaniṣad is trying to convey a very difficult idea, but fortunately it gives many illustrations. Here is another one: Suppose you have been seized by some robbers. They put a blindfold on your eyes and then take you away into the forest and leave you there. Perhaps the forest is infested with wild animals. Somehow or other you have to get out, but you don’t know where you are and you can’t see anything. What do you do? You run around in every direction, shouting: ‘I am so-and-so. I belong to such-and-such village. I can’t see anything. Please help me get out of here.’ Then at last someone takes pity on you and leads you out of the forest. That someone is the teacher. You are ignorant and don’t know the way. You don’t know how to reach God, how to attain the Truth. But someone has compassion on you—someone who knows the way. You say, ‘I must go back home.’ But what is this home? It is the Self. The small self wants to return to the Cosmic Self. It is as if the self is alienated from itself—as if there is a barrier between one self and the other. The individual self and the Cosmic Self are the same, but there seems to be a barrier between them. We have to remove that barrier.
- Yathā, as
- tasya, his
- abhinahanam, blindfold
- pramucya, having removed
- prabrūyāt, someone says
- etām diśam, this way
- gandhārāḥ, is the Gandhāra country
- etām diśam vraja iti, go this way
- saḥ, he
- grāmāt grāmam pṛcchan, asking from village to village
- paṇḍitaḥ medhāvī, the enlightened person who gets knowledge [of what direction to go in]
- gandhārān eva upasampadyeta, reaches Gandhāra itself
- evam eva, in the same way
- iha, in this world
- puruṣaḥ veda, a person knows
- ācāryavān, guided by a teacher
- tasya, his
- tāvat eva, that long
- ciram, delay
- yāvat, as long as
- na vimokṣye, he is hot free [from the body]
- atha sampatsye iti, then he becomes merged in the Self.
note The question being considered here is, if I am ignorant how will my ignorance be removed? It can be removed through the instructions of a teacher. But he must be a competent teacher. Can a blind person lead another blind person? No. There is sure to be a disaster if they try. In this verse the Upaniṣad gives an example of a person led blindfolded into a forest and left there. We are like that person. We are blind, ignorant, and we are unhappy and suffer because of our ignorance. This world of attachment is like a dense forest. Though it is self-created, we do not know the way out. We need someone to help us—someone who knows the way. We need a good teacher. Śaṅkara says the word medhāvī means one who is capable of understanding. You may have a good teacher, and you may have been given instructions, but you have to use your intelligence also. Now suppose you have a good teacher and you have attained Self-knowledge. According to Vedānta, when you attain Self-knowledge you automatically attain liberation. But the Upaniṣad says there is still one snag. What is that snag? Our prārabdha karma. Karma means the results of our actions. If I do something good, I will experience a good result; and if I do something bad, I must suffer. Vedānta says, there are three kinds of karma. One kind is called sañcita karma. It is our karma that has been accumulated from one birth to another. We have done so many things, and all these actions are waiting to bear fruit. Another kind of karma is called āgāmī karma. While we are experiencing the fruits of our past actions, we are also creating new karma now by our present actions. Some of these actions will bear fruit immediately, but others will take time. The third kind of karma is called prārabdha karma. It is that which has already started bearing fruit in our present life. According to Vedānta, if you have attained Self-knowledge, both your sañcita karma and your āgāmī karma are destroyed. Śaṅkara says they are burned in the fire of knowledge (jñānāgni). But your prārabdha karma will continue. It is the momentum. If you are to suffer from cancer or something else, you cannot escape it. You have to wait till your prārabdha karma exhausts itself. There are two examples of prārabdha karma. One example is: Suppose you are sawing a tree down. You saw it through completely, but it keeps standing there. It does not immediately fall down. Then a little breeze comes and it falls over. Prārabdha is like the tree standing for a while before falling down. Then there is the example of the arrow that has been shot. Once you shoot an arrow, you cannot call it back. The same is the case with prārabdha karma. It goes on till the force that has put it into motion is expended. Now, if you have attained Self-knowledge, your actions will not be like those of an ordinary person. Whatever you do from then on is for the good of others. Śaṅkara says a liberated person does nothing out of desire. If you do something out of desire, that action binds you, even if it is something good. Very often a person does something good out of desire for fame, for power, or for some other selfish motive. A liberated person, according to Śaṅkara, will do nothing that is against the spirit of the scriptures. His actions will always be right. And they will be only for the good of others (lokahitārtham), or for God (Īśvarārtham).
- Saḥ yaḥ, that which
- eṣaḥ, this
- aṇimā, the subtlest of all
- idam sarvam aitadātmyam, the Self of all this
- tat satyam, that is the Truth
- saḥ ātmā, that is the Self
- tat, that
- tvam, you
- asi, are
- śvetaketo iti, O Śvetaketu
- bhagavān, sir
- bhūyaḥ eva, again
- mā, to me
- vijñāpayatu iti, will you please explain
- tathā, so be it
- somya iti, O Somya
- ha uvāca, he [the father] said. Iti caturdaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the fourteenth section.
- Puruṣam, a person
- uta, also
- somya, O Somya
- upatāpinam, who is sick
- jñātayaḥ, relatives
- pari-upāsate, sit around him
- jānāsi mām jānāsi mām iti, saying ‘Do you recognize me, do you recognize me?’
- yāvaṭ, so long as
- tasya, his
- vāk, speech
- manasi na sampadyate, does not merge in his mind
- manaḥ prāṇe, the mind into prāṇa
- prāṇaḥ tejasi, prāṇa into heat
- tejaḥ parasyām devatāyām, heat into the Supreme Deity
- tāvat jānāti, that long he knows [them].
note The Upaniṣad has previously said that from the Self comes heat, from heat comes prāṇa (the life force), from prāṇa comes the mind, and from the mind comes speech. Then at the time of death, these things go back in the reverse order—speech goes back into the mind, etc. The resting place is the Self, Pure Spirit. Everything goes back there, and everything comes from there. When a person is dying, it is common for his relatives to gather round and ask the person, ‘Do you recognize me?’ How long does he recognize them? So long as heat has not left the body. Even though his breathing has stopped, as long as the body is warm, the person is still alive.
- Atha, then
- yadā, when
- asya, his
- vāk manasi sampadyate, speech merges into the mind
- manaḥ prāṇe, the mind into prāṇa
- prāṇaḥ tejasi, prāṇa into heat
- tejaḥ parasyām devatāyām, heat into the Supreme Self
- atha na jānāti, then he does not know.
note After heat leaves the body, a person can no longer recognize anyone. Heat merges in the Self. The Self is the final resting place. Then what is the difference between the death of an ignorant person and the death of one who has attained Self-knowledge? Śaṅkara says a person who is ignorant merges in the Self only to re-emerge again and be reborn. But when a person who is enlightened dies, that is his mokṣa, his liberation. Why are we born again and again? Because we have unfulfilled desires. Suppose we die now—what happens to those desires? They have to be fulfilled, so again we seek a body. Perhaps we want to be rich, or we want to rule over people, or we want to eat good food, or we want to be a great scholar. Unless we have a body, we cannot fulfil these desires. But our goal is desirelessness. Only when we become desireless can we attain Self-knowledge. Holy Mother, Sri Sarada Devi, used to say, ‘If you have to pray for anything, pray for desirelessnes But some people say: ‘What’s the harm in being reborn? Life is fun.’ The scriptures say: ‘All right, go ahead. But how long will the fun last? At some point you will be tired of all this and realize what a bondage life is. Then you will seek liberation from this cycle of birth and death.’ On the other hand, there are a few people who, after becoming free themselves, want to help others become free. In Mahāyāna Buddhism, these people are called bodhisattvas. They have knowledge, but as long as others are suffering, they will not take the benefit of that knowledge to attain final release. They will return to this world for the good of others. There is a very interesting story about Rāmānuja, the expounder of Viśiṣṭādvaita (qualified monism). When Rāmānuja was initiated, his guru said to him: ‘You see, this is a very great mantra. You must keep it a secret and not tell it to others.’ Then Rāmānuja asked, ‘What would happen if others hear this mantra?’ The teacher answered, ‘They would all be liberated, but you would go to hell.’ As soon as Rāmānuja left his teacher, he went to the top of a temple tower and called all the people to come. When everyone had gathered there, he repeated the mantra to them all. This is the ideal. There is a theory called sarvamuktivāda—all shall be liberated together. That is to say, I do not want to be liberated until all are liberated. Sri Ramakrishna used to say that some people are very selfish. Even when they go to a public feast they enjoy it themselves and then quietly leave without telling others about it. But there are others who, as soon as they hear about it, gather everyone together to enjoy it with them. One day Swami Vivekananda went to Sri Ramakrishna and begged him to let him remain absorbed in samādhi. But Sri Ramakrishna scolded him, saying: ‘I thought you would be like a big banyan tree, giving shade and rest to many people who are scorched by the This is the ideal—to be like that tree, to make no distinction between a good person and a bad person, to be ready to give relief to everyone, whether friend or foe. That is a bodhisattva. When you have that ideal you do not care for your own liberation. That is true selflessness. What we have to remember is that we are all one in the Self. Unless we are conscious of this, we are not liberated.
- Saḥ yaḥ, that which
- eṣaḥ, this
- aṇimā, the subtlest of all
- idam sarvam aitadātmyam, the Self of all this
- tat satyam, that is the Truth
- saḥ ātmā, that is the Self
- tat, that
- tvam, you
- asi, are
- śvetaketo iti, O Śvetaketu
- bhagavān, sir
- bhūyaḥ eva, again
- mā, to me
- vijñāpayatu iti, will you please explain
- tathā, so be it
- somya iti, O Somya
- ha uvāca, he [the father] said. Iti pañcadaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the fifteenth section.
- Somya, O Somya
- puruṣam, a person
- hastagṛhītam, with his hands tied
- ānayanti, they bring
- apahārṣīt, he has stolen something
- steyam akārṣīt, he has committed robbery
- paraśum, an axe
- asmai, for him
- tapata iti, heat
- yadi, if
- saḥ, he
- kartā tasya bhavati, is the one who has done it
- tataḥ, then
- eva, surely
- anṛtam, false [a liar]
- ātmānam kurute, proves himself
- anṛta-abhisandhaḥ, having a dishonest character
- saḥ ātmānam, he himself
- anṛtena, by falsehood
- antardhāya, under the cover [of falsehood]
- paraśum taptam, the hot axe
- pratigṛhṇāti, grasps
- saḥ dahyate, he gets burned
- atha hanyate, then he dies.
note What is liberation? Liberation is the state in which I know I am the Self—I know that I am never born and will never die. When I know that I am free, then I am aptakāma, fully satisfied. There is nothing more to achieve, because nothing more exists outside of myself. If there is something outside myself, then I might think, ‘Oh, let me have that.’ But if I am everything, if everything exists within me, what is there to desire? Sarvam khalu idam brahma—all this is Brahman. And I am that Brahman. I am free, immortal. There is no more birth and death for me. Now here the question arises, what is the test of whether you have Self-knowledge or not? The Upaniṣad gives another illustration: Suppose someone is brought to you and you are told he has committed a theft. You ask him if he has done it and he denies it. But all the evidence seems to point to him as the culprit. What do you do? In ancient days they had a test, a rather cruel test. They put the blade of an axe in fire, and when it was very hot they would put it against the hand of the suspect. If his hand was burnt he was considered guilty, because he was covered, as it were, by falsehood. And if his hand was not burnt he was considered innocent, because he was protected by truth. Similarly, if we do not have Self-knowledge, we will continue to bum in this world. We will be born again and again. But if we have attained Self-knowledge, we will be liberated. Truth will set us free. Self-knowledge is not something you can demonstrate or take out and show. The only proof of it is that we do not have to continue in this cycle of birth and death. Nevertheless, when a person attains Self-knowledge, he is not the same any more. His attitude towards others changes. For instance, he can never hurt anyone, because if he hurts someone he hurts himself. Then again, no one is a stranger to him. He accepts everyone. If someone is happy, he is happy. If someone is in pain, he is also in pain. If someone has done well, he feels proud of that person—as if it is his own success. He can never be jealous, because he feels one with everybody.
- Atha, but
- yadi, if
- akartā tasya bhavati, he is not the one who has done it
- tataḥ, then
- eva, surely
- satyam, truthful
- ātmānam kurute, proves himself
- satya-abhisandhaḥ, having an honest character
- saḥ ātmānam, he himself
- satyena, by truth
- antardhāya, under the cover [of truth]
- paraśum taptam, the hot axe
- pratigṛhṇāti, grasps
- saḥ na dahyate, he does not get burned
- atha mucyate, then he is set free.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Yathā, as
- saḥ, he
- tatra, in such circumstances
- na adāhyet, is not burned
- idam sarvarn aitadātmyam, the Self of all this
- tat satyam, that is the Truth
- saḥ ātmā, that is the Self
- tat, that
- tvam, you
- asi, are
- śvetaketo iti, O Śvetaketu
- asya, from him [his father]
- tat ha, that [Self]
- vijajñau iti, he clearly learnt
- vijajñau iti, he clearly leamt. Iti ṣoḍaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the sixteenth section. Iti chāndogyopaniṣadi ṣaṣṭhaḥ adhyāyaḥ, here ends the sixth chapter of the Chāndogya Upaniṣad.
note “Idam sarvam”—all this. ‘This’ refers to this phenomenal world which we see, with which we are familiar. Please remember, even in this unreal phenomenal world that one unchangeable essence exists. Tat satyam—that is the Reality. Sri Ramakrishna used to give the example of pillows. Pillows may be different sizes, different shapes, and have different functions, but inside all of them is the same silk-cotton, the same essence. Similarly, within this phenomenal world there is one essence, one Reality. And that is our Self. Tat tvam asi—you are that. This chapter stresses the idea that there is something—we call it pure Spirit—from which everything has emerged, on which everything rests, and into which everything finally merges. There is something common from which we have all come, on which we all rest, and into which we all go back. That something is always constant. Think of the ocean, for example. Where do the waves come from? The ocean. What supports them? The ocean. Where do they finally go? Back to the ocean. This coming and going, back and forth—we see this happening all the time, with everything. We are born, we remain for a while, and then we die. Over and over again—we come from Brahman, we are sustained by Brahman, and we go back to Brahman. But all the time we are that Brahman. As the waves are nothing but the ocean, similarly, we are nothing but Brahman. Sri Ramakrishna used to say that the relative and the Absolute are the same. The Absolute is compared to a snake coiled up, sleeping on the ground, and the relative is like a snake in motion, raising its hood. But when everything disappears, when there is no phenomenal world, what remains? We do not know. There is a vast, infinite One. We cannot describe it, because it has no name and no form. How can you describe something that is nameless and formless? Suppose you say ‘white.’ Can you understand ‘white’ without a white object? There must be a particularization. A white flower, or a white shirt, we can understand. Similarly, how can we understand pure Existence? This is why the Upaniṣad simply calls it tat, that. Vedānta says that the One has become many, but this many does not make a real modification or change in the One. The One remains One. It only appears to be many.
- Bhagavaḥ, sir
- adhīhi iti, please teach me
- sanatkumāram, to Sanatkumāra
- nāradaḥ ha upasasāda, Nārada went [and said]
- tam ha uvāca, [Sanatkumāra] said to him
- yat vettha, whatever you know
- tena mā upasīda, tell me that
- tataḥ ūrdhvam, from that point
- te vakṣyāmi iti, I will teach you
- saḥ ha uvāca, he [Nārada] said.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Bhagavaḥ, sir
- adhyemi, I know
- ṛg vedam yajur vedam sāma vedam ātharvaṇam caturtham, the Ṛg Veda, the Yajur Veda, the Sāma Veda, and the fourth, the Atharva Veda
- itihāsa purāṇam pañcamam, history and the Purāṇas, as the fifth
- vedānām vedam, grammar [lit., the Veda of the Vedas]
- pitryam, rites offered out of respect to the ancestors
- rāśim, mathematics
- daivam, the science of meteors and other natural phenomena [and omens]
- nidhim, the science of underground resources
- vākovākyam, logic
- ekāyanam, moral science
- deva-vidyām, astrology
- brahma-vidyām, knowledge of the Vedas
- bhūta-vidyām, geology
- kṣattra-vidyām, archery
- nakṣatra-vidyām, astronomy
- sarpa[-vidyām], snake-charming
- devajana-vidyām, fine arts
- bhagavaḥ, sir
- etat adhyemi, I know all this.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Bhagavaḥ, sir
- saḥ aham mantravit eva asmi, [though I have studied much] I know only the word meaning
- na ātmavit, I do not know the Self
- śrutam hi eva me, I have also heard
- bhagavat dṛśebhyaḥ, from people like you
- tarati śokam ātmavit iti, one who knows the Self overcomes sorrow
- bhagavaḥ, sir, saḥ aham śocāmi, I am suffering from sorrow
- tam mā bhagavān śokasya pāram tārayatu iti, sir, please take me across [the ocean of] sorrow
- tam ha uvāca, [Sanatkumāra] said to him
- yat vai kiñca etat, whatever it is
- adhyagīṣṭhāḥ etat nāma eva, you have learnt is only words.
note Nārada was a great scholar. But in spite of all his knowledge, he did not know the Self and was very unhappy. So, with great humility, he approached the sage Sanatkumāra and said, ‘Sir, would you please teach me?’ Sanatkumāra replied, ‘Tell me what you already know.’ The teacher must know what level the student is at so he can raise him from where he is. Then Nārada began to list all the subjects he had studied: the Vedas, history and mythology, grammar, mathematics, astrology, and so forth. But Nārada felt that all this was pointless. It served no purpose, because if he did not know the Self he knew nothing. His knowledge was merely aparā vidyā, lower knowledge, and not parā vidyā, higher knowledge—that is, knowledge of the Self. Moreover, Nārada said: ‘I know only the words. I do not know the Self.’ The finest, most subtle, knowledge is knowledge of the Self You begin with the gross and go step by step until you reach the finest. First you are only a mantra-vit—that is, you know only the word meanings of the scriptures. But this is nothing. The scriptures are all about the Self. If you don’t know the Self, your knowledge of the scriptures is useless. Being a scholar without knowing the real meaning of the scriptures is like being a beast of burden. A donkey may carry a load of sandalwood. In fact, his back may almost be breaking with the weight of it. Yet he does not enjoy the fragrance. Similarly, being a scholar is not the same as having Self-knowledge. Nārada has great yearning. He says: ‘I have heard that saints like you have no more grief because you know the Self. Please take me across the ocean of sorrow. You alone can do that by giving me Self-knowledge. Life has a purpose. Please make me feel that I have achieved that purpose.’ Now Sanatkumāra says to Nārada: ‘You have studied much, but you have studied only words. Each word has a meaning, and that meaning has to be grasped.’ How do we grasp the meaning? Śaṅkara gives an example here: Suppose the king is coming by in a procession and you are very anxious to see him. But along with the king are thousands of other people, bands, vehicles, horses, elephants—so much pomp and grandeur. Where is the king? Śaṅkara says this world is like that procession. The king is there, but he is hidden from you—hidden behind all the pomp and pageantry. Similarly, in this world we perceive only names and forms—words, not substance. Merely knowing the word Brahman Now the question may arise: Sanatkumāra says that this knowledge of the Vedas and other things is mere words. But perhaps you have studied all the scriptures and performed many sacrifices—is all this then futile? Śaṅkara says no, it’s not futile. He gives the example: Suppose a child wants to know what the moon is. How do you show him the moon? First you say, ‘Do you see that big tree over there?’ When the child says yes, you say, ‘Do you see the top of the tree?’ Again, when the child says yes, you say: ‘Do you see that big shining ball behind the branches? That is the moon.’ You go step by step. Can you teach an ignorant person the highest science? Will he be able to grasp it? You must start with something he can understand. Similarly, there is the world of sense experience before us, and it is very real to us. We don’t see the Self, so we can’t understand what it is. Self-knowledge is the highest knowledge. We cannot expect to attain it immediately. First we must know what this world is. First we must know what it is to have money, scholarship, fame, and other things. After experiencing these things of the world and finding them to be hollow, only then can we become disillusioned with this world. And only then can we renounce this world of name and form and fix our minds on the Self. We may hear about the Self, but first we must know that this world we are so
- Nāma vai, name is
- ṛg vedaḥ yajur vedaḥ sāma vedaḥ ātharvaṇaḥ caturthaḥ, the Ṛg Veda, the Yajur Veda, the Sāma Veda, and the fourth, the Atharva Veda
- itihāsa purāṇaḥ pañcamaḥ, history and the Purāṇas, as the fifth
- vedānām vedaḥ, grammar [lit., the Veda of the Vedas]
- pitryaḥ, rites offered out of respect to the ancestors
- rāśiḥ, mathematics
- daivaḥ, the science of meteors and other natural phenomena [and omens]
- nidhiḥ, the science of underground resources
- vākovākyam, logic
- ekāyanam, moral science
- deva-vidyā, astrology
- brahma-vidyā, knowledge of the Vedas
- bhūta-vidyā, geology
- kṣattra-vidyā, archery
- nakṣatra-vidyā, astronomy
- sarpa [-vidyā], snake-charming
- devajana-vidyā, fine arts
- nāma eva etat, these are mere names
- nāma upāssva iti, worship name.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Saḥ yaḥ, he who
- nāma brahma iti upāste, worships name as Brahman
- yāvat nāmnaḥ gatam, as far as name can go
- tatra, that far
- asya yathā-kāmacāraḥ bhavati, as he wishes he can go
- yaḥ nāma brahma iti upāste, he who worships name as Brahman
- bhagavaḥ, sir
- nāmnaḥ bhūyaḥ asti iti, is there anything higher than name
- nāmnaḥ vāva bhūyaḥ asti iti, there is certainly something higher than name
- bhagavān, sir
- tat me bravītu iti, please explain it to me. Iti prathamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the first section.
note If you worship name as Brahman then you can achieve anything you want within certain limits. But Brahman is the real purport. The names by themselves are not important. Names have a limited use. When you call a flower a rose, you are obviously referring to a particular species of flower. Within the limits of that species, you have as much freedom as you like. You may be referring to a rose of any colour you like—white, red, yellow, etc. You are free within the limits of the colours and other characteristics of the rose. But when you identify the rose as Brahman, you impose on Brahman the limitations that the name ‘rose’ has. As Brahman is nameless, you have no right to impose the limitations that name implies on it.
- Vāk vāva nāmnaḥ bhūyasī, speech is certainly superior to name
- vāk vai vijñāpayati, speech makes known
- ṛg vedam yajur vedam sāma vedam ātharvaṇam caturtham, the Ṛg Veda, the Yajur Veda, the Sāma Veda, and the fourth, the Atharva Veda
- itihāsa purāṇam pañcamam, history and the Purāṇas, as the fifth
- vedānām vedam, grammar [lit., the Veda of the Vedas]
- pitryam, rites offered out of respect to the ancestors
- rāśim, mathematics
- daivam, the science of meteors and other natural phenomena [and omens]
- nidhim, the science of underground resources
- vākovākyam, logic
- ekāyanam, moral science
- deva-vidyām, astrology
- brahma-vidyām, knowledge of the Vedas
- bhūta-vidyām, geology
- kṣattra-vidyām, archery
- nakṣatra-vidyām, astronomy
- sarpa [-vidyām], snake-charming
- devajana-vidyām, fine arts
- divam ca, heaven
- pṛthivīm ca, and the earth
- vāyum ca, and air
- ākāśam ca, and space
- āpaḥ ca, and water
- tejaḥ ca, and fire
- devān ca, and the gods
- manuṣyān ca, and human beings
- paśūn ca, and animals
- vayāṃsi ca, and birds
- tṛṇa-vanaspatīn, creepers and big trees
- śvāpadāni, animals of prey
- ākīṭa-pataṅga-pipīlikam, worms, fleas, and ants
- dharmam ca adharmam ca, merit and demerit
- satyam ca anṛtam ca, and truth and untruth
- sādhu ca asādhu ca, and good and evil
- hṛdayajnam ca ahṛdayajñam ca, pleasant and unpleasant
- yat vai vāk, if speech
- na abhaviṣyat, did not exist
- na dharmaḥ na adharmaḥ vyajñāpayiṣyat, there would be no awareness of merit and demerit
- satyani na anṛtam, nor of truth and untruth
- sādhu na asādhu na, nor of good and evil
- hṛdayajñaḥ na ahṛdayajñaḥ, nor of pleasant and unpleasant
- vāk era etat sarvam vijñāpayati, speech alone makes it possible to understand all this
- vāk upāssva iti, worship speech.
note Vāk is the organ of speech. It produces not only words, but words with deep meanings. For instance, we have access to the wisdom of the Vedas through these words. These words represent Brahman and should be worshipped as such.
- Saḥ yah, he who
- vācam brahma iti upāste, worships speech as Brahman
- yāvat vācaḥ gatam, as far as the power of speech goes
- tatra, that far
- asya yathā-kāmacāraḥ bhavati, as he wishes he can go
- yaḥ vācam brahma iti upāste, he who worships speech as Brahman
- bhagavaḥ, sir
- vācaḥ bhūyaḥ asti iti, is there anything higher than speech
- vācaḥ vāva bhūyaḥ asti iti, there is certainly something higher than speech
- bhagavān, sir
- tat me bravītu iti, please explain it to me. Iti dvitīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the second section.
- Manaḥ vāva vācaḥ bhūyaḥ, the mind is certainly superior to speech
- yathā vai, just as
- dve vā āmalake, two āmalaka fruits
- dve vā kole, or two kolas [plums]
- dvau vā akṣau, or two akṣa fruits
- muṣṭiḥ anubhavati, the fist can hold
- evam, in the same way
- manaḥ anubhavati, the mind can hold
- vācam ca nāma ca, speech and mind
- yadā, when
- saḥ, someone
- manasā, in his mind
- manasyati, thinks
- mantrān adhīyīya iti, I will read the mantras
- atha, then
- adhīte, he reads
- karmāṇi kurvīya iti, I will work
- atha, then
- kurute, he works
- putrān ca paśūn ca, children and animals
- iccheya iti, let me wish for
- atha icchate, then he wishes
- imam ca lokam amum ca, this world and the other world
- iccheya iti, let me wish for
- atha icchate, then he wishes
- manaḥ hi ātmā, the mind is the self
- manaḥ hi lokaḥ, the mind is the world
- manaḥ hi brahma, the mind is Brahman
- manaḥ upāssva iti, worship the mind.
note Speech and name are important, but they are not enough. They will not take you very far. Suppose you repeat the name of God, but your mind is elsewhere, thinking of something else. Will that serve any purpose? No. The Upaniṣad says here, first you decide in your mind what you will do, and after that you act on the thought. Just as you hold fruits within your hand, similarly, you hold within your mind what you want—whether it is children, property, scholarship, or something else. So the mind is higher than speech.
- Saḥ yaḥ, he who
- manaḥ brahma iti upāste, worships the mind as Brahman
- yāvat manasaḥ gatam, as far as the mind goes
- tatra, that far
- asya yathā-kāmacāraḥ bhavati, as he wishes he can go
- yaḥ manaḥ brahma iti upāste, he who worships the mind as Brahman
- bhagavaḥ, sir
- manasaḥ bhūyaḥ asti iti, is there anything higher than the mind
- manasaḥ vāva bhūyaḥ asti iti, there is certainly something higher than the mind
- bhagavān, sir
- tat me bravītu iti, please explain it to me. Iti tṛtīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the third section.
- Saṅkalpaḥ vāva manasaḥ bhūyān, the will is indeed superior to the mind
- yadā vai, when
- saṅkalpayate, a person decides
- atha, then
- manasyati, he thinks
- atha, then
- vācam īrayati, he directs the organ of speech
- tām u nāmni īrayati, he makes speech utter the name
- nāmni, in the names
- mantrāḥ, all the mantras
- ekam bhavanti, are united
- mantreṣu karmāṇi, the actions [are united] in the mantras.
note The mind is very important, but it heeds to be guided by the will. Why? Because the mind is always wavering. It cannot decide. In the Bhagavad Gītā the mind is described as being vāyoḥ iva, like the wind. It is restless and difficult to control. Sometimes the mind is even compared to a mad elephant. All of us have minds, no doubt, but not all have an equal degree of will power, or determination. For instance, anyone may utter some mantras, but unless they are recited with saṅkalpa, they do not mean anything. They are just words. When you add saṅkalpa to the mantras, then the words become active and powerful. This is why saṅkalpa is higher.
- Tāni ha vai etāni, all these [i.e., mind, speech, name, mantra, and karma]
- saṅkalpa-ekāyanāni, merge in saṅkalpa
- saṅkalpātmakāni, rise from saṅkalpa
- saṅkalpe pratiṣṭhitāni, supported by saṅkalpa
- dyāvāpṛthivī, heaven and the earth
- samaklṛpatām, will
- vāyuḥ cā ākāśam ca, the air and the sky
- samakalpetām, will
- āpaḥ ca tejaḥ ca, water and fire
- samakalpanta, will
- teṣām saṃklṛptyai, through their will
- varṣam saṅkalpate, rain wills
- varṣasya saṃklṛptyai, because the rain wills
- annam saṅkalpate, food wills
- annasya saṃklṛptyai, because of the will of food
- prāṇāḥ saṅkalpante, the prāṇas will
- prāṇānām saṃklṛptyai, because of the will of the prāṇas
- mantrāḥ saṅkalpante, the mantras will
- mantrāṇām saṃklṛptyai, because the mantras will
- karmāṇi saṅkalpante, the karmas will
- karmaṇām saṃklṛptyai, because the karmas will
- lokaḥ saṅkalpate, the heaven and other worlds will
- lokasya saṃklṛptyai, because the worlds will
- sarvam saṅkalpate, everything wills
- saḥ eṣaḥ, this is the way
- saṅkalpaḥ, will [works]
- saṅkalpam upāssva iti, worship will.
note Sanatkumāra says here that because of saṅkalpa, each of the forces of nature plays its role—as if each knows the duty it’s supposed to perform and has taken a vow to do it. For instance, the earth remains steady—as if it decided long ago that it would remain firm and unmoving. The world goes on, nature goes on, society goes on—all due to this saṅkalpa, to the principle of each doing his or her own duty.
- Saḥ yaḥ saṅkalpam brahma iti upāste, he who worships will-power as Brahman
- klṛptān vai saḥ lokān dhruvān, the true worlds he wishes for
- dhruvaḥ, being true himself
- pratiṣṭhitān, the well-established [worlds]
- pratiṣṭhitaḥ, [himself being] well-established
- avyathamānān, [the worlds] free from pain
- avyathamānaḥ, [himself being] free from pain
- abhisidhyati, he attains
- yāvat saṅkalpasya gatam, as far as will can go
- tatra, that far
- asya yathā-kāmacāraḥ bhavati, as he wishes he can go
- yaḥ saṅkalpam brahma iti upāste, he who worships saṅkalpa as Brahman
- bhagavaḥ, sir
- saṅkalpāt bhūyaḥ asti iti, is there anything higher than saṅkalpa
- saṅkalpāt vāva bhūyaḥ asti iti, there is certainly something higher than saṅkalpa
- bhagavān, sir
- tat me bravītu iti, please explain it to me. Iti caturthaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the fourth section.
note The will is the beginning and end of everything concerning the ṃind. Not only that—the will is the root of the earth, heaven, of all the worlds, of space, air, fire, water, food, life, the mantras, and work. The will is the origin and end of the phenomenal world. If you meditate on this, you learn the secret of progress in life. But if you are a true seeker of Truth, you soon begin to feel that there must be something higher. This is divine discontent. And this is why Nārada asks Sanatkumāra if there is anything higher. Sanatkumāra takes him step by step, from a lower truth to a higher truth.
- Cittam vāva saṅkalpāt bhūyaḥ, intelligence is certainly higher than saṅkalpa [will-power]
- yadā vai cetayate, when one comprehends
- atha saṅkalpayate, then one wills
- atha, then
- manasyati, he thinks
- atha, then
- vācam īrayati, he directs the organ of speech
- tām u nāmni īrayati, he makes speech utter the name
- nāmni, in the names
- mantrāḥ, all the mantras
- ekam bhavanti, are united
- mantreṣu karmāṇi, the actions [are united] in the mantras.
note Higher than saṅkalpa is citta. Just as saṅkalpa is part of the mind, so also is citta. Śaṅkara says that here citta means intelligence. It is right understanding of what to do in a present situation in the light of past experience. You have in your mind your past experiences and your future plans, and according to that you weigh the pros and cons of your present condition and decide what to do. Citta is the power to judge what is good and bad, what is right and wrong, and then make a decision promptly and correctly. A person who has this intelligence never does things impulsively. Saṅkalpa, or will, is good, but suppose you cannot discriminate and you apply your will to a wrong purpose. A foolish person may be very obstinate, but that kind of will-power will eventually land him in trouble. Our will must be guided by our intelligence. You may have noticed that the order here is from gross to fine. First Sanatkumāra mentions words, which are gross; then the mind, which is finer; then saṅkalpa, which is more fine; and now citta, still finer. He does not reject the gross. The gross level is also truth, but it is a lower truth. Gradually he takes Nārada to the finest, the highest,
- Tāni ha vai etāni, all these [saṅkalpa, mind, speech, etc.]
- citta-ekāyanāni, merge in the citta [intelligence]
- cittātmāni, citta is the self [of all these]
- citte pratiṣṭitāni, they rest in citta
- tasmāt, that is why
- yadi api, even if
- bahuvit, a person knows much
- acittaḥ bhavati, but is dull [i.e., is lacking in true understanding]
- na ayam asti iti, that person does not exist
- eva enam āhuḥ, people say about him
- yat ayam veda, no matter how much he knows
- yat vai ayam vidvān, if he were really learned
- na ittham acittaḥ syāt iti, he would not be foolish like this
- atha, but
- yadi alpavit bhavati, if there is a person without much knowledge
- cittavān, [but] with intelligence
- tasmā eva uta śuśrūṣante, they would like to hear him speak
- eṣām, of all these
- cittam hi eva ekāyanam, intelligence is where they merge
- cittam ātmā, intelligence is their soul
- cittam pratiṣṭhā, intelligence is their support
- cittam upāssva iti, worship intelligence.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Saḥ yaḥ, he who
- cittam brahma iti upāste, worships intelligence as Brahman
- abhisidhyati, he attains
- cittān vai lokān, worlds of intelligence
- dhruvān, [worlds that are] true
- dhruvaḥ, being true himself
- pratiṣṭhitān, the well-established [worlds]
- pratiṣṭhitaḥ, [himself being] well-established
- avyathamānān, [the worlds] free from pain
- avyathamānaḥ, [himself being] free from pain
- yāvat cittasya gatam, as far as intelligence can go
- tatra, that far
- asya yathā-kāmacāraḥ bhavati, as he wishes he can go
- yaḥ cittam brahma iti upāste, he who worships intelligence as Brahman
- bhagavah, sir
- cittāt bhūyaḥ asti iti, is there anything higher than intelligence
- cittāt vāva bhūyaḥ asti iti, there is certainly something higher than intelligence
- bhaga-
- Dhyānam vāva cittāt bhūyaḥ, meditation is certainly superior to intelligence
- dhyāyati iva pṛthivī, the earth seems to be meditating
- antarikṣam dhyāyati iva, the space between the earth and heaven seems to be meditating
- dyauḥ dhyāyati iva, the heaven seems to be meditating
- āpaḥ dhyāyanti iva, water seems to be meditating
- parvatāḥ dhyāyanti iva, the mountains seem to be meditating
- deva-manuṣyāḥ dhyāyanti iva, gods and human beings seem to be meditating
- tasmāt, this is why
- ye, those who
- iha, in this world
- manuṣyāṇām, among human beings
- mahattām prāpnuvanti, attain greatness
- dhyānāpādāṃśāḥ iva eva te bhavanti, they seem to enjoy the fruits of meditation
- atha, but
- ye alpāḥ, those who are small
- kalahinaḥ, are quarrelsome
- piśunāḥ, crooked
- upavādinaḥ, those who love scandel-mongering
- atha, but
- ye prabhavaḥ, those who are great
- dhyānāpādāṃśāḥ iva eva te bhavanti, they seem to enjoy the fruits of meditation
- dhyānam upāssva iti, worship meditation.
note This is why, those people in this world who attain greatness seem to enjoy the fruits of meditation. But there are people of small calibre. They are quarrelsome, crooked, and always finding fault with others. Those who are great, however, are so because of their habit of meditation. Therefore worship meditation. According to Śaṅkara, dhyāna is an uninterrupted stream of thought directed towards some object. Thinking of some idea, you concentrate your mind on it without breaking the flow, without any interruption—like pouring oil from one vessel to another in a continuous stream. In the same way, you must fix your mind on God. You may meditate on him as something abstract, as an idea. Or, if that is difficult, you may meditate on him with some kind of form. Sanatkumāra says here that everything seems to be meditating—the earth, the intermediate region, heaven, the mountains. Once Swami Vivekananda said: ‘Look at the Himalayas. Does it not strike you that it is a yogi meditating?’ Śaṅkara also compares the earth to a yogi sitting in meditation, firm and unmoving. As the earth is steady and fixed, so we also should be steady and fixed when we meditate. Before Buddha attained illumination he vowed: Ihāsane śuṣyatu me śarīraṃ tvagasthimāṃsaṃ pralayaṃ ca yātu; Aprāpya bodhiṃ bahukalpadurlabhāṃ naivāsanātkāyamataścaliṣyate. May my body shrivel up on this seat; may my skin, bones, and flesh disintegrate. Without attaining enlightenment, which is so hard to attain, I shall not leave this seat. This is the sort of determination we must have. If you can think of everything as meditating, then you also will be able to meditate. And those people who meditate attain greatness, because they constantly think of great things. Śaṅkara says that greatness comes through knowledge or wealth or some other thing. But in order to become great you must think in a great way, speak in a great way, and behave in a great way. Suppose you cannot think in terms of being great. You condemn yourself and think, ‘Oh, that is not for me.’ This is not humility. It is foolishness. It is being small-minded, and it is condemned by the scriptures. Swami Vivekananda used to say, ‘You may have faith in all the gods and goddesses, but if you do not have faith in yourself you will never achieve anything.’ Similarly, if you are jealous or speak ill of others, you will not be able to meditate on great things. And if you cannot meditate on great things, your nature will deteriorate. Someone once told Vidyasagar that a certain person was criticizing him. Vidyasagar said, ‘I don’t remember having helped him in any way, so why should he criticize me?’ Sometimes you find that the very people who have received your help try to harm you. This is the nature of small-minded people. Thinking shapes our character. If we meditate on noble things we become noble.
- Saḥ yaḥ dhyānam brahma iti upāste, one who worships meditation as Brahman
- yāvat dhyānasya gatam, as far as meditation can go
- tatra, that far
- asya yathā-kāmacāraḥ bhavati, as he wishes he can go
- yaḥ dhyānam brahma iti upāste, he who worships meditation as Brahman
- bhagavaḥ, sir
- dhyānāt bhūyaḥ asti iti, is there anything higher than meditation
- dhyānāt vāva bhūyaḥ asti iti, there is certainly something higher than meditation
- bhagavān, sir
- tat me bravītu iti, please explain it to me. Iti ṣaṣṭhaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the sixth section.
- Vijñānam vāva dhyānāt bhūyaḥ, vijñāna [i.e., the practical application of knowledge] is certainly superior to meditation
- vijñānena vai vijānāti, through vijñāna one knows
- ṛg vedam yajur vedam sāma vedam ātharvaṇam caturtham, the Ṛg Veda, the Yajur Veda, the Sāma Veda, and the fourth, the Atharva Veda
- itihāsa purāṇam pañcamam, history and the Purāṇas, as the fifth
- vedānām vedam, grammar [lit., the Veda of the Vedas]
- pitryam, rites offered out of respect to the ancestors
- rāśim, mathematics
- daivam, the science of meteors and other natural phenomena [and omens]
- nidhim, the science of underground resources
- vākovākyam, logic
- ekāyanam, moral science
- deva-vidyām, astrology
- brahma-vidyām, knowledge of the Vedas
- bhūta-vidyām, geology
- kṣattra-vidyām, archery
- nakṣatra-vidyām, astronomy
- sarpa [-vidyām], snakecharming
- devajana-vidyām, fine arts
- divam ca, heaven
- pṛthivīm ca, and the earth
- vāyum ca, and air
- ākāśam ca, and space
- āpaḥ ca, and water
- tejaḥ ca, and fire
- devān ca, and the gods
- manuṣyān ca, and human beings
- paśūn ca, and animals
- vayāṃsi ca, and birds
- tṛṇa-vanaspatīn, creepers and big trees
- śvāpadāni, animals of prey
- ākīṭa-pataṅga-pipīlikam, worms, fleas, and ants
- dharmam ca adharmam ca, merit and demerit
- satyam ca anṛtam ca, and truth and untruth
- sādhu ca asādhu ca, and good and evil
- hṛdayajñam ca ahṛdayajñam ca, pleasant and unpleasant
- annam ca rasam ca, food and water
- imam ca lokam amum ca, this world and the other world
- vijñānena eva vijānāti, one knows this through vijñāna
- vijñānam upāssva iti, worship vijñāna.
note Vijñāna is higher than dhyāna, meditation. What is vijñāna? It is knowledge of the meaning of the scriptures (vjñānam śāstrārthaviṣayam jñānam). There are so many scriptures, but suppose you are able to recite all of them from memory. That is not enough. You must understand the real purport of what each is saying and then put the teachings into practice. Some people have one book that they read over and over again. It may be the Gītā or The Gospel When Swami Turiyananda was young he would read one verse at a time from the Gītā and spend the whole day, or the next several days, meditating on it. He would not go on to the next verse until he had realized the truth of the one he had just read. This is vijñāna, and this is why vijñāna is higher than meditation.
- Saḥ yaḥ, he who
- vijñānam brahma iti upāste, worships vijñāna [i.e., the practical application of knowledge] as Brahman
- saḥ vai vijñānavataḥ jñānavataḥ lokān abhisidhyati, attains the vijñānamaya and jñānamaya worlds
- yāvat vijñānasya gatam, as far as vijñāna goes
- tatra, that far
- asya yathā-kāmacāraḥ bhavati, as he wishes he can go
- yaḥ vijñānam brahma iti upāste, he who worships vijñāna as Brahman
- bhagavaḥ, sir
- vijñānāt bhūyaḥ asti iti, is there anything higher than vijñāna
- vijñānāt vāva bhūyaḥ asti iti, there is certainly something higher than vijñāna
- bhagavān, sir
- tat me bravītu iti, please explain it to me. Iti saptamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the seventh section.
- Balanm vāva vijñānāt bhūyaḥ, strength is superior to understanding
- ekaḥ balavān, one strong person
- api ha śatam vijñānavatāin ākampayate, can make even a hundred persons of understanding shake [with fear]
- yadā saḥ balī bhavati, when a person is strong [he is full of enthusiasm]
- atha utthātā bhavati, he is then up and about
- uttiṣṭhan, being up
- paricaritā bhavati, he looks after [his teacher]
- paricaran, attending to the needs [of his teacher]
- upasattā bhavati, he sits near [the teacher]
- upasīdan, sitting near him
- draṣṭā bhavati, he watches [what the teacher does]
- śrotā bhavati, he listens [to what the. teacher says]
- mantā bhavati, [and] thinks it over
- boddhā bhavati, he tries to understand the meaning
- kartā bhavati, he does what he is supposed to do
- vijñātā bhavati, he grasps the meaning [of what the teacher had said]
- balena vai pṛthivī tiṣṭhati, through power the whole world is sustained
- balena antarikṣam, through power, the interspace [is sustained]
- balena dyauḥ, through power, heaven
- balena parvatāḥ, through strength, the mountains
- balena deva-manuṣyāḥ, through strength, gods and human beings
- balena paśavaḥ ca, through strength, cattle
- vayāṃsi ca tṛṇa-vanaspatayaḥ, and birds and creepers and big trees
- śvāpadāni, animals of prey
- ākīṭa-pataṅga-pipīlikam, worms, fleas, and ants
- balena lokaḥ tiṣṭhati, through strength the whole world is sustained
- balam upāssva iti, worship strength.
note What is higher than understanding? Strength. You might remember that startling remark Swami Vivekananda made in the course of a lecture: ‘You will reach heaven quicker by playing football than by reading the Gita.’ Why do we play football? To be strong, to have strong muscles and a healthy body. How will you understand what Śrī Kṛṣṇa is saying unless you have a strong body and nerves? If you are weak, you can never grasp the real meaning of the Gītā. As the Muṇḍaka Upaniṣad (III.ii.4) says, ‘Nāyamātmā balahīnena labhyaḥ—This Self cannot be known by the weak.’ This, of course, does not mean just physical strength. Intellectual strength is also necessary—in fact, strength at all levels. Everyone follows a strong person. Gandhi was very strong-minded. If he made up his mind to do something, nothing on earth could make him change—even if he had to do it alone. He meant what he said, and that is why he commanded so much respect. It is very important to mean what you say and say what you mean. Weak people cannot do that. Sanatkumāra says that in the presence of a strong man, a hundred men of understanding tremble. If you are strong you will be enterprising, but weak people are always vacillating. They never know their minds. A strong person will start acting immediately. He is never idle. If a person wants to gain anything materially, he has to work hard. How often does someone gain something by a fluke? And this is even more important if one is seeking the Truth. Lots of us say, ‘Oh, when will I realize the Self?’ But are we prepared to work hard to do it? In ancient days if people wanted to learn the Vedas they would have to go to a teacher and live with him. Besides attending to their studies, the students would serve the teacher. They would have many duties to perform. It was a difficult life. There was a devotee who used to come with his classmates to Belur Math when Swami Brahmananda was there. He noticed that Swami Brahmananda would sometimes ask one of his disciples to bring him a glass of water, or do some other little service. This devotee always hoped that some day Swami Brahmananda would ask him to do something. Finally one day the postman came with a parcel for Swami Brahmananda, who wanted someone to unpack it for him. As if in answer to this devotee’s prayers, Swami Brahmananda turned to him and said: ‘Would you do me this favour? Take this pared, unpack it, and bring me the contents. But look, be sure you don’t tear the paper or cut the ropes with which it is tied.’ So, with great care, the devotee did as he was asked. Sri Ramakrishna was also like this—punctilious. If you are a seeker of Truth, you have to be correct in every detail. You may think that attaining Self-knowledge is only a matter of renunciation and practice of meditation and so on. But how can you meditate if your mind is not attentive to every detail? Through service the teacher watches the student. He sees whether the student is careless or absent-minded or lazy. When you serve the teacher you become intimate, and if you are intimate, he will gladly share his knowledge with you. A good teacher is always looking for a good student, and he is happy when he finds a student who is attentive, humble, keen to learn, and who loves him. Swami Nirvanananda was considered the best of Swami Brahmananda’s attendants. Swami Brahmananda was always surrounded by young people who loved him and wanted to serve him. But none could surpass Swami Nirvanananda because he would not wait for Swami Brahmananda to tell him what he needed. Swami Nirvanananda would anticipate his needs beforehand. Whether it was a cup of tea, a glass of water, or something to eat, it would be there before Swami Brahmananda would ask. Most of the time Swami Brahmananda would be on a high spiritual plane, forgetful of his physical needs. A good attendant had to know what he needed beforehand and provide it. Religion is not just something intellectual. It is a transformation of the whole personality. The teacher is the mould, and you try to form yourself according to that mould. How? First you hear what the teacher says, and then you reason: ‘Why did he say that? What did he mean by that?’ Then you watch what he does. Very soon the truth of what the teacher says reveals itself to you. You realize what he is saying, and then you act accordingly. This earth is an example of what strength can do. The earth sustains everything through its own strength. In fact, everything in nature is sustained by its own inherent strength. It is not strength borrowed from something else. Similarly, we must support ourselves by our own strength. So Sanatkumāra says first you rise. That is to say, once you have decided to attain Self-knowledge, don’t be idle. Begin immediately, As Swami Vivekananda
- Saḥ yaḥ, he who
- balam brahma iti upāste, worships strength as Brahman
- yāvat balasya gatam, as far as strength goes
- tatra, that far
- asya yathā-kāmacāraḥ bhavati, as he wishes he can go
- yaḥ balam brahma iti upāste, he who worships strength as Brahman
- bhagavaḥ, sir
- balāt bhūyaḥ asti iti, is there anything higher than strength
- balāt vāva bhūyaḥ asti iti, there is certainly something higher than strength
- bhagavāṃ sir
- tat me bravītu iti, please explain it to me. Iti aṣṭamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the eighth section.
note Strength here means strength produced by food. If you starve, you become weak and then you do not understand the scriptures. Perhaps your teacher will ask you to recite something from the scriptures, but you won’t be able to because of your weakness from fasting. A strong person, however, can please his teacher by his enthusiasm and service. He can also carry out his teacher’s instructions to the latter’s satisfaction. By virtue of his strength, he becomes an ideal person in all respects.
- Annam vāva balāt bhūyaḥ, food is certainly superior to strength
- tasmāt, that is why
- yadi api, even if
- daśa rātrīḥ na aśnīyāt, a person fasts for ten [days and] nights
- yadi u ha jīvet, though he may live
- atha vā adraṣṭā, he may not be able to see
- aśrotā, or hear
- amantā, think
- aboddhā, understand
- akartā, work
- avijñātā bhavati, nor can he fully grasp [the meaning of what he is taught]
- atha, but
- annasya āyai, when he eats food
- draṣṭā bhavati, he can see
- śrotā bhavati, he can hear
- mantā bhavati, he can think
- boddhā bhavati, he can understand
- kartā bhavati, he can work
- vijñātā bhavati, he can grasp the meaning
- annam upāssva iti, worship food.
note Food creates strength. Suppose you fast for ten days or so. What will happen? It is possible you could die, but even if you don’t, your sense organs will not function. You won’t be able to see, hear, or think. If you went to a teacher you would not be able to learn anything from him. But then if you resume eating, your organs and your mind would again start functioning. You could then study and serve the teacher and learn from him.
- Saḥ yaḥ, he who
- annam brahma iti upāste, worships food as Brahman
- saḥ abhisidhyati, he attains
- annavataḥ vai lokān pānavataḥ, worlds hill of food and drink
- yāvat annasya gatam, as far as food goes
- tatra, that far
- asya yathā-kāmacāraḥ bhavati, as he wishes he can go
- yaḥ annam brahma iti upāste, he who worships food as Brahman
- bhagavaḥ, sir
- annāt bhūyaḥ asti iti, is there anything higher than food
- annāt vāva bhūyaḥ asti iti, there is certainly something higher than food
- bhagavān, sir
- tat me bravītu iti, please explain it to me. Iti navamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the ninth section.
- Āpaḥ vāva annāt bhūyaḥ, water is certainly superior than food
- tasmāt, this is why
- yadā suvṛṣṭiḥ na bhavati, when there is not enough rain
- prāṇāḥ vyādhīyante, people are anxious
- annam kanīyaḥ bhaviṣyati iti, [thinking,] there will not be much food
- atha yadā suvṛṣṭiḥ bhavati, then when it rains
- prāṇāḥ ānandinaḥ bhavanti, people become happy
- annam bahu bhaviṣyati iti, [thinking,] there will be much food
- āpaḥ eva imāḥ, water is all this
- mūrtāḥ, different forms
- yā iyam pṛthivī, this earth
- yat antarikṣam, this interspace
- yat dyauḥ, this heaven
- yat parvatāḥ, these mountains
- yat deva-manuṣyāḥ, these gods and human beings
- yat paśavaḥ ca, these cattle
- vayāṃsi ca, and birds
- tṛṇa-vanaspatayaḥ, and creepers and trees
- śvāpadāni, animals of prey
- ākīṭa-pataṅga-pipīlikam, worms, insects, and ants
- āpaḥ eva imāḥ mūrtāḥ, these are all water in different forms
- apaḥ upāssva iti, worship water.
note Suppose one year there is very little rainfall. Everyone then becomes very worried. They say: ‘What will happen to us? This is a bad year. The crops will fail and there will be a famine.’ On the other hand, if there is good rain during the year, then there is a good harvest. People say, ‘This year we will have plenty to eat.’ The bodies of all living beings are products of water and are dependent on water.
- Saḥ yaḥ, he who
- apaḥ brahma iti upāste, worships water as Brahman
- sarvān kāmān āpnoti, gets all he wishes
- tṛptimān bhavati, [and] he is happy
- yāvat apām gatam, as far as water goes
- tatra, that far
- asya yathā-kāmacāraḥ bhavati, as he wishes he can go
- yaḥ apaḥ brahma iti upāste, he who worships water as Brahman
- bhagavaḥ, sir
- adbhyaḥ bhūyaḥ asti iti, is there anything higher than water
- adbhyaḥ vāva bhūyaḥ asti iti, there is certainly something higher than water
- bhagavān, sir
- tat me bravītu iti, please explain it to me. Iti daśamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the tenth section.
note The Upaniṣad says that if you worship water as Brahman all your desires are fulfilled and you become happy. You can also do whatever you please. This is an exaggeration, but the Upaniṣad is trying to entice you to understand the value of water.
- Tejaḥ vāva adbhyaḥ bhūyaḥ, fire is certainly superior to water
- tat vai etat, that [fire]
- vāyum āgṛhya, taking the support of air
- ākāśam abhitapati, heats the sky
- tadā, then
- āhaḥ, people say
- niśocati, it is very hot
- nitapati, it is burning
- varṣiṣyati vai iti, there will be rain
- tejaḥ eva tat, there is fire
- pūrvam, first
- darśayitvā, showing
- atha apaḥ, then water
- sṛjate, creates
- tat etat, that [fire]
- ūrdhvābhiḥ ca tiraścībhiḥ ca, going upwards and sideways in an irregular way
- vidyudbhiḥ, with lightning
- āhrādāḥ, the roar of thunder
- caranti, moves about
- tasmāt, this is why
- āhuḥ, people say
- vidyotate, there is lightning
- stanayati, there is thunder
- varṣiṣyati vai iti, there will certainly be rain
- tejaḥ eva tat pūrvam darśayitvā, first heat is seen
- atha apaḥ sṛjate, then it creates water
- tejaḥ upāssva iti, worship fire.
note In Indian philosophy, there is no such thing as creation—that is, something created out of nothing. But there is manifestation. This universe is always there, only sometimes it is manifest and sometimes it is not. When it is not manifest it is in a seed form. But Brahman is the essence of everything. It is infinite Existence, and that Existence is Consciousness. The first manifestation of Brahman is space. After that comes air and then fire. Water comes from fire, or energy. Finally, earth comes from water. Some things in this universe are gross, and some are subtle, but according to Indian philosophy all are by-products of earth, water, fire, air, and space. This universe is nothing but a permutation and combination of these five elements. Tejas means fire, heat, or energy. Fire is superior to water in the sense that it is the cause, and the cause is always superior to the effect. Fire is said to take air as its support and then make the air motionless through its power. The heat then spreads through space. We all know that when the atmosphere becomes very hot, it will soon rain. Also, before it rains we often see lightning and hear the roar of thunder. This indicates that the atmosphere is surcharged with electricity. So it is said that fire is the cause of water. Fire manifests itself as water. It is not that these elements are separate things.
- Saḥ yaḥ, he who
- tejaḥ brahma iti upāste, worships fire as Brahman
- saḥ vai tejasi, he becomes energetic and bright
- abhisidhyati, [and] attains
- tejasvataḥ bhāsvataḥ lokān, worlds that are bright and shining
- apahatatamaskān, and without a hint of darkness
- yāvat tejasaḥ gatam, as far as tejas goes
- tatra, that far
- asya yathā-kāmacāraḥ bhavati, as he wishes he can go
- yaḥ tejaḥ brahma iti upāste, he who worships fire as Brahman
- bhagavaḥ, sir
- tejasaḥ bhūyaḥ aṣṭi iti, is there anything higher than tejas
- tejasaḥ vāva bhūyaḥ asti iti, there is certainly something higher
note From ancient times there has been the practice of worshipping fire in different cultures all over the world. In India during the Vedic period people performed sacrifices to fire and always kept their fire burning. But among the religions of the world now, the Parsees are especially known for their worship of fire. The Upaniṣad says that if you worship fire you become like fire—radiant, bright, strong, and shining. That is the Hindu idea. You choose some model, called an iṣṭa. My iṣṭa is my desired state of excellence. Suppose I choose Buddha as my iṣṭa. If I worship him and meditate on him, slowly my character will be changed and I will be transformed. But fire does not just give radiance. Fire, or light, is also a symbol of knowledge as well as a symbol of purity. Fire is said to burn away all impurities. When you meditate on fire as a symbol of knowledge, you meditate on all that is good, bright, and radiant. Slowly we are approaching Brahman. We are going to the source. Suppose we want to walk from Calcutta to Gangotri, the source of the Ganga. How do we do it? We follow the course of the river. Gradually, step by step, we leave Calcutta behind and go further and further north, until at last we find ourselves at Gangotri. In the same way, Sanatkumāra is taking Nārada step by step to the knowledge of the Self.
- Ākāśaḥ vāva tejasaḥ bhūyān, space is certainly superior to fire
- ākāśe vai, within space
- sūryā-candra-māsau ubhau, are both the sun and the moon
- vidyut, lightning
- nakṣatrāṇi, the stars
- agniḥ, [and] fire
- ākāśena, through space
- āhvayati, one calls
- ākāśena śṛṇoti, through space one hears
- ākāśena pratiśṛṇoti, through space one hears what others are saying
- ākāśe ramate, in space one enjoys
- ākāśe na ramate, in space one suffers
- ākāśe jāyate, in space one is born
- ākāśam abhijāyate, [trees and plants] grow pointing to space
- ākāśam upāssva iti, worship space.
note You may find what seem to be errors in every religion, because no religion can reveal the whole of the Ultimate Truth. No religion can exhaust God. It can reveal only one or two aspects of God. So we see here, Sanatkumāra is taking Nārada from a lower truth to a higher truth. He is showing how the cause is higher than the effect. Suppose there is no such thing as space. Where would fire be? Or lightning? Or the sun or the moon or the stars? So space is higher than fire, or energy. Without space there would be no sound, and no one could speak to another. Nor could anyone be born or grow.
- Saḥ yaḥ, he who
- ākāśam brahma iti upāste, worships space as Brahman
- saḥ vai lokān, he attains worlds
- ākāśavataḥ prakāśavataḥ, that are spacious and shining
- asambādhān, free from all hindrances
- urugāyavataḥ, [and] extensive
- yāvat ākāśasya gatam, as far as space goes
- tatra, that far
- asya yathā-kāmacāraḥ bhavati, as he wishes he can go
- yaḥ ākāśam brahma iti upāste, he who worships space as Brahman
- bhagavaḥ, sir
- ākāśāt bhūyaḥ asti iti, is there anything higher than ākāśa
- ākāśāt vāva bhūyaḥ asti iti, there is certainly something higher than ākāśa
- bhagavān, sir
- tat me bravītu iti, please explain it to me. Iti dvādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the twelfth section.
note If you meditate on something vast, you become vast. Space is infinite, so when you meditate on space you gradually envelop the whole universe. You become so vast that you find there are no hurdles in your way. Why do we practise meditation? One reason is to quicken our growth, our inner development. When we meditate on the deity we like most, we are, in fact, meditating on the qualities that deity embodies. Then gradually we find we are acquiring those same qualities. There is a Sanskrit saying: ‘As you think, so you are.’ If you think you are good, then you will be good. But if you start thinking you are bad, you will soon discover that you are deteriorating. This is why we must meditate on that which is good and noble. Again Nārada is not content. He asks if there is something higher. The student has to ask; otherwise, if he is not interested, there is no point in teaching him. The student must have the urge within himself
- Smaraḥ vāva ākāśāt bhūyaḥ, memory is certainly superior to ākāśa [space]
- tasmāt, this is why
- yadi api, even if
- bahavaḥ, many people
- āsīran, get together
- na smarantaḥ, [but] they cannot remember
- te, they
- na eva kañcana śṛṇuyuḥ, cannot hear anything
- na manvīran, nor think
- na vijānīran, nor know
- yadā vāva te smareyuḥ, but if they can remember
- atha śṛṇuyuḥ, then they can hear
- atha manvīran, then they can think
- atha vijānīran, then they can know
- smareṇa vai, by virtue of memory
- putrān vijānāti, one knows one’s children
- smareṇa paśūn, by virtue of memory [one knows one’s] animals
- smaram upāssva iti, worship memory.
note Memory is the medium through which we learn. Without memory we cannot progress, because we cannot retain anything. Because we have the faculty of memory, we hear something, we understand it, and then we are prompted to action. Suppose someone tells me: ‘Beware! There is a snake over there. Don’t go that way.’ If I cannot remember what that person has said, then I will go in that direction and be bitten by the snake. When the guru gives us spiritual instructions, we have to hear it correctly, think over it and ponder it, and then meditate on it again and again. We must think deeply on it. Without memory we cannot do that.
- Saḥ yaḥ, he who
- smaram brahma iti upāste, worships memory as Brahman
- yāvat smarasya gatam, as far as memory goes
- tatra, that far
- asya yathā-kāmacāraḥ bhavati, as he wishes he can go
- yaḥ smaram brahma iti upāste, he who worships memory as Brahman
- bhagavaḥ, sir
- smarāt bhūyaḥ asti iti, is there anything higher than memory
- smarāt vāva bhūyaḥ asti iti, there is certainly something higher than memory
- bhagavān, sir
- tat me bravītu iti, please explain it to me. Iti trayodaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the thirteenth section.
note Sanatkumāra says to meditate on memory as Brahman. Even the lowest truth is Brahman. But we must not stop there. That is not the goal. True knowledge is not a collection of information stored in our memory. True knowledge is attained through assimilation. We have to grasp it, absorb it. Knowledge has to become part and parcel of our being; otherwise we are like beasts of burden. It is no use knowing the truth unless we act in the light of that truth. Until scholarship has made some impact on our character, it is nothing. Only when it makes us a new individual do we become truly enlightened. Sri Ramakrishna used to give the example of a vulture. A vulture flies very high in the sky, but it is always looking down at the ground—looking for the dead body of some animal so that it can come down and eat the flesh. Similarly, merely going up won’t do. That is to say, merely stuffing your mind with information is not enough. You have to use that information to overcome the obstacles in your life. That’s what is meant.
- Āśā vāva smarāt bhūyasī, hope is certainly superior to memory
- āśā-iddhaḥ vai, fired by hope
- smaraḥ, memory
- mantrān, the mantras
- adhīte, learns
- karmāṇi kurute, performs the rituals
- putrān ca, children
- paśūn ca, and animals
- icchate, he wishes for
- imam ca lokam amum ca, this world and the other [world]
- icchate, he wishes for
- āśām upāssva iti, worship hope.
note Suppose there is something you want. You have not got it, but you hope to get it. This kind of desire can be helpful. Maybe you have money, children, and a good reputation, but you are not happy. You discover that any amount of material prosperity you attain does not give you peace of mind. You see many people who are very prosperous but unhappy. You then start yearning for spiritual enlightenment. This is called divine discontent. This discontent pushes you on and on to make progress. Without burning desire, you cannot attain anything in spiritual life.
- Saḥ yaḥ, he who
- āśām brahma iti upāste, worships hope as Brahman
- āśayā, by that hope
- asya sarve kāmāḥ, all his desires
- samṛdhyanti, are fulfilled
- amoghāḥ, without fail
- ha asya āśiṣaḥ bhavanti, his desires are fulfilled
- yāvat āśāyāḥ gatam, as far as hope goes
- tatra, that far
- asya yathā-kāmacāraḥ bhavati, as he wishes he can go
- yaḥ āśām brahma iti upāste, he who worships hope as Brahman
- bhagavaḥ, sir
- āśāyāḥ bhūyaḥ asti iti, is there anything higher than hope
- āśāyāḥ vāva bhūyaḥ asti iti, there is certainly something higher than hope
- bhagavān, sir
- tat me bravītu iti, please explain it to me. Iti caturdaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the fourteenth section.
note The message given here is that one must not lose heart. No doubt there are many difficulties in the way, but they can be overcome, and they are overcome
- Prāṇaḥ vāva āśāyāḥ bhūyān, prāṇa [the vital force] is certainly superior to hope
- yathā vai arāḥ, just as the spokes
- nābhau samarpitāḥ, are attached to the hub
- evam, in the same way
- asmin prāṇe, on this prāṇa
- sarvarn, all this
- samarpitam, are resting
- prāṇaḥ prāṇena yāti, prāṇa works by its own power
- prāṇaḥ prāṇam dadāti, prāṇa gives prāṇa
- prāṇāya, to prāṇa
- dadāti, [and again] gives
- prāṇaḥ ha pitā, prāṇa is the father
- prāṇaḥ mātā, prāṇa is the mother
note Prāṇa, the vital force, is superior to hope. Suppose you are dead. Can hope do anything for you then? You must have life. If you are not living then there can be no hope, no memory—nothing. The Upaniṣad says that prāṇa is the resting place of everything. It is like a wheel with its spokes. All the spokes are fixed on the hub of the wheel. Similarly, my mind and my organs are all fixed on prāṇa. My eyes are very powerful, but if I am dead they may still be intact but they cannot see. Prāṇa functions on the individual level in you, in me, in plants and insects and animals. But we represent only a small portion of this life force, because prāṇa also functions on the cosmic level. On the cosmic level prāṇa is Hiraṇyagarbha, the first manifestation of Brahman. The whole cosmos is governed and activated by prāṇa. Brahman is beyond thought and If I stop breathing my body and organs can no longer function, and eventually they disintegrate. Similarly, if the cosmic life force withdraws itself from this universe, everything comes to a halt. The sun does not shine; the air does not blow. The whole life process comes to a standstill. We see so many beings around us. Someone is your mother, someone your father, someone your brother, someone your sister, but they are all prāṇa. Prāṇa is in the form of your mother. Prāṇa is in the form of your father, or your sister, or your teacher, and so on. Our family, society, the entire humanity, all living beings—all are prāṇa in different forms. Prāṇa takes various forms and then assumes different relationships.
- Saḥ yadi, if anyone
- pitaram vā mataram vā, his father or mother
- bhrātaram vā svasāram vā, or brother or sister
- ācāryam vā brāhmaṇam vā, or teacher or a brāhmin
- kiñcit, anything
- bhṛśam iva, discourteously
- pratyāha, answers
- dhik tvā astu iti, shame on you
- enam eva āhuḥ, [people] say to him
- pitṛhā vai tvam asi, you have killed your father
- mātṛhā vai tvam asi, you have killed your mother
- bhrātṛhā vai tvam asi, you have killed your brother
- svasṛhā vai tvam asi, you have killed your sister
- ācāryahā vai tvam asi, you have killed your teacher
- brāhmaṇahā vai tvam asi iti, you have killed a brāhmin.
note According to Śaṅkara, using the informal tvam (you) instead of the more formal bhavān would be such an offense. Here the Upaniṣad means that you should treat everyone with respect. Being disrespectful to people is as good as murdering them.
- Atha, but
- yadi api enān, if even all these
- utkrāntaprāṇān, when life has departed
- śūlena, with the help of a spear
- vyatiṣan, tears the bodies to pieces
- samāsam, puts them in a pile
- dahet, [and] bums them
- na eva enam brūyaḥ, people will not say to him
- pitṛhā asi iti, you killed your father
- na mātṛhā asi iti, nor you killed your mother
- na bhrātṛhā asi iti, nor you killed your brother
- na svasṛhā asi iti, nor you killed your sister
- na ācāryahā asi iti, nor you killed your teacher
- na brāhmaṇahā asi iti, nor you killed a brāhmin.
note Suppose you say something very rude to your father. People will say: ‘Shame on you! You have killed your father.’ But suppose your father has died. You will then have to burn or bury his body. Yet no one will scold you or blame you for doing something wrong, because prāṇa has left the body. This is the difference between prāṇa existing in the body and prāṇa not existing in the body.
- Prāṇaḥ hi eva etāni sarvāṇi bhavati, prāṇa is all this
- saḥ vai eṣaḥ, he who
- evam, thus
- paśyan, seeing
- evam manvānaḥ, thus considering
- evam vijānan, thus knowing
- ativādī bhavati, becomes a superior speaker
- cet, if
- tarn brūyuḥ, anybody says to him
- ativādī asi iti, you are a superior speaker
- ativādī asmi iti brūyān, he will say, ‘Yes I am a superior speaker’
- na apahnuvīta, he will not deny it. Iti pañcadaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the fifteenth section.
note Who is an ativādī? Here ativādī means ‘a superior speaker.’ It is one who has realized the Truth and has thereby acquired the ability to say nothing but the truth. When a holy person speaks, his words make sense. There is a ring of truth about them. They are authoritative. Such a person is an ativādī We all speak. We are speaking all the time. But for most of us our words are like the cawing of crows. Our words are just sounds. They make no sense. But when the speaker is a holy person, one who has realized God, who has seen the Truth face to face, everything he says is true. If you have read Josephine McLeod’s reminiscences of Swami Vivekananda, you will remember how she described the first time she heard Swamiji speak: ‘He stood up and said something, and I thought, “Yes, this is true.” Again he said something, and I thought, “Yes, this is true too.” Yet again he said something and I said to myself, “This is also true.” Whatever he said was true.’ Such a person is an ativādī. In one of the Upaniṣads we find a ṛṣi calling to humanity: ‘Hear me, O children of immortal bliss. I have known the Truth. If you know it you overcome
- Eṣaḥ, this [person]
- tu, but
- vai ativadati, is truly an ativādī
- yaḥ, who
- satyena ativadati, who speaks of Truth after having known the Truth
- bhagavaḥ, sir
- saḥ aham, as I am that [i.e., one who is unhappy]
- satyena ativadāni iti, I want to be an ativādī by knowing the Truth
- satyam tu eva vijijñāsitavyam iti, but Truth must be thoroughly enquired into
- bhagavaḥ, sir
- satyam vijijñāse iti, I wish to thoroughly enquire into Truth. Iti ṣoḍaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the sixteenth section.
note Hearing Sanatkumāra’s words about prāṇa, Nārada concluded that prāṇa is everything, that it is the ultimate. Thinking he was now an ativādī, he kept quiet. He did not make any further enquiries. Sanatkumāra understood, however, and told him: ‘No, you do not know it yet. This is not the ultimate. This is not Brahman. Prāṇa is a manifestation of Brahman but not Brahman itself. In order to know Brahman one must know the Truth.’ That is to say, one must know the meaning behind the words. You may speak of God, but have you seen God yourself? If you have not seen him, if you have not realized him, what right have you got to talk about him? You are like a blind man trying to lead another blind man. Have you yourself realized the Truth?—that is the criterion. You must have direct experience of the Truth—not just some information you have picked up from books or from other people. It must be a-parokṣa—that is, not through another source. It must be direct, personal, immediate. Nārada immediately understood his mistake and with great humility asked to learn the Truth. This spirit of humility is very important. As Sri Ramakrishna says, water cannot accumulate in a high place. It always runs down to a low place. Similarly, good qualities cannot remain in a proud person. They will soon run off. Only in a humble person can they be retained. If you are humble the teacher will be glad to teach you. So also, a good teacher will never say: ‘I am supreme. I know everything.’
- Yadā, when
- vai vijānāti, a person knows well
- atha, then
- satyam vadati, he speaks what he knows to be the Truth
- avijānan, without knowing it well
- satyam na vadati, he does not speak of Truth
- vijānan eva, knowing it well
- satyam vadati, one can speak of Truth
- vijñānam tu eva vijijñāsitavyam iti, but one must seek knowledge in depth
- vijñānam bhagavaḥ vijijñāse iti, sir, I seek knowledge in depth. Iti saptadaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the seventeenth section.
note Sanatkumāra says that when you know the Truth, whatever you say is nothing but the truth. You cannot say anything that is not the truth. Truth is Truth, and there is no compromise in it. Once you know this Truth, everything else is irrelevant. But what if that Truth is associated with names and forms? Is that Truth? The scriptures admit it as a relative truth. It is not, however, the Absolute Truth. The Absolute Truth is called ‘that’ because it is beyond the reach of the sense organs. As regards the relative truth, it is called ‘this’, because it is within the reach of the sense organs. The Absolute Truth is difficult to understand. For instance, the elements in their pure form are beyond the reach of the sense organs, so they are sometimes referred to as ‘that’, but they are not the Absolute Truth. Brahman is the Absolute Truth. In this connection it is to be remembered that fire was said to be red, water white, and earth black. Though it was said that the colours alone were real, this is not ‘real’ from the standpoint of Absolute Truth. These colours are also attributes. This is why the Absolute Truth is difficult to understand. Knowing the Absolute Truth is vijñāna.
- Yadā vai manute, when one learns to think well
- atha vijānāti, then one can know deeply
- amatvā, without applying the mind
- na vijānāti, one cannot know deeply
- matvā eva vijānāti, a person knows deeply when he thinks deeply
- matiḥ tu eva vijijñāsitavya iti, but one must want to know how to think well
- bhagavaḥ, sir
- matim vijijñāse iti, I want to know what this thinking is. Iti aṣṭādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the eighteenth section.
note How do we know something? We know it by applying our mind—that is, by concentrating our mind on it. Swami Turiyananda used to say that if you continue reading the Gītā with a concentrated mind, then whenever you read it new meanings will unfold, meanings which you never suspected. Sanatkumāra says that without applying your mind seriously, you will not understand what you are studying. At Belur Math, Swamiji used to have the monks debate on different issues. One person would say something, and another would contradict him. When two people debate about something, they both get excited and the heat rises. As one of the monks used to say, ‘When there is some heat there will also be some light.’ Debating is like churning milk. As you chum the milk the cream gradually begins to appear. So also, when there is a debate, truth gradually comes to the surface. Suppose you have a thorn stuck in your foot. What do you do? As Sri Ramakrishna used to say, you take another thorn and use it to remove the first thorn. Then you throw away both. Similarly, you have to use your mind to go beyond the mind. Vedānta says that Truth is within you. But you must first hear about it from a teacher. Then you must reflect on it. Think over it again and again: ‘What does this mean? How can I be one with Brahman?’ You go on questioning, searching for the real meaning of the, words. After that you must deeply meditate on it. Then only the real meaning dawns on you. It comes as if in a flash. What else is this mind for? If we don’t think, we are as good as dead. Human beings are superior Śaṅkara gives a wonderful definition of reflection. He says it means having great love for the subject being considered.
- Yadā vai śraddadhāti, when a person has respect [for something or someone—or faith in something or someone]
- atha manute, then he thinks deeply [of that thing or person]
- aśraddadhat, if there is no respect
- na manute, he does not think deeply
- śraddadhat eva manute, one thinks deeply when one has respect
- śraddhā tu eva vijijñāsitavya iti, but one must try to have this respect
- śraddhām bhagavaḥ vijijñāse iti, sir, I want to have this respect. Iti ekonaviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the nineteenth section.
note Reflecting is good, but one should do it with śraddhā, faith. Śraddhā also means respect. For instance, if my guru tells me something, I know it must be true because I know he will never mislead me. When you go to a guru you should have faith in what he says. Then later you will get the confirmation of what he has taught you from within, and at that point your own mind becomes the guru. But to begin with you must have respect for what the guru says. This does not mean, however, that you cannot ask him questions. You have every right to have things clarified. But if you say, ‘Well, after all, this person knows nothing; he is just trying to fool me,’ and so on, then you will never get anywhere. Rather, one must listen with an open mind, thinking, ‘This person is held in high respect, so I will listen and I will study.’ Ramakrishna, for instance, made many statements which some of his disciples, such as Swami Vivekananda, had difficulty accepting, so they would question him and argue. And Ramakrishna would welcome their questions and arguments. Others would protest and say, ‘When Ramakrishna has said something, why not accept it?’ But Ramakrishna would reply, ‘No, let them question.’ It was because their enquiry was done with śraddhā, respect, and with a keen desire to know. Suppose you don’t have śraddhā. Then you would not care. You would not even give a moment’s thought to finding out the Truth. Only when you have śraddhā can you go on thinking and reflecting on it.
- Yadā vai nistiṣṭhati, when one is steady in one’s service and devotion to one’s teacher
- atha śraddadhāti, then one has respect
- anistiṣṭhan, where this steadiness and devotion is missing
- na śraddadhāti, there is no respect
- nistiṣṭhan era śraddadhāti, a person has respect when he has this steadiness
- niṣṭhā tu era vijijñāsitavya iti, but one must be determined to have this steadiness
note It is difficult to translate the word niṣṭhā. The closest word in English is probably ‘steadiness.’ For instance, you say you want to know something, but actually it is only a passing mood on your part. You really don’t mean it. This is the opposite of steadiness. But if you really mean it, if you go on struggling to get that knowledge, no matter how difficult or frustrating it may be to acquire it, then this is niṣṭhā, steadiness. Śaṅkara says that niṣṭhā comes from serving the guru with devotion. When you devotedly serve your teacher, your love for the subject of your enquiry grows stronger and stronger, and your conviction also grows stronger and stronger. You begin to think: ‘Yes, there is such a thing as Self-realization. How else can I explain my teacher being so good, so kind, so affectionate, so selfless?’ You find that your teacher is unfailing in his loyalty to the ideals which he professes, and slowly you are able to understand the real implication of the words tyāga, renunciation, titikṣā, forbearance, and so forth, because you see him putting them Section Twenty-one
- Yadā vai karoti, when a person does his duty [i.e., when he practises self-restraint and concentration of the mind]
- atha nistiṣṭḥati, then he is steady
- akṛtvā, without doing one’s duty
- na nistiṣṭhati, one cannot be steady
- kṛtvā eva nistiṣṭhati, one becomes steady by doing one’s duty
- kṛtiḥ tu eva vijijñāsitavya iti, but one should know well the nature of duty
- bhagavaḥ kṛtim vijijñāse iti, sir, I want to know the nature of duty. Iti ekaviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the twenty-first section.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Kṛtiḥ means ‘application,’ or ‘repeated practice.’ How do we get niṣṭhā, or steadiness? Śaṅkara says it comes through repeated practice of self-restraint and self-discipline—that is, through the control of the organs and the mind.
note Section Twenty-three
- Yaḥ vai bhūmā, that which is infinite [lit., big, or the biggest]
- tat sukham, that is happiness
- na alpe sukham asti, there is no happiness in the finite [small]
- bhūmā eva sukham, happiness is only in the infinite
- bhūmā tu eva vijijñāsitavyaḥ iti, but one must try to understand the true nature of the infinite
- bhūmānam bhagavaḥ vijijñāse iti, sir, I want to understand the true nature of the infinite. Iti trayoviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the twenty-third section.
note If you attain bhūmā, then you have real happiness. What is bhūmā? It is Brahman. It is the biggest. It is infinite. Something is infinite when it is without any limitations in terms of time and space. Even our own lives are limited. We were born at a certain point in time and we shall live for a certain span of time. It may be for a hundred years or it may be less, but the body will not last forever. Then why should we bother about God or Brahman or something that is said to be infinite? Because we want to be happy. Perhaps you are very fond of sweets and enjoy eating them. But when you have finished eating them your joy is gone. Moreover, if you eat too many then you become sick and are miserable. Only in the infinite is there real joy, real happiness, real peace—peace that is constant, always there, and never disturbed. As Sanatkumāra says, ‘Na alpe sukham asti—there is no happiness in that which is small, limited, or short-lived.’ Śaṅkara says, anything that is finite causes tṛṣṇā, thirst—that is, it increases your desire for more. Whatever you get, you desire still more. Suppose you possess the whole world; even then you would not be happy. Therefore that which is finite is duḥkhabījam—the seed of unhappiness. As long as you are confined to the limited world of sense experience you can never be happy. You have to go beyond sense experience. When you attain the state of bhūmā you feel you have got everything you have ever wanted. As the Gītā says (VI.22): ‘Attaining that, one does not regard anything to be higher.’ Section Twenty-four
- Yatra, where
- na anyat paśyati, one sees nothing else
- na anyat śṛṇoti, hears nothing else
- na anyat vijānāti, knows nothing about other things
- saḥ bhūmā, that is bhūmā [the infinite]
- atha, but
- yatra, where
- anyat paśyati, one sees something else
- anyat śṛṇoti, hears something else
- anyat vijānāti, knows of something else
- tat alpam, that is small [finite]
- yaḥ vai bhūmā, that which is infinite
- tat amṛtam, that is immortal
- atha, but
- yat alpam, that which is finite
- tat martyam, that is mortal
- bhagavaḥ, sir
- kasmin saḥ pratiṣṭhitaḥ iti, on what does that [bhūmā] rest
- sve mahimni, on its own power
- yadi vā na mahimni iti, or not even on that power.
note At the level of bhūmā, the infinite, there is only bhūmā—nothing but bhūmā. And when you attain that level, you see nothing but bhūmā. If you see anything else, then you know at once it is alpa, finite. Suppose you are alone in a room with a hundred mirrors. What will you see? Only yourself—the same self multiplied a hundred times. But if you attain the state of bhūmā, or Brahman, this is just the experience you will have. You will see yourself everywhere—the same Self in all beings. We talk of love and compassion, but how can there be love unless there is a feeling of oneness? When you have this feeling of oneness, then if someone is in pain, you are also in pain. True love is possible only when we realize that ‘you’ and ‘I are one and the same. This is the supreme experience. Once at Dakshineswar two boatmen were having a quarrel and one of them started beating the other. Ramakrishna saw it from a distance and felt as if he were being beaten. Even the marks of the beating were seen on his body. Another day he saw someone walking on some grass, and he felt that the person was stepping on him. When Ramakrishna had throat cancer he could hardly eat a thing. One day some of his disciples went to him and begged him to ask Mother Kali to cure him. Ramakrishna replied that he could not ask such a thing from her, that he depended totally on her will. But the disciples would not let him alone. They pleaded again and again: ‘Do it for our sake.’ They could not bear to see him suffer. Finally Ramakrishna agreed to say something to the Mother. When the disciples came back to him later to ask if he had talked to the Mother, Ramakrishna said, ‘I told Mother that I could not eat because of the pain in my throat, and I asked her to allow me to eat something.’ ‘What did she say?’ they asked. Ramakrishna replied: ‘She showed me all of you, and then she said, “But you are eating through so many mouths.” I was ashamed and could not utter another word.’ There is a story about Ganesh and his mother Parvati. Once when Ganesh was playing with a cat, he became very rough and beat it. Later, when he went to his mother, he noticed wounds all over her body. Ganesh was alarmed and asked, ‘Who has beaten you, Mother?’ Parvati replied: ‘Son, you have done this. You beat the cat, but I am also in the cat. If you hurt the cat you hurt me too.’ The Vedāntic idea is that the same Self is everywhere. It is the same consciousness. In some cases that consciousness is more manifest, and in other cases it is less, but it is the same Self permeating everything. From a tiny atom to the whole cosmos, it is all one. The difference is only in the degree of manifestation. Where there is duality there is conflict, so we must beware of the finite. We must beware of limiting ourselves to our own body. That is the small ‘I’. The body will die, and you think you will die. But if you are one with bhūmā, you are immortal. Nārada is a very intelligent person. He asks: ‘There is this bhūmā. But who or what supports it?’ Sanatkumāra replies: ‘Bhūmā is self-sufficient. It supports itself. In fact, there is nothing besides bhūmā to speak of supporting or not supporting. There is just one. If there are two things, then only does the question of supporting arise.’
- Go-aśvam, cows and horses
- iha, in this world
- mahimā iti ācakṣate, are called the glory
- hasti-hiraṇyam, elephants and gold
- dāsa-bhāryam, servants and wives
- kṣetrāṇi āyatanāni iti, farmlands and houses
- aham evam na bravīmi, I am not speaking of this kind [of glory]
- anyaḥ hi anyasmin pratiṣṭhitaḥ iti, something depending on something else
- bravīmi iti ha uvāca, this is what I am saying. Iti caturviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the twenty-fourth section.
note In those days in India if you had cattle and other animals, you were considered very rich because they supported you. They were a source of income. So also if you had gold or fields or other property. In this type of situation, there are two separate things—you, the owner, and the things you own. One supports the other. But if there is only one, then the question of supporting does not arise. Who supports whom? So Sanatkumāra tells Nārada, bhūmā is everything. It is one without a second, and it is self-sufficient. Section Twenty-five
- Saḥ, that [bhūmā]
- eva adhastāt, is down below
- saḥ upariṣṭāt, that is up above
- saḥ paścāt, that is behind
- saḥ purastāt, that is in front
- saḥ dakṣiṇataḥ, that is to the right
- saḥ uttarataḥ, that is to the left
- saḥ eva idam sarvam iti, it is truly all this
- atha ataḥ, next
- ahaṅkāra ādeśaḥ eva, the instruction regarding one’s own identity
- aham eva adhastāt, I am down below
- aham upariṣṭāt, I am up above
- aham paścāt, I am behind
- aham purastāt, I am in front
- aham dakṣiṇataḥ, I am to the right
- aham uttarataḥ, I am to the left
- aham eva idam sarvam iti, I am truly all this.
note Our Self is the Self of all. Our Self is in the sky, in the air, in the water, in the tiny insect, and in the biggest animal. It is all-embracing, everywhere, in every being, in everything. It is Existence itself. Imagine that the whole cosmos is a vast ocean, and in that ocean there are waves. Some of the waves are huge and some of them are very small, maybe only ripples. But it is the same water. Similarly, there is one Existence, but we see diversity. This diversity, however, is only in name and form. It is not real. Underlying the diversity is one Existence, and that Existence is our own Self. This is not just an intellectual theory. There are great saints who have actually experienced this. They say, suppose you throw a stone into the middle of a lake. Immediately the water surrounding the spot where you have thrown the stone becomes disturbed. Then gradually you discover that the entire mass of water is disturbed. Similarly, if someone is in pain somewhere, then you also are in pain. You may have noticed that if you play a stringed instrument in a room where there are other stringed instruments, you will find that sounds are coming from the other instruments. The sound vibration from one will affect the others. Swami Vivekananda had many such experiences. Once one of his brother disciples found him pacing back and forth outside his room at midnight. The brother disciple asked Swamiji why he was not sleeping, and Swamiji replied that he had suddenly woken up with the feeling that something terrible had just happened, that a great calamity had just happened somewhere. The next day when the newspaper arrived people found that there had been a terrible volcanic eruption that night in a certain place, and many people had died. A great person has that kind of sensitivity, because he feels that there is just one heart, one mind, one consciousness. What you think, he thinks. If you are suffering, he can at once see it when he looks at you. You may ask, ‘Is it possible for me to identify myself with everything?’ The scriptures say, ‘Yes, it is possible.’ Now you think of yourself as small, as alpa. You think you are an individual and separate from others. But when you identify yourself with the cosmos, you become bhūmā, infinite. Swamiji once said, suppose you are a small drop of water in a cloud in the sky. Then one day it rains. You start falling towards the ocean, and you cry, ‘Oh, I am lost, I am lost!’ But what happens when you reach the ocean? You are no longer a tiny drop. You are one with the vast ocean. It is the sense of separateness that makes us feel we are small. Then we become jealous of each other or afraid of others, and because of this we are unhappy. Vedānta says, when you have the feeling that you are one with the whole cosmos, that you alone exist, then you will be happy. It is all a question of how you think of yourself. The Upaniṣad says here to think: ‘I am below. I am above. I am everywhere. I am everything.’ Many people have a hint of this experience at some time or other in their life. For instance, you may have seen someone in terrible pain. Maybe you didn’t even know the person, yet at the very sight of that person’s suffering, you felt that you were suffering. Though physically you were not affected, still you felt the pain. A human being’s development towards this sense of oneness is the sign of real progress. This is not to deny differences among us, however. Of course there are differences. Differences are accepted. They are natural. We would not like uniformity. But the differences are only minor details. Now we may think, ‘I am short and that person is tall.’ But when we begin to look at things as a whole, then we shall see that we are everywhere. Then we will think: ‘Sometimes I am tall, and sometimes I am short.’ Instead of thinking, ‘Some people are very bright and others are dull,’ we will think: ‘The bright person is me, and the dull person is also me. All are me in different forms.’ As long as you think you are separate from others, you will sometimes be good to others and sometimes be very selfish and not care about others. And even when you do something for others, you will do it only out of a temporary sense of pity. But when you feel your identity with others you never lose that feeling of oneness, and then there is never any room for selfishness. “Aham eva idam sarvam”—I am all this. Idam means ‘this.’ It is this physical world, this empirical world. It is all that you see and feel. It is the world of sense experience. We think we know this world, but in reality we do not. You may say something is hard, but to me it may be soft. You may say something looks red, but I may see it as orange. This is the nature of this world. No two people have the same experience of it. Yet, the Upaniṣad says, behind this world of sense experience is bhūmā. It is the same Self everywhere, in different forms and with different names.
- Atha ataḥ, next
- ātmādeśaḥ eva, the instruction regarding the Self
- ātmā eva adhastāt, the Self is down below
- ātmā upariṣṭāt, the Self is up above
- ātmā paścāt, the Self is behind
- ātmā purastāt, the Self is in front
- ātmā dakṣiṇataḥ, the Self is to the right
- ātmā uttarataḥ, the Self is to the left
- ātmā eva idam sarvam iti, the Self is truly all this
- saḥ vai eṣaḥ, that [worshipper] who
- evam paśyan, sees in this way
- evam manvānaḥ, thinks in this way
- evam vijānan, knows in this way
- ātmaratiḥ, has love for the Self
- ātmakrīḍah, sports with the Self
- ātmamithunaḥ, enjoys the company of the Self
- ātmānandaḥ, has joy in the Self
- saḥ svarāṭ bhavati, he becomes supreme [a sovereign]
- sarveṣu lokeṣu, in all the worlds
- tasya kāmacāraḥ bhavati, he can go about as he likes
- atha, then
- ye, those who
- anyatha ataḥ vidaḥ, know otherwise
- anyarājānaḥ, are under the control of others
- te kṣayyalokāḥ bhavanti, they live in worlds that are not permanent
- sarveṣu lokeṣu, in all the worlds
- teṣām akāmacāraḥ bhavati, he cannot move about as he likes. Iti pañcaviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the twenty-fifth section.
note The Upaniṣad says, you see yourself in all that exists. When you have the experience, ‘I am infinite, I am one with all,’ then there is no duality. You enjoy your own Self. Normally we look for friends so we can enjoy ourselves in their company. But when you realize bhūmā, you don’t need any companions. You know that everything is within and not outside. Now we are so dependent on things outside. If someone is harsh to us we feel bad, and if someone is good to us we are happy. Similarly, we may be addicted to cigarettes and are miserable if we don’t get them. So our happiness always depends on external conditions. Where is our freedom? This is not freedom. We are simply beggars. A free soul, however, is always happy within himself. He is not bothered by external conditions. Sri Ramakrishna was not dependent on anyone or anything. Once some servants came to him and told him that the owner of the temple garden said he must leave immediately. Sri Ramakrishna at once got up and started walking out of the temple compound, just as he was. He did not stop to pack anything or take a second look at his room. He simply started leaving. The owner happened to see him leaving, and asked: ‘Sir, why are you leaving? I asked your nephew to leave, not you.’ Then Sri Ramakrishna replied, ‘Oh, you don’t want me to leave?’ and he immediately turned around and went back to his room as if nothing had happened. Suppose you enjoy a certain kind of music, but another person does not care for it. Why does this happen? It is because that music evokes in you a certain feeling or emotion which it does not evoke in the other person. The enjoyment is not in the music. It is within you. So also, sometimes you may sit and daydream, thinking of a pilgrimage you took in the Himalayas long back. You go on thinking and enjoying the memories even though the Himalayas are no longer in front of you. The enjoyment is totally within you. So when you realize your Self, you no longer need the world outside. In fact, it no longer exists for you. You alone exist. Some people may say this is selfishness, but it is not. Rather, your self has expanded. It has become all-embracing. It has become bhūmā. ‘Saḥ svarāṭ bhavati—he becomes a sovereign.’ When you attain sovereignty you no longer identify yourself with the body. You feel yourself to be one with the entire cosmos. This is the goal of life—to realize that there is only One which appears as many, with different names and forms. Section Twenty-six
- Tasya ha vai etasya, of a person like this
- evam paśyataḥ, who sees in this way
- evam manvānasya, who thinks in this way
- evam vijānataḥ, who has such knowledge
- ātmataḥ prāṇaḥ, life [comes] from the Self
- ātmataḥ āśā, hope [comes] from the Self
- ātmataḥ smaraḥ, memory [comes] from the Self
- ātmataḥ ākāśaḥ, space [comes] from the Self
- ātmataḥ tejaḥ, fire [comes] from the Self
- ātmataḥ āpaḥ, water [comes] from the Self
- ātmataḥ āvirbhāva-tirobhāvau, birth and death [come] from the Self
- ātmataḥ annam, food [comes] from the Self
- ātmataḥ balam, strength [comes] from the Self
- ātmataḥ vijñānam, knowledge in depth [comes] from the Self
- ātmataḥ dhyānam, meditation [comes] from the Self
- ātmataḥ cittam, the heart [comes] from the Self
- ātmataḥ saṅkalpaḥ, resolution [comes] from the Self
- ātmataḥ manaḥ, the mind [comes] from the Self
- ātmataḥ vāk, speech [comes] from the Self
- ātmataḥ nāma, name [comes] from the Self
- ātmataḥ mantrāḥ, the mantras [comes] from the Self
- ātmataḥ karmāṇi, all work [comes] from the Self
- ātmataḥ eva idam sarvam iti, all this [comes] from the Self.
note Just as waves rise from and fall back on the ocean, so also all these things—prāṇa, hope, memory, birth, death, happiness, unhappiness, etc.—come from the Self and go back to the Self. They are all within our own self. Once we know the Self, the phenomenal world no longer exists for us.
- Tat eṣaḥ ślokaḥ, here is a verse on the subject
- paśyaḥ, a person who sees thus [i.e., who knows the Self]
- mṛtyum na paśyati, does not see death
- na rogam, nor disease
- na uta duḥkhatam, nor suffering
- paśyaḥ, a person who sees thus
- sarvam ha paśyati, sees everything
- sarvam āpnoti, he obtains all
- sarvaśaḥ, in every way. Saḥ ekadhā bhavati, he is one [before the creation]
- tridhā bhavati, [and] he is in three forms [fire, water, and earth]
- pañcadhā, in five forms
- saptadhā, in seven forms
- ca eva navadhā, and in nine forms
- punaḥ ca, also
- ekādaśaḥ smṛtaḥ, he is thought of as having eleven forms
- śatam ca daśa ca, and one hundred and ten forms
- ekaḥ ca sahasrāṇi ca viṃśatiḥ, and also one thousand and twenty forms
- āhāra-śuddhau, if the food is pure
- sattva-śuddhiḥ, the mind is pure
- sattva-śuddhau, if the mind is pure
- dhruvā smṛtiḥ, the memory is strong and steady
- smṛtilambhe, when the memory is good
- sarva-granthīnām, from all bondages
- vipramokṣaḥ, one is freed
- tasmai, to him [to Nārada]
- mṛditakaṣāyāya, who was free from all impurities
- bhagavān sanatkumāraḥ, revered Sanatkumāra
- tamasaḥ pāram, beyond darkness
- darśayati, showed
- tam, him [Sanatkumāra]
- skanda iti ācakṣate, they refer to as ‘Skanda’ [the wise]
- tam, him [Sanatkumāra]
- skanda iti ācakṣate, they refer to as ‘Skanda’ [the wise]. Iti ṣaḍviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the twenty-sixth section. Iti chāndogyopaniṣadi saptamaḥ adhyāyaḥ, here ends the seventh chapter of the Chāndogya Upaniṣad.
note But how do you attain this knowledge? You have to have pure food. Pure food makes the body and mind pure, and you are then able to keep the mind under control. By controlling the mind, you are able to go beyond ignorance and become free from bondage. Like Sanatkumāra, you earn the title ‘Skanda,’ the wise one.
- Atha, next
- asmin brahmapure, in this city of Brahman [i.e., the body]
- yat idam daharam, this small
- puṇḍarīkam, lotus
- veśma, an abode [i.e., the heart]
- asmin, in this
- daharaḥ antarākāśaḥ, is a small space
- tasmin yat antaḥ, within that
- tat anveṣṭavyam, one must seek that
- tat vāva vijijñāsitavyam iti, one must earnestly desire to know that.
note The scriptures try to help us know our real identity, because when we know that, we know we are all one with Brahman. But first we must have a pure mind. The mind becomes purified by living a good life and by practising self-restraint and truthfulness. It is in the pure mind that the Self reveals itself. The heart is said to be like a lotus, and in that lotus resides the Self—as if this is the home of the Self.
- Cet, if
- tam, to him [the teacher]
- brūyuḥ, [the disciples] ask
- asmin brahmapure, in this city of Brahman [i.e., the body]
- yat idam daharam, this small
- puṇḍarīkam, lotus
- veśma, an abode [i.e., the heart]
- asmin, in this
- daharaḥ antarākāśaḥ, is a small space
- kim tat atra, what is it that is there
- yat anveṣṭavyam, which one must seek
- yat vāva vijijñāsitavyam iti, which one must earnestly desire to know
- saḥ brūyāt, he [the teacher] should reply.
note The disciples wanted to know what was within the heart. The teacher had said there is a space there. But is there anything within this space? If so, is it something very special? Why is it necessary that they should know about it? They asked, ‘Should we investigate it?’ The scriptures say, ‘Yes, investigate it.’
- Yāvān, as much as
- ayam ākāśaḥ, this space
- tāvān, so that much
- eṣaḥ antaḥ-hṛdaye ākāśe, this space inside the heart
- ubhe, both
- asmin, in this
- dyāvā-pṛthivī, heaven and earth
- antaḥ eva samāhite, are resting deep within
- ubhau agniḥ ca vāyuḥ ca, both fire and air
- sūryā-candramasau ubhau, both the sun and the moon
- vidyut, lightning
- nakṣatrāṇi, the stars
- yat ca, whatever
- asya, of it [of the self with the body]
- iha, in this world
- asti, exists
- yat ca na asti, or whatever does not exist
- sarvam tat, all that
- asmin samāhitam iti, is resting within.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Cet, if
- tam, to him [the teacher]
- brūyuḥ, [the disciples] ask
- asmin brahmapure, in this city of Brahman [i.e., the body]
- idam sarvam cet, if all this
- samāhitam, are lying
- sarvāṇi ca bhūtāni, and all things
- sarve ca kāmaḥ, and all desires [that people may have]
- yadā, when
- etat, this [body]
- jarā, old age
- āpnoti vā, attains
- pradhvaṃsate vā, or it perishes
- kim, what
- tataḥ, then
- atiśiṣyate iti, remains?
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Saḥ, he [the teacher]
- brūyāt, will say
- asya, its [the body’s]
- jarayā, by old age
- etat, this [i.e., the space within the heart—the Self]
- na jīryati, is not affected
- vadhena asya na hanyate, nor does it meet death by being killed
- etat, this
- satyam brahmapuram, city of Brahman is real
- asmin, in this
- kāmāḥ, all desires
- samāhitāḥ, are contained
- eṣaḥ ātmā, this Self
- apahatapāpmā, is free from all sins [or, sorrows]
- vijaraḥ, free from old age
- vimṛtyuḥ, deathless
- viśokaḥ, free from bereavement
- vijighatsaḥ, without hunger
- apipāsaḥ, without thirst
- satyakāmaḥ, love of Truth
- satyasaṅkalpaḥ, committed to Truth
- yathā, like
- hi eva iha, in this world
- prajāḥ, people
- anu-āviśanti, come and go
- yathā-anuśāsanam, according to the law of the country
- yam yam, whatever
- antam, province
- abhikāmaḥ bhavanti, they desire
- yam janapadam, any village
- yam kṣetrabhāgam, [or] any field
- tam tam eva, that very [place]
- upajīvanti, they enjoy.
note The idea is that an ignorant person may get whatever he wants as the fruit of his actions, but he remains bound.
- Tat yathā, just as
- iha, in this world
- karmajitaḥ, results acquired according to one’s efforts
- lokaḥ, this world
- kṣīyate, perishes
- evam eva, similarly
- amutra
- in the other world
- puṇyajitaḥ, what is earned by meritorious work [such as performing the Agnihotra and other sacrifices]
- lokaḥ, heaven [or other worlds]
- kṣīyate, perishes
- tat ye, those
- iha, in this world
- ātmānam ananuvidya, without knowing the Self
- etān ca satyān kāmān, and these worthwhile things
- vrajanti, leave [this world]
- teṣām, for them
- sarveṣu lokeṣu, in all the worlds
- akāmacāraḥ bhavati, there is bondage
- atha, but
- ye, those who
- iha, in this world
- ātmānam anuvidya, knowing the self
- etān ca satyān kāmān, and these worthwhile things
- vrajanti, leave this world
- teṣām, for them
- sarveṣu lokeṣu, in all the worlds
- kāmacāraḥ bhavati, they are free to go anywhere. Iti prathamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the first section.
- Yadi, if
- saḥ, he [who has realized the Self and is free to go where he wants]
- pitṛlokakāmaḥ bhavati, wishes for a place in the world of fathers
- pitaraḥ sam-ut-tiṣṭhanti, the fathers appear
- asya saṅkalpāt eva, through his wish
- tena pitṛlokena sampannaḥ, joining his forefathers in that world
- mahīyate, he becomes great.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Atha, then
- yadi, if
- mātṛlokakāmaḥ bhavati, he wishes for a place in the world of mothers
- mātaraḥ sam-ut-tiṣṭhanti, the mothers appear
- asya. saṅkalpāt eva, through his wish
- tena mātṛlokena sampannaḥ, joining the mothers in that world
- mahīyate, he becomes great.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Atha, then
- yadi, if
- bhrātṛlokakāmaḥ bhavati, he wishes for a place in the world of brothers
- bhrātaraḥ sam-ut-tiṣṭhanti, brothers appear
- asya saṅkalpāt eva, through his wish
- tena bhrātṛlokena sampannaḥ, joining brothers in that world
- mahīyate, he becomes great.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Atha, then
- yadi, if
- svasṛlokakāmaḥ bhavati, he wishes for a place in the world of sisters
- svasāraḥ sam-ut-tiṣṭhanti, sisters appear
- asya saṅkalpāt eva, through his wish
- tena svasṛlokena sampannaḥ, joining the sisters in that world
- mahīyate, he becomes great.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Atha, then
- yadi, if
- sakhilokakāmaḥ bhavati, he wishes for a place in the world of friends
- sakhāyaḥ sam-ut-tiṣṭhanti, friends appear
- asya saṅkalpāt eva, through his wish
- tena sakhilokena sampannaḥ, joining friends in that world
- mahīyate, he becomes great.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Atha, then
- yadi, if
- gandhamālyalokakāmaḥ bhavati, he wishes for a world of fragrant flower garlands
- gandhamālye sam -ut-tiṣṭhataḥ, the fragrant flower garlands appear
- asya saṅkalpāt eva, through his wish
- tena gandhamālyalokena sampannaḥ, by having fragrant flower garlands in that world
- mahīyate, he becomes great.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Atha, then
- yadi, if
- annapānalokakāmaḥ bhavati, he wishes for a world of food and drink
- annapāne sam-ut-tiṣṭhataḥ, food and drink appear
- asya saṅkalpāt eva, through his wish
- tena annapānalokena sampannaḥ, by having food and drink in that world
- mahīyate, he becomes great.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Atha, then
- yadi, if
- gītavāditralokakāmaḥ bhavati, he wishes for a world of music
- gītavāditre sam-ut-tiṣṭhataḥ, music comes
- asya saṅkalpāt eva, through his wish
- tena gītavāditralokena sampannaḥ, by having music in that world
- mahīyate, he, becomes great.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Atha, then
- yadi, if
- strīlokakāmaḥ bhavati, he wishes for the company of women
- striyaḥ sam-ut-tiṣṭhanti,
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Yam yam antam abhikāmaḥ bhavati, whatever province he wishes for
- yam kāmam kāmayate, [and] whatever good thing he wishes to have
- saḥ sam-ut-tiṣṭhati, that appears
- asya saṅkalpāt eva, through his wish
- tena sampannaḥ, by acquiring that
- mahīyate, he becomes great. Iti dvitīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the second section.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Te ime, all these
- satyaḥ kāmāḥ, true desires
- anṛtāpidhānāḥ, with a false look
- teṣām satyānām satām, of those true desires [resting in the Self]
- anṛtam apidhānam, have a false look
- yaḥ yaḥ hi asya, whoever of one’s [relatives]
- itaḥ, from this world
- praiti, leaves
- tam, he
- iha, here [in this world]
- darśanāya na labhate, cannot be seen again.
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Atha, further
- ye asya jīvāḥ ca, those of his [i.e., the relatives of one who knows the Self] who are alive
- ye ca pretāḥ, and those who are dead
- yat ca anyat, and whatever else
- icchan, one wishes for
- na labhate, [but] does not get
- sarvam tat, all that
- atra, here
- gatvā, going
- vindate, one gets
- atra hi, for here
- asya, his
- ete satyāḥ kāmāḥ, these true desires
- anṛtāpidhānaḥ, with a false look
- tat yathā, as
- akṣetrajñāḥ nihitam, those who have no idea about what is hidden underground
- api hiraṇyanidhim, though precious as gold
- upari-upari, again and again
- sañcarantaḥ, going over it
- na vindeyaḥ, do not get it
- evam eva, in this way
- imāḥ sarvāḥ prajāḥ, all these beings
- ahaḥ ahaḥ, daily
- gacchantyaḥ, going
- etam brahmalokam, to this world of Brahman
- na vindanti, do not attain it
- hi, because
- anṛtena, by falsehood [i.e., ignorance]
- pratyūḍhaḥ, they are covered.
note Inside the heart is the whole universe. When we have suṣupti, dreamless sleep, we are then one with Bṛahman and one with the whole world. We are not conscious of it, however, because of our ignorance.
- Saḥ vai eṣaḥ, it is this
- ātmā hṛdi, the Self in the heart
- tasya etat eva niruktam, this is the meaning of it
- hṛdi + ayam iti, ‘it is in the heart’
- tasmāt, therefore
- hṛdayam, it is [known as] the heart
- evam vit, one who knows this
- ahaḥ ahaḥ vai, every day
- svargam lokam eti, goes to the heavenly world.
note Where is the Self? It is within. Normally when we think of God, we look up in the sky or we go to a temple, thinking he is there. But in reality God is within us, in our own heart. The heart is the place where we experience the Self. It is the seat of Self-realization. So here the Upaniṣad says, for this reason we worship our own heart as Brahman. Svarga loka normally means the ‘heavenly world.’ But here it means that we go into our own Self. We become one with the Self. The word hṛdayam means hṛdi plus ayam. Hṛdi means ‘in the heart,’ and ayam means ‘this’—that is, this Self, the Cosmic Self, which is the source of everything, is within the heart.
- Atha, then
- yaḥ eṣaḥ samprasādaḥ, this [Self] which is the embodiment of happiness [from dreamless sleep]
- asmāt śarīrāt samutthāya, emerging from the body
- param jyotiḥ upasampadya, attaining the highest light
- svena rūpeṇa abhiniṣpadyate, he assumes his real nature
- eṣaḥ ātmā, this is the Self
- iti ha uvāca, he [the teacher] said
- etat amṛtam, this is immortal
- abhayam, fearless
- etat brahma iti, this is Brahman
- tasya ha vai etasya brahmaṇaḥ nāma satyam iti, this Brahman is [also] called ‘Truth.’
note When the self leaves the body during deep sleep, it assumes its real nature. What is that nature? Does it have any form? Not exactly. It attains its real nature as light. Knowledge is very often associated with light. We sometimes repeat the prayer, ‘Tamasaḥ mā jyotiḥ gamaya—lead us from darkness to light.’ That is to say, lead us from the darkness of ignorance to the light of knowledge. When we are attached to the body, we are always trying to enjoy more and more sense objects. For that reason we are always disturbed and unhappy. There is no peace or calmness in us—no serenity. If you look at an image of Buddha, what do you see? His face is calm and peaceful. If you look at the face of any god or goddess you see that peace and serenity. That serenity is our very nature, but when we are attached to the body we rarely feel it. Sometimes we smile, but that smile often signifies more pain than pleasure. It is superficial. It does not come from within. Indian scriptures remind us again and again that everything is within. Strength, knowledge, joy—it is all within us. When we know our true nature, we are no longer attached to the body, and it is nothing for us to leave it behind. Once Sarada Devi was in a state of ecstasy and saw herself outside her body. She thought to herself: ‘How can I go back to such a body?’ For people like her, leaving the body is a matter of choice. They can assume a body or reject it as they like. After a long time she persuaded herself to return to the body. When you can overcome the delusion that you are the body, you can reject it. You then get back your true nature, as it were. You realize you are free, full of bliss, and enlightened. You are then immortal (amṛtam) and fearless (abhayām). You have conquered fear. So long as you feel you are the body, you have fear. One day you may fall sick and die—that fear is always haunting you. When you know you are Brahman, however, you know you will never, die. The Upaniṣad says Brahman is named satya, Truth. Truth is that which was true in the past, is now true in the present, and will be true in the future. This Self is Truth itself.
- Tāni ha vai etāni trīṇi akṣarāṇi, these are the three syllables
- sa tī yam iti, ‘sa’, ‘tī’, and ‘yam’
- tat yat sat, that which is ‘sat’ [i.e., ‘sa’]
- tat amṛtam, that is immortal
- atha, then
- yat ti, what is ‘ti’
- tat martyam, that is mortal
- atha, then
- yat yam, what is ‘yam’
- tena ubhe yacchati, both are controlled by it
- yat anena ubhe yacchati, as both are controlled by it [i.e., by ‘yam’]
- tasmāt, therefore
- yam, it is ‘yam’
- evamvit, one who knows thus
- ahaḥ ahaḥ, daily
- vai svargam lokam eti, goes to the heavenly world [in deep sleep]. Iti tṛtīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the third section.
note The Upaniṣad says there are three syllables that make up the word satyam—sa, tī, and yam. Sa stands for sat. Sat is derived from the root as, which means ‘existence.’ It is Existence Absolute, eternal. Here the Upaniṣad says, sa is that which is immortal and ti is that which is mortal. We have both immortal and mortal aspects to us. At the transcendental level we are immortal, but at the empirical, or phenomenal, level we are mortal. At the transcendental level there is no ‘I’ or ‘you’. There is no duality at all. There is only one. Where does this universe come from? It comes from that which is immortal. That is to say, the immortal becomes the mortal. The Absolute becomes the relative. The syllable yam stands for saṃyama, to control. It is the Self that controls both the relative and the Absolute. Similarly, one who has realized his true nature has control of both the transcendental and the relative. He is always the same, everywhere—whether in the transcendental world, in samādhi, which is here called sat, or in the phenomenal world, ti, the world that “Evamvit ahaḥ ahaḥ svargam lokam eti”—one who knows this goes every day into heaven. That is to say, when we are in deep sleep we are in svargaloka, the world of peace. We are then one with the Self, resting on the Self. It’s like a bird resting on its nest. It is happy and safe. But sometimes the bird has to go about after food. Similarly, when we wake up we have to be involved in this empirical world. Then there is diversity—no more unity. Śaṅkara says that when even the syllables of satyam, which is the name of Brahman, are so significant, how great then must be the state that the word signifies. Similarly, even the idea ‘I am Brahman’ is so inspiring—what to speak of having the experience itself. Suppose you have been hearing for a long time about Benaras but you have never been there. You have some idea about it and would love to go there. Even the word Benaras excites you. How thrilled you feel then when you at last get there. From our experience of deep sleep we have some idea of what Brahman is like. We know, even from this brief experience, how wonderful it is to be one with the Self. But when we are firmly established in Brahman and our ignorance is gone, what a wonderful thing it is. So, as Śaṅkara says, we have to go on meditating that we are one with Brahman, and gradually this meditation will lead us to the experience itself. The experience is what we need. We have to have that. Swami Vivekananda used to say that religion is realization. Suppose we go on talking about Brahman. This may help us and inspire us. It may even give us some impetus, but that’s all. We must not stop there. Our goal is the experience.
- Atha, next
- yaḥ ātmā, that Self
- saḥ, it
- setuḥ, [is like] a dam
- vidhṛtiḥ, the support
- eṣām lokānām, of these worlds
- asambhedāya, for their protection [so that they may remain separate from one another]
- ahorātre, day and night
- etam setum na tarataḥ, cannot cross over this dam
- na jarā, nor old age
- na mṛtyuḥ, nor death
- na śokaḥ, nor bereavement
- na sukṛtam, nor good actions
- na duṣkṛtam, nor bad actions
- sarve
note In this world there are so many varieties of things, and each has its role to play. Human beings have their role to play; animals have theirs, and plants have theirs. The sun rises at a certain time. It never fails. Each thing is in its place, doing what it’s supposed to be doing. There should be no mix-up. If there were a mix-up, there would be chaos. Who supervises all this so that everything is in its proper place? It is the Self. The word setu usually means ‘bridge,’ but here it means a dam. Suppose you have a large river and you want to separate the water for some reason or other. You then erect a dam. This keeps the two sides apart and prevents them from mixing. Similarly, the Upaniṣad says, in this phenomenal world the Self acts as a dam so that everything functions as it should, without getting mixed up. The Self stands as a barrier, keeping each thing in its place. It is never failing. Day and night, sorrow, sin, the castes and stages of life, material things—animate or inanimate—whatever there is in the world of diversity, It is the Self that creates all the diversity—good, bad, rich, poor, educated, ignorant. There are so many kinds of people and so many kinds of plants, animals, and objects. The Self not only manifests all this diversity—it also maintains it. It does not want the diversity to disappear, because this diversity is necessary for the phenomenal world to go on. But these divisions do not touch the Self. Nothing can affect it. It is the Master, controlling everything, but it is not controlled by anything. Mṛtyu (death), for instance, is so powerful. Everyone is subject to death, but it cannot overcome this dam, the Self. No blemish or impurity can even approach the Self. It is never affected by the good or bad that exists in the world. It is always the same—constant and pure. The Self is also called here brahma-loka. The Self, the ātman, is Brahman. When you look at the world, you say, ‘Sarvam khalu idam brahma’—all this is Brahman. When you look inside, within you, you say, ‘Aham brahmāsmi’—I am Brahman, or ‘Ayam ātmā brahma’—this self is Brahman. It is the same Self, inside and outside. Śaṅkara says that if you know you are the Self, you are not affected by anything. But how do you realize the Self? Śaṅkara says you realize it by brahmacarya, by continence and self-control.
- Tasmāt, this is why
- vai etam setum tīrtvā, when crossing this dam
- andhaḥ san, if a person is blind
- anandhaḥ bhavati, he behaves as if he is not blind
- viddhaḥ san, if a person is hurt
- aviddhaḥ bhavati, he behaves as if he is not hurt
- upatāpī san, if a person is mentally upset
- anupatāpī bhavati, he behaves as if he is not mentally upset
- tasmāt, this is why
- vai etam setum tīrtvā, when crossing this dam
- api naktam, even night
- ahaḥ eva abhiniṣpadyate, looks like day
- hi eva eṣaḥ brahmalokaḥ, for this Brahmaloka
- sakṛt vibhātaḥ, is always manifest.
note Again and again the Upaniṣad stresses knowledge of the Self. Why? This knowledge is necessary for us to live in this world; otherwise we are not safe. We are vulnerable to all the forces of this phenomenal world. These forces may sweep us off our feet. Sri Ramakrishna used to say, ‘Tie the knowledge of Advaita in the corner of your cloth and then go wherever you like.’ That is, once we know we are the Self, nothing can affect us. We are like that dam, without any change. A person may be a householder or a monk—it doesn’t matter. He is safe. Here, the Upaniṣad says, you may be blind, but you do not feel you are blind. The blindness does not affect you. It affects the body, but you know you are not the body. Similarly, you may have some disease or illness in the body, but you do not feel you are ill. If you are conscious of the body then you will also be conscious of its limitations. Blindness is a limitation, so you will be conscious that you are blind. But the pure Self is not conditioned by anything. If you feel you are the Self you are not subject to the limitations of the body. This applies to the mind also. Swami Turiyananda would now and then get carbuncles that would have to be removed by surgery. He would not let the doctor give him any anaesthetic, however. He would ask the doctor to give him a few minutes’ warning, and he would meditate for a while. Then he would tell the doctor he was ready. The carbuncle might be large and require a long time for the surgery, but Swami Turiyananda would not show any sign When Swami Shivananda was old he suffered from asthma. Sometimes he had no sleep at all during the night, but in the morning people would come and find him very cheerful. They would ask him, ‘Sir, how are you?’ and he would smile and say, ‘I am fine.’ Then he would say: ‘Look, if you are asking about the body, then I will say this body is old and diseased. But by the grace of my Master, I know I am not this body, so I am not affected by it.’ Suppose there is something wrong with the shirt you are wearing. You would not think there is something wrong with you. You know you are independent of the shirt. Similarly, your body is just a covering, as it were. You are independent of your body. The example the Upaniṣad gives of the dam is very apt. A dam stands supreme. Nothing can affect it. Similarly, if you know your true nature, you will stand firm like a rock even when waves of sorrow come and try to overwhelm you. Disease, poverty, humiliation—all kinds of misfortunes may come, but they will all be forced back without making any impression on you, as if there is a dam that stands between the world and your Self. The scriptures are constantly reminding us that this is what we are missing. Why else should we care for Self-knowledge? All this is just to encourage us and to invite us to taste the bliss of Self-knowledge. Lots of people say: ‘What do you mean by Self-knowledge? I know who I am. What else should I know?’ But do they know they are not the body? Do they know they cannot be affected by old age, disease, or death, or by poverty or misfortune? Most people are slaves of their circumstances. Only one who knows his real Self is free. Most of our external conditions cannot be changed. They are not under our control. If it is summer it will be hot. Can you change it? No, but you can change yourself. Similarly, with other circumstances in our lives. Our attitude should be: ‘Well, I don’t care. I will face this problem. It can never affect my real Self.’ When you have this attitude, you know you will not be cowed by adversities and external circumstances. This is the message of the Upaniṣads and also of the Gītā. In the Gītā Kṛṣṇa again and again talks about the sthitā-prajña, the person of steady wisdom, who is firmly rooted in Self-knowledge, and whom nothing can sway. When Alexander the Great came to India, he met a yogī and was so impressed with him that he wanted to bring him to Greece. Alexander tried in many ways to tempt the yogī to go to Greece, but nothing worked. Then Alexander threatened to kill him. The yogī just laughed and said: ‘You have never told such a lie. You cannot kill me. You may kill the body, but I am not the body. I am the Self.’ The Upaniṣad says that when you know the Self, night and day are the same to you. It may appear to be night to others, but for you there is always light. You always have inner light. You always see yourself as Brahman. Śaṅkara says that the word Brahmaloka here means the state of Brahman. Whether you are blind or not, whether you are healthy or not, you are always conscious that you are Brahman. Not for a moment do you forget it.
- Tat ye, those who
- era etain brahmalokam, this Brahmaloka
- brahmacaryeṇa, through the practice of brahmacarya
- anuvindanti, attain
- teṣām era, for such people
- eṣaḥ brahmalokaḥ, is this Brahmaloka
- teṣām, for them
- sarveṣu lokeṣu, to all the worlds
- kāmacāraḥ bhavati, they can go as they like. Iti caturthaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the fourth section.
note There is a wonderful statement in one of the scriptures that says scholars talk about sweets but they never taste them. That is to say, the scholars talk about things they know nothing about. The scholars, it says, get only takra, whey. But the yogīs are the ones who taste the kṣīra, the thickened, sweet milk. Unless you eat the kṣīra, how do you know what it is like? Similarly, you may talk very well about Brahman. What you say may sound very good. But unless you have the experience of Brahman, you can’t understand what it is like. Here the Upaniṣad says, how do you get this experience? Through brahmacarya, self-control. The word brahmacarya means brahma carati—that is, one who is always at the level of Brahman. The scriptures say there are two paths open to us—śreyas, the good, and preyas, the pleasant, the attractive. One who practises brahmacarya will reflect on these two and say: ‘I shall not accept that which is merely attractive. I shall only have śreyas, that which is the highest.’ Religion does not come by magic. It comes through self-discipline, and that means a lot of hard work, sweat, and tears. You have to yearn for it and cry for it, saying, ‘Oh when am I going to succeed?’ Sri Ramakrishna would often have no sleep at night and no food for the whole day. Sometimes someone would have to force food into his mouth in order to get him to eat. He had no body consciousness. Moreover, he would never accept money. The Upaniṣad says that if you practise brahmacarya you are free and everything is at your disposal. But, like Ramakrishna, your attitude is: ‘I don’t care for all this. I don’t want anything in all these worlds. I want only Brahman.’ Vedānta says, you are free because you feel you are one with everything. Everything is within your grasp. There is no barrier between you and the world outside. Now there is a barrier. We want to see something because we think it is separate from us, outside of us. But when this idea of separation ceases, we feel we are everything.
- Atha, then
- yat, that which
- yajñaḥ iti ācakṣate, is called ‘yajña’ [sacrifice]
- tat brahmacaryam eva, that is brahmacarya
- hi, because
- yaḥ jñātā, one who knows this
- brahmacaryeṇa, through brahmacarya
- tam vindate, attains that [Brahmaloka]
- atha, then
- yat iṣṭam iti ācakṣate, that which is called ‘iṣṭa’ [worship]
- tat brahmacaryam eva, that is brahmacarya
- hi, because
- brahmacaryeṇa eva, through brahmacarya
- iṣṭvā ātmānam anuvindate, one attains the desired Self.
note Whatever you do with the idea of self-restraint is brahmacarya. Worship is brahmacarya; fasting is brahmacarya; observing silence is brahmacarya. If you retire from the world and go to the forest, that also is brahmacarya. The whole idea is self-restraint. Many people observe silence for a certain length of time. Gandhiji, for instance, would observe absolute silence once a week. Some people may say this is silly, but it’s not. Such observances bring strength. Suppose something has provoked you and you are angry, but through strength of mind you get control of your emotions and you do not retaliate. Similarly, you may feel tempted to do something you shouldn’t and you refuse to do it. Or you may see some good food and feel tempted to eat something that is bad for you, but then you restrain yourself. Self-control in any form is brahmacarya. It is brahmacarya because it ultimately leads to Self-realization and union with Brahman. The Upaniṣad says here that the performance of a sacrifice is also brahmacarya because there are many restrictions imposed on the sacrificer. For instance, he cannot eat until he finishes the worship. The word for sacrifice is yajña, which comes from yaḥ Another reason why worship is called brahmacarya is that the worship is done to a particular deity (iṣṭa), and you must meditate on that deity. That is, you are wishing (iṣ) for that deity, or wishing for your union with that deity. The only way to control the mind is through mental strength. According to Vedānta, strength is not outside. It is within. And self-control is the source of strength. First and foremost is brahmacarya. In fact, it is first and last. It’s not that you practise self-control for some time and then you say, ‘I don’t need to observe this any more.’ No, all through we need self-control. Gradually, however, it becomes natural. By constantly observing truthfulness, you find you are incapable of saying what is immoral or wrong.
- Atha, then
- yat sattrāyaṇam iti ācakṣate, that which is called a ‘Sattrāyaṇa’ [a long sacrifice]
- tat brahmacaryam eva, that is brahmacarya
- hi, for
- brahmacaryeṇa eva, through brahmacarya
- sataḥ, from Sat [i.e., the Cosmic Self]
- ātmanaḥ trāṇam vindate, the individual self attains its liberation [union with the Cosmic Self]
- atha, then
- yat maunam iti ācakṣate, that which is called ‘mauna’ [silence]
- tat brahmacaryam eva, that is brahmacarya
- hi, for
- ātmānam anuvidya, knowing the Self
- brahmacaryeṇa eva, through brahmacarya
- manute, one remains absorbed in thinking.
note There is a particular sacrifice called Sattrāyaṇa, which involves the services of many priests. It is a big affair. The Upaniṣad says it is considered brahmacarya to perform this Sattrāyaṇa sacrifice because through Existence (sat) a person gets protection (trāṇa) for oneself (ātmana). You always feel you are protected by Sat, so you are sure of yourself. In the same way, when you are practising brahmacarya, you know nothing is going to sway you from the vow you have taken. As the Gītā says, the self is your own friend and it is also your own enemy. By practising brahmacarya you will gradually become stronger, and as you grow Mauna, a vow of silence, is also a form of brahmacarya. We all know that when we are doing something serious we like to be quiet. We don’t like to talk much, nor do we like our mind to be restless. We want to be able to fix our mind on what we are doing. Similarly, brahmacarya means that our mind is fixed on Brahman. We are in touch with Brahman, always reminding ourselves that we are not this body and not this mind. We are the Self. We are Brahman. So taking a vow of silence (mauna) means that a person contemplates, or meditates, (manute) on his identity with Brahman. Śaṅkara says that this meditation on Brahman comes after seeking the help of the scriptures and the teacher. Both are necessary. The scriptures give you guidelines, but the teacher takes you by the hand and leads you to the goal.
- Atha, next
- yat anāśakāyanam iti ācakṣate, that which is called ‘anāśakāyana’ [i.e., anāśaka + ayana, the path of fasting]
- tat brahmacaryam eva, that is brahmacarya
- hi, for
- eṣaḥ ātmā, this Self
- yam brahmacaryeṇa anuvindate, which one attains through brahmacarya
- na naśyati, never perishes
- atha, then
- yat araṇyāyanam iti ācakṣate, that which is called ‘araṇyāyana’ [i.e., araṇya + ayana, life in the forest]
- tat brahmacaryam eva, that is brahmacarya
- tat, there
- araḥ ca ha vai ṇyaḥ ca, Ara and Ṇya
- arṇavau, are the two oceans
- brahmaloke, in Brahmaloka
- tṛtīyasyām itaḥ divi, in the third heaven from here [i.e., from the earth]
- tat, [and] there
- airammadīyam saraḥ, is a lake called ‘Airammadīya’
- tat aśvatthaḥ, [and] there is a peepal tree
- somasavanaḥ, which exudes soma juice
- tat aparājitā pūḥ, [and] there is the city Aparājitā [the ‘Invincible’]
- brahmaṇaḥ, belonging to Brahmā
- prabhu-vimitam, built specially by the Lord
- hiraṇmayam, [a canopy] made of gold.
note When you practise brahmacarya, you are always moving on the plane of the Self. Fasting (anāśakāyana) is also called brahmacarya, because when you fast you attain (ayana) the Self that is protected (anāśaka). So also, if you retire to the forest, that is brahmacarya. You say, ‘I’ve had enough of this drama of life,’ so you go and live in the forest to meditate on Brahman. Then finally, by practising continence and self-control, you become transformed and you enter the realm of Brahman. In that world there is a vast lake which is filled with a sweet drink. When you taste that drink you are exhilarated. There is also a banyan tree from which streams of nectar flow. You are now in a world which is not meant for the weak. Only those with strong will-power, who have practised continence and self-control over the years, can enter this world. It is the world of bliss. The Upaniṣad says this is the third world. The first world is this earth, the second is the intermediate region, and the third is this heaven. You are close to Brahman here, and you are happy and enjoy yourself.
- Tat ye, those who
- etau arṇavau, these two oceans
- aram ca ṇyam ca, Ara and Ṇya
- brahmaloke, in Brahmaloka
- anuvindanti, attain
- brahmacaryeṇa, through brahmacarya
- teṣām eva, for them
- eṣaḥ brahmalokaḥ, is this Brahmaloka
- sarveṣu lokeṣu, in all the worlds
- teṣām kāmacāraḥ bhavati, they can go freely. Iti pañcamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the fifth section,
note Brahmaloka is not a physical region like this earth. It is a state of being. It is next to liberation. You are almost free there, but not quite. Vedānta says there are four states. The first and the highest is when a person merges immediately into Brahman at the time of death. The next state is Brahmaloka. After that is Svargaloka, heaven. This is where people who have done good things go after death. They are very happy there, but they must eventually come back to earth. The majority of people, however, fall into the fourth category. After death they must immediately come back to this world. They have desires, and in order to fulfil their desires they must have a body.
- Atha, then
- yaḥ etāḥ hṛdayasya nāḍyaḥ, these veins which are in the heart
- taḥ, they
- piṅgalasya aṇimnaḥ tiṣṭhanti, are filled with a very thin, tawny-coloured liquid
- śuklasya, of white
- nīlasya, of blue
- pītasya, of yellow
- lohitasya iti, of red
- asau vai ādityaḥ, the sun there
- piṅgalaḥ, is tawny
- eṣaḥ śuklaḥ, it is white
- eṣaḥ nīlaḥ, it is blue
- eṣaḥ pītaḥ, it is yellow
- eṣaḥ lohitaḥ, it is red.
note The heart is the place where one meditates on Brahman. The heart is said to be shaped like a lotus bud, and it also has some similarities to the sun. The sun emits its rays, which spread out in all directions. Similarly, the veins arise from the heart and spread out in all directions. These veins are filled with a very thin substance. This substance changes its colour, and along with it, the veins also change colour. Sometimes it is reddish-yellow, sometimes blue, sometimes white, etc. The sun changes its colour likewise.
- Tat yathā, just as
- ātataḥ mahāpathaḥ, a long and broad road
- ubhau grāmau gacchati, connects two villages
- imam ca amum ca, this one with that
- evam eva, like that
- etāḥ ādityasya raśmayaiḥ these rays [which are blue, yellow, etc.] of the sun
- ubhau lokau gacchanti, connect two worlds
- imam ca amum ca, this [the human body] with that [the sun]
- tāḥ, these [rays]
- amuṣmāt ādityāt, from the solar region
- pratāyante, emerge
- āsu nāḍīṣu, into these veins
- sṛptāḥ, enter
- te, these [rays]
- ābhyaḥ nāḍībhyaḥ pratāyante, emerge from the veins
- te amuṣmin āditye sṛptāḥ, [and] they go back into the solar region.
note How are the rays of the sun related to the veins of a human body? The Upaniṣad compares the rays to a big, wide road connecting two villages far away from each other. The rays of the sun go out and enter the veins of a human body, and then they return to the sun.
- Tat yatra
- then when
- etat suptaḥ, a person is sleeping
- samastaḥ, with all the organs quiet
- samprasannaḥ, free from worry
- svapnam na vijānāti, has no dreams
- tadā, then
- āsu nāḍīṣu, into the [blue, yellow, etc.] veins
- sṛptaḥ bhavati, he enters
- tam, him
- na kaścana pāpmā spṛśati, no sin whatever can touch
- hi tadā, for then
- tejasā sampannaḥ bhavati, he is surrounded by the rays of the sun.
note There are two kinds of sleep: one kind in which you have dreams, and another in which you have no dreams. The latter is called suṣupti. In suṣupti all your organs merge within you, and this means you have no contact whatsoever with the world outside. The energy of the sun fills your veins, and your sense organs then remain inactive. As a result, there is no way anything good or bad can touch you or contaminate you. You are therefore in your true state—free and pure.
- Atha, then
- yatra, when
- etat, a person
- abalimānam, weakness
- nītaḥ bhavati, is reduced to
- tam abhitaḥ, around him
- āsīnāḥ, those sitting
- āhaḥ, say
- jānāsi mām jānāsi mām iti, do you know me, do you know me
- saḥ, he
- yāvat, as long as
- asmāt śarīrāt, from this body
- anutkrāntaḥ bhavati, does not leave
- tāvat jānāti, that long he knows [them].
note When a person is dying, he is surrounded by his relatives and friends, and they keep asking him: ‘Do you know me? Do you recognize us?’ As long as there is life left in his body he can recognize them. But when he has left the body, he cannot answer, because the body cannot speak without him.
- Atha, then
- yatra, when
- etat, this [person]
- asmāt śarīrāt, from this body
- utkrāmati, leaves
- atha, then
- etaiḥ eva raśmibhiḥ, by these rays
- ūrdhvam ākramate, is carried upward
- saḥ, he
- om iti, by meditating on Om
- vā ha ut mīyate, he surely goes up
- vā, or [i.e., otherwise not]
- yāvat, in the time that
- manaḥ kṣipyet, the mind moves
- tāvat, in that time
- saḥ ādityam gacchati, he goes to the realm of the sun
- etat vai, that [sun]
- lokadvāram khalu, is the gateway [to the world of Brahman]
- viduṣām prapadanam, for those who know [this Om] it is the entrance
- nirodhaḥ aviduṣām, for the ignorant, entry is barred.
note Brahmaloka. Those who know the meaning of Om and think of it at the time of death enter Brahmaloka, but those who are ignorant of it have no chance of entering. What happens to a person when he dies? If he is a good person and has been meditating on Om, at the time of death he will try to meditate on Om in the heart. In Hinduism, it is the practice for religious people to die thinking of God. Here the Upaniṣad suggests meditation on Om. Then when the dying person leaves the body, he quickly goes through the sun rays to the realm of the sun. How quickly? As quick as the mind can move. Suppose we think of someone who lives very close to us. Then we think of someone in England, or somewhere else far away. That is how fast the mind can move. Similarly, that is how fast it takes for a person to reach the sun. The Upaniṣad says that the sun is the door to Brahmaloka. If you have meditated on your oneness with Om, then you go through this door to Brahmaloka. But what if a person is not religious and does not think of God or Om at the time of death? Then that door is closed for him. He cannot enter within. Vedānta says, you are the architect of your own fate. A good person will have a good world to go to. And if he knows his true nature, he will go right to Brahmaloka. But those who still have desires are not free. They must stay in lower regions to wait for their rebirth.
- Tat eṣaḥ ślokaḥ, there is a verse about this
- śatam ca ekā ca, one hundred and one
- hṛdayasya nāḍyaḥ, arteries of the heart
- tāsām ekā, one of them
- mūrdhānam abhiniḥsṛtā, extends to the top of the head
- tayā, by that [artery]
- urdhvam āyan, going up
- amṛtatvam eti, one attains immortality
- anyāḥ, as regards the others
- viṣvan utkramaṇe bhavanti utkramaṇe bhavanti, they cause one to depart from the body in different directions, they cause one to depart. Iti ṣaṣṭhaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the sixth section.
note The Upaniṣad says, there are a hundred and one arteries, and one of these goes up to the crown of the head. That is the sūrya nāḍī, the passage to the sun, described in the previous verse. It goes from the heart to the top of the head. Those who depart from the body through this passage attain immortality—that is, liberation. But what happens to other people? Those who depart through other passages must be reborn. They may be reborn as a human being, or they may be reborn as an animal, or even as an insect. But please note: It is the same Self that is a human being, an animal, and an insect. From an amoeba to the state of Brahman, it is the same Consciousness. You may start as an amoeba, never mind. If you are Brahman, you are always Brahman, whether you have a good body or not. You may not know you are Brahman. But that does not change the fact that you are Brahman. You may think you are just an amoeba, because you identify yourself with an amoeba body. Similarly, you may think you are a dog because you have a dog body. Or you may think you are a human being because you are in a human body. But this is all ignorance. Your goal is to realize yourself as Brahman, and, no matter what kind of body you have now, some day you will reach that goal.
- Yaḥ ātmā apahatapāpmā, the Self is free from sin
- vijaraḥ, free from the effects of age
- vimṛtyuḥ, free from death
- viśokaḥ, free from sorrow
- vijighatsaḥ, free from hunger
- apipāsaḥ, free from thirst
- satyakāmaḥ, is the cause of desire for Truth
- satyasaṅkalpaḥ, is the cause of commitment to Truth
- saḥ, that
- anveṣṭavyaḥ, has to be sought
- saḥ vijijñāsitavyaḥ, that has to be thoroughly investigated
- saḥ, a person
- sarvān ca lokān āpnoti, attains all worlds
- sarvān ca kāmān, and all desires
- yaḥ, who
- tam ātmānam, that Self
- anuvidya, having learned
- vijānāti, [and] knows it
- prajāpatiḥ iti ha uvāca, Prajāpati once said.
note Again and again the Upaniṣads glorify Self-knowledge, but what is the nature of the Self, and how do we attain that knowledge? Here the Upaniṣad begins a story to answer this. Once Prajāpati, the creator, decided to teach people about the Self. He described the Self as apahata-pāpmā, free from sins, or blemishes (pāpa)—that is to say, it is pure. Vijara—it never ages, or decays. Vimṛtyu—it is free from death. The body, of course, is subject to decay and it perishes. When you look at an old person you can tell at once that the body has decayed. It has become weak, and there are wrinkles and grey hair, and so on. Then gradually it must perish. That which has birth also has death. No matter when the body was born, it will eventually begin to fall apart and die. But the Self will never die. Then Prajāpati says, the Self is viśoka, without sorrow, vijighatsa, not subject to hunger, and apipāsa, not subject to thirst. Besides this, the Self is satyakāma and satyasaṅkalpa—seeking the Truth and always rooted in Truth. That is to say, it is Truth itself. It is always one with Truth, so it can never deviate from Truth. “Saḥ anveṣṭavyaḥ”—that has to be known. This is the purpose of life. Sri Ramakrishna used to say, ‘To realize God is the goal of life.’ The goal is not money, not power, not scholarship. It is nothing but God. Saḥ vijijñāsitavyaḥ—it has to be enquired about. You cannot sit back and wait for it to reveal itself to you. You must go and find someone to teach you about it. And when you have found a capable teacher, you must fall at his feet and beg him to teach you. Then you must ask again and again until your doubts are removed: ‘Is it like this? Is it like that?’ But you must go to someone who knows the Self. Can a blind man lead another blind man? If the teacher does not know the Self, how will you learn? When you fulfil these conditions, what happens? You get everything you want. You become supreme. The Upaniṣad says, you conquer the whole universe. How? Because you realize you are the Self. And that Self is the Self of all that exists. You are everything. In this way too, all your desires are fulfilled. Self-knowledge gives you the highest. You may have everything else—friends, relatives, great political power, money, scholarship, a high social standing—but if you do not have Self-knowledge, everything is useless. Prajāpati has declared: ‘This is the nature of the Self. And if you know the Self, you attain everything.’ He has sent out an invitation, as it were: ‘Come and learn from me.’ Here, in order to teach the nature of the Self, and also to emphasize the need for self-discipline to attain Self-knowledge, the Upani-
- Tat ha, that [what Prajāpati had said]
- ubhaye deva-asurāḥ, both the gods and the demons
- anububudhire, learned from what other people said
- te ha ucuḥ, they said [among themselves]
- hanta tam ātmānam anvicchāmaḥ, so let us search for the Self
- yam ātmānam, that Self
- anviṣya, by seeking
- sarvān ca lokān āpnoti, a person attains all worlds
- sarvān ca kāmān hi, and all desires
- indraḥ, Indra
- ha eva devānām, among all the gods
- abhipravrāja, went [to Prajāpati]
- virocanaḥ asurānām, [and] Virocana from among the asuras
- tau, those two
- ha asaṃvidānau, without letting each other know
- eva samitpāṇī, with fuel in hand
- prajāpati-sakāśam, to Prajāpati
- ājagmatuḥ, went.
note Indra is the chief of the gods and goddesses, and Virocana is the chief of the demons. Though Prajāpati is the grandparent of both of them, they are adversaries. Both Indra and Virocana heard from people what Prajāpati had said about the Self, and they were curious. They each decided to go to Prajāpati for instructions. As they often fought with one another, they never let each other know what they were doing. Everything was secret and confidential. But by chance both Indra and Virocana came to Prajāpati at the same time. How did they go? Śaṅkara says they went with great humility. Both of them were rulers, yet they put aside their royal robes and regalia, and wore the simplest clothes. They also came samitpāṇī ‘with fuel in hand,’ as an offering and as a sign of humility. Why? To show that they knew this knowledge to be superior even to rulership of the three worlds. In the Kaṭha Upaniṣad, Yama told Naciketā he would give him anything he wanted instead of Naciketā’s request for knowledge of the Self. Naciketā could have been ruler of the three worlds if he wanted,
- Tau, those two
- ha dvātriṃśatam varṣāṇi, for thirty-two years
- brahmacaryam ūṣataḥ, lived there practising strict self-control
- tau ha prajāpatiḥ uvāca, Prajāpati said to them
- kim icchantau avāstam iti, for what purpose have you stayed here
- tau ha ucatuḥ, they said
- yaḥ ātmā apahatapāpmā, the Self is free from sin
- vijaraḥ, free from the effects of age
- vimṛtyuḥ, free from death
- viśokaḥ, free from sorrow
- vijighatsaḥ, free from hunger
- apipāsaḥ, free from thirst
- satyakāmaḥ, is the cause of desire for Truth
- satyasaṅkalpaḥ, is the cause of commitment to Truth
- saḥ, that
- anveṣṭavyaḥ, has to be sought
- saḥ vijijñāsitavyaḥ, that has to be thoroughly investigated
- saḥ, a person
- sarvān ca lokān āpnoti, attains all worlds
- sarvān ca kāmān, and all desires
- yaḥ, who
- taw ātmānam, that Self
- anuvidya, having learned
- vijānāti iti, [and] knows it
- bhagavataḥ, sir
- vacaḥ vedayante, this is your message
- tarn icchantau, wishing for that [knowledge of the Self]
- avāstam iti, we have lived here.
note Indra and Virocana heard that Prajāpati had said the Self was pure, undecaying, without death, and so on, and they decided to go and learn from him. But a student must first go through some disciplines and prepare himself to receive these instructions. So for thirty-two years they practised brahmacarya, living with Prajāpati. They served him with humility, forgetting After thirty-two years, Prajāpati one day sent for them and asked: ‘Why are you here? What do you want from me?’ Indra and Virocana replied: ‘We heard from people that you said the Self is without decay, without death, and without sorrow. We want to know that Self. This is why we have come to you. We have been living here the past thirty-two years because we want to know the Self.’ Śaṅkara says that previously Indra and Virocana were hostile to each other. But now they are humble and no longer jealous, and they have even become friendly. Why has their nature changed? Because they have practised brahmacarya, self-control. “Brahmacarya” means brahma carati, one who moves around Brahman—that is, one who is always thinking of Brahman and trying to feel that he is Brahman. His whole life is centred around Brahman. Such a person lives a simple and austere life—with simple food, simple clothes, and so on. And he always practises self-restraint in everything he does. In Hinduism, self-restraint is the key to everything. If you want to achieve anything, even in secular life, you have to practise self-restraint.
- Tau, to those two
- prajāpatiḥ ha uvāca, Prajāpati said
- yaḥ eṣaḥ puruṣaḥ, that person which
- akṣiṇi dṛśyate, is seen in the eye
- eṣaḥ ātmā iti, that is the Self
- ha uvāca, [then] he said
- etat amṛtam, that is immortal
- abhayam, [and] fearless
- etat brahma iti, that is Brahman
- atha, then [they asked]
- bhagavaḥ, Lord
- yaḥ ayam apsu parikhyāyate, that which is seen in water
- yaḥ ca ayam ādarśe, and that which is in a mirror
- katamaḥ eṣaḥ iti, which is it
- eṣaḥ, this [Self]
- u eva eṣu parikhyāyate, is that which is seen
- sarveṣu anteṣu, in all these
- iti ha uvāca, he said. Iti saptamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the seventh section.
note According to Hindu philosophy, Supreme Knowledge is not meant for people whose minds are not pure. Though Indra and Virocana had been with Prajāpati for thirty-two years and they had made some progress towards purity, their minds were not yet pure enough to receive Self-knowledge. So Prajāpati’s first instruction was neither here nor there. It didn’t help them much. To begin with, Prajāpati said the Self is in the eyes. We all know that if We stand in front of someone, we can see our own reflection on that person’s eyes, and this is what Indra and Virocana thought Prajāpati meant. They said: ‘We see a similar reflection when we look in water or in a mirror. We see ourselves reflected there. Which of these is the Self?’ Prajāpati answered, ‘The Self is in all these.’ Here Śaṅkara raises the question: What did he mean by this? Was he misleading them? No, he was not misleading them, because it is true the Self is everywhere and in everything. But a person has to search. They could take his statement literally, but that would be a mistake. He wanted them to ask questions and use their judgement. He knew they would not understand, however. They were not yet ready for the highest Truth. He felt they had to spend more time practising brahmacarya.
- Udaśarāve ātmānam avekṣya, look at yourself in a vessel filled with water
- yat ātmanaḥ na vijānīthaḥ, what you do not understand about the Self
- tat me prabrūtam iti, tell me what it is
- tau ha udaśarāve avekṣāñcakrāte, [then] they looked [at themselves] in the water
- tau ha prajāpatiḥ uvāca, Prajāpati said to them
- kim paśyathaḥ iti, what do you see
- tau ha ucatuḥ, the two of them said
- āvām, we both
- bhagavaḥ, Lord
- sarvam eva idam ātmānam paśyāvaḥ, see the whole of our self
- pratirūpam, a reflection
- ālomabhyaḥ, from the hair
- ānakhebhyaḥ, to the nails.
note Prajāpati told them to bring a pan of water. They brought it, and he said: ‘Look in the water. What do you see? If you have any doubt, if it is not clear to you exactly what I mean when I say the Self is in the water, then ask me.’ A kind teacher is always ready to answer any question that a student may put. But instead of thinking and questioning, they simply said they saw the reflection of their own bodies—to the hair and the nails. When they even included the hair and nails, it should have been obvious to them that this could not be the Self. In the Vedānta philosophy there is the illustration of the pole-star. How do you show someone the pole-star? First you draw that person’s attention to a tree. Then you point to a big branch of the tree, and then to a smaller branch, and then to the pole-star beyond that. So you take the person step by step. This is what Prajāpati is trying to do. He is not trying to mislead them, but to take them from where they are, one step at a time.
- Tau ha prajāpatiḥ uvāca, Prajāpati said to them
- sādhu-alaṅkṛtau, well-dressed
- suvasanau, wearing fine clothes
- pariṣkṛtau bhūtvā, having become neat and clean
- udaśarāve avekṣethām iti, look into the vessel of water
- sādhu-alaṅkṛtau bhūtvā, having become well-dressed
- suvasanau, wearing fine clothes
- pariṣkṛtau, neat and clean
- tau ha udaśarāve avekṣāñcakrāte, they looked in the vessel of water
- tau ha prajāpatiḥ uvāca, Prajāpati said to them
- kim paśyathaḥ iti, what do you see?
note Now Prajāpati tells them to wash themselves and put on fine clothes and ornaments, and then look again into the pan of water. He was trying to raise a doubt in their minds. This is one way of teaching the Truth.
- Tau ha ucatuḥ, they both said
- bhagavaḥ, sir
- yathā eva, just as
- idam āvām, we two here
- sādhu-alaṅkṛtau, well-dressed
- suvasanau, wearing fine clothes
- pariṣkṛtau svaḥ, are neat and clean
- evam eva, like this
- bhagavaḥ, lord
- imau, these two [reflections]
- sādhu-alaṅkṛtau, well-dressed
- suvasanau, wearing fine clothes
- pariṣkṛtau iti, neat and clean
- iti ha uvāca, [Prajāpati] said
- eṣaḥ ātmā, this is the Self
- etat amṛtam, this is immortal
- abhayam, fearless
- etat brahma iti, this is Brahman
- tau, both of them
- śāntahṛdayau pravavrajatuḥ, left happy in mind.
note Now Indra and Virocana see themselves with fine clothes and ornaments on. Just as it should have been obvious to them that the Self is not the body with its hair and nails, even more so it should be obvious that the Self is not the body with its fine clothes, as they were not wearing those clothes before. Prajāpati was trying to provoke them into thinking. Is the body with its fine clothes deathless and free from fear? If it is unchanging, why does it look different when you put on different clothes? But they went away very happy, thinking they had the answer. Ordinarily our minds are wavering back and forth with doubts and indecision. That is the nature of the mind. But the Upaniṣad says Indra and Virocana went away śāntahṛdaya, with their minds at rest. That means without any doubt, without any question. It means they think they have received a satisfactory answer to their question, and the problem is solved.
- Tau ha anu-īkṣya, having observed them
- prajāpatiḥ uvāca, Prajāpati said
- anupalabhya ātmānam, without realizing the Self
- ananuvidya, without knowing
- vrajatah, they have left
- yatare, whoever among these two [gods or demons]
- etat upaniṣadaḥ bhaviṣyanti, will understand this teaching this way
- devāḥ vā asurāḥ vā, whether gods or demons
- te parābhaviṣyanti iti, they will be destroyed
- saḥ ha virocanaḥ, that Virocana
- śāntahṛdayaḥ eva, with a happy mind
- asurān jagāma, went to the demons
- tebhyaḥ, to them
- etām upaniṣadam ha provāca, explained the meaning of this upaniṣad
- ātmā eva ha iha mahayyaḥ, the body is an object of worship in this world
- ātmā paricaryaḥ, the body should be well taken care of
- ātmānam eva iha mahayan, by treating the body with due respect in this world
- ātmānam paricaran, by taking good care of it
- ubhau lokau, both worlds
- imam ca amum ca, this and the other
- āpnoti iti, one attains.
note ‘The body is the Self, and in this world it should be worshipped and taken care of. If the body is worshipped and well taken care of in this world, one attains both this world and the next.’ Prajāpati deplored the fact that they had left without asking for clarification. He was their teacher and well-wisher, and he was also their grandfather. He said: ‘Poor children, they have gone away without knowing anything. They should have asked me, “When the body changes, does that mean the Self also changes?” But they did not ask any questions. Because they do not understand, they will fall away from the right path.’ Virocana went back to the demons and said: ‘I have got the answer. The body is the Self.’ Nourish this body, and look after it; eat, drink, and be merry; enjoy yourselves—this is the aim of life for a demon, that is, for a materialist. That which is gross, which can be perceived by the sense organs, that is the reality. And that which cannot be perceived is not real. This is the doctrine that Virocana preached. The Upaniṣad uses the word upaniṣad to refer to what Virocana taught the demons, but it uses the word ironically. The word upaniṣad means niḥśeṣa—that is to say, it ‘totally destroys’ your ignorance. An Upaniṣad is supposed to give you Self-knowledge. But Virocana took the teaching to mean that the body was the Self. He thought that by worshipping and taking care of the body one would gain not only this world, but the other world also.
- Tasmāt, this is why
- api adya, till today
- iha, here in this world
- adadānam, one incapable of giving anything in charity
- aśraddadhānam, one who has no respect for others
- ayajamānam, one who never performs a sacrifice
- āhuḥ, they say
- āsuraḥ bata iti, ‘Oh, he is like a demon’
- asurānām hi eṣaḥ upaniṣat, because this knowledge is suited for the demons
- pretasya, of a dead person
- śarīram, the body
- bhikṣayā, with gifts [flowers, food, drink, etc.]
- vasanena, with clothes
- alaṅkāreṇa, with jewellery
- saṃskurvanti, they decorate
- hi, for
- etena, in this way
- annum lokam, the other world
- jeṣyantaḥ, they will win
- manyante, they think. Iti aṣṭamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the eighth section.
note Here the Upaniṣad says that there is a class of people who are not interested in self-discipline. They are the demons. They are only interested in sense pleasure, and they only believe in what can be perceived by the senses and what is present before them. They do not believe in God, and they are not interested in higher things. They are selfish and do not give anything in charity. They do not have faith in higher things, nor do they have respect for anything that is good—for good people or for good deeds. And they do not believe in sacrifice. Their attitude is: ‘Why should I share what I have? I want everything for myself.’ What is the aim of their life? What is their ideal? Only that which concerns their body. The body is everything to them. Even when someone dies, they decorate the body with all kinds of things they like—flowers, garlands, fragrance, ornaments, silk clothes. Everything is done to make the body appear beautiful, as if a dead body is beautiful! They think if the body is properly decorated in this way, the deceased will look like a prince and will conquer heaven. They think the gods and goddesses will receive him as their ruler, and so on. In ancient Egypt, when the Pharaohs died, their bodies were treated with special ointments to preserve them. Then when they were put in their tombs, the bodies of their servants and attendants were also put there so they could look after them. Besides this, all the vessels and things the Pharaohs used were put in the tomb. Everything went with them. The Hindu concept, however, is that the body will decay and perish, but the self is independent of the body. The self will never decay and never perish. It is a common experience that when a person dies, we see all his organs intact, but if we talk to him he does not answer. Why? Because the self has left the body. The Upaniṣad does not mean to say that the body is not important. As a means to attain Self-knowledge it is important. It is a tool that we need for progress in our spiritual life and also in our mundane life. As the Muṇḍaka Upaniṣad says, ‘Nāyamātmā balahīnena labhyaḥ—this Self is not attained by one who has no strength.’ If you have a weak, feeble body, then you cannot struggle or make sustained effort in any vocation—whether spiritual or secular. But when too much importance is given to the body, we forget that we are not the body, but the Self.
- Atha, but
- indraḥ, Indra, the king of the gods
- ha aprāpya eva, even before getting back
- devān, to the gods
- etat bhayam dadarśa, saw this fear [i.e., doubt]
- yathā eva, just as
- asmin śarīre sādhu-alaṅkṛte, with this body being well decorated
- khalu ayam, this [reflection of the body]
- sādhu-alaṅkṛtah bhavati, is also well decorated
- suvasane suvasanaḥ, when the body is in fine clothes, the reflection is wearing fine clothes
- pariṣkṛte pariṣkṛtaḥ, when the body is neat and clean, the reflection is neat and clean
- evam eva, like this
- asmin andhe, if [the body] is blind
- ayam andhaḥ bhavati, this [reflection] is of a blind person
- srāme srāmaḥ, if the body is lame, the reflection is of a lame person
- parivṛkṇe parivṛkṇaḥ, if the body is hurt, the reflection is of an injured body
- asya śarīrasya eva nāśam anu, on the body’s destruction
- eṣaḥ naśyati, this [reflection] is destroyed
- aham atra bhogyam na paśyāmi iti, I see nothing good in this.
note Virocana was happy. He had no more doubts or questions. He liked the idea of the body being the Self. But what about Indra? Indra was a higher being. He was a god and was endowed with some spiritual qualities. Whereas Virocana thought Prajāpati was saying the body was the Self, Indra thought he was saying the reflection was the Self. Indra also left Prajāpati and started to go back home, but then he was struck by a doubt: ‘How can that reflection be my Self? It can’t be. When I first looked at the reflection in the water it looked one way. Then when I put on fine clothes it looked another way. Suppose I lose a limb. The reflection will show that there is a limb missing. Whatever change there is in the body will show on the reflection. And if the body perishes, the reflection will be gone. But Prajāpati himself spoke of the Self as something constant, free from all defects, and immortal. It is something that does not change. What did Prajāpati mean when he said, “This is the Self”? Surely the
- Saḥ, he [Indra]
- punaḥ eyāya, again went back
- samitpāṇiḥ, with fuel in hand
- tam, to him
- prajāpatiḥ ha uvāca, Prajāpati said
- maghavan, O Maghavan [Indra]
- yat prāvrājīḥ, you left
- śāntahṛdayaḥ, satisfied
- sārdham virocanena, along with Virocana
- kim icchan, what do you want
- punaḥ āgamaḥ iti, that you have come back again
- saḥ ha uvāca, he [Indra] said
- bhagavaḥ, lord
- yathā era, just as
- asmin śarīre sādhu-alaṅkṛte, with this body being well decorated
- khalu ayam, this [reflection of the body]
- sādhu-alaṅkṛtah bhavati, is also well decorated
- suvasane suvasanaḥ, when the body is in fine clothes, the reflection is wearing fine clothes
- pariṣkṛte pariṣkṛtaḥ, when the body is neat and clean, the reflection is neat and clean
- evam era, like this
- asmin andhe, if [the body] is blind
- ayam andhaḥ bhavati, this [reflection] is of a blind person
- srāme srāmaḥ, if the body is lame, the reflection is of a lame person
- parivṛkṇe parivṛkṇaḥ, if the body is hurt, the reflection is of an injured body
- asya śarīrasya eva nāśam anu, on the body’s destruction
- eṣaḥ naśyati, this [reflection] is destroyed
- aham atra bhogyam na paśyāmi iti, I see nothing good in this.
note Again Indra went to Prajāpati with fuel in hand as a symbol of surrender and humility. Śaṅkara makes a very significant comment here. The question is raised, ‘Virocana went away satisfied, but why did Indra come back?’ Śaṅkara says that we understand a thing according to our own level and inclination—according to our own nature. Śaṅkara cites the example given in the Bṛhadāraṇyaka Upaniṣad of Prajāpati’s instruction to the gods, humans, and asuras. To all of them Prajāpati gave the same instruction: he simply said, ‘da.’ The gods understood him to be saying dāmyata, be self-controlled. The human beings took it to mean datta, give in charity. And the asuras thought he was saying dayadhvam, be compassionate. They all heard the same thing, but they interpreted it differently, according to their nature. The gods have the purest nature. They are the closest to Brahman. What is preventing them from being united with Brahman? Just a very thin layer of ignorance. They have to have a full measure of purity, and self-discipline is what leads to this purity. This is why they took the instruction to mean they should practise self-control. The next are human beings. They are good, but they could be better. How? By practising selflessness. They should give whatever they can, share what they have with others, and not be selfish. But the demons are not ready for self-control or charity. They are very cruel and passionate by nature. Therefore they took the instruction to mean that they These are the three characteristics we find among people. One kind of person needs to practise self-control; another kind, charity; and a third kind, mercy. It all depends on the level one is at. Vedānta says you have to be ready to receive Self-knowledge. You have to be prepared. How a person understands the instructions is based on how much preparation he has had. Prajāpati was not trying to deceive Indra and Virocana. He was testing them, but he knew they were not prepared to receive Self-knowledge.
- Evam eva eṣaḥ, it is like that
- maghavan, O Maghavan
- iti ha uvāca, [Prajāpati] said
- etam tu eva bhūyaḥ anuvyākhyāsyāmi, I will explain it once again
- te, to you
- vasā, stay here
- aparāṇi dvātriṃśatam, another thirty-two
- varṣāṇi iti, years
- saḥ, he [Indra]
- ha aparāṇi dvātriṃśatam varṣāṇi, for another thirty-two years
- uvāsa, lived there
- tasmai ha uvāca, [Prajāpati] said to him. Iti navamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the ninth section.
note Prajāpati was obviously pleased that Indra had come back, but he wanted him to practise brahmacarya for another thirty-two years. Then he would again give him instructions.
- Yaḥ eṣaḥ, this [person] who
- svapne mahīyamānaḥ, [appearing to be] worshipped in dreams
- carati, goes about
- eṣaḥ ātmā, this is the Self
- iti ha uvāca, [Prajāpati] said
- etat amṛtam abhayam, it is immortal and fearless
- etat brahma iti, it is Brahman
- saḥ ha śāntahṛdayaḥ pravavrāja, he left happy in mind
- ha aprāpya eva, even before getting back
- devān, to the gods
- etat bhayam dadarśa, saw this fear [i.e., doubt]
- yadi api, even if
- tat idam śarīram, this body
- andham bhavati, is blind
- saḥ anandhaḥ bhavati, this [dream body] is not blind
- yadi srāmam asrāmaḥ, if [the body] is lame, the [dream body] is not lame
- na eva eṣaḥ asya doṣena duṣyati, nor is this [dream body] affected by the defects [of the body].
note Then after thirty-two years, Prajāpati said to Indra, ‘When you are asleep you have dreams and you find yourself moving about, as if you are the ruler of all, as if you are very great and powerful. That Indra left satisfied, but on the way back home he began to think about what Prajāpati had said: ‘When I saw the reflection in the water, it was just as my body was. If the body was decorated, the reflection also was decorated. That means if the body is blind, the reflection shows a blind body. But suppose I am blind and I am dreaming. At that time I can see so many things. So it is true, the condition of the body does not affect the Self. The Self is something different.’
- Asya vadhena na hanyate, [the dream body] is not killed when [the body] is killed
- na asya srāmyeṇa srāmaḥ, nor is it lame with [the body’s] lameness
- tu, nevertheless
- enam eva ghnanti, as if they are killing him
- vicchādayanti iva, as if they are chasing him
- apriyavettā iva bhavati, as if there is something unpleasant
- api roditi iva, as if he is even weeping
- aham atra bhogyam na paśyāmi iti, I see nothing good in this.
note Indra continued to think about what Prajāpati had said. This is the nature of someone who has discrimination. And this is what Prajāpati expected him to do. In fact, Prajāpati would have been disappointed if Indra had not questioned what he had said. A good teacher is ready to give his knowledge, but the student also has to be ready. He has to be mentally alert and ask questions. Indra thought: ‘It is true, the dream-self is independent of the body. But I find that even in my dreams I am sometimes happy and sometimes unhappy. Sometimes I am in pain, and sometimes I am crying. And sometimes I even see myself being chased by someone and I am frightened. Prajāpati said the Self is free from fear, so how could this fear come? It should not happen. If the Self is subject to such limitations and unpleasant experiences, then it is not free and perfect. No, I cannot accept this answer.’
- Saḥ, he [Indra]
- punaḥ eyāya, again went back
- samitpāṇiḥ, with fuel in hand
- tam, to him
- prajāpatiḥ ha uvāca, Prajāpati said
- maghavan, O Maghavan [Indra]
- yat prāvrājīḥ, you left
- śāntahṛdayaḥ, satisfied
- kim icchan, what do you want
- punaḥ āgamaḥ iti, that you have come back again
- saḥ ha uvāca, he [Indra] said
- bhagavaḥ, lord
- yadi api, even if
- tat idam śarīram, this body
- andham bhavati, is blind
- saḥ anandhaḥ bhavati, this [dream body] is not blind
- yadi srāmam asrāmaḥ, if [the body] is lame, the [dream body] is not lame
- na eva eṣaḥ asya doṣena duṣyati, nor is this [dream body] affected by the defects [of the body].
note Most of us think the body is everything. But the idea of Vedānta is that we are independent of the body and the mind. The body and the mind are limitations. In reality, however, nothing can limit us. Our real Self is free and fearless. Prajāpati is happy that Indra has discovered this.
- Asya vadhena na hanyate, [the dream body] is not killed when [the body] is killed
- na asya srāmyeṇa srāmaḥ, nor is it lame with [the body’s] lameness
- tu, nevertheless
- enam eva ghnanti, as if they are killing him
- vicchādayanti iva, as if they are chasing him
- apriyavettā iva bhavati, as if there is something unpleasant
- api roditi iva, as if he is even weeping
- āham ātra bhogyam na paśyāmi iti, I see nothing good in this
- evam eva eṣaḥ, it is like that
- maghavan, O Maghavan
- iti ha uvāca, [Prajāpati] said
- etam tu eva bhūyaḥ anuvyākhyāsyāmi, I will explain it once again
- te, to you
- vasa, stay here
- aparāṇi dvātriṃśatam, another thirty-two
- varṣāṇi iti, years
- saḥ, he [Indra]
- ha aparāṇi dvātriṃśatam varṣāṇi, for another thirty-two years
- uvāsa, lived there
- tasrnai ha uvāca, [Prajāpati] said to him. Iti daśamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the tenth section.
note Indra says to Prajāpati, ‘Sir, if your original statement is true that the Self is without any shortcomings and it never changes, then the dream self cannot be the real Self.’ Prajāpati’s first premise was that the Self was apahatapāpmā, without any limitations. Pāpa has a very comprehensive meaning. It is not just ‘sin.’ It may also mean weakness, shortcoming, or limitation. So in the light of this premise Indra has come back.
- Yatra tat etat, when this [self]
- suptaḥ, is sleeping
- samastaḥ, all organs inactive
- samprasannaḥ, free from worry
- svapnam na vijānāti, does not have any dreams
- eṣaḥ ātmā, this is the Self [free from sin]
- iti ha uvāca, [Prajāpati] said
- etat amṛtam abhayam, it is immortal and fearless
- etat brahma iti, it is Brahman
- saḥ ha śāntahṛdayaḥ pravavrāja, he [Indra] left happy in mind
- aprāpya eva devān, but even before getting back to the gods
- saḥ etat bhayam dadarśa, he saw this fear [i.e., difficulty]
- ayam, this [self]
- nāha khalu samprati, does not while [in deep sleep]
- evam, in this way [i.e., as when awake]
- ātmānam jānāti, know itself
- ayam aham asmi iti, I am so-and-so
- na eva imāni bhūtāni, nor even all these beings
- vināśam eva apītaḥ bhavati, as if he becomes obliterated
- na aham atra bhogyam paśyāmi iti, I don’t see any good in this.
note Next, Prajāpati told Indra about deep sleep. Normally when we are awake, our sense organs are outgoing, as if they are constantly searching for something. Then when we are dreaming, our body is at rest but our mind is not at rest. But if we have sound, dreamless sleep, our body, our organs, and our mind are all resting. Prajāpati says: ‘This is the Self [Ātman]. This is Brahman.’ According to Vedanta, Ātman and Brahman are one and the same. When we use the word Ātman, we are referring to the Self within us. The word Brahman, means ‘the biggest,’ The greatest,’ ‘the ultimate.’ There is nothing higher, nothing greater. Really speaking, we don’t know what the ultimate is like. But we use the word Brahman to convey the idea of its uniqueness, that it is superior to everything. What Prajāpati said seemed very convincing, and Indra left śāntahṛdaya—with his mind satisfied, with no more doubts. But as he was on his way back home, something began to trouble him. He thought: ‘When I have dreamless sleep, why is it that I am not conscious of anything—even of myself? It’s as if I have been annihilated and everything around me has disappeared. Why should this be?’ When Sri Ramakrishna used to have samādhi, he had no external consciousness and there was almost no sign of life in his body, but his face was beaming with joy. What is the difference between samādhi and deep sleep? In samādhi you have Self-knowledge. You know your real Self. And when your consciousness of the external world returns you are liberated. You have no more attachments or hankering after worldly pleasures. You are in a state of supreme bliss. In suṣupti, deep sleep, all feelings, all experiences, all perceptions are temporarily wiped out. But when you wake up, you are the same person you were when you went to sleep. Your ignorance is still there, and there is no change in your outlook. You have the same attachments and fears, and you run after the same worldly pleasures that you did before you had deep sleep. Your bondage continues. That is the difference between the two.
- Saḥ, he [Indra]
- punaḥ eyāya, again went back
- samitpāṇiḥ, with fuel in hand
- tam, to him
- prajāpatiḥ ha uvāca, Prajāpati said
- maghavan, O Maghavan [Indra]
- yat prāvrājīḥ, you left
- śāntahṛdayaḥ, satisfied
- kim icchan, what do you want
- punaḥ āgamaḥ iti, that you have come back again
- saḥ ha uvāca, he [Indra] said
- bhagavaḥ, lord
- ayam, this [self]
- nāha khalu samprati, does not while [in deep sleep]
- evam, in this way [i.e., as when awake]
- ātmānam jānāti, know itself
- ayam aham asmi iti, I am so-and-so
- na eva imāni bhūtāni, nor even all these beings
- vināśam eva apītaḥ bhavati, as if he becomes
note There is no commentary available for this verse.
- Evam eva eṣaḥ, it is like that
- maghavan, O Maghavan
- iti ha uvāca, [Prajāpati] said
- etam tu eva bhūyaḥ anuvyākhyāsyāmi, I will explain it once again
- te, to you
- vasa, stay here
- aparāṇi pañca, another five
- varṣāṇi iti, years
- saḥ, he [Indra]
- ha aparāṇi pañca varṣāṇi, for another five years
- uvāsa, lived there
- tāni ekaśatam sampeduḥ, one hundred and one [years] were completed
- etat tat yat āhaḥ, this is what it is when people say
- maghavān prajāpatau brahmacaryam uvāsa, Indra lived with Prajāpati practising brahmacārya
- ekaśatam ha vai varṣāṇi iti, one hundred and one years
- tasmai ha uvāca, [Prajāpati] said to him. Iti ekādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the eleventh section.
note For the third time Indra returned. Prajāpati must have been very pleased with this. If the student comes back again and again with questions, then naturally the teacher is pleased. He thinks: ‘I have a very clever student. He wants to know, and I am happy to be able to help him.’ This time he asked Indra to practise brahmacarya for just five years, as he could see Indra was almost ready. So Indra practised austerities for a total of a hundred and one years. Śaṅkara says that the reason this story has been introduced here is to show how important Self-knowledge is—that there is nothing higher and more desirable than Self-knowledge. The Indian scriptures are very clear: If you are mainly interested in acquiring money they say: ‘All right, have money. But remember, it will only give you happiness for a while. Very soon you will discover what a bondage it is.’ It is the same for other things—scholarship, political power, social standing, and so on. You may enjoy them if you want, but all the time you must know that they will not last long and they will not give you peace of mind. The scriptures say that it is only through Self-knowledge that you will get happiness which is eternal, which is always yours. This is why Self-knowledge is considered to be the highest goal of life.
- Maghavan, O Maghavan [Indra]
- martyam vai idam śarīram, this body is mortal [subject to death]
- āttam mṛtyunā, it has been captured by death
- tat, that [body]
- asya amṛtasya aśarīrasya ātmanaḥ adhiṣṭhānam, is the foundation of this immortal and formless Self
- āttaḥ vai saśarīraḥ priya-apriyābhyām, one who has a body is subject to good and evil
- saśarīrasya sataḥ, for one who has a body
- priya-apriyayoḥ apahatiḥ na asti, there is no end to good and evil
- aśarīram vāva santam, but one who is without a body
- priya-apriye na spṛśataḥ, is not touched by good and evil.
note Prajāpati now starts teaching Indra about the nature of the Self. He says the Self has no body and no form, yet somehow or other the Self has identified itself with the body. Why? Because of ignorance. But if the Self is supposed to be pure consciousness, pure knowledge, where has this ignorance come from? Can light and darkness coexist? Similarly, can knowledge and ignorance coexist? No. There is, in fact, no ignorance at all in the Self. Yet, somehow or other, the formless Self identifies itself with the body and imagines that whatever happens to the body happens to it. It feels it is born when the body is born, and that it dies when the body dies. Vedānta says this ignorance is temporary and it can be removed. Vedānta calls this ignorance māyā. Māyā is often translated as ‘illusion,’ but this is not quite correct. Swami Vivekananda calls it ‘a statement of fact.’ You cannot say it does not exist, but again you cannot say exactly what it is. It is anirvacanīya, indescribable. Śaṅkara often uses the example of the rope and the snake to explain how māyā works. Suppose you are walking along a road on a dark night, and you suddenly see what you think is a snake lying across the road in front of you. You are frightened and you start yelling, ‘Snake! Snake!’ Then some people living nearby come running out of their homes with lights, and you discover it is not a snake after all. It is just a rope. Another example given is that of the mirage. Suppose you are walking in a desert and you are very thirsty. In the distance you see a lake and you start walking towards it. You go on and on, but you never reach the water. Finally you realize it is just a mirage. It is all due to the effect of the sunrays on the sand. Another example is that of thinking you see silver where there is just a piece of mother-of-pearl. When you see the mother-of-pearl, you are convinced that you are seeing silver. So māyā is an error with a semblance of truth. Yet, Vedānta says, the mother-of-pearl never becomes silver, nor does the rope ever become a snake or the sand become water. Māyā has two aspects—āvaraṇa and vikṣepa. Āvaraṇa means ‘covering.’ Māyā covers the rope and hides its real nature. Vikṣepa is the projecting power of māyā. It projects the appearance of a snake where there is just a rope. This is also called adhyāsa, superimposition. Vedānta says this ignorance is just temporary. As soon as light comes, we see the rope rather than the snake. Similarly, as soon as knowledge is awakened in us, our false identification with the body is gone and we realize our true nature. Prajāpati says to Indra, ‘This body has been captured by death.’ Here Śaṅkara asks: ‘Why does Prajāpati say this? He says this so that we will try to get rid of our ignorance quickly.’ If we are merely told that we are mortal and that some day we will die, we may say: ‘Well, I will not die soon. I still have many years at my disposal to live as I like. I will enjoy myself as long as possible.’ But if we are told that we are already in the grips of death, that death is already at our doorstep, that it has already conquered us, we will understand that there is no time to lose. We must attain Self-knowledge immediately. The Hindu idea is that anything that has a beginning also has an end. Anything that is born must some day die. This is something we don’t like to accept. When Yama asked King Yuddhiṣṭhira what the most amazing thing was, Yuddhiṣṭhira replied, ‘The most amazing thing is that people see others dying all around them, but somehow or other they believe they will never die.’ But the fact is, the moment we are born, the process of death begins. When we are born, death comes to us and says: ‘Here I am. I am going to follow you like a shadow. Sooner or later you will be my victim, even if I have to wait a hundred years.’ Vedānta says, however, that the Self is never born and it never dies. It is immortal. Death is for the śārīra—that is, for one who feels he is a body. So also pleasure and pain. These changing conditions afflict only the person who identifies himself with the body. This empirical world is a world of sense experience, and it is always subject to change. One moment it is hot, the next moment it is cold. One moment there is pleasure, and the next there is pain. This is the way the world goes on, continuously. But if you can get rid of the delusion that you are an embodied being, then you are no longer swayed by the changing conditions of life. You are always the same, always calm. And there is no question of pleasure and pain for you. They cannot touch you. Even if the body is affected, you are not affected. Prajāpati says the body is the adhiṣṭhānam, the abode or resting place, of the Self. Foṛ the time being the Self chooses to live in this house. Though the Self is amṛtam, immortal, and aśarīram, without a body, it identifies itself with the body and thinks it is mortal. This fact of delusion has to be recognized. We cannot ignore it. But if delusion, or ignorance, were in the nature of the Self, how could we get How do we uncover that Knowledge? How do we remove our delusion and stop identifying ourself with the body? Śaṅkara says, first we must become free from desires. We identify ourself with the body because we have desires. For example, we want to eat something. How will we eat it if we do not have a body? For any sense desire we have, we must have a body to fulfil it. And as long as we have a body, we will sometimes have pleasure and sometimes have pain. We cannot always have pleasure. Along with pleasure comes pain. Then again, some of our desires will be fulfilled, but some of them will not. And if they are not fulfilled, we will be disappointed. Vedānta says, even the desire for liberation requires a body to fulfil it. But when we attain Self-knowledge we realize a state where there is no such change. We then know our true nature, our real Self, which is never touched by the changing conditions of the world. Then Śaṅkara says, if you want Self-knowledge you must go to a teacher. But not just any teacher. You must go to one who is himself free from desires—one who is a paramahaṃsa. The word paramahaṃsa literally means a swan. A swan is said to be able to separate milk from water. If there is milk mixed with water, it will drink only the milk and leave behind the water. So a teacher who is a paramahaṃsa has developed discrimination between the real and the unreal, the permanent and the impermanent. He rejects whatever is unreal, and accepts only that which is real and immortal. That is to say, he has no more desires for anything in this world. What does such a teacher do? He shows you your real nature. Sri Ramakrishna used to explain this with the story of the tiger and the goats. Once a pregnant tigress was running after a flock of goats when she fell down exhausted and died. But as she died, she gave birth to a baby tiger. The baby tiger was adopted by the goats, and in course of time he began to eat grass and bleat just like them. All the while he thought he was a goat. Even when he grew up he never realized he was a tiger. One day a big tiger came there and was about to spring on the flock when he noticed another tiger running away frightened and bleating like a goat. Disgusted, he ran and caught hold of the grass-eating tiger and said: ‘What are you doing here with these goats? Shame on you! You are a tiger.’ But the grass-eating tiger started crying and said: ‘No, no, I am a goat. Let me go.’ Then the big tiger dragged the other to a river and said: ‘Look at your reflection in the water. You look just like me. You are not a goat. You are a tiger.’ He then forced a piece of meat into the grass-eating tiger’s mouth. Getting the taste of the meat, the grass-eating tiger started to roar. So this is what the guru does. He removes our ignorance and tells us who we really are—tat tvam asi, thou art that.
- Aśarīraḥ vāyuḥ, air is formless
- abhram vidyut stanayitnuḥ, light clouds, lightning, and thunder
- etāni, all these
- aśarīrāṇi, are formless
- tat yathā, just as
- etāni, all these
- amuṣmāt ākāśāt, from the sky
- samutthāya, arise
- param jyotiḥ upasampadya, attain the great light [i.e., are exposed to the heat of the sun in summer]
- svena rūpeṇa abhiniṣpadyante, appear in their respective forms [in the rainy season].
note Here the idea is that even though we don’t see the Self, it is always within us. The Upaniṣad compares it with air, clouds, lightning, and thunder. In winter the sky is clear. There are very few clouds, and there are no strong winds or storms. But then as summer begins the temperature starts rising, and slowly the clouds gather. Then come the storms with their high winds and lightning and thunder. Where were the clouds and lightning during winter? They were there, but they were not visible. We see them only when the conditions are right; otherwise they are in a latent form, one with the sky. They appear from the sky, and then they merge into the sun.
- Evam eva, just like that
- eṣaḥ samprasādaḥ, this serene one [i.e., the individual self, after attaining Self-knowledge]
- asmāt śarīrāt, from this body
- samutthāya, arising
- param jyotiḥ, the radiance of the Cosmic Self
- upasampadya, attains
- svena rūpeṇa abhiniṣpadyate, appears in his own form
- saḥ uttama puruṣaḥ, this is the Supreme Being
- saḥ tatra paryeti, he goes about
- jakṣat krīḍan ramamāṇaḥ, eating, playing, and enjoying himself
- strībhiḥ vā, with women
- yānaiḥ vā, or in carriages
- jñātibhiḥ vā, or with relatives
- na smaran, not remembering
- upajānam idam śarīram, this body in which he was born
- yathā, just as
- saḥ prayogyaḥ, an animal [a horse or bullock]
- ācaraṇe yuktaḥ, is harnessed to a carriage [or chariot]
- evam eva, like that
- ayam prāṇaḥ, this life
- asmin śarīre yuktaḥ, is harnessed to the body.
note The question here is, who is the enjoyer? It is the self. This is something basic to Vedānta philosophy. The self is the master. The body is like a house, and the self is like the owner of the house. Just as the owner of a house can change his house at any time, so also, the self can change its body at any time. Here the relationship of the self with the body is clearly brought out. The self is immortal and aśarīra, without a body. But, like lightning or clouds, the self is sometimes manifest in a form. With ordinary people the distinction between the self and the body is not noticeable, but with an enlightened person the distinction is quite conspicuous. In all his manners and his way of speaking, you see that the enlightened person is using his body as his instrument. He is always conscious that he is the self. He may be eating or drinking or talking or moving about like anyone else, but still you see there is a difference. An ordinary person is not his own master. He is a slave to his body and mind. But a knower of the Self has conquered the body and the mind and can make them behave as he wants. He is merely the draṣṭā, the spectator. He sees the world going on with all its madness, and to him it is great fun, because he is totally unaffected and untouched. Vedānta keeps trying to convince us of the fact that happiness is not outside. It is not dependent on any objective circumstances. It is all within. If happiness were dependent on external conditions then why doesn’t the same thing give happiness to everyone? Some people are very happy if they get some sweets to eat. But there are other people who don’t care for sweets at all. If the sweets were the source of happiness they should make everyone happy, but they don’t. There are people who, in spite of seemingly unfavorable circumstances, are very happy. They know that they don’t have to seek for happiness outside. They find it within. But this is not to say a knower of the Self is cold and indifferent. Śaṅkara says, when you know your Self, when you know you are Brahman and that everything you see is nothing but Brahman, then you feel you are one with all. If others are happy, you are happy. If others are in pain, you are also in pain. Now we are separate from others because we think we are the body and we identify ourself with our body. Yet still we talk of love, compassion, of sharing the sorrows and sufferings of others. How can we share them? We can’t. We may have pity on someone, but often that pity is accompanied by a sense of superiority. By showing pity we are often merely showing our arrogance. This is why the Taittirīya Upaniṣad says that when you give someone something, give it with respect. You may give something to a beggar. He may be in rags. Never mind, he is God. You should feel grateful to him that he is accepting your offering. The Upaniṣad also says, if you cannot give with respect then it is better not to give at all. You will hurt the other person’s self-respect. So whatever you give, give with love and humility. When you give something, you are giving it to your own Self, because you are everywhere—in the small, in the big, in a human being, and in an insect.
- Atha, then
- yatra etat cakṣuḥ, where this organ of vision is
- ākāśam anuviṣaṇṇam, lying inside the space [in the eye]
- saḥ cākṣuṣaḥ puruṣaḥ, that is the deity presiding over the eye
- darśanāya cakṣuḥ, the eye is the instrument of vision
- atha, then
- yaḥ veda, one who knows
- idam jighrāṇi iti, I smell this
- saḥ ātmā, that is the Self
- gandhāya ghrāṇam, the organ of smell is the instrument of smelling
- atha, then
- yaḥ veda, one who knows
- idam abhivyāharāṇi iti, I speak this
- saḥ ātmā, that is the Self
- abhivyāhārāya vāk, the organ of speech is the instrument of speaking
- atha, then
- yaḥ veda, one who knows
- idam śṛṇavāni iti, I hear this
- saḥ ātmā, that is the Self
- śravaṇāya śrotram, the ear is the instrument of hearing.
note The Upaniṣad is saying that the Self is within us, and that the Self makes use of the organs for its experience in this empirical world. ‘I see, I hear, I speak’—who is this ‘I’? When I say, ‘I see,’ do I mean the eyes are seeing something by their own power? No. The Self is behind the eyes, and the Self uses them for its own purpose. The eyes are not independent. When we die, all our organs may be intact, yet we won’t be able to see or hear anything. You may ask, ‘How do I know that the Self is working through the organs?’ Vedānta says, suppose you are absent-minded and are absorbed in thinking something. Someone may come and stand before you and say something, but you don’t see him at all. Now who is it that is absorbed? It is the Self. The Self has withdrawn itself from the sense organs, and because of this they are not able to operate in the way they normally do. Earlier Prajāpati had told Indra and Virocana that the person in the eyes is the Self. Indra took it to mean that his own reflection was the Self. But this is not what Prajāpati meant. He meant that there is a being within us who sees through the eyes and hears through the ears. He says that within the eye there is a space, and that is where the Self is. The Self is hiding there, as it were. Prajāpati uses the word puruṣa to refer to the Self. Here puruṣa does not mean ‘male,’ as it does in Bengali. The word puruṣa literally means pure śayate—that is, ‘one who is lying,’ or ‘hidden’ (śayate) ‘in a place’ (pure). Who does the organ of smelling work for? The Self. All our organs are servants of the Self. The person in the eye uses the eye to see and the organ of smelling to smell. When the Self, the puruṣa, wants to speak, it uses the organ of speaking. And when it wants to hear, it uses the organ of hearing.
- Atha, next
- yaḥ veda, that which knows
- idam manvāni iti, I am thinking this
- saḥ ātmā, that is the Self
- manaḥ asya daivam cakṣuḥ, the mind is its divine eye
- saḥ vai eṣaḥ, that [Self]
- etena daivena cakṣuṣā manasā, with the help of the divine mental eye
- etān kāmān paśyan ramate, enjoys seeing the things it likes
- yaḥ ete brahmaloke, those which are in Brahmaloka.
note Next comes the mind. The mind is the principal organ. The Self works through the mind, and by means of the mind it works through the eyes, ears, and other organs. You may remember the example given in the Kaṭha Upaniṣad: The Self is the master of the chariot, the mind is the charioteer, and the organs are the horses. The mind is directly responsible for keeping the organs under control. The mind is called here the daivam cakṣuḥ, the divine eye, because the Self sees through the mind. The mind is extraordinary. One who is firmly established in Self-knowledge can enjoy whatever he wants mentally. And for such a person everything is Brahman and every place is Brahmaloka.
- Tam vai etam devāḥ ātmānam upāsate, that is the Self which the gods worship
- tasmāt, this is why
- sarve ca lokāḥ, all the worlds
- teṣām āttāḥ, are within the grasp of them [the gods]
- sarve ca kāmāḥ, and all things they desire
- sarvān ca lokān, all worlds
- sarvān ca kāmān, and all things one desires
- āpnoti, one attains
- yaḥ tam ātmānam anuvidya, one who knows the Self
- vijānāti iti, and has a direct, personal experience of it
- prajāpatiḥ ha uvāca prajāpatiḥ uvāca, this is what Prajāpati taught. Iti dvādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the twelfth section.
note Here the Upaniṣad is praising Self-knowledge in order to tempt us to attain it. Earlier the Upaniṣad said, ‘Na alpe sukḥam asti’—there is no happiness in the finite, in what is small or limited. Only in bhūmā, the infinite, is there happiness. Bhūmā is infinite in terms of both time and space. Whatever is limited by time and space cannot give us peace and happiness. Even the state of a god or goddess is a limitation, according to Hinduism. By virtue of the kind of life you have lived and the good things you have done, you may be elevated to the position of a god or goddess. But that position is only temporary. When your term expires, you are right back where you Śaṅkara says the Upaniṣad does not mean to say that this state can be attained only by gods and goddesses. It is for human beings also. In fact, it is our very birthright. The story of Indra and Virocana going to Prajāpati for Self-knowledge shows that we are all suffering from discontent. We are always seeking something, though we may not know exactly what it is. Even the gods and goddesses in heaven are not content. After many births they have attained the status of a god or goddess, and they seem to have everything they desire, yet still they are not satisfied. This is why Indra went to Prajāpati and spent a hundred and one years practising austerities to get the knowledge of the Self. The Upaniṣad says again and again that Self-knowledge is the highest. If you attain that you attain everything.
- Śyāmāt śabalam prapadye, from the dark may I attain the diverse
- śabalāt śyāmam prapadye, from the diverse may I attain the dark
- aśvaḥ romāṇi iva, as a horse [shakes] its fur
- pāpam vidhūya, I will shake off any shortcomings [I have]
- candra iva rāhoḥ mukhāt pramucya, as the moon gets free from the mouth of Rāhu
- dhūtvā śarīram, laying down the body
- kṛtātmā, having accomplished everything
- akṛtam, eternal
- brahmalokam, Brahmaloka
- abhisambhavāmi iti abhisambhavāmi iti, I will attain, I will attain. Iti trayodaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the thirteeenth section.
note This is a meditation mantra. It contains the essence of all that has been said before in this Upaniṣad. There are two important words used here—śyāma and śabala. Śyāma means ‘dark,’ or ‘black.’ Śyāmā is the feminine form, and it is also a name of Mother Kālī. Śaṅkara says that śyāma is gambhīraḥ varṇaḥ, a deep colour—that is to say, it is not perceptible to our sense organs. When we say something is dark, it suggests that it is difficult to know. Mother Kālī is said to be dark because we really do not know what or who she is. Here the word śyāma refers to Brahman, because Brahman also is difficult to know. Where do we realize Brahman? Within us, within the heart. Śabala means many-coloured, or with many forms. It stands for Brahmaloka. It is the multiplicity outside. The idea is, what is inside is also outside. The One becomes the many. Suppose you enter a room where there are a hundred mirrors. What do you see? You see a hundred reflections of yourself. Or suppose the moon is shining above and there are many pots of water on the ground. In each pot there is a reflection of the moon, but there is in reality only one moon. How do we realize this—that the One becomes the many? Through cittaśuddhi, purification of the mind. Your mind is like a mirror. If the mirror is clean you have a very clear reflection of yourself. But if there is dust and dirt on the mirror you cannot see your reflection very well. The Upaniṣad has again and again been emphasizing this need for purification of the mind. It is not something that is attained all of a sudden. It does not happen by a fluke. It comes only after years of hard struggle and self-discipline. Two illustrations are given here in this verse. The first is about a horse. When a horse has dirt on his body, he wants to get rid of it. He does not like something unnatural sticking to his fur. What does he do? He shakes his body. So also, we have the dirt of ignorance, egotism, and other things clinging to our mind, but they are not part of our real nature and we must get rid of them. We must shake them off. How? Through discrimination: ‘I am not this body, nor am I identified with anything the body is identified with, such as caste or country. These are all superimpositions. My real Self is always pure, without birth, without death.’ When you practise this kind of discrimination, slowly the conviction grows on you that you are not the body, that you are the Self, separate from the body. The second illustration is taken from the myth of the churning of the ocean. In ancient times the gods and the demons decided to churn the ocean to obtain the nectar of immortality so that they would never die. After much difficulty they managed to get the nectar, and then the gods tricked the demons and snatched it away so they could have it all for themselves. When the nectar was being distributed among the gods, the sun and the moon noticed that Rāhu, a demon, was hiding among them and they shouted a warning. But it was too late. Rāhu was able to get a taste of the nectar just before his head was cut off. Thus the rest of his body perished but his head became immortal, and that head is forever chasing his enemies, the sun and the moon. When there is an eclipse of the moon, it is said that Rāhu has swallowed the moon. But because Rāhu has no body, the moon soon comes out from the bottom of his head and we again see the shining form of the moon. The Upaniṣad says that it is as if we were all within the mouth of Rāhu. We have all been swallowed by ignorance, as it were. By nature we are the luminous Self, but the light of the Self has been covered by the darkness of ignorance. Somehow or other we have to free ourselves from the mouth of Rāhu and we will then regain our inherent splendour. Vedānta says, if you are Brahman you have always been Brahman. It is not that you are attaining something new. When you realize Brahman, you realize what you have always been. It is like a prince kidnapped by some beggars when he is just a baby. As he grows up among the beggars, he behaves just like them. He never realizes he is a prince. But one day some people discover him and take him to the palace and tell him he is the prince. He was always the prince, only he did not know it. There is a wonderful example told by Holy Mother. There was a large diamond lying on the ground near a bathing ghat. Everyone thought it was a piece of glass, and those who came to bathe there used to scrape the dirt off their feet by rubbing them on the diamond. One day a jeweller saw it and realized it was a diamond. Hadn’t it always been a diamond? Similarly, you have always been Brahman, only you did not know it. Vedānta says we have placed our own hands over our eyes and we are saying: ‘Help! I can’t see anything. I am blind.’ We have always been telling ourselves that we are worthless and good for nothing. Now we must reverse our thinking. We must tell ourselves that we are pure, free, and divine. Vedānta does not claim it can perform any miracles. It does not have any strange, magical formulas. What Vedānta says is very simple and straightforward—Tat tvam asi, thou art that. Vedānta tries to awaken the power that is already lying dormant within us. And in how many different ways it tries. Śaṅkara says the scriptures are ādaravati, affectionate, like a mother. Perhaps you want to eat only sweets and nothing else, but the doctor has said you should not eat sweets. What does your mother do? She will go on coaxing you in different ways to eat what is good for you. Similarly, the Upaniṣad goes on coaxing us to attain Self-knowledge. The Upaniṣad is telling us we are now mesmerized into thinking we are good for nothing, a sinner, a slave. We have to get out of the grips of this delusion, like the moon gets out of the mouth of Rāhu. We have to shake off this delusion, like the horse shaking off the dirt on its fur. We then attain a state which is called akṛtam, uncreated. Whatever is created will be destroyed. If we build a house, then some day or other it will be destroyed. But that which is uncreated, which is not the effect of anything, is eternal. It will never come to an end. Self-knowledge is not something created in us. It is not a product. Nor is it the result of anything.
- Ākāśaḥ vai nāma, that which is described as ‘space’
- nāmarūpayoḥ nirvahitā, is manifest through names and forms
- te, those [names and forms]
- yat antarā, are within that
- tat brahma, that is Brahman
- tat amṛtam, that [Brahman] is immortal
- saḥ ātmā, it is the Self [the inmost being in everyone]
- prapadye, may I be able to enter
- sabhām veśma, the court
- prajāpateḥ, of Prajāpati
- aham bhavāmi yaśaḥ brāhmaṇānām, may I attain the fame of a brāhmin
- yāśaḥ rājñām, the fame of a prince
- yaśaḥ viśam, the fame of a merchant
- aham yaśaḥ anuprāpatsi, I wish to have real fame
- saḥ ha aham yaśasām yaśaḥ, I want to be famous among all famous people
- mā abhigām, may I not be born again
- śyetam adatkam adatkam śyetam lindu, so that I may not have a body covered with blood and dirt, and which is toothless yet always wanting to eat. Iti caturdaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the fourteenth section.
note How do we meditate on the infinite? One way is to think of ākāśa, space. Sri Ramakrishna used to advise this also. If we can think we are one with the infinite, then slowly the consciousness that we are the body, that we are limited and bound, will go. We must not make the mistake of thinking that Brahman and ākāśa are the same, however. They are by no means synonymous. Ākāśa is matter, and Brahman is not. Brahman is pure consciousness. But often we find that, just to give us some idea of what Brahman is like, ākāśa is used as an example. This is because we cannot see it or feel it, yet we know it is everywhere. How do we identify something or someone? Only by mentioning its name and form. If we take away the names and forms, there is just one vast Existence. I am Existence. You are Existence. Everything is Existence, Sat. And this Sat is one and undivided. But as soon as we give something a form and a name, it becomes individualized. Then one individual becomes separate from another. The Upaniṣad says, that in which all these names and forms exist, and which is unattached and unaffected by them, is Brahman.
- Tat ha etat, this [knowledge of the Self, which has so long been discussed]
- brahmā prajāpataye uvāca, Brahmā taught Prajāpati [i.e., to Kaśyapa]
- prajāpatiḥ manave, Prajāpati [taught] Manu
- manuḥ prajābhyaḥ, Manu [taught] his own children [i.e., to all human beings]
- yathā-vidhānam, strictly according to the prescribed rules
- vedam adhītya, studying the Vedas
- guroḥ karma atiśeṣena, in the time he is free after serving the teacher
- abhisamāvṛtya ācāryakulāt, after returning home from the teacher’s house
- kutumbe, he marries
- śucau deṣe, in a holy place
- svādhyāyam adhīyānaḥ, studying the scriptures regularly and as the occasion demands
- dhārmikān vidadhāt, teaching his children and disciples to be truly religious
- ātmani sarvendriyāṇi sampratiṣṭhāpya, withdrawing all organs into himself
- ahiṃsan sarvabhūtāni, practising non-in-jury to all living beings
- anyatra tīrthebhyaḥ, except at a holy place
- saḥ khalu evam vartayan, he lives in this way
- yāvat āyuṣam, to the end of his life
- brahmalokam abhisampadyate, goes to Brahmaloka
- na ca punaḥ āvartate na ca punaḥ āvartate, and he does not return, he does not return [to this world again]. Iti pañcadaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ, here ends the fifteenth section. Iti chāndogya upaniṣadi aṣṭamaḥ adhyāyaḥ, here ends the eighth chapter of the Chāndogya Upaniṣad.
note The Chāndogya Upaniṣad has altogether eight chapters, the first five of them being devoted to karma (worship), and the last three being almost exclusively devoted to ātmā-jñāna (Self-knowledge). One may ask, ‘Why waste so much space on worship?’ The answer is that worship is necessary in order to attain citta-śuddhi (purification of the mind). A pure mind is like a clean mirror. If you stand before a clean mirror, you can see yourself clearly. Similarly, when your mind is purified, the Self reveals itself to you. You then know that your self is the Self of all and you are one with all. The Upaniṣad says here that as soon as you receive the sacred thread, you go and live with your teacher as a brahmacārin. You become part of his family. You serve him in various ways, and he teaches you all that you need to know. Though you must work hard serving the teacher and also studying the scriptures, in the long run you learn more from the way your teacher lives. He shows you what kind of person you have to be. If the teacher is satisfied with your progress, he permits you to go back home. This permission is called samāvartan—a convocation, in common parlance. You may or may not go back home. If you return home, you may marry and raise a family. The scriptures tell you what sort of life you have to live there. As a householder, you have many obligations to fulfil, and you fulfil them as best you can, following the scriptures. There are two kinds of brahmacārins: The ṇaiṣṭhika brahmacārins never marry. They remain with the teacher and are life-long celibates. The upakurvāṇa brahmacārins live with the teacher for twelve years as celibates, and then they may return home and marry. But no matter whether you remain with the teacher or you return home and become a householder, you are required to continue studying the scriptures. And you must study them according to the rules laid down about place and time. This is called svadhyāya. Along with svadhyāya, you are also required to practise ahiṃsā, non-violence. The Upaniṣad says you must.
